HUMAN LUNG CANCER ASSOCIATED GENE SEQUENCES AND POLYPEPTIDES

Abstract: This invention relates to newly identified lung or lung cancer related polynucleotides and the polypetides encoded by these polynucleotides herein collectively known as "lung cancer antigens", and to the complete gene sequences associated therewith and to the expression products thereof, as well as the use of such lung cancer antigens for detection, prevention and treatment of disorders of the lung, particularly the presence of lung cancer. This invention relates to the lung cancer antigens as well as vectors, host cells, antibodies directed to lung cancer antigens and recombinant and synthetic methods for producing the same. Also provided are diagnostic methods for diagnosing and treating, preventing and/or prognosing disorders related to the lung, including lung cancer, and therapeutic methods for treating such disorders. The invention further relates to screening methods for identifying agonists and antagonists of lung cancer antigens of the invention. The present invention further relates to methods and/or compositions for inhibiting the production and/or function of the polypetides of the present invention.

Description: Human Lung Cancer Associated Gene Sequences and Polypeptides Field of the Invention This invention relates to newly identified lung or lung cancer related polynucleotides and the polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides herein collectively known as "lung cancer antigens," and to the complete gene sequences associated therewith and to the expression products thereof, as well as the use of such lung cancer antigens for detection, prevention and treatment of disorders of the lung, particularly the presence of lung cancer. This invention relates to the lung cancer antigens as well as vectors, host cells, antibodies directed to lung cancer antigens and recombinant and synthetic methods for producing the same. Also provided are diagnostic methods for diagnosing and treating, preventing and/or prognosing disorders related to the lung, including lung cancer, and therapeutic methods for treating such disorders. The invention further relates to screening methods for identifying agonists and antagonists of lung cancer antigens of the invention. The present invention further relates to methods and/or compositions for inhibiting the production and/or function of the polypeptides of the present invention. Background of the Invention Cell growth is a carefully regulated process which responds to specific needs of the body. Occasionally, the intricate, and highly regulated controls dictating the rules for cellular division break down. When this occurs, the cell begins to grow and divide independently of its homeostatic regulation resulting in a condition commonly referred to as cancer. In fact, cancer is the second leading cause of death among Americans aged 25-44. Lung cancer is the primary cause of cancer death among both men and women in the U.S., with an estimated 172,000 new cases being reported in 1994. The five-year survival rate among all lung cancer patients, regardless of the stage of disease at diagnosis, is only 13%. This contrasts with a five-year survival rate of 46% among cases detected while the disease-is still localized. However, only 16% of lung cancers are discovered before the disease has spread. Early detection is difficult since clinical symptoms are often not seen until the disease has reached an advanced stage. Currently, diagnosis is aided by the use of chest x-rays, analysis of the type of cells contained in sputum and fiberoptic examination of the bronchial passages. Treatment regimens are determined by the type and stage of the cancer, and include surgery, radiation therapy and/or chemotherapy. In spite of considerable research into therapies for the disease, lung cancer remains difficult to treat. Accordingly, there remains a need in the art for improved vaccines, treatment methods and diagnostic techniques for lung cancer. There is a need for factors that regulate activation, and differentiation of normal and abnormal cells. There is a need for identification and characterization of such factors that modulate activation and differentiation of lung cells, both normally and in disease states. In particular, there is a need to isolate and characterize additional molecules that mediate apoptosis, DNA repair, tumor-mediated angiogenesis, genetic imprinting, immune responses to tumors and tumor antigens and, among other things, that can play a role in detecting, preventing, ameliorating or correcting dysfunctions or diseases related to the lung. Summary of the Invention The present invention includes isolated nucleic acid molecules comprising, or alternatively, consisting of, a lung and/or lung cancer associated polynucleotide sequence disclosed in the sequence listing (as SEQ ID Nos: l to 443) and/or contained in a human cDNA clone described in Tables 1, 2 and 5 and deposited with the American Type Culture Collection ("ATCC"). Fragments, variant, and derivatives of these nucleic acid molecules are also encompassed by the invention. The present invention also includes isolated nucleic acid molecules comprising, or alternatively consisting of, a polynucleotide encoding a lung or lung cancer polypeptide. The present invention further includes lung and/or lung cancer polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides. Further provided for are amino acid sequences comprising, or alternatively consisting of, lung and/or lung cancer polypeptides as disclosed in the sequence listing (as SEQ ID NOs: 444 to 886) and/or encoded by a human cDNA clone described in Tables 1, 2 and 5 and deposited with the ATCC. Antibodies that bind these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Polypeptide fragments, variants, and derivatives of these amino acid sequences are also encompassed by the invention, as are polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides and antibodies that bind these polypeptides. Also provided are diagnostic methods for diagnosing and treating, preventing, and/or prognosing disorders related to the lung, including lung cancer, and therapeutic methods for treating such disorders. The invention further relates to screening methods for identifying agonists and antagonists of lung cancer antigens of the invention. Detailed Description Tables Table 1 summarizes some of the lung cancer antigens encompassed by the invention (including contig sequences (SEQ ID NO:X) and the cDNA clone related to the contig sequence) and further summarizes certain characteristics of the lung cancer polynucleotides and the polypeptides encoded thereby. The first column shows the "SEQ ID NO:" for each of the 443 lung cancer antigen polynucleotide sequences of the invention. The second column provides a unique "Sequence/Contig ID" identification for each lung and/or lung cancer associated sequence. The third column, "Gene Name," and the fourth column, "Overlap," provide a putative identification of the gene based on the sequence similarity of its translation product to an amino acid sequence found in a publicly accessible gene database and the database accession no. for the database sequence having similarity, respectively. The fifth and sixth columns provide the location (nucleotide position nos. within the contig), "Start" and "End", in the polynucleotide sequence "SEQ ID NO:X" that delineate the preferred ORE shown in the sequence listing as SEQ ID NO:Y. The seventh and eighth columns provide the "% Identity" (percent identity) and "% Similarity" (percent similarity), respectively, observed between the aligned sequence segments of the translation product of SEQ ID NO:X and the database sequence. The ninth column provides a unique "Clone ID" for a cDNA clone related to each contig sequence. Table 2 summarizes ATCC Deposits, Deposit dates, and ATCC designation numbers of deposits made with the ATCC in connection with the present application. Table 3 indicates public ESTs, of which at least one, two, three, four, five, ten, fifteen or more of any one or more of these public EST sequences are optionally excluded from certain embodiments of the invention. Table 4 lists residues comprising antigenic epitopes of antigenic epitope-bearing fragments present in most of the lung or lung cancer associated polynucleotides described in Table 1 as predicted by the inventors using the algorithm of Jameson and Wolf, (1988) Comp. Appl. Biosci. 4: 181-186. The Jameson- Wolf antigenic analysis was performed using the computer program PROTEAN (Version 3.1 1 for the Power Macintosh, DNASTAR, Inc., 1228 South Park Street Madison, WI). Lung and lung cancer associated polypeptides (e.g., SEQ ID NO:Y, polypeptides encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, or polypeptides encoded by the cDNA in the referenced cDNA clone) may possess one or more antigenic epitopes comprising residues described in Table 4. It will be appreciated that depending on the analytical criteria used to predict antigenic determinants, the exact address of the determinant may vary slightly. The residues and locations shown in column two of Table 4 correspond to the amino acid sequences for most lung and lung cancer associated polypeptide sequence shown in the Sequence Listing. Table 5 shows the cDNA libraries sequenced, and ATCC designation numbers and vector information relating to these cDNA libraries. Definitions The following definitions are provided to facilitate understanding of certain terms used throughout this specification. In the present invention, "isolated" refers to material removed from its original environment (e.g., the natural environment if it is naturally occurring), and thus is altered "by the hand of man" from its natural state. For example, an isolated polynucleotide could be part of a vector or a composition of matter, or could be contained within a cell, and still be "isolated" because that vector, composition of matter, or particular cell is not the original environment of the polynucleotide. The term "isolated" does not refer to genomic or cDNA libraries, whole cell total or mRNA preparations, genomic DNA preparations (including those separated by electrophoresis and transferred onto blots), sheared whole cell genomic DNA preparations or other compositions where the art demonstrates no distinguishing features of the polynucleotide/sequences of the present invention. As used herein, a "polynucleotide" refers to a molecule having a nucleic acid sequence contained in SEQ ID NO:X (as described in column 1 of Table 1) or the related cDNA clone (as described in column 9 of Table 1 and contained within a library deposited with the ATCC). For example, the polynucleotide can contain the nucleotide sequence of the full length cDNA sequence, including the 5' and 3' untranslated sequences, the coding region, as well as fragments, epitopes, domains, and variants of the nucleic acid sequence. Moreover, as used herein, a "polypeptide" refers to a molecule having an amino acid sequence encoded by a polynucleotide of the invention as broadly defined (obviously excluding poly-Phenylalanine or poly-Lysine peptide sequences which result from translation of a polyA tail of a sequence corresponding to a cDNA). In the present invention, "SEQ ID NO:X" was often generated by overlapping sequences contained in multiple clones (contig analysis). A representative clone containing all or most of the sequence for SEQ ID NO:X is deposited at Human Genome Sciences, Inc. (HGS) in a catalogued and archived library. As shown in column 9 of Table 1, each clone is identified by a cDNA Clone ID. Each Clone ID is unique to an individual clone and the Clone ID is all the information needed to retrieve a given clone from the HGS library. In addition to the individual cDNA clone deposits, most of the cDNA libraries from which the clones were derived were deposited at the American Type Culture Collection (hereinafter "ATCC"). Table 5 provides a list of the deposited cDNA libraries. One can use the Clone ID to determine the library source by reference to Tables 2 and 5. Table 5 lists the deposited cDNA libraries by name and links each library to an ATCC Deposit. Library names contain four characters, for example, "HTWE." The name of a cDNA clone ("Clone ID") isolated from that library begins with the same four characters, for example "HTWEP07". As mentioned below, Table 1 correlates the Clone ID names with SEQ ID NOs. Thus, starting with a SEQ ID NO, one can use Tables 1 , 2 and 5 to determine the corresponding Clone ID, from which library it came and in which ATCC deposit the library is contained. Furthermore, it is possible to retrieve a given cDNA clone from the source library by techniques known in the art and described elsewhere herein. The ATCC is located at 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209, USA. The ATCC deposits were made persuant to the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the international recognition of the deposit of microorganisms for the purposes of patent procedure. A "polynucleotide" of the present invention also includes those polynucleotides capable of hybridizing, under stringent hybridization conditions, to sequences contained in SEQ ID NO:X, or the complement thereof (e.g., the complement of any one, two, three, four, or more of the polynucleotide fragments described herein), and/or sequences contained in the related cDNA clone within a library deposited with the ATCC. "Stringent hybridization conditions" refers to an overnight incubation at 42 degree C in a solution comprising 50% formamide, 5x SSC (750 mM NaCl, 75 mM trisodium citrate), 50 mM sodium phosphate (pH 7.6), 5x Denhardt's solution, 10% dextran sulfate, and 20 μg/ml denatured, sheared salmon sperm DNA, followed by washing the filters in 0.1 x SSC at about 65 degree C. Also included within "polynucleotides" of the present invention are nucleic acid molecules that hybridize to the polynucleotides of the present invention at lower stringency hybridization conditions. Changes in the stringency of hybridization and signal detection are primarily accomplished through the manipulation of formamide concentration (lower percentages of formamide result in lowered stringency); salt conditions, or temperature. For example, lower stringency conditions include an overnight incubation at 37 degree C in a solution comprising 6X SSPE (20X SSPE = 3M NaCl; 0.2M NaH 2 PO 4 ; 0.02M EDTA, pH 7.4), 0.5% SDS, 30% formamide, 100 ug/ml salmon sperm blocking DNA; followed by washes at 50 degree C with 1XSSPE, 0.1% SDS. In addition, to achieve even lower stringency, washes performed following stringent hybridization can be done at higher salt concentrations (e.g. 5X SSC). Note that variations in the above conditions may be accomplished through the inclusion and/or substitution of alternate blocking reagents used to suppress background in hybridization experiments. Typical blocking reagents include Denhardt's reagent, BLOTTO, heparin, denatured salmon sperm DNA, and commercially available proprietary formulations. The inclusion of specific blocking reagents may require modification of the hybridization conditions described above, due to problems with compatibility. Of course, a polynucleotide which hybridizes only to polyA+ sequences (such as any 3' terminal polyA+ tract of a cDNA shown in the sequence listing), or to a complementary stretch of T (or U) residues, would not be included in the definition of "polynucleotide," since such a polynucleotide would hybridize to any nucleic acid molecule containing a poly (A) stretch or the complement thereof (e.g., practically any double-stranded cDNA clone generated using oligo dT as a primer). The polynucleotides of the present invention can be composed of any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA. For example, polynucleotides can be composed of single- and double-stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single-stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions. In addition, the polynucleotide can be composed of triple-stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA. A polynucleotide may also contain one or more modified bases or DNA or RNA backbones modified for stability or for other reasons. "Modified" bases include, for example, tritylated bases and unusual bases such as inosine. A variety of modifications can be made to DNA and RNA; thus, "polynucleotide" embraces chemically, enzymatically, or metabolically modified forms. In specific embodiments, the polynucleotides of the invention are at least 15, at least 30, at least 50, at least 100, at least 125, at least 500, or at least 1000 continuous nucleotides but are less than or equal to 300 kb, 200 kb, 100 kb, 50 kb, 15 kb, 10 kb, 7.5kb, 5 kb, 2.5 kb, 2.0 kb, or 1 kb, in length. In a further embodiment, polynucleotides of the invention comprise a portion of the coding sequences, as disclosed herein, but do not comprise all or a portion of any intron. In another embodiment, the polynucleotides comprising coding sequences do not contain coding sequences of a genomic flanking gene (i.e., 5' or 3' to the gene of interest in the genome). In other embodiments, the polynucleotides of the invention do not contain the coding sequence of more than 1000, 500, 250, 100, 50, 25, 20, 15, 10, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 genomic flanking gene(s). "SEQ ID NO:X" refers to a lung cancer antigen polynucleotide sequence described in Table 1. SEQ ID NO:X is identified by an integer specified in column 1 of Table 1. The polypeptide sequence SEQ ID NO:Y is a translated open reading frame (ORF) encoded by polynucleotide SEQ ID NO:X. There are 443 lung cancer antigen polynucleotide sequences described in Table 1 and shown in the sequence listing (SEQ ID NO: l through SEQ ID NO:443). Likewise there are 443 polypeptide sequences shown in the sequence listing, one polypeptide sequence for each of the polynucleotide sequences (SEQ ID NO:444 through SEQ ID NO:886). The polynucleotide sequences are shown in the sequence listing immediately followed by all of the polypeptide sequences. Thus, a polypeptide sequence corresponding to polynucleotide sequence SEQ ID NO: l is the first polypeptide sequence shown in the sequence listing. The second polypeptide sequence corresponds to the polynucleotide sequence shown as SEQ ID NO:2, and so on. In otherwords, since there are 443 polynucleotide sequences, for any polynucleotide sequence SEQ ID NO:X, a corresponding polypeptide SEQ ID NO:Y can be determined by the formula X + 443 = Y. In addition, any of the unique "Sequence/Contig ID" defined in column 2 of Table 1, can be linked to the corresponding polypeptide SEQ ID NO:Y by reference to Table 4. The polypeptides of the present invention can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, i.e., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other than the 20 gene-encoded amino acids. The polypeptides may be modified by either natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in a polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini. It will be appreciated that the same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in a given polypeptide. Also, a given polypeptide may contain many types of modifications. Polypeptides may be branched, for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic polypeptides may result from posttranslation natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods. Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer- RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination. (See, for instance, PROTEINS - STRUCTURE AND MOLECULAR PROPERTIES, 2nd Ed., T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993); POSTTRANSLATIONAL COVALENT MODIFICATION OF PROTEINS, B. C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York, pgs. 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al., Meth Enzymol 182:626-646 (1990); Rattan et al., Ann NY Acad Sci 663:48-62 (1992).) The lung and lung cancer polypeptides of the invention can be prepared in any suitable manner. Such polypeptides include isolated naturally occurring polypeptides, recombinantly produced polypeptides, synthetically produced polypeptides, or polypeptides produced by a combination of these methods. Means for preparing such polypeptides are well understood in the art. The polypeptides may be in the form of the secreted protein, including the mature form, or may be a part of a larger protein, such as a fusion protein (see below). It is often advantageous to include an additional amino acid sequence which contains secretory or leader sequences, pro-sequences, sequences which aid in purification, such as multiple histidine residues, or an additional sequence for stability during recombinant production. The lung and lung cancer polypeptides of the present invention are preferably provided in an isolated form, and preferably are substantially purified. A recombinantly produced version of a polypeptide, including the secreted polypeptide, can be substantially purified using techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art, such as, for example, by the one-step method described in Smith and Johnson, Gene 67:31-40 (1988). Polypeptides of the invention also can be purified from natural, synthetic or recombinant sources using techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art, such as, for example, antibodies of the invention raised against the polypeptides of the present invention in methods which are well known in the art. By a polypeptide demonstrating a "functional activity" is meant, a polypeptide capable of displaying one or more known functional activities associated with a full-length (complete) protein of the invention. Such functional activities include, but are not limited to, biological activity, antigenicity [ability to bind (or compete with a polypeptide for binding) to an anti-polypeptide antibody], immunogenicity (ability to generate antibody which binds to a specific polypeptide of the invention), ability to form multimers with polypeptides of the invention, and ability to bind to a receptor or ligand for a polypeptide. "A polypeptide having functional activity" refers to polypeptides exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical to, an activity of a polypeptide of the present invention, including mature forms, as measured in a particular assay, such as, for example, a biological assay, with or without dose dependency. In the case where dose dependency does exist, it need not be identical to that of the polypeptide, but rather substantially similar to the dose- dependence in a given activity as compared to the polypeptide of the present invention (i.e., the candidate polypeptide will exhibit greater activity or not more than about 25-fold less and, preferably, not more than about tenfold less activity, and most preferably, not more than about three-fold less activity relative to the polypeptide of the present invention). The functional activity of the lung cancer antigen polypeptides, and fragments, variants derivatives, and analogs thereof, can be assayed by various methods. For example, in one embodiment where one is assaying for the ability to bind or compete with full-length polypeptide of the present invention for binding to an antibody to the full length polypeptide antibody, various immunoassays known in the art can be used, including but not limited to, competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich" immunoassays, immunoradiometric assays, gel diffusion precipitation reactions, immunodiffusion assays, in situ immunoassays (using colloidal gold, enzyme or radioisotope labels, for example), western blots, precipitation reactions, agglutination assays (e.g., gel agglutination assays, hemagglutination assays), complement fixation assays, immunofluorescence assays, protein A assays, and immunoelectrophoresis assays, etc. In one embodiment, antibody binding is detected by detecting a label on the primary antibody. In another embodiment, the primary antibody is detected by detecting binding of a secondary antibody or reagent to the primary antibody. In a further embodiment, the secondary antibody is labeled. Many means are known in the art for detecting binding in an immunoassay and are within the scope of the present invention. In another embodiment, where a ligand is identified, or the ability of a polypeptide fragment, variant or derivative of the invention to multimerize is being evaluated, binding can be assayed, e.g., by means well-known in the art, such as, for example, reducing and non- reducing gel chromatography, protein affinity chromatography, and affinity blotting. See generally, Phizicky, E., et al., Microbiol. Rev. 59:94-123 (1995). In another embodiment, physiological correlates polypeptide of the present invention binding to its substrates (signal transduction) can be assayed. In addition, assays described herein (see Examples) and otherwise known in the art may routinely be applied to measure the ability of polypeptides of the present invention and fragments, variants derivatives and analogs thereof to elicit polypeptide related biological activity (either in vitro or in vivo). Other methods will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention. I I Lung and Lung Cancer Associated Polynucleotides and Polypeptides of the Invention It has been discovered herein that the polynucleotides described in Table 1 are expressed at significantly enhanced levels in human lung and/or lung cancer tissues. Accordingly, such polynucleotides, polypeptides encoded by such polynucleotides, and antibodies specific for such polypeptides find use in the prediction, diagnosis, prevention and treatment of lung related disorders, including lung cancer as more fully described below. Table 1 summarizes some of the polynucleotides encompassed by the invention (including contig sequences (SEQ ID NO:X) and the related cDNA clones) and further summarizes certain characteristics of these lung and/or lung cancer associated polynucleotides and the polypeptides encoded thereby. Table 1 Sequence/ HGS Nucleotide Seq ID No. Contig ID Gene Name ° ver,aP Start End % % Clone ID Identity Similarity' 1 507002 nuclear protein Skip [I lomo sapiens] >gι|3417599 gι| 1236986 2 970 91 91 1 IAJAW79 (AF045184) nuclear receptor coactivator NCoA-62 [Homo sapiens] 508935 (AF053651 ) cellular apoptosis susceptibility protein gι|3598795 1920 98 98 HDLAG79 [Homo sapiens] >sp|075432|075432 CELLULAR APOPT OSIS SUSCEP TIBILITY PROTEIN Length = 971 518959 257 727 HIBCM7 I 539756 IgG Fc fragment receptor precursor [Homo sapiens] gι| 182474 51 293 98 98 HAPBV45 >pιr|JL01 18|JL01 18 Fc gamma (IgG) receptor Ila precursor - human >sp|P 12318|rCGA_HUMAN LOW AFFINITY I UNOGLOBULIN GAMMA TC RECEPTOR II-A PRECURSOR (rC-GAMMA Rll-A) (rCRll-Λ) (IGG TC Rl CEP I OR ll-A) (CD32) 540125 cyclin H [Homo sapiens] >gι|532561 cyclin H gι|536920 80 1099 95 95 HFPCA09 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|I38731 |I38731 cyclin H - human >sp|P51946|CYCH_HUMAN CYCLIN H (M015-ASSOCIATED PRO TEIN) (P37) (P34) Length = 323 540275 leukotπene A-4 hydrolase precursor [Homo sapiens] gι|307130 72 1946 100 100 I ISBΛG I 2 >gι|307131 leukotπene A4 hydrolase [Homo sapiens] >gι|976396 leukotπene A4 hydrolase [Homo sapiens] 540331 235 519 HAP0045 540955 1052 1492 HMAJJ62 541251 M l subunit of ribonucleotide reductase [Homo gι|36065 9 1469 98 98 I IE II FY81 sapiens] >gι|36153 large subunit ribonucleotide reductase [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S 16680] S 16680 πbonucleoside-diphosphdte reductase (EC 1 17 4 1 ) chain M l - human Length = 792 541978 collagen alpha 3(V1) chain precursor ■ human Length pιr|S 13679|CGHU3A 991 99 99 I I011B 75 = 2970 547680 aetin bundling protein [Homo sapiens | >gι|458028 gι|497269 840 100 100 I IDIM II KW actin bundling prolein [Homo sapiens] >pιr|I38621 |I3862 l actin bundling protein - human >sp|Q16658|FASC_ HUMAN TASCIN (ACTIN BUNDLING PROTEIN) Length = 493 547705 galactose- 1 -phosphate uπdyl transferase [Homo gι|182951 767 94 94 I ICHMZ75 sapiens] >gι| 182951 galactose- 1 -phosphate uπdyl transferase [Homo sapiens] 549763 cyclin-dependent protein kinase, type 4 [Homo gι|456427 291 124 92 92 11MGBP27 sapiens] >gι| 1353416 cyclin-dependent kinase 4 [Homo sapiens] >sp|P l 1802|CDK4_HUMAN CELL DIVISION PRO TEIN KINASE 4 (EC 2 7 1 -) (CYCLIN-DEPENDEN T KINASE 4) (PSK-J3) Length = 303 549819 sufactant apoprotein 18 precursor [Homo sapiens] gι|338298 1 105 100 100 HAPQT93 Length = 243 549820 sufactant apoprotein 18 precursor [Homo sapiens] gι|338298 3 464 75 82 1 IFTDY88 Length = 243 549944 von Willebrand tactor [Homo sapiens] gι|340356 741 1928 100 100 IIUVEG60 >pιr|A34480|VWHU von Willebrand factor precursor - human >gι|5538IO von Willebrand factor [Homo sapiens] {SUB 990-1947} >gnl|PID|e222518 von Willebrand factor [Homo sapiens] {SUB 1-178} >gι|340316 von Willebrand anlige 551426 conneλin 40 [Homo sapiens] Length = 358 gι|l220303 1 372 97 97 IIΛPQN48 552182 macrophage lectin 2 [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|d 1009736 696 923 98 98 HDPFQ65 >sp|QI4538|Q14538 MACROPHAGE LECTIN 2 Length = 292 552540 lung surfactant protein D [Homo sapiens] Length = gι|34767 1 414 96 96 HA QD13 375 553367 (AF053944) aortic carbo\ypeptιdase-lιke protein gι|3288 16 423 1160 98 99 I1DIDB06 ACLP [Homo sapiens] >sp|G3288916|G3288916 AORTIC CARBOXYPEPTIDASE-LIKE PROTEIN ACLP >gnl|PID|dl013781 AEBP1 [Homo sapiens] {SUB 314-1158} Length = 1158 554326 SAS [Homo sapiens] >sp|O00577|O00577 COSMID gι|2209293 500 1195 92 93 IISDJF42 6E5 CDK4, SAS AND KIAA0167 GENES. COMPLETE CDS. AND OS9 Length = 227 554657 bihverdin-lXbeta reductase I [Homo sapiens] gnl|P!D|dl007449 69 713 93 93 IIMUΛP34 >gnl|PID|dl0059l2 NADPH-flavin reductase [Homo sapiens] >pιr|JC2070|JC2070 NADPH dehydrogenase (flavin) (EC 1682) - human >sp|P30043|FLRE_HUMAN FLAVIN REDUCTASE (EC 16991) (FR) (NADPH- DEPENDEN1 DIAPHORASE 556156 nuclear chloride ion channel protein [Homo sapiens] gι|2073569 243 635 94 96 I IMl TP33 >sp|O00299|CLI l_HUMAN CHLORIDE INTRACELLULAR CHANNEL PROT EIN 1 (NUCLEAR CHLORIDE ION CHANNEL 27) (P64 CLCP) Length = 241 557747 prepro-plasma carboxypeptidase B [Homo sapiens] gι| 189687 745 96 96 HLQB043 >pιr|A4 l204|A41204 carboxypeptidase B (EC 3 4 17 2) CPB2 precursor - human >sp|Q I 51 14|Q 151 14 PREPRO-PLASMA CARBOXYPEPTIDASE B Length = 423 558599 C0X5B [Homo sapiens] >gι| 180941 cytochrome c gι| 180937 478 87 88 I IMCB059 oxidase precursor (EC 1 9 3 1 ) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|JT0324|OTHU5B cytochrome-c oxidase (EC 1 9 3 1 ) chain Vb precursor - human 572403 434 607 I II ID! 1 16 573366 41 163 HBΛMD7 I 573986 159 338 I IYACJ68 575435 VDUPI = l ,25-dιhydroλyvιtamιn D-3 up-regulated bbs| 155932 297 1490 94 94 I IBI 1MI I57 [human, HL-60 promyelocytic leukemia cells, Peptide, 391 aa] [Homo sapiens] Length = 391 584341 pulmonary surfactant-associated protein [Homo gι| 190672 90 866 99 99 HAPOA63 sapiens] Length = 248 584435 CD53 glycoprotein [Homo sapiens] >gι| 180141 cell gι| 180 l43 122 814 89 89 I IUFAR85 surface antigen [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A37243|A37243 hemopoietic cell surface glycoprotein CD53 - human >sp|P19397|CD53_HUMAN LEUKOCYTE SURFACE AN TIGEN CD53 (CELL SURFACE GLYCOPROTEIN CD53) Length = 219 585187 enigma protein [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A55050|A55050 gι|561637 1 1494 77 79 HMCJD03 enigma - human 585658 transcobalamin II [Homo sapiens] gι|339 ! 96 85 888 91 91 HMAGB31 >pιr|A39744|A39744 transcobalamin II precursor - human >gι|2952291 (AF047576) transcobalamin II [Homo sapiens] { SUB 1 -21 } >sp|G298394|G298394 TRANSCOBALAMIN II ISOPCPTIDE A {N- TERMINAL} [SUB 1-26} Length = 427 585693 PECAM- 1 precursor [Homo sapiens] gι| l 89776 759 2405 92 92 HMSAO07 >pιr|A40096|A40096 platelet-endothe al cell adhesion molecule- 1 (CD31 ) precursor - human >sp|P I6284|PECl_HUMAN PLATELET ENDOTHEL1AL CELL ADHESION MOLECULE PRECURSOR (PECAM- 1 ) (CD31 ANTIGEN) (ENDOCAM) (GPIIA') >bbs| 13897 585701 preprocathepsin H (AA -22 to 314) [Homo sapiens] gι|29710 1094 99 100 HDP1P49 >pιr|S12486|KHHUH cathepsm H (EC 3 4 22 16) precursor - human >sp|P09668|CATH_HUMAN CATHEPSIN H PRECURSOR (EC 3 4 22 16) >gι|29708 cathepsm I I [Homo sapiens] {SUB 88- 335 } Length = 335 586019 major group rhinovirus receptor precusor | Homo gι|306895 1354 95 95 HOGΛH59 sapiens] Length = 532 587225 cytotoxin seπne protease-C precursor [Homo gι| 18 H 64 32 865 100 100 I IWΛAB59 sapiens] >gι| 183155 cytotoxic T-lymphocyte- associated serine esterase I [Homo sapiens] >gι| 181 157 cytotoxic seπne proteinase [Homo sapiens] >gι|338430 serine protease [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A32692|A32692 cytotoxic 587445 Clara cells 10 kda secretory protein [Homo sapiens] gι|457935 75 431 91 93 HI JBE03 >gι|457933 Clara cells 10 kda secretory protein [Homo sapiens] >gι|23132 10 kDa secretory preprote (AA -21 to -1 ) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|JS0036|JS0036 Clara cell 10K protein precursor - human >pιr|I38397| 587572 pulmonar} surfactant protein SP-C 1 [Homo sapiens] gι|387030 30 677 HT FBB76 Length = 191 587596 20 190 H \PQS32 588548 acid phosphatase ty pe 5 (AA 1 - 325) [Homo gι|34734 97 1092 95 95 HAPNX70 sapiens] >pιr|S 15752|S 15752 acid phosphatase (EC 3 1 3 2) ACP5 precursor - human >sp|G262924|G262924 TARTRA TE-RFSISTANT ACID PHOSPHATASE PEAK 1 ISOFORM 16 KDA SUBUN IT , I RACP PEAK 1 {N- TERMINAL} {SUB 183-203 } Len 588881 monocy te antigen CD 14 [Homo sapiens] >gι|29741 gι| 180021 240 1532 89 89 I IH1 CG79 leucine-πch preprotem (AA - 19 to 356) [Homo sapiens] Length = 375 588933 hepaπn cofactor II [Homo sapiens] ii| 183908 1532 97 97 I II VH1 I90 >pιr|A37924|A37924 hepaπn cofactor II precursor - human >sp|P05546|HEP2_HUMAN HEPARIN COFAC TOR II PRECURSOR (HC-II) (PRO TEASE INHIBITOR ! I USTRPIN 2) (111 S2) >gι|412013 proteinase inhibitor [unιdcntιlled| {SUB 20-499} >g 592136 cytochrome P450 [Homo sapiens] gι|501031 422 991 89 HDPGB64 >pιr|A541 16|A541 16 cytochrome P450 I B I - human >sp|Q 16678|CP lB_HUMAN CYTOCHROME P450 1 B 1 (EC 1 14 14 1 ) (CYPIB 1 ) Length = 543 613777 478 I 1ΛPNX53 614669 alcohol dehydrogenase [Homo sapiens] gι| 178372 852 100 100 HCEOB63 >pιr|A33371 |DEHUEl aldehyde dehydrogenase (NAD+) (EC 1 2 I 3) I . cylosolic - human >sp|P00352|DHAC_HUMAN ALDEHYDE DEHYDROGENASE, CYTOSOLIC (EC 1 2 I 3) (CLASS 1) (ALHDI1) (ALDH-E1 ) {SUB 2-501 ) Length = 501 619502 dJ6802 2 [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|e 1294465 258 1244 79 79 HCUCB72 >sp|P35579|MYSN_HUMAN MYOSIN HEAVY CHAIN, NONMUSCLE TYPE A (CELLULAR MYOSIN HEAVY CHAIN, TYPE A) (NMMHC- A) >gι|553596 cellular myosin heavy chain [Homo sapιens| { SUB 1 - 1337 } Length = I 960 619525 stomatin [Homo sapιens| >gι|3 K)69 erythrυcytc band gnl|PID|e 140838 928 94 94 ll ll 11109 7 integral membrane protein | Homo sapιens| >pιr|S17659|S 17659 membiane protein 7, erythrocyte - human >sp|P27105|BAN7_HUMAN ERYTHROCYTE BAND 7 INTEGRAL MEMBRANE PROTEIN (STOMATIN) (PRO TEIN 7 2B) {SUB 2-2 623660 C protein [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A26885|A26885 gι|306875 155 559 100 100 HDPMR96 heterogeneous πbonuclear particle protein C - human Length = 290 625480 CD68=1 lOkda transmembrane glycoprotein [human bbs| 127493 1074 65 65 HDPXL17 promonocyte cell line U937, Peptide 354 aa] [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A4893l|A4893l transmembiane glycoprotein CD68, 110k - human >sp|P348IO|CD68_HUMANMACROSIALIN PRrCURSOR (GPl 10) (CD68) >gι|3511124 (Al 060540) 647688 ALDH7 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|I38669|I38669 ALDH7 ;ι|601780 1290 85 IICHCC79 - human >sp|P43353|DHA7_HUMAN ALDEHYDE DEHYDROGENASE 7 (EC 1215) >sp|G601780|G601780 ALDH7 Length = 468 650865 DOC1 [Homo sapιens| >sp|Q13597|Q13597 gι|1297319 251 1567 99 99 HMSBY41 MYOSIN HEAVY CHAIN HOMOLOG DOC1 Length = 752 651676 retinoic acid binding protein II [Homo sapiens] gι| 181026 120 566 100 100 H AID66 >gι|181030 retinoic acid-binding protein II [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A45057|RJHU2 retinoic acid-binding protein II, cellular - human Length = 138 651751 ADH beta- 1 -subunit (aa 1-375) [Homo sapiens] gι|28416 1187 99 99 HLDOUIO >gι|178111 alcohol dehydrogenase beta-1 subunit [Homo sapiens] >gnl|PID|dl000528 alcohol dehydrogenase beta 1 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A23607|DEHUAB alcohol dehydrogenase (EC 1111)2- human >sp|P00325|ADHB_HUMAN 651787 hla-dr antigen alpha chain [Homo sapiens] gι|307264 844 I IDPMQ I 4 >gι|386945 HLA-DR alpha-chain [Homo sapiens] >gι|307267 HI A-DR alpha-chain |Homo sapiens] >pιr|A93952|HI HUDA MHC class II histocompatibi ty antigen HLA-DR alpha chain precursor - human >sp|P01903|HA2R_HUMAN HLA C 651840 creatine kinase [Homo sapiens] >gι|3702298 gι| 180588 1339 96 96 Hl lBHB l (AC00578 I ) KCRM_HUMAN M-CK [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A31793|KIHUCM creatine kinase (EC 2 7 3 2) chain M - human >sp|P06732|KCRM_HUMAN CREA 1 INL KINASE M CHAIN (FC 2 7 3 2) (M-CK) >sp|G3702298|G3702298 KCRMJTUMAN (EC 651892 TGT-b supertamily receptor t> pe I [Homo sapiens] gι|425148 994 1587 93 96 111 MDR7 I >gι|2228562 activin receptor like kinase 1 [Homo sapiens] >pιr| A49431 |A49431 TGr-b superfamily receptor tj pe I - human >sp|P37023|KIR3_HUMAN SERINE/THREONINE-PRO TTIN K1NASL RECEPTOR R3 PRECURSOR (EC 2 7 1 3 652557 Gl l-krupple related protein [Homo sapiens] gι| 186768 1064 92 92 I IBMV/88 >pιr|A40350|A40350 transcription repr sser protein YY 1 - human Length = 414 653011 409 651 HRADN49 656155 57 233 HI 1 AR I I 656930 (AF068836) c> tohesιn binding protein HE [Homo gι|3192909 88 840 93 93 HTXΓSO I sapiens] >sp|O60759|O60759 CYTOHESIN BINDING PROTEIN HE Length = 359 659023 2 337 IIRDBI73 659263 98 412 HSICM5I 660696 alpha- 1 type IV collagen [Homo sapiens] gι|!80803 1218 100 100 HSLΓT56 >pιr|S16876|CGHU4B collagen alpha I (IV) chain precursor - human >sp|P02462|CA14JTUMAN PROCOLLAGEN ALPHA 1(IV) CHAIN PRECURSOR >gι|180424 pro-alpha- 1 (IV) [Homo sapiens] {SUB 1256-1669) >gι|180818 procollagen alpha- 1 666881 (AC002073) Lim Kinase [Homo sapiens] gι|2078472 101 373 100 100 HOECM70 >gnl|PID|dl008908 LIMK-2 [Homo sapiens] >sp|P5367l|LIK2JIUMAN LIM DOMAIN KINASE 2 (LC 271 -) (LIMK-2) >pιr|PC4291|PC4291 LIMK2a prolein - human (fragment) {SUB 1-80} Length = 638 677071 492 713 HODDC39 677997 23 163 HAPMF55 681507 hepatoma-deπved GF [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|d!0044I9 1 738 80 80 HOEΓVSO >pιr|A55055|A55055 hepatoma-deπved giowth factor - human >sp|P51858|HDGr_HUMAN HEPΛTOMA-DERIVED GROW TH FAC TOR (HDGF) Length = 240 682736 selenophosphate synthetase 2 [Homo sapiens] gι| 1815622 109 858 100 100 HGBASI1 >sp|Q99611|Q99611 SELENOPHOSPHATE SYNTHETASE 2 Length = 448 683116 rsec8 [Rattus norvegicus] >pιr|159422|I59422 rsec8 - gij 1019441 93 1346 94 96 IIMSCXI8 rat (fragment) >sp|Q62824|Q62824 RSEC8 (FRAGMENT) Length = 975 686494 797 979 HK1YK88 72 686634 I ILA DP4 beta-chain [Homo sapiens] >gι|296648 gι|306858 325 867 97 97 I IΛ IBM85 pot hla-dp-beta I [Homo sapιens| >pιr|A02229|HLHUPB MHC class II histocompatibililv antigen 111 A-DP beta I chain (allele DPB4 1 ) pieuirsor - human >sp|P04440|HB2P_HUMAN HLA CLASS II HISTOCOMPATIBILITY AN TIGEN, 73 688221 (AF033095) testis enhanced gene transcript protein gι|2645729 60 824 78 78 I ICYBK57 [Homo sapiens] Length = 237 74 703498 MacMARCKS gene product [Homo sapiens] gι|38435 27 767 67 67 HNTSA 18 >pιr|S31861|S31861 myπsty lated alamne-πch protein kinase C substrate, macrophage - human >sp|P49006|MRP_HUMAN MARCKS-RELATED PROT EIN (MAC-MARCKS) { SUB 2- 195 } Length = 195 75 705143 collagen alpha 2(IV) chain precursor - human pιr|A32024|CGHU2B 1056 2345 100 100 I II DC 1168 >sp|P08572|CA24J IUMAN PROCOl LAGLN ALPHA 2(IV) CHAIN PRECURSOR >gι|29551 alpha (2) chain [Homo sapiens] { SUB 1254-1712} >gι|553233 alpha-2 type IV collagen [Homo sapiens] { SUB 1 -33 } Length = 1712 76 705227 185 1388 I IAJBQ62 77 705958 pulmonary surfactant-associated protein SP-B gι| 190674 1 291 97 97 I 1ΛPSA56 [Homo sapιens| Length = 381 78 705965 171 727 I IHI GD34 79 706145 proteasome subunit LMP7 [Homo sapiens] gι|38482 2 787 99 99 I II I FV83 >gι| 1054747 alternative first exon ( l b) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|C44324|C44324 proteasome chain I MP7, ioπn E2 precursor - human Length = 276 80 706473 .05 934 I I I 31 1 17 81 707380 2 160 HOSCI74 82 707779 ubiquitin-conjugating enzyme [Homo sapiens] gι| 1 172224 2 616 100 100 HOUGS29 >gnl|PID|e228278 ubiquitm conjugating enzyme [Homo sapiens] >gι| l 184055 ubiquitm conjugating enzj me homolog [Homo sapiens] >gι| 1574950 RAD6 homolog. May be involved in ubiquitm conjugation, Interacts with RAD 83 709441 c-syn protooncogene [Homo sapiens] gι| 181 l 72 272 96 96 I IP1 CC93 >pιr|A243 I4|TVHUSY protein-tyrosine kinase (EC 2 7 1 1 12) n, splice form B - human >sp|P06241 IFYN HUMAN PROTO-ONCOGENE T YROSINE-PROTEIN KINASE I YN (EC 2 7 1 I 12) (P59-rYN) (SYN) (SLK) {SUB 2-537} Length = 537 84 710443 adenylyl cyclase-associated protein [Homo sapiens] gι| 178084 124 1560 100 100 HUSAK67 >gι| 179920 CAP protein [Homo sapiens] >pιr| A48120|Λ48120 adenylyl cyclase-associated CAP protein homolog - human >sp|QO I 518|CAPlJ IUMAN ADLNYI YL CYCLASL-ASSOC1ATED PRO TEIN I (CAP I ) Length = 475 85 710603 285 2099 HCLCA40 86 710616 tissue-specific secretory protein [unidentified] gι|513467 13 549 90 90 HL JBI80 >gι|818881 epididymal secretory protein precursor [Pan troglodytes] >gι|79407 l epididymal secretory protein 14 6 [Macaca fasuculaπs] >gι|37477 orf [Homo sapiens] >pιr|!53929|153929 epιdιd> mal secretory pr 87 710662 29 532 HFIHJ06 710917 binding protein [Homo sapiens] >sp|Q1386 l|Q13861 gι|553204 68 2182 87 87 H 1 PCV69 DNA-BINDING PROTEIN (FRAGMENT) Length = 695 89 711866 199 444 I IAPSN41 90 714903 IAK I proteιn=proteιn tyrosine kinase [mice, eve bbs| 135032 43 891 92 93 HMCHM89 Peptide, 1 153 aa] [Mus sp ] Length = 1 153 91 718139 rab 13 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A49647|A49647 GTP- gι|452320 740 100 100 I IMSBB73 binding protein Rab 13 - human Length = 203 92 719142 489 13 16 I II ISLΛ46 93 719721 308 523 HHBAG83 94 719914 Fit gene product [Mus musculus] >gι| 1067145 TT1 gι|31 1632 317 1039 95 97 I ILICC89 protein [Mus musculus] >pιr|S33513|S335 l 3 gene Fit protein - mouse >sp|Q64362|Q64362 FUSED TOES (FT1 PROTEIN) Length = 292 95 720134 H1SBE47 96 720270 646 867 HCLCX62 97 720583 caveo n [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S26884|S26884 gι|38516 47 631 98 98 HSKWA34 caveolm - human >sp|Q03135|CAV1_HUMAN CAVEOLIN-1 Length = 178 98 720904 cDNA isolated tor this protein using a monoclonal gnl|PID|e !03 l61 160 858 100 100 I IL TDL48 antibody directed against the p27k prosomal protein [Homo sapiens] Length = 266 99 721 194 564 1268 HEMDK30 100 721271 923 1 141 I IAP0033 101 723886 280 585 HMLLQ32 102 723968 cytochrome c oxidase subunit Vlb (AA 1-86) [Homo gι|30295 64 408 100 100 HLDXB30 sapiens] >gι|30381 cytochrome oxidase subunit Vlb [Homo sapiens] >gι|2098574 (AC002115) COXG [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S03287|OGHU6B cytochrome- c oxidase (EC 1931) chain Vlb - human >sp|P14854|COXG_HUMAN CYTOC 103 725321 337 HUKTR20 104 725326 DNA-binding protein [Homo sapiens] gι|2275!53 665 94 94 HTXKL35 >sp|E331113|E331113 DNA-BINDING PROTEIN >sp]G2275153|G2275153 DNA-BINDING PROTEIN Length = 426 105 726034 riBRONECITN PRECURSOR (FN) >gι] 182697 sp|P02751|riNC_ IUM 175 867 98 HSLBI52 fibroπectin [Homo sapiens] (SUB 1594-2386} AN >gι|4096852 fibronectin [Homo sapiens] [SUB 1116-1422} >gι|4096850 fibronectin |Homo sapiens] {SUB 2228-2386} >gι|4096858 fibronectin |llomo sapiens] {SUB 2231-2386} >gι|!826 106 726602 2 247 HΛPNN47 107 726965 882 1220 IIBKDI 66 108 727809 Na,K-ATPase beta subunit [Homo sapiens] gι|386974 103 1017 95 95 IILBGA63 >gι|28933 put Na/K-ATPase beta (aa 1-303) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A23764|PWHUNB Na+/K+- exchanging ATPase (EC 36 I 37) beta chain - human >sp|P05026|ATNBJIUMAN SODIUM/PO TASS1UM-TRANSPOR I ING ATPASE BE TA-1 CHAIN (EC 36 109 731703 106 423 HTTEM33 110 732840 (AB0I9219) similar to yeast pre-mRNA splicing gnl|PID|dI038129 752 1456 100 100 HEONN38 factors, Prpl Zerl and Prp6 [Homo sapiens] Length = 941 111 733629 320 502 HLRΛI 56 112 733749 hevin gene product [Homo sapiens] gι|758066 221 2272 86 86 HNTNI08 >pιr|S60062|S60062 hevin precursor - human >sp|Q14515|Q14515 HIGH ENDO THELIAL VENULE PRECURSOR Length = 664 113 734119 1440 1622 HWADN83 114 734637 transfer RNA-Trp synthetase [Homo sapiens] gι|340368 324 749 93 95 HTXEJ03 >pιr|JH0533|JH0533 tryptophan-tRNA hgase (EC 6 1 1 2) - human Length = 471 1 15 734638 transfer RNA-Trp synthetase [Homo sapiens] gι| 184657 51 1 1935 100 100 HMEJM56 >gι|30821 471 aa polypeptide (gamma2) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|Λ41633|A4 l 706 iryplophan-tRNA ligasc (EC 6 1 I 2) - human >bbs| l 79357 tryptophanyl-tRNΛ synthetase, TipRS {N-ierminal, alternatively spliced) {EC 6 I I 2 116 734865 CAG-isl 7 [Homo sapiens] Length = 213 gι|3126984 1 795 89 89 I IEGAJ73 117 738846 234 356 HAPOQ59 118 740584 103 246 I 1BMUW84 119 741213 (AF071559) histone deacetylase dHDAC3 gι|3982757 3 506 43 72 I IΛPNP64 [Drosophila melanogaster] >sp|G3982757|G3982757 HISTONE DEACETYLASE DHDAC3 Length = 438 120 741229 unnamed protein product [Homo sapiens] >gι|903934 gnl|PID|e306342 60 1 1 15 94 94 HWLEG6 I cysteine protease [Homo sapiens] >gι|886050 Ich-2 [Homo sapiens] >gι|999454 TX protease precursor [Homo sapiens] >gι|4096346 Mih l/ TX isoform alpha [Homo sapiens] >pιr|Λ575 I l |A5751 1 ιnterleukιn-I beta conve 121 741299 (AJ010952) putative tRNA splicing protein [Homo gnl|PID|e ! 321525 955 100 100 HOLEY69 sapiens] >sp|E 132 l 525|E 1321525 PU TA TIVE TRNA SPLICING PRO I E1N (FRAGMEN T) Length = 318 122 743134 P47 LBC oncogene [Homo sapiens] gι|458210 1254 99 99 HAMGO I 5 >pιr|I38434|I38434 P47 LBC oncogene - human >sp|Q12802|Q12802 P47 LBC ONCOGENE Length = 424 123 744680 IGT-BP 4 [Homo sapiens] >gnl|PID|e 1227579 gι| I 848 l6 379 747 99 99 HUSGU74 insulin-like growth factor binding protein 4 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|B37252|B37252 insulin-like growth factor-binding protein 4 precursor - human >sp|P22692|IBP4_HUMAN INSULIN-LIKE GROW TH FACTOR BINDING PRO TEIN 4 PREC 124 744705 69 983 HPMGT 42 125 745337 protein phosphatase 2A 65 kDa regulatory subunit, gι|510469 50 1837 99 100 HADDU62 alpha isofor [Sus scrota] >sp|P54612|2AAA_PIG PROTEIN PHOSPHATASE PP2A, 65 KD REGULATORY SUBUNIT, ALPHA 1SOTORM (PROTEIN PHOSPHATASE PP2A SUBUNI T A, ALPHA ISOFORM) (PR65-ALPHA) { SUB 2-589} Length = 589 126 745570 1044 1322 HMQBY61 127 746078 25 201 HAGGV41 128 750595 666 1061 HL8PW74 129 750633 768 1202 I1ΛUB 02 130 750766 CLE7 [Gallus gallus] Length = 239 gι| 1184955 858 83 90 HE8PS92 131 752225 238 426 HLWFK49 132 754538 I 567 HAPST69 133 754820 apohpoprotein E [Homo sapiens] Length = 317 gι| 178853 103 561 100 100 HLDAR05 134 756565 GTP-binding protein (rab5) [Cams lamiliaiis] gι| 164056 78 221 79 90 II SCNS7 >pιr|A30413|A30413 GTP-binding protein Rab5 dog Length = 215 135 756793 1603 1896 IICRΛB3I 136 757431 (AF02I819) RNA-bmding protein regulatory subunit gι|24603l8 145 726 100 100 HSAYH89 [Homo sapiens] >sp|O14805|OI4805 RNA- BINDING PROTEIN REGULATORY SUBUNIT Length = 189 137 757478 3 578 HTWDN75 138 757695 636 971 HISAG86 139 760876 1 240 HCLC072 140 761528 fructose 1,6-bιsphosphatase (EC 31311) [Homo gi] 178349 2 1273 96 96 HS1CU72 sapiens] >gnl|PID|dl005592 'fructose-16- bisphosphatase' [Homo sapiens] >gnl|PID|dl005593 'fructose- 16-bιsphosphatase' [Homo sapιens| >gnl|PID|dlO()5594 Tιuclose-16-bιsphosphdlase' [Homo sapiens] >sp 141 761936 454 645 HAFBΓII 142 761944 homologue of yeast IPP isomerase | Homo sapiens] gι|488750 1342 1923 94 94 U6Γ EL27 >pιr|A53028|A53028 isopentenyl-diphosphate Delta- isomerase (EC 5 3 3 2) homolog - human >sp|Q13907|Q 13907 IIOMOI OG OF YEAST IPP ISOMERASE Length = 228 143 764913 keratinocyte growth lactor 2 [Homo sapiens] gι|2231295 486 1214 89 89 HOLΓN72 >gnl|PID|d 1023194 (AB002097) TGF- IO [Homo sapiens] >sp|015520|O 15520 riBROBL AS 1 GROW I I I ΓACTOR- 10 Length = 208 144 764941 ras inhibitor [Homo sapiens] >pιr|C38637|C38637 gι|553634 672 1769 97 99 HDPQI77 Ras inhibitor (clone JC310) - human (fragment) >sp[Q00426|Q00426 PUTATIVE RAS INHIBI TOR (FRAGMEN T) Length = 428 45 765903 766 1092 I IOSCZ8 I 46 766122 3 224 HAPS 163 47 766719 448 822 I I1 ΛSM02 48 767655 Sec62 [Homo sapiens] >gnl|PID|d 1013944 gι| 1928973 86 1162 100 100 HCUCC76 translocation protein- 1 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|JC5279| IC5279 translocation protein 1 - human >sp|Q99442|Q99442 I RANSLOCATIONAL PROTEIN- 1 Length = 399 149 767941 HPBRII-7 gene product [Homo sapiens] >gι|871299 gι|87130 l 334 68 85 I I TGDX23 Human pre-mRNA cleavage factor I 68 kDa subunit [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S57447|S57447 HPBRII-7 protein - human >sp|Q 16630|Q 16630 HPBR1I-4 MRNA Length = 551 150 768035 170 655 HI irCX49 151 769888 5C5 Length = 276 sp|Q 15693IQ 15693 106 690 82 82 HGBC073 152 771671 complement Clq B-chain precursor [Homo sapiens] gι| 179642 594 890 98 100 HDPAK07 >pιr|B23422|ClHUQB complement subcomponent Clq chain B precursor - human (SUB 3-255) >sp|P02746|CIQB_IIUMAN COMPLEMENI C1Q SUBCOMPONENT. B CHAIN PRECURSOR (SUB 5-255} >gι|573114 Clq B-chain precursor [Homo s 153 772876 59 820 HUS1R49 154 773150 dJ262D122 ((mitochondπal/chloroplast 30S gnl|PID|e 1284377 145 489 99 99 IIDLAB47 πbosomal protein S1 )-LIKE protein) [Homo sapiens] >sp|O60783|O60783 DI262D122 ((MITOCIIONDRIAL/CHLOROPLAST 30S RIBOSOMALPROIEINS14)-LIKE PROTEIN) Length =128 155 773398 699 995 HAFBD20 156 773647 (AF089816) RGS-GAIP interacting protein GIPC gι|3789934 501 953 90 90 HWLFD70 I Homo sapiens] >sp|G3789934|G3789934 RGS- GAIP INTERACTING PROTEIN GIPC >gι|2613004 (AF028824) T ax interaction protein 2 [Homo sapiens] {SUB 78-333} Length = 333 157 773927 splicing factor [Homo sapiens] >gι|472956 gClq-R gι|338045 945 100 100 HCHME48 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|JT0762|JT0762 pre-mRNA splicing factor SF2 P32 chain precursor - human >sp|Q07021|MA32_HUMAN COMPLEMENT COMPONENT 1, Q SUBCOMPONENT BINDING PROTEIN PRECURSOR (GLYCOPRO I EIN GCIQBP)(GC10- 158 774100 (AF006088) p 16-Arc [Homo sapiens] >gι|240761 1 gι|2282042 97 597 100 100 HGCNL45 (AFO 17807) Arp2/3 complex 16kDa subunit [Homo sapιens| >sp|O I55 l l |AR I6_I IUMΛN ARP2/3 COMPLEX 16 KD SUBUNI T (P I6-ARC) Length = 151 159 774101 120 353 HMVC T79 160 774159 1 141 HKAEV I 5 161 774341 2 682 HMAFC46 162 774371 1291 1647 I 1HFHK22 163 777534 (AF006082) Arp2 [Homo sapiens] gι|2282030 148 1365 96 96 11MT AE25 >sp|015142|ARP2_HUMAN ACTIN-LIKE PROTEIN 2 Length = 394 164 777623 (AF030162) inner mitochondnal membrane gι|2599129 98 760 86 86 HMELH I 2 translocase Tιm23 [Homo sapiens] >sp|014925|014925 INNER MITOCHONDRIAL MEMBRANE TRANSLOCASE TIM23 Length = 209 165 779194 2 232 HODFE80 166 779387 SSR alpha subunit [Homo sapiens] gι|551638 138 1028 84 84 HNTNA20 >pιr|I38246|I38246 SSR alpha subunit - human Length = 286 167 779790 3 488 I I I ΛL54 168 779818 human complement C lr [Homo sapiens] gι| 179644 73 1125 98 99 HLICR27 >pιr|A24170|C l HURB complement subcomponent C I r (EC 3 4 21 41 ) precursor - human >sp|P00736|C I RJTUMAN COMPLEMENT C 1 R COMPONENT PRECURSOR (EC 3 4 21 41 ) Length = 705 169 779819 human complement Clr [Homo sapiens] gι| 179644 370 1716 99 99 1I1BEI12 >pιr|A24170|ClHURB complement subcomponent Clr (EC 342141) precursor- human >sp|P00736|C 1 R HUM AN COMPLEMENT C 1 R COMPONENT PRECURSOR (EC 342141 ) Length = 705 170 780634 Man9-mannosιdase [Homo sapiens] gι|4l6180 281 97 97 IIL1GU89 >pιr|S38965|S38965 Man(9)-ιnannosιdase - human >sp|P33908|MA12_HUMAN MANNOSYL- OLIGOSACCHARIDE ALPHA-1,2- MΛNNOSIDΛSE (EC 321113) (MΛN(9)- ALPHA-MΛNNOSIDASE) Length = 625 171 780638 (AF049659) geranylgeranyl pyiophosphate synthase gι|2944400 209 1120 58 76 IIDQLR43 [Drosophila melanogaster] >sp|061539|061539 GERANYLGERANYL PYROPHOSPHATE SYNTHASE Length = 338 172 780773 (AC004079) 40% similar to yeast high mobility gι|2822179 43 555 91 94 HBJIIV9I group-like nuclear protein, P32495 (PID g417360) [Homo sapiens] >sp|043362|043362 SIMILAR TO YEAST HIGH MOBILI TY GROUP-LIKE NUCLEAR PROTEIN Length =151 173 780778 transcription factor LBPla - human Length = 504 pιr|A56205|A56205 167 100 100 HE8TZ19 174 780873 DAD1 protein [Sus scrota] >sp|Q29036|DADl_PIG gnl|PID|dlOI3802 429 87 87 HEDAE0I DEFENDER AGAINST CELL DEATH 1 (DAD-1) Length = 113 175 7821 13 (AF039704) lysosomal pepstatin insensitive protease gi|4063841 575 1702 92 92 HWBEE06 [Homo sapiens] >sp|G4063841 |G4063841 LYSOSOMAL PEPSTATIN INSENSITIVE PROTEASE Length = 563 176 782153 Mvp lp [Saccharomyces cerevisiae] Length = 5 gi|562121 133 855 39 72 HDABR2 I 177 782376 similar to ubiquitm conjugating enzyme gι|746510 100 1014 62 79 I IFXBY84 [Caenorhabditis elegans] >sp|Q 1893 I |Q 18931 SIMILAR TO UBIQUITIN CONJUGATING ENZYME Length = 309 178 782420 leptin receptor gene-related protein [I lomo sapiens] gnl|PID|e315497 1 480 100 100 HSKHA38 >sp|015243|015243 OB-R GENE RELATED PROTEIN Length = 131 179 782672 3 380 I IOSΛW38 180 783148 3 326 11BIBU44 181 783510 (AJ000644) SPOP [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|el 2 l6712 165 1319 95 95 HCGBC59 >sp|0437911043791 SPOP Length = 374 182 783734 mena protein [Mus musculus] >sp|P7()430|P70430 gι| 1644455 2 1 171 81 84 HO1 IΛI I70 ENABLED HOMOLOG (MENA PROTEIN) Length = 541 183 784201 (AF073839) bithoraxoid-like protein [Rattus gi|328888 l 64 477 93 96 HWHGB85 norvegicus] >sp|088567|088567 BITHORAXOID- LIKE PROTEIN Length = 96 184 784381 tetracyc ne transporter-like protein [Mus musculus] dbj||D883 I 5_l 3 1409 78 84 HD I G33 >pir|JC5641|JC5641 sugar transporter protein HiATl - mouse >sp]P70187|P70187 HIPPOCAMPUS ABUNDANT PROTEIN TRANSCRIPT 1 (TETRACYCLINE TRANSPORTER-LIKE PROTEIN) Length = 490 185 784387 472 HWBEJ50 186 784639 GTP-binding protein (rab7) [Ca s fami aπs] gι| 164058 88 711 100 100 HL9RW49 >pιr|B304!3|B30413 GTP-binding protein rab7 - dog Length = 207 187 784641 dJ560B93 [Homo sapiens] >sp|043735|043735 gnl|PlD|el246376 120 596 67 81 HD EW56 DJ560B93 Length = 152 188 785053 586 729 HMS1N30 189 785142 DOC-2 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|G02228|G02228 DOC- gι| 1063686 2 2038 90 90 HOEBZ3I 2 - human >sp|P98082|DOC2_HUMAN DIFFERENTIALLY EXPRESSED PROTEIN 2 (DOC-2) >gι|l 110539 mitogen-responsive phosphoprotein [Homo sapiens] (SUB 1-229} I ength = 770 190 785584 18 524 HI5FS84 191 785795 ERF-1 gene pioduct [Homo sapιens| gι|825653 12 1178 75 75 HWAAY25 >pιr|S34854|S34854 epidermal growth factor- response factor 1 - human >gι|972116 ERF-1 protein [Sus scrofa] (SUB 299-337} Length = 338 192 786283 (ΛB016068) lls Slc24p [Homo sapιens| gnl|PID|dl()34696 1020 88 88 HOI B >sp|075844|075844 IIS STE24P L ngth = 475 193 786335 HN I |Mus musculus] >sp|P97825|P97825 gι|1864l65 600 73 75 HILGW8I HEMATOLOGICAL AND NEUROLOGICAL EXPRESSED SEQUENCE 1 (UN I) (I INI) Length = 154 194 786511 162 HOSDD78 195 787330 possesses similarity with C3HC4 type zinc finger gnl|PID|e 1343639 69 689 67 86 IICWUG30 domains [Caenorhabditis elegans) >sp|Q 17573|Q 17573 CO 1 G64 PRO I LIN 1 ength = 170 196 787377 steroid receptor coactivator [Homo sapiens] gι| 1 1 17915 426 HAPSS34 >pιr|A57620|A57620 steroid receptor coactivator 1 - human >sp|Q 13420|Q 13420 STEROID RECEPTOR COAC TIVATOR >pιr|PC4362|PC4362 steroid receptor coactivator- 1 - human (fragment) (SUB 990- 1061 } Length = 1061 197 787662 191 508 I ILHAU33 198 788754 143 2077 HN TΛQ63 199 789351 (AB001993) g a maturation factor homologous gnl|PID|d 1026502 630 1070 99 99 I IN I 1B05 protein [Homo sapiens] >gι|3329382 (AF038956) gha maturation tactor beta [Homo sapiens) >sp|O60234|O60234 GLIA MATURA I ION FACTOR HOMOLOGOUS PRO I EIN Length = 142 200 789466 47 283 I IAPNZ91 201 790396 1 819 HSKXJ34 202 791673 343 606 HLTCB62 203 792080 (AF037206) RING zinc finger protein [Mus gι|2746337 360 659 97 100 HDQHN07 musculus] >sp|054966|054966 RING ZINC FINGER PROTEIN Length = 268 204 793025 protein-tyrosine phosphatase [Homo sapiens] gι]29981 835 1404 96 96 HNFDF94 >pιr|S29090|S29090 dual specificity phosphoprotein phosphatase (EC 3 I 3 -) I - human >sp|P28562|DUS IJ IUMAN DUAL SPECIFICITY PRO TEIN PHOSPHATASE I (EC 3 1 3 48) (EC 3 1 3 16) (MAP KINASE PHOSPHA TASE- 1 ) (MPK-1 M 205 793043 (ΛTO 12872) phosphatidyhnositol 4-kιnase 230 gι|2326227 164 1 183 99 99 I IFOMG90 [Homo sapιens| >sp|G2326227|G2326227 PHOSPHATIDYLINOSITOL 4-KINASE 230 >gι|598193 phosphatidyhnositol 4-kmase [Homo sapiens] {SUB 1 191-2044 } Length = 2044 206 793386 642 11KA I75 207 795144 eIF3-p66 [Homo sapiens] >gι|2351378 translation gι|2351378 1204 99 99 HFOXO07 initiation factor elF3 p66 subunit [Homo sapιens| >sp|015371 |015371 EIF3-P66 Length = 548 208 79591 1 323 1496 HOGAN95 209 795962 145 777 H011AR44 210 796221 glutathione-S-transferase homolog [Homo sapiens] gι|2393722 57 914 96 97 I IMΛAC I 2 >sp|P78417|P78417 GLUTATI IIONE-S- TRANSFERΛSE HOMOLOG Length = 241 211 796283 443 718 HΓ ΓBV2 I 212 796392 3 845 HEEA023 213 797655 3 776 HKMMC49 214 799486 a sapiens] Length gι| 15 H644 144 1598 95 95 HT AFD8 I = 482 215 799681 41 217 HCLSC85 216 800221 endothe al PAS domain protein [Homo sapiens] gι| 1805268 1 999 98 98 HHPFS31 Length = 870 217 800376 ABC-C transporter [Homo sapiens ■1 gnl|PID|e243436 3 557 100 100 I IAPO I9 I >pιr|S71363|S71363 probable transport protein ABC C - human >sp|Q92473|Q92473 ABC-C TRANSPOR TER Length = 1704 218 800567 170 HTXDX21 219 800652 2 745 HMLΓRO I 220 800748 (AF075575) dysferlm |Homo sapiens] gι|36()0028 3 1850 66 83 HDQGA I 3 >sp|075923|075923 DYSrERLIN Length = 2080 221 802032 153 560 HPJCA43 222 802050 glutathione peroxidase [Homo sapiens] gnl|PlD|el 192233 129 362 93 93 HAOMI 95 >gnl|PID|d 1000980 glutathione peroxidase [Homo sapiens] >sp|043787|043787 GLUTATHIONE PEROXIDASE (EC 1 1 1 1 9) >gnI|PID|d 1004380 plasma glutathione peroxidase [Homo sapiens] {SUB 82-226} >gnl|P!D|d 1004379 plasma glut 223 805551 (AF044201 ) neural membrane protein 35, NMP35 gι|3426268 1056 49 61 HWHQN I 6 [Rattus norvegicus] >sp|O88407|O88407 NEURAL MEMBRANE PROTEIN 35 Length = 316 224 805662 atopy i elated autoantigen CAI C |Homo sapiens) gnl|PID|e 13 10645 67 1527 99 99 I IA I V32 >sp|075785|075785 Al OPY RELA I LD AU I OAN TIGFN CALC (I RAGMI NT ) 1 ength = 313 225 805750 I 318 I IL9QJ 13 226 805860 3 317 HSSBJ90 227 805886 (AF090386) napsin A [Homo sapiens] Length = 420 gι|4154287 186 1040 98 99 HAPOP50 228 806706 endolhelial PAS domain protein 1 [Homo sapiens] gι| 1805268 179 649 91 91 HΛI IAΛ80 Length = 870 229 81 1637 (AF093414) estrogen response element binding gι|3747052 269 189 88 88 H6EDL02 protein [Saguinus oedipus) >sρ|077798|077798 ESTROGEN RESPONSE ELEMENT BINDING PROTEIN >sp|G386547|G386547 D(TTAGGG)N- BINDING PROTEIN B39= 1ΥPE E HETEROGENEOUS NUCLEAR RIBONUCLEOPRO I EIN HOMOLOG { PEI IDE 2} {SU 230 81 1782 (AF026124) schwannoma-associated protein [Mus gι|2565396 1012 1755 85 86 I IUSHH56 musculus] >sp|O35405|O35405 SCHWANNOMA- ASSOCIATED PROTEIN Length = 488 231 812338 p40 [Homo sapiens] >sp|O00568|O00568 RAB9 gnl|PID|e323546 261 1 169 96 96 I IAPTR06 EFFECTOR P40, COMPLETE CDS Length = 372 232 812439 (AB008375) osleoblast specific cysteine-πch protein gnl|PID|dI023870 617 1699 85 85 HSL11L73 [Homo sapiens] >sp|014549|014549 OSTEOBLAST SPECIFIC CYSTEINE-RICH PROTEIN Length = 403 233 812645 GDP dissociation inhibitor [Homo sapiens] gι|404045 462 96 97 I IAPN029 >gι|441455 Human rho GDP-dissociation Inhibitor 2(IEF 8120) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A47742|A47742 Rho-GDP-dissociation inhibitor Ly-GDl - human >sp|P52566|GDIS_HUMAN RHO GDP- DISSOCIATION INHIBITOR 2 (RHO GDI 2) (RHO-G 234 812770 tropomyosin, fibroblast - human >gι|37424 pιr|A25530|A25530 26 835 79 79 I IWΛAY56 cytoskeletal tropomyosin (AA 1 -248) [Homo sapiens] ( SUB 1-239) Length = 248 235 812893 mitogen mducible gene mιg-2 [Homo sapiens] gι|505033 176 2311 58 IIMAFL22 >pιr|S69890|S69890 mitogen mducible gene mιg-2 - human >sp|Q 14840|Q 14840 MITOGEN INDUCIBLE GENE MIG-2 (FRAGMENT ) Length = 720 236 813080 (Ar052433) katanin p80 subunit [Strongylocentrotus gι|3005601 538 37 60 HAP0V32 purpuratus] >sp|06l585|06l585 KATANIN P80 SUBUNIT Length = 690 237 813139 phosphoprotein p53 [Homo sapiens] gι|386994 337 1149 100 100 HHLUB27 >sp|Q1681l|Q168ll CELLULAR TUMOR AN riGEN P53 (FRAGMENT) Length = 393 238 815326 1204 1320 IIDPRN26 239 815740 1243 1494 IILIF146 240 815812 852 1028 HLIBF42 241 824865 The hal520 gene product is novel [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|dl008225 2 904 91 91 HDP1H94 S >gι| 1255240 ljsosomal-associated multitransmembrane protein [Homo sapiens] (SUB 8-269} Length = 269 242 825138 176 484 HWI LCI 8 243 825535 2 736 HELGU27 244 826203 1604 1903 III4AF72 245 827046 2477 2656 II18BI56 246 827168 (AF035819) macrophage receptor MARCO [Homo gι|300279l 87 1295 100 100 HMSIΛ80 sapiens] >sp|G300279l|G300279l MACROPHAGE Rl CI I' 1 OR MARCO I ength = 520 247 827195 collagen alpha 2( VI) chain precursor, medium splice pιr|S09646|S09646 1484 98 99 HSYCG31 form - human >sp|P12I l()|CA26_HUMAN COLLAGEN ALPHA 2(VI) CHAIN (FRAGMENT) {SUB 237-589) >gι| 179710 alpha-2 collagen type Vl-a [Homo sapiens] {SUB 590-917} >gι|30050 precursor pol> peptide (AA -20 to 234) 248 827249 (AT093119) UPIll [Homo sapiens] gι|3676824 178 1476 98 98 HSYDM77 >sp|075967|075967 UPH 1 Length = 439 249 827447 63 608 HΛPNR75 250 827515 Vatl [Homo sapiens] Length = 300 gι| 1698401 2 850 95 95 H TTED68 251 827621 MLN 70, SI 00 C gene product [Homo sapiens] gι|951233 42 443 100 100 IIINAC47 >gnl|PID|dl008I78 calgizzaπn |llomo sapiens] >gnl|PID|d 1008950 human S100C protein [Homo sapιens| >gι|26()5598 calcium binding protein |llomo sapiensj >pιr|l37080|I37080 calgiz aπn - human Length =105 252 827883 666 1004 Hliri!V82 253 828040 (AF023269) probable transcπptional legulator dre4 gι|25II745 54 1280 77 88 HI 11 37 [Drosophila melanogaster] >sp|O17045|O 17045 PROBABLE TRANSCRIPTIONAL REGULATOR DRE4 (TRAGMENT) Length = 1059 254 828360 ADP-πbosylation factor 4 [Homo sapiens] gι|178985 292 100 100 HLIFG60 >pιr|B38622|B38622 ADP-πbosylation factor 4- human >sp|P18085|ARF4_HUMAN ADP- RIBOSYLATION FACTOR 4 {SUB 2-180} >gnl|PID|e276443 ADP-πbosylation factor 4 [Sus scrofa| (SUB 1-51} Length = 180 255 828506 rac2 gene product [Cams famιhaπs| >gι| 190824 ras- gι|922 182 319 100 100 HDQHC41 related C3 botulinum toxin substrate [Homo sapiens] >gι|53886 ras-related C3 botuhnium toxin substrate [Mus musculus] >gι|3184510 GTPase cRac I A [Gallus gallus] >pιr|Λ34788|TVHUC I G TP-binding protein rac 256 828517 pl20E4F transcription factor [Homo sapiens] gι| 1906602 379 84 84 I 1PJDE77 >sp|O00146|O00146 P120E4F TRANSCRIPTION FACTOR Length = 783 257 828898 iron regulatory factor [Homo sapiens] gι|33963 1252 100 100 HMCBD26 >pιr|S26403|S26403 iron-responsive element-binding protein - human >sp|P21399|IRE l_HUMAN IRON- RESPONSIVE ELEMENT BINDING PROTEIN 1 (IRE-BP l ) (IRON REGULATORY PROTEIN 1 ) (IRPI) (FERRITIN REPRESSOR PROTEIN) (ACONITATE 258 828959 1681 21 15 HGBBQ46 259 829081 core protein II precursor [Homo sapiens] gι| 180928 3 953 88 88 πosroi2 >pιr|A32629|A32629 ubιquιnol--cytochrome-c reductase (EC I 10 2 2) core protein II - human Length = 453 260 830069 (AC004492) HMG box containing protein 1 [Homo gι|2995607 1073 95 95 HDPBR82 sapiens] >sp|O6038 l |O60381 HMG BOX CONTAINING PROTEIN 1 Length = 514 261 830109 103 645 HC1AA79 262 830176 protein kinase C mu [Homo sapiens] gι|438373 131 86 92 HAPIB14 >pιr|A53215|A53215 protein kinase C (LC 271 -) mu - human >sp|Q15139|KPCMJIUMAN PROTEIN KINASE C MU TYPL (EC 271 -) (NPKC-MU) Length = 912 263 830241 (AT065482) sorting nexin 2 [Homo sapiens] gι|3152938 1242 37 58 II IV04 >sp|O60749|O60749 SORTING NEXIN 2 Length = 519 264 830264 transcription regulator helix-loop-he x proleιn=Idl bbs| 169359 369 80 80 HAPIΛ45 Id I -a [human, g oblastoma cell line U25I, Peptide, 155 aa] [Homo sapiens] >gι|I816512 heh\-loop- he x protein Id- 1 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|JC5395|JC5395 hehx-loop-hclix protein Idl - human Length = 155 265 830402 1138 1482 IIWBl A34 266 830414 thromboxane synthase [Homo sapiens] gι|338704 126 1079 94 94 HMC1R67 >pιr|A41766|A41766 thromboxane-A synthase (EC 53995) I - human Length = 534 267 830444 mhc antigen DC-alpha chain [Homo sapiens] gι|307243 67 630 100 100 IIAAY3I >gnl|PID|e307041 HLA-DQA1*05011 [Homo sapiens] >gι|2665521 MHC class II DC-alpha [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A022I5|HLHU3C MHC class II histocompatibi ty antigen I ILA-DQ alpha I chain precursor (allele DQA 1*0501) - human 268 830476 non-muscle myosm heavy chain [Bos taurus] gι|3205211 1122 36 50 HWI HB64 >sp|O02717|O02717 NON-MUSCLE MYOSIN HEAVY CHAIN (FRAGMENT) Length = 625 269 830624 mRNA export protein [Homo sapiens] Length = 368 gι| 1903456 149 1387 100 100 H IT PA57 270 830643 CDC2-related kinase [Homo sapiens] gι|493130 1 122 100 100 I I I DAB49 >pιr|A55262|A55262 protein kinase (EC 2 7 I 37) cdc2-related PITALRE - human >sp|P50750|CDK9_HUMAN CELL DIVISION PROTEIN KINASE 9 (EC 2 7 I -) (SERINE/THREONINE-PROT EIN KINASE PITALRE) (C-2K) Length = 372 271 830714 fibroblast growth tactor receptor-FLG precursor gι|31378 2292 95 95 HSSMW37 [Homo sapiens] >gι|3 1393 Fibroblast Growth Factor Receptor. 3-lg Domaιn+2 ΛΛ nisei t |l lomo sapiens] >gι|351 10 fibroblast growth factor icceptor [Homo sapiens] >pιr|Sl I692| TVI 1UFG fibroblast growth lactor recep 272 830826 plasminogen activator preprotem [Homo sapiens] gι|35283 1 14 593 92 92 HAJΛC29 >pιr|I38098|I38098 t-plasminogen activator (EC 3 4 21 68) precursor (variant) - human Length = 291 273 830888 von Ebner minor salivary gland protein [Mus gι| I I 84790 663 64 I IPSNE01 musculus] >sp|Q61 1 14|Q61 1 14 VON EBNER MINOR SALIVARY GLAND PROTEIN Length = 310 274 830984 antigen [I Iomo sapiens] >gι|30949 pre-pro gι| 188543 215 799 61 I IOEKY01 polypeptide (AA -22 to 163) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S06786|A60592 T-cell surface glycoprotein E2 precursor - human >sp|P14209|MIC2_HUMAN T- CELL SURFACE GLYCOPRO IΕIN E2 PRECURSOR (E2 ANTIGEN) (CD99) (MIC2 PROTEIN) (12E7 275 831015 putative surlace glycoprotein |I lomo sapiens] gnl|PID|c l 88 l 79 633 88 88 Hi ll U 143 >sp|P5380 l|C21 1_HUMΛN PUT A I IVI SURI ACT GLYCOPRO TEIN C2 IORH PRECURSOR (C210RF3) L ength = 180 276 831080 lymphoma 3-encoded protein (bcl-3) [Homo sapiens] gι| 179376 1703 77 I IΛDDQ39 >pιr|A34794|A34794 B-cell CLL/lymphoma 3 (BCL3) protein - human >sp|P20749|BCL3_HUMAN B-CELL LYMPHOMA 3-ENCODED PROTEIN (BCL-3 PRO! EIN) >gι|533381 homologous to members o( the 1-kappa B family, protein bi 277 831 101 zinc finger transcπptional regulator [Homo sapiens] gι| 183443 899 66 66 I IEOM083 >gι|340013 tπstetraproline [Homo sapiens] >gι| 183445 zinc finger transcπptional regulator [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S34427|S34427 tπsletraproline protein - human Length = 326 278 831 146 (AF 104670) cell cycle protein [Homo sapiens] gι|4160449 916 93 93 1DP I 032 >gι|4099506 erbB3 binding protein EBP1 [Homo sapiens] { SUB 55-394} Length = 394 279 831215 farnesyl-protem transferase alpha-subunit [Homo gι|292031 1 182 96 96 HM I AH30 sapiens] >gι|388756 farnesyl-protem transferase alpha-subunit [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A47659|A47659 tarnesyl-protein transferase alpha chain - human >sp|P49354|PFTA_HUMAN PRO TEIN FARNESYLTRANSFERASE ALPHA SUBU 280 831231 unknown orf, len 393, CAI 0 13 [Saccharomyces gι|5757ϋ l 1012 28 51 HMA IF05 cere isiae] >pιr|S49759|S49759 probable membrane protein YML0 I 8c - yeast (Saccharomj ces cerevisiae) Length = 393 281 831242 heat-shock protein I ISP70B [Homo sapiens] gι|35222 105 2099 91 H I I IV 15 >pιr| S09036| S09036 dnaK-type molecular chaperone HSPA6 - human >sp|P17066|HS76_HUMAN HEAT SHOCK 70 KD PROTEIN 6 (HEAT SHOCK 70 KD PROTEIN B') >gι|35224 heat shock protein 70B' (AA 355-643) |Homo sapiens] {SUB 35 282 831267 246 464 HL ΓGI I I 283 831272 641 1006 HL ΓDROI 284 831291 glutathione peroxidase-GI [Homo sapiens] Length = gι|579930 228 677 99 99 HL QL R45 190 285 831382 epoxide hydrolase [Homo sapiens] Length = 455 gι|450269 541 1 1 16 87 87 111 VI IGO I 286 831624 oriutliine lase | I lomo sapιens| >gι|386989 gι| 189371 164 1561 100 100 1121 BM53 ornitlune decarboxylase [Homo sapiens] >gι|338278 ornithine decai boxy lase [Homo sapiens] >gι|338280 ormthine decarbox) lase |Homo sapiens] >gι|35136 ornithine decarbox lase [Homo sapiens] >gι|296667 ormth 287 831640 pol> peptide BM28 [Homo sapiens] Length = 892 gι|468704 337 534 97 100 HI XHK31 831688 vascular anticoagulating protein [unidentified] gι|410788 164 787 100 100 HELI R81 >gι|412271 VAC alpha [Mus musculus] >gι| 179132 aannttiiccooaagguullaanntt pprreeccuurrssoorr ((55'' eenndd ppuutt ) putative [H loomm<o sapiens] >gι|3071 16 lipocortm-V [homo sapiens) >gι| 1821 12 endonexm II [Homo sapiens] >gι|37637 VAC prot 289 831690 membrane cofactor preprotem (AA -34 to 350) gι|34505 46 1308 85 85 HOUl l 144 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|SO I896|SO I896 membrane cofactor protein precursor - human >sp|G232300|G2323()0 Ml MBRANT COl AC 1 OR PRO TEIN MCP CD46 {Al I LRNA 1 IVL1 Y SPLICED} { SUB 286-384} Length = 384 290 831718 ets2 protein [Homo sapiens] >gι|2736087 gι| 182273 316 100 100 I 1I IX1 61 (AF017257) er> throblastosis virus oncogene homolog 2 protein [Homo sapiens] >pιr|B32066|TVHUE2 transcription factor ets-2 - human >sp|P15036|ETS2_HUMAN C-E TS-2 PROTEIN >gι| 182271 ets protein [Homo sapiens] { SUB 324 291 831832 881 1108 HE8SB04 292 831907 92 307 HLHCN83 293 831938 aldehyde dehy drogenase (NAD+) (LC 1 2 I 3) 2 pιr|A29975|DEHUE2 D4 1289 95 95 I IDPXK32 precursor mitochondπal - human >sp|P0509 l |DHAM_HUMAN Al DEI IYDE DEHYDROGENASE Ml TOCHONDRIAL PRECURSOR (EC 1 2 1 3) (CLASS 2) (ALDH1) (ALD1 I-E2) Length = 517 294 831954 825 HDP TA79 295 832028 KM-102-derιved reductase-like factoi |Homo gnl|PID|d!014370 494 1051 97 97 IIDABDII sapiens] >sp|Q99475|Q99475 KM-I02-DERIVED REDUCTASE-LIKE FACTOR >gnl|PID|eI249328 (AJ001050) thioredoxin reductase [Homo sapiens | {SUB 53-549} Length = 549 296 832043 similar to human 22kDa SM22 mRNA PID|dl005335 31 504 100 100 III IAQ18 (HUM22SM) [Homo sapiens] Length = 199 297 832055 194 334 IICRQC8I 298 832124 520 1155 I1ADCL25 299 832145 21 185 HCQDA34 300 832254 2 565 IICI BG05 301 832331 123 506 IIBJBQ28 302 832360 calpastatin [Homo sapiens] Length = 464 gι|9513l5 89 811 83 83 IIP1D1D9 303 832401 Ubiquitin-conjugating enzyme Ubcl 12 [I lomo gι|474827 1 558 90 90 11ILAB10 sapiens] >gι|483538 ubιquιtιn-con|ugatιng enzyme Ubcl 12 [Homo sapiens] >gι|897847 L2-20K [Mus musculus] >pιr|A53516|A53516 ubiquitm- conjugating enzyme UbcH2 - human >pιr|JC4308|JC4308 ubiquitm-protem hgase (EC 304 832403 150 269 IIΛPCK19 305 832437 470 1664 HT1UK77 306 832492 adenylate kinase 2B [Homo sapiens] gι| 1477653 2 430 100 100 HLJBI137 >pιr|JC5893|JC5893 adenylate kinase (EC 2743) 2B - human Length = 232 307 832598 CCAAT /enhancer binding protein gamma [Rattus gι|55928 383 790 92 93 121 ΛC64 norvegicus] >pιr|S26300|S26300 transcription factor C/EBP-gamma - rat (fragment) >sp|P26801|CEBG_RAT CCAAT/ENHANCER BINDING PROTEIN GAMMA (C/EBP GAMMA) (SUB 86-235} Length = 235 308 832605 CRM 1 protein [Homo sapiens] >sp|O14980|O 14980 gι|2626840 668 3322 99 99 H2CBU81 CRM1 PROTEIN Length = 1071 309 834510 macrophage inflammatory protein- 1 -alpha [Homo gι|2924l7 629 IIMSGD45 sapiens] >gι| 179985 C-C chemokine receptor type 1 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A45177| A45177 chemokine (C- C) receptor 1 - human >sp|P32246|CKR! JTUMAN C-C CHEMOKINE RECEPTOR TYPE 1 (C-C CKR-I) (CC-CKR-1) (CCR-1) (CCRI) 310 835139 (AF1065l8)sιalomucιnCDI64lHomo sapiens] gι|3941728 42 683 89 89 HΛM1184 >sp|G3941728]G3941728 SIALOMUCIN CD164 Length =178 311 835142 (AF0292I3) IL-1 receptor accessory protein [Homo gι|2599127 1091 44 60 IIJPDH20 sapiens] >gnl|PID|dl026349 (AB006537) interleukin 1 receptor accessory protein [Homo sapiens] >sp|014915|014915 IL-1 RECEPTOR ACCESSORY PROTEIN >gι|2909775 (AF016261) ιnterleukm-1 receptor accessory prote 312 835271 (AJ005766) LAMP [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|e!363772 698 90 90 HD HB46 >sp|E 1363772|E 1363772 LAMP PRECURSOR Length = 416 313 835369 melanoma-associated antigen [Homo sapiens] gι| 189384 386 87 87 HLJEA92 >gι|34527 ME491 antigen precursor (AA -1 to 237) [Homo sapiens] >bbs|93790 ocular melanoma- associated antigen, OMA81 H [human, uveal melanoma, Peptide, 238 aa] [Homo sapiens] >gι|430756 ME491 /CD63 antigen 11 lomo s 314 835430 470 1240 I 1WBDL33 3 15 835462 (AF083236) FLDED-1 [Homo sapiens] gι|3462834 957 62 79 HLDOK36 >gnl|PID|e 1334489 (A 1010973) DEDD protein [Homo sapiens] >gι|3930213 (AF043733) death effector domain-containing testicular molecule [Homo sapiens] >sp|075618|075618 TLDED- l >sp|G3930213|G3930213 DEATH EITEC I OR DOMAIN-CO 316 835539 pre-mRNA splicing factor [Homo sapiens] >gι|55440 gι|338484 46 510 100 100 HW AAP51 X 16 gene product [Mus musculus] >gnl|PID|e274089 splicing factor [Mus musculus] >pιr|S I40l 6|S14016 X 16 protein - mouse >pιr|I54089|I54089 pre-mRNA splicing factor - human Length = 164 317 835635 (AF097 I81 ) tuftelin-mteracting protein 10 [Mus gι|385 H64 2260 92 96 HDPKE84 musculus] >gι|3851 164 (AF097181 ) tuftehn- mteracting protein 10 [Mus musculus] >sp|G3851 164|G3851 164 T UFTELIN- INTERACT ING PROTEIN 10 Length = 526 318 835815 phosphate cyclase [Homo sapiens] >gnl|PID|e31 1729 gnl|PID|e3 I 1534 99 581 94 94 ISI Λ 09 phosphate cyclase [Homo sapιens| { SUB 1 -48) Length = 366 319 836161 mutant N-acetylglucosamin ltransferase I [Cπcetulus g,ι| 1531641 816 48 68 IIISCD15 gπseus] Length = 447 320 836213 URF 3 (NADH dehydrogenase subunit) [Homo gι|13011 87 245 90 97 HΛVMII34 sapiens] >gι|506832 protein 3 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A00422|DNHUN3 NADH dehydrogenase (ubiqumone) (EC 1653) chain 3 - human mitochondrion (SGC 1 ) >sp|P03897|NU3M_HUMAN NADI1- UBIQUINONE OXIDOREDUCT ASE CI IAIN 3 (EC 16 321 836371 Similar to sultatase [Caenorhabditis elegans] gι|l 125842 530 60 74 HSYBS71 >sp|Q21376|Q21376 SIMILAR TO ULIATASE NCBIGI 1125842 Length = 709 322 836618 (AF079446) developmental protein DG 1067 gι|3420747 76 1035 50 75 HWAGI 94 [Dictyostelium discoideum] >sp|076738|076738 DEVELOPMENTAL PROTEIN DG1067 (FRAGMENT) Length = 338 323 836895 (Al 039695) antigen NY-CO-25 [1 lomo sapiens] gι|3170190 2545 98 98 IIN1CGI5 >sp|G3170190|G3170190 ANTIGEN NY-CO-25 (FRAGMENT) >gnI|PlD|dl013881 similar to mouse heat shock protein 105 kDa beta [Homo sapiens] {SUB 15-872} I ength = 872 324 837181 129 1046 HDTLB55 325 837238 similar to DNAI |Cacnorhabdιtιselegans| I ength = gnl|PID|e 1349481 54 1265 58 78 I IC1101196 355 326 837337 1078 1446 HKABZ88 327 837530 prostaglandm transporter hPG T [Homo sapiens] gι| 16 l 7590 517 43 72 HKIYI 62 >gι|3676522 (AF056732) prostaglandm transporter [Homo sapiens] >sp|Q92959|PGT_HUMAN PROSTAGLAND1N TRANSPORT ER (PGT) >sp|G3676522|G3676522 PROSTAGLANDIN TRANSPORTER Length = 643 328 837551 (Ar038960) SKD 1 homolog [Homo sapiens] gι|3329390 2 1396 84 94 HLGΛU95 >sp|075351 |075351 SKD 1 HOMOLOG Length = 444 329 837622 84 1484 I INFIB27 330 839908 470 691 H TTFW42 331 839949 (ΛL008726) dJ337018 2 (Lysosomal Protective gnl|PID|el29658l 3 1478 100 100 HDPRY42 Protein precursor (EC 3 4 16 5, Cathepsm A, Carboxypeptidase C)) [Homo sapiens] >sp|O60790|O60790 DJ337018 2 (LYSOSOMAL PRO I EC I IVE PRO H IN PRECURSOR (EC 3 4 16 5, CA 1 1 ILPS1N A, CARBOXYPL 1 IDASL C)) Length = 480 332 840000 489 1880 HP TXG77 333 840095 564 1580 HOEBZ29 334 840166 put homologue to S cerevisiae GAR 1 gene gι|510509 188 769 62 78 I IL1 ILY06 [Drosophila melanogaster] >pιr|S49193|S49193 GCR 101 protein - fruit fly (Drosophila melanogaster) >sp|Q24345|Q24345 GCR 101 MRNA Length = 239 335 840249 ATPase 6 [Homo sapiens] >gι|2052364 ATPase 6 gι| 13009 520 870 65 68 I II 1DI 64 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A01049|PWHU6 I I+- transport g A TP synthase (EC 3 6 1 34) protein 6 - human mitochondrion (SGC I ) >sp|P00846|ΛTP6_HUMAN A TP SYN 1 1 IΛSL A CI IAIN ([ C 3 6 I 34) (PRO 1 EIN 6) Length = 226 336 840601 mtegπn-hnked kinase [Homo sapiens] gι|3150002 1 1287 99 99 HOEKB20 >sp|Q13418|Q 134 l 8 INTEGRIN-LINKED KINASE Length = 452 337 840613 (AJ012463) transcription factor [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|e 1339598 126 2504 96 96 I IARNB I 5 >sp|E 1339598|E l 39598 TRANSCRIP I ION FACTOR Length = 770 338 840699 t-complex pol peptide 1 (AA 1 -556) [Homo sapiens] gι|36796 2 1015 94 95 HT LN I 25 Length = 556 339 840752 491 790 HDPDD66 340 840755 RAB 14 [Rattus norvegicus] Length = 215 gι|206535 3 938 99 99 I II 1ITM77 341 840844 1 219 I IMΓLM Π 342 841066 J kappa RS-binding protein [Mus musculus] gt|52757 79 1629 96 96 H6EER20 >bbs|63468 J kappa recombination signal sequence binding protein, RBP-2 [mice pre B cell line 38B9, Peptide, 526 aa] [Mus sp ] >pιr|A43567|A43567 J- kappa recombination sequence-binding protein - mouse >gι|554 ! 33 343 841306 La SS-B [Drosophila melanogaster] gι|464020 64 696 76 HLMFU88 >pιr|A53773|A53773 La SS-B homolog D-la - fruit fly (Drosophila melanogaster) >sp|P40796|LA_DROME LA PRO 1 LIN HOMOLOG (LA RIBONUCLEOPROTEIN) (LA AUTOAN TIGEN HOMOLOG) Length = 390 344 841913 44 217 HDPDC94 345 842025 prepromultimerm [Homo sapiens] gι|927596 1414 98 98 HE9OX09 >sp|Q 13201 |ECM_HUMAN ENDOTHELIAL CELL MULTIMERIN PRECURSOR Length = 1228 346 842178 986 I ISKCI 20 347 842438 down syndrome candidate region 1 , one ol tour gι|2612866 428 98 100 1 ID I F 147 alternatively spliced exon 1 [Homo sapiens] >sp|O00582|O00582 DOWN SYNDROME CRITICAL REGION 1 PRO TEIN >gι|2618743 down syndrome candidate region 1 one of four alternatively spliced exon I [Homo sapiens] { SUB 348 843289 (ArO 13249) leukocyte-associated Ig-hke receptor- 1 gι|2352941 334 1299 94 94 HMCFH47 [Homo sapiens] Length = 287 349 843447 (AB00022 I) CC chemokine [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|d !022520 42 332 100 100 11APBV34 >gnl|PID|e321838 CC-chemokme 1 [Homo sapiens] >gι|3426362 (AF082214) CC chemokine DC-CK- l/PARC/MIP-4 [Homo sapiens] >gnl|PlD|d l035349 (ABO 121 13) CC chemokine PARC precursor [Homo sapiens] >sp|P55774|M!P4_HUMAN MACRO 350 843743 gamma-interleron-inducible protein precursor [Homo gι|307042 803 88 HMΛKA82 sapiens] >pιr|A43708|A43708 gamma-inlerferon- inducible protein IP-30 precursor - human >sp|P13284|INIPJTUMAN GAMMA- IN TERFERON-INDUCIBLE PROTEIN IP-30 PRECURSOR Length = 303 351 843878 MHC class II DP3-alpha [Homo sapiens] >gι|673417 gι|703089 42 932 76 76 HDPNI27 class II antigen [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A29313|HLI IUSB MHC class II histocompatibility antigen HLA-DP alpha- 1 chain precursor - human >sp|P20036|HA2Q_HUMAN HLA CLASS II H1S 1 OCOMPA T1BILI 1 Y ANTIGEN, DP ALPHA CHAI 352 843964 318 656 HSLDM3 1 353 844071 TAR DNA-binding proteιn-43 [Homo sapiens] gι|90 !998 125 1369 100 100 11TDAI 19 >pιr|l38977|I38977 TAR DNA-binding proteιn-43 - human >sp|Q I 3148|Q I3148 TAR DNA-BINDING PRO I LIN-43 l ength = 414 354 844444 Similar to man(9)-alpha-mannosιdase gι| 1086860 1828 53 73 HOUΓX I S [Caenorhabditis elegans] >sp|Q22120|Q22120 SIMILAR TO MAN(9)-Al PHΛ-MANNOSIDASE NCBI GI 1086860 Length = 5 1 355 844561 3 320 I 1WAL 1 73 356 844953 679 2020 I IHESF05 357 844990 2 1090 HCGMF32 358 845379 similar to alcohol dehydrogenase/πbitol gι|2731377 3 1745 52 74 I IDΛBU82 dehydrogenase [Caenorhabditis elegans] >sp|Q09979|Q09979 HYPO THETICAL 105 9 KD PROTEIN C I 7G 10 8 IN CHROMOSOME II Length = 938 359 845829 tatty aldehyde dehydrogenase [I lomo sapiens] gι| 1666529 19 924 94 94 HOEJR65 Length = 508 360 H TAIR72R 171 302 H I AIR72 361 HΛGDU65R (AB020884) beta-actm [Plecoglossus altivehs] gnl|PID|d!036110 1 291 67 67 HAGDU65 Length = 146 362 HAPRM 14R (AF000381 ) non-functional lolate binding pi ote gι|2565196 183 377 88 88 HAPRM I 4 [Homo sapiens] >sp|014597|014597 NON- I UNC I IONΛ1 I 01 A I L BINDING PRO 1 1 IN Length = 254 363 HMWE122R (ATO 12024) lntegπn cytoplasmic domain associated gι|2307002 176 349 100 100 HMWLI22 protein, leap- l b [Homo sapiens] >sp|014714|014714 1NTEGRIN CY I OPLASMIC DOMAIN ASSOCIATED PROTEIN Length = 150 364 HE2I029R (AF018432) dUTPase [Homo sapiens] >gι| l 144332 gι|2443581 190 100 100 I II 21029 deoxyuπdine nucleotidohydrolase [Homo sapiens] >gι| 1421818 deoxyuπdine tπphosphatase [Homo sapiens] >pιr|G02777|G02777 dUTP pyrophosphatase (EC 3 6 I 23) - human >gι|292877 dUTP nucleotidohydrolase [Homo sa 365 HE8QG48R (AF059524) reliculon gene iamily protein | l lomo gι|4()9 l 868 70 552 97 97 I II 8QG48 sapiens] >sp|G4091868|G4091868 RL 1 ICULON GENE FAMILY PROT EIN Length = 236 366 HCLSJ64R (AJ005568) SPR2J piotein [Mus musculus| gnl|PID|e l 289139 185 59 67 I IU 164 >sp|O70561|O7056 l SPR2J PROTEIN Length = 109 367 HAMFN44R acidic πbosomal phosphoprotein (P2) [Homo gι| 190236 262 97 97 HAMFN44 sapiens] >pιr|C27 I25|R6HUP2 acidic πbosomal protein P2 - human Length = 1 15 368 HBNAZ15R adenine phosphoribosyltransferase [Homo sapiens] gι| 178867 46 345 90 90 HBNΛZ 15 >gι|28819 adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (aprt) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S06232|RTHUA adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (EC 2 4 2 7) - human >sp|P07741 |APTJTUMAN ADENINE PHOSPHORIBOSYLTRANSFERASE (EC 2 4 2 7) 369 HMCGG09R apoferπtin H chain [Homo sapiens] Length = 190 gι|28435 257 100 100 HMCGG09 370 I IADΓF69R AT P synthase, oligom cm sensitivity conferring gι| 1008080 265 88 88 HADI I 69 protein [Homo sapiens] >sp|P48047|ATPO_HUMAN ATP SYNTHASE OLIGOMYCIN SENSITIVITY CONFERRAL PROTEIN PRECURSOR, MITOCHONDRIAL (EC 3 6 1 34) (OSCP) >bbs| 165246 oligomycm sensitivity conferral protein oscp horn 371 HFPDJ 19R ATPase subunit 6 [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|d !007873 139 537 63 66 HFPDI 19 >sp|Q34772|Q34772 ATP SYNTHASE A CHAIN (EC 3 6 I 34) Length = 226 372 I I2MBΛ8 I R autoanligen [Homo sapiens] gι| l 79285 75 404 93 93 I2MBΛ I >sp|Q 13823|NGP l_I IUMAN AU TOAN I IGEN NOP- 1 Length = 731 373 HBGOI21 R B-nryb piotein (AA 1-700) [Homo sapiens] gι|29472 368 100 100 HBGOI21 >pιr|S01991|SO I991 transforming protein B-myb - human >sp|P10244|MYBBJ IUMAN MYB- RELATED PROTEIN B (B-MYB) Length = 700 HCLCW23R carboxylesterase hCE-2 [Homo sapiens] ϊi|1407780 164 100 100 HCLCW23 >sp|Q16859|QI6859 CARBOXYLESTERASE (EC 31 I 1)(ALI-ESTERASE)(B-ESTERASE) (MONOBUTYRASE) (COCAINE ESTERASE) (PROCAINE ESTERASE) (ME I HYLBUTYRASE) Length = 550 HOSNFIIR cytochrome oxidase I [Casuaπus bennetti] gι|2198692 305 442 67 75 HOSNI 11 >sp|O03521|COXl_CASBE CY TOCHROME C OXIDASE POLYPEPTIDE I (EC 1931) (FRAGMENT) Length =337 II2CACI1R elongation factor I alpha |Oryctolagus cuniculus] gι|49522l 108 461 85 85 II2CAC1 >gι|!55l elongation factor 1 alpha [Oryctolagus cuniculus] >gι|181963 elongation factor EF-1-alpha [Homo sapiens] >gι|31098 Er-1 alpha (aa 1-463) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|B24977|EFHU I translation elongation fac HBCCK84R exon [Homo sapιens| >pιr|I55360|I55360 ornithine- gι|553605 174 413 93 93 IIBCCK84 oxo-acid transaminase (EC 26 I 13) - human (fragment) Length = 42 HOEMQ09R extracellular protein [Homo sapiens] gι|458228 301 HOEMQ09 >pιr|I38449|I38449 extracellular protein - human >sp|Q12805|QI2805 EXTRACELLULAR PROTEIN SI -5 PRECURSOR Leneth = 387 HMCHR5 IR ferπtin light subunit [Homo sapiens] gι|1825l8 490 74 75 IIMCHR51 >gnl|P!D|e284040 ferntin L-chain [Homo sapiens] {SUB 1-26) Length = 175 380 HALSri OR fibrmogen gamma chain [Homo sapiens] >gι| 182439 gι|577054 188 85 86 HALSF IO fibrmogen gamma chain [Homo sapiens] >sp|P02679|FIBG_HUMAN riBRINOGEN GAMMA-A CHAIN PRECURSOR >gι|577055 gamma-fibπnogen chain fragment [Homo sapiens] {SUB 209-270} Length = 437 381 HOEMK I 7R fibronectin [Homo sapiens] gι|4096860 159 70 72 I IOFMK 17 >sp|G4096860|G4096860 FIBRONEC TIN (FRAGMEN T) Length = 545 382 11TLHA89R GDP dissociation inhibitor [I lomo sapiens] gι|337395 80 100 100 11 A 89 >gι|456 I9 I Human rho GDP-dissociation Inhibitor 1(1EF 81 18) [Homo sapiens] >gnl|P!D|d l003602 human rho GDI fHomo sapiens] >pιι|I38 l 56|I38 l 56 rho protein GDP-dissociation inhibitor I (IFF 81 18) - hu an >sp|P52565]G 383 HAGHZ I 5R H-protein [Homo sapiens] >gnl|PID|dl OO I083 gι| 184348 307 70 70 1AGI I715 hydrogen carrier protein precursor [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A36662|GCHUH glycine cleavage system protein H precursor - human >sp|P23434|GCSH_HUMAN GLYCINE CLEAVAGE SYSTEM H PROT E1N PRECURSOR Length = 173 384 HWATE43R hla-di antigen alpha chain [Homo sapiens] gι|307264 422 93 93 HWAI L43 >gι|386945 HLA-DR alpha-chain [Homo sapiens] >gι|307267 HLA-DR alpha-chain [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A93952|HLHUDA MHC class II histocompatibihty antigen HLA-DR alpha chain precursor - human >sp|P01903|HA2R_HUMAN HLA C 385 H2CAA26R initation factor 4B [Homo sapiens] gι|288100 264 73 73 II2CAA26 >pιr|S12566|SI2566 translation initiation factor elT- 4B - human >sp|P23588|lF4B_llUMΛN EUKARYOTIC I RANSLAT ION IN1T IAT ION FACTOR 4B (E1F-4B) Length = 611 386 HTLIW74R ιnosιne-5'-monophosphate dehydrogenase gι|304517 652 95 95 HIL1W74 [Cπcetulus gnseus] >pιr|B3!997|B31997 IMP dehydrogenase (EC 111205) - Chinese hamster >sp|P12269|IMD2_MESAUlNOSINE-5'- MONOPHOSPHATE DEHYDROGENASE 2 (EC 1 I I 205) (IMP DEHYDROGENASE 2) (IMPDH- II)(IMPD2) Le 387 HDTHW36R 309 HDIIIW36 388 HDPTT19R 36 278 1IDPI I 19 389 IIKBAC11R 171 452 IIKB C II 390 IIBGOU32R longest open reading frame [Homo sapi ns] gnl|PID|e4346 I 231 80 80 1115001132 >sp|Q 14617|Q 14617 INTER1 LRON-INDUCIBLL MRNA (CDNA 1-8) Length = 152 391 HNTNC82R Meis I -iclated protein lb ]Mus musculus] gι| 1679672 438 98 98 IINI C82 >gnl|PID|e330084 (AJ000507) Homeodomam protein Meιs2d [Mus musculus] Length = 470 392 HMCIB16R MHC class I histoeompatibility antigen I ILA-A3 pιr|A02!92|HLHUA3 312 98 98 HMC1BI6 alpha chain precursor - human >sp|P04439|lA03_HUMAN HLA CLASS I HIST ©COMPATIBILITY ANT IGEN A-3 ALPI IA CHAIN PRECURSOR >gι| 187622 MHC class I antigen [Homo sapiens] {SUB 254-370) Length = 370 393 HAPNX90R MHC HLA-DQ-beta cell surface glycoprotein gι|307255 227 376 100 100 HAPNX90 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|I55996|I55996 MHC HLA-DQ- beta cell surface glycoprotein - human >sp|Q3009l |Q30091 MHC CLASS II HLA-DQ- BET A Length = 261 394 1 ISI IΛL55R NF-kappa-B transcription tactor subunit [I lomo gι|307300 188 90 95 I ISHAl 55 sapiens] >pιr|I537 l9|I53719 NF-kappa-B transcription factor subunit - human >sp|E78680|E78680 P65 SUBUNIT Or TRANSCRIPTION FACTOR NF-KAPPAB ( SUB 281-33 1 } Length = 537 395 HAJBZ28R nucleolar autoantigen No55 [Homo sapiens] gι| I491809 316 98 100 HAJBZ28 >sp|Q92791 |N055_HUMAN NUCLEOLAR AUTOANTIGEN N055 Length = 437 396 HAGGW 13R placenta protein 9 [unidentified] >gι| 179036 aldose gι|413094 147 75 78 HAGGW I 3 reductase (EC 1 1 1 21 ) [Homo sapiens] >gι| 178485 aldose reductase [Homo sapiens] >gι| 178487 aldose reductase (EC I I 1 21 ) [Homo sapiens] >gι| 178491 aldose reductase [Homo sapiens] >gι|28647 aldose redu 397 HAHDV81R plasma gelsolin [Homo sapiens] gι|736249 302 92 95 HAHDV8 I >pιr|A0301 1|FAHUP gelsolin precursor, plasma - human >sp|P06396|GLLS_HUMAN GELSOLIN PRECURSOR, PLASMA (ACTIN- DEPOLYMERIZING FACTOR) (ADF) (BREVIN) (AGEL) >gnl|PID|e20565 plasma gelsolin (AA 49- I I 7) [Homo sapiens] { SUB 49- 1 1 398 HACBP41 R plasma protease (C I ) inhibitor precursor [Homo gι|1796 I 9 1 13 367 66 70 HACBP41 sapiens] Length = 500 399 HANGC26R plasma protease (C I ) inhibitor precursor [I lomo gι| 179619 3 245 78 82 HANGC26 sapiens] Length = 500 400 HESAN74R platelet-derived growth factor receptor [Homo gι| 189730 1 363 70 74 I IESΛN74 sapιens| >gι|2107947 platelet-derived growth factor type beta receptor [Homo sapiens] {SUB 547-568 } Length = 1 106 401 HWLMW20R 1 408 HWLMW20 402 HAPNU02R pulmonary surfactant apoprotein precursor [Homo gι| 190565 1 435 100 100 HAPNU02 sapiens] Length = 248 403 I IOUGB I 8R put eEr- I U (aa 1 -94) [Homo sapiensj >gι|50799 giβ i i i o 20 202 71 73 HOUGB I put eEr-TU (aa 1-94) [Mus musculus] Length = 94 404 HBAGQ35R put lamin A precursoi (aa 1-702) |Homo sapiens] gι|34228 13 234 81 83 HBΛGQ35 Length = 702 405 HADME37R pyruvate kinase (EC 2 7 I 40) muscle splice form pιr|S64635|S64635 16 135 100 100 HADME37 M 1 - human Length = 531 406 I IAPQM68R raf protein (aa 1-648) [Homo sapiens] gι|35842 53 427 99 99 I IΛPQM68 >pιr|A00637|TVHUF6 protein kinase raf-1 (EC 2 7 1 -) - human >sp|P04049|KRAF_HUMAN RAF PROTO-ONCOGENE SERINE/THREONINE- PROTEIN KINASE (EC 2 7 1 -) (RAF- 1) (C-RAF) >gι|2257953 (AF006463) c-RAr homolog [Papio ham dryas 407 I ISLGI35R πbosomal protein S28 [Homo sapiens) >gι|337403 gι|l518637 158 93 93 IISLGI35 πbosomal protein S28 [Homo sapiens] >gι|508266 πbosomal protein S28 [Mus musculus] >gι|57726 πbosomal protein S28 [Rattus rattus] >gι|4050094 (AF1 10520) RPS28 [Mus musculus] >pιr|JQ l I 70|R3RT28 πbosomal p 408 HDPQN35R signal recognition particle, 72 kDa subunit [Cams gι|297768 325 93 95 HDPQN35 familiaπs] >pιr|A40692|A40692 signal recognition particle 72K chain - dog Length = 671 409 HAPNU41R SP-A2 delta=surtactant protein {N-termmal bbs| 146432 308 100 100 HAPNU41 altematvely spliced} [human, fetal lung explants, Peptide Partial, 41 aa] [Homo sapiens] >pιr|I64840|l64840 SP-A2 delta - human (fragment) >sp|Q16!39|Q16139 SP-A2 DEI TA (TRAGMLNT) Length = 41 410 HSYCT58R tenascm [Homo sapiens] Length = 2199 gι|37227 2 148 100 100 HSYC158 411 I ITKL I 54R tissue-specific secietory protein [unidentified] gι|513467 3 392 84 84 HI E 154 >gι|8l8881 epididymal secretory protein precursor [Pan troglodytes] >gι|79407l epididymal secretory protein 146 [Maeaca tasuculaπs] >gι|37477 orf I Homo sapiens) >pιr|153929|l53929 epididumil secretory pr 412 HTXNT90R transfer RNA-Trp sy nthelase [Homo sapiens] gι| 184657 521 100 100 HTXN T90 >gι|30821471 aa polypeptide (gamma2) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A41633|A41706 tr ptophan-tRNA hgase (EC 6 I I 2) - human >bbs|l79357 tryptophanyl-tRNA synthetase, TrpRS {N-terminal, alternatively spliced} {EC 6112 H6BSD14R 123 539 H6BSD14 H6EEC47R 1 90 H6EEC47 HACBQ15R 279 452 HACBQI5 HADTII59R 2 208 1IADTH59 HAIAA2IR 1 144 HA1AA2I 1IANGG63R 3 182 HANGG63 419 HAPAK90R 66 227 IIAPAK90 420 IIΛPBH25R 318 506 1IAPBII25 421 11APBP34R 3 236 IIAPBP34 422 IIAPBV57R 180 380 HΛPBV37 423 I1APOL49R 80 316 IIΛPOI49 424 HAPQ076R 3 350 HΛPQ076 425 HBArB37R 247 417 HBAΓB37 426 HBKDI63R 140 259 HBKDI63 427 HCFLU89R 298 411 HCΓLU89 428 HCLCX30R 92 376 HCLCX30 429 HCUCD74R 2 91 IICUCD74 430 HDTFW96R 63 290 IID1I W96 431 1IDTLW91R 406 588 IIDTI W91 432 HE9GW86R 59 289 HL9GW86 433 HFACI43R 1 123 IITAC143 434 HHBGW74R 196 330 IIHBGW74 435 IIHFLJ48R 3 323 IJHΓL J48 436 HHΓLJSOR 240 425 1IIII1 J50 437 1IKMMF86R 1 75 HKMMI86 438 HMCIB02R 212 424 II MCI 1302 439 HOLKC43R 1 381 IIOLKC43 440 HPJCZ62R 34 231 IIPJCZ62 441 HPJDY23R 37 84 HPIDY23 442 HSXEN17R 244 354 HSXFN17 443 11 1MMCCGGGGI177RR vacuolar H+-ATPase B subunit [Gallus gallus] gι|675489 1 273 100 100 IIMCGGI7 Length = 453 The first column of Table 1 shows the "SEQ ID NO:" for each of the 443 lung cancer antigen polynucleotide sequences of the invention. The second column in Table 1, provides a unique "Sequence/Contig ID" identification for each lung and/or lung cancer associated sequence. The third column in Table 1, "Gene Name," provides a putative identification of the gene based on the sequence similarity of its translation product to an amino acid sequence found in a publicly accessible gene database, such as GenBank (NCBI). The great majority of the cDNA sequences reported in Table 1 are unrelated to any sequences previously described in the literature. The fourth column, in Table 1, "Overlap," provides the database accession no. for the database sequence having similarity. The fifth and sixth columns in Table 1 provide the location (nucleotide position nos. within the contig), "Start" and "End", in the polynucleotide sequence "SEQ ID NO:X" that delineate the preferred ORF shown in the sequence listing as SEQ ID NO:Y. In one embodiment, the invention provides a protein comprising, or alternatively consisting of, a polypeptide encoded by the portion of SEQ ID NO:X delineated by the nucleotide position nos. "Start" and "End". Also provided are polynucleotides encoding such proteins and the complementary strand thereto. The seventh and eighth columns provide the "% Identity" (percent identity) and "% Similarity" (percent similarity) observed between the aligned sequence segments of the translation product of SEQ ID NO:X and the database sequence. The ninth column of Table 1 provides a unique "Clone ID" for a clone related to each contig sequence. This clone ID references the cDNA clone which contains at least the 5' most sequence of the assembled contig and at least a portion of SEQ ID NO:X was determined by directly sequencing the referenced clone. The reference clone may have more sequence than described in the sequence listing or the clone may have less. In the vast majority of cases, however, the clone is believed to encode a full-length polypeptide. In the case where a clone is not full-length, a full-length cDNA can be obtained by methods described elsewhere herein. Table 3 indicates public ESTs, of which at least one, two, three, four, five, ten, or more of any one or more of these public ESTs are optionally excluded from the invention. SEQ ID NO:X (where X may be any of the polynucleotide sequences disclosed in the sequence listing as SEQ ID NO: 1 through SEQ ID NO:443) and the translated SEQ ID NO:Y (where Y may be any of the polypeptide sequences disclosed in the sequence listing as SEQ ID NO:444 through SEQ ID NO:886) are sufficiently accurate and otherwise suitable for a variety of uses well known in the art and decribed further below. For instance, SEQ ID NO:X has uses including, but not limited to, in designing nucleic acid hybridization probes that will detect nucleic acid sequences contained in SEQ ID NO:X or the related cDNA clone contained in a library deposited with the ATCC. These probes will also hybridize to nucleic acid molecules in biological samples, thereby enabling immediate applications in chromosome mapping, linkage analysis, tissue identification and/or typing, and a variety of forensic and diagnostic methods of the invention. Similarly, polypeptides identified from SEQ ID NO:Y have uses that include, but are not limited to, generating antibodies which bind specifically to the lung cancer antigen polypeptides, or fragments thereof, and/or to the lung cancer antigen polypeptides encoded by the cDNA clones identified in Table 1. Nevertheless, DNA sequences generated by sequencing reactions can contain sequencing errors. The errors exist as misidentified nucleotides, or as insertions or deletions of nucleotides in the generated DNA sequence. The erroneously inserted or deleted nucleotides cause frame shifts in the reading frames of the predicted amino acid sequence. In these cases, the predicted amino acid sequence diverges from the actual amino acid sequence, even though the generated DNA sequence may be greater than 99.9% identical to the actual DNA sequence (for example, one base insertion or deletion in an open reading frame of over 1000 bases). Accordingly, for those applications requiring precision in the nucleotide sequence or the amino acid sequence, the present invention provides not only the generated nucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ID NO:X, the predicted translated amino acid sequence identified as SEQ ID NO:Y, but also a sample of plasmid DNA containing the related cDNA clone (deposited with the ATCC, as set forth in Table 1). The nucleotide sequence of each deposited clone can readily be determined by sequencing the deposited clone in accordance with known methods. Further, techniques known in the art can be used to verify the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO:X. The predicted amino acid sequence can then be verified from such deposits. Moreover, the amino acid sequence of the protein encoded by a particular clone can also be directly determined by peptide sequencing or by expressing the protein in a suitable host cell containing the deposited human cDNA, collecting the protein, and determining its sequence. The present invention also relates to vectors or plasmids which include such DNA sequences, as well as the use of the DNA sequences. The material deposited with the ATCC on: Table 2 each is a mixture of cDNA clones derived from a variety of human tissue and cloned in either a plasmid vector or a phage vector, as shown in Table 5. These deposits are referred to as "the deposits" herein. The tissues from which the clones were derived are listed in Table 5, and the vector in which the cDNA is contained is also indicated in Table 5. The deposited material includes the cDNA clones which were partially sequenced and are related to the SEQ ID NO:X described in Table 1 (column 9). Thus, a clone which is isolatable from the ATCC Deposits by use of a sequence listed as SEQ ID NO:X may include the entire coding region of a human gene or in other cases such clone may include a substantial portion of the coding region of a human gene. Although the sequence listing lists only a portion of the DNA sequence in a clone included in the ATCC Deposits, it is well within the ability of one skilled in the art to complete the sequence of the DNA included in a clone isolatable from the ATCC Deposits by use of a sequence (or portion thereof) listed in Table 1 by procedures hereinafter further described, and others apparent to those skilled in the art. Also provided in Table 5 is the name of the vector which contains the cDNA clone. Each vector is routinely used in the art. The following additional information is provided for convenience. Vectors Lambda Zap (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128,256 and 5,286,636), Uni-Zap XR (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128, 256 and 5,286,636), Zap Express (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128,256 and 5,286,636), pBluescript (pBS) (Short, J. M. et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 7(5:7583-7600 (1988); Alting-Mees, M. A. and Short, J. M., Nucleic Acids Res. 17:9494 (1989)) and pBK (Alting- Mees, M. A. et al., Strategies 5:58-61 (1992)) are commercially available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, Inc., 1 101 1 N. Torrey Pines Road, La Jolla, CA, 92037. pBS contains an ampicillin resistance gene and pBK contains a neomycin resistance gene. Phagemid pBS may be excised from the Lambda Zap and Uni-Zap XR vectors, and phagemid pBK may be excised from the Zap Express vector. Both phagemids may be transformed into E. coli strain XL-1 Blue, also available from Stratagene. Vectors pSportl, pCMVSport 1.0, pCMVSport 2.0 and pCMVSport 3.0, were obtained from Life Technologies, Inc., P. O. Box 6009, Gaithersburg, MD 20897. All Sport vectors contain an ampicillin resistance gene and may be transformed into E. coli strain DH10B, also available from Life Technologies. See, for instance, Gruber, C. E., et al., Focus 75:59 (1993). Vector lafmid BA (Bento Soares, Columbia University, New York, NY) contains an ampicillin resistance gene and can be transformed into E. coli strain XL-1 Blue. Vector pCR ® 2.1, which is available from Invitrogen, 1600 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, CA 92008, contains an ampicillin resistance gene and may be transformed into E. coli strain DH10B, available from Life Technologies. See, for instance, Clark, J. M., Nuc. Acids Res. 76:9677-9686 (1988) and Mead, D. et al, Bio/Technology 9: (1991). The present invention also relates to the genes corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X, SEQ ID NO:Y, and/or the cDNA contained in a deposited cDNA clone. The corresponding gene can be isolated in accordance with known methods using the sequence information disclosed herein. Such methods include, but are not limited to, preparing probes or primers from the disclosed sequence and identifying or amplifying the corresponding gene from appropriate sources of genomic material. Also provided in the present invention are allelic variants, orthologs, and/or species homologs. Procedures known in the art can be used to obtain full-length genes, allelic variants, splice variants, full-length coding portions, orthologs, and/or species homologs of genes corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X, SEQ ID NO:Y, and/or the cDNA contained in the related cDNA clone in the deposit, using information from the sequences disclosed herein or the clones deposited with the ATCC. For example, allelic variants and/or species homologs may be isolated and identified by making suitable probes or primers from the sequences provided herein and screening a suitable nucleic acid source for allelic variants and/or the desired homologue. The present invention provides a polynucleotide comprising, or alternatively consisting of, the nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, and/or the related cDNA clone (See, e.g., columns 1 and 9 of Table 1). The present invention also provides a polypeptide comprising, or alternatively, consisting of, the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library. Polynucleotides encoding a polypeptide comprising, or alternatively consisting of, the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide encoded by the the dDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, are also encompassed by the invention. The present invention further encompasses a polynucleotide comprising, or alternatively consisting of, the complement of the nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, and/or the complement of the coding strand of the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library. Many polynucleotide sequences, such as EST sequences, are publicly available and accessible through sequence databases and may have been publicly available prior to conception of the present invention. Preferably, such related polynucleotides are specifically excluded from the scope of the present invention. To list every related sequence would unduly burden the disclosure of this application. Accordingly, for each "Contig Id" listed in the first column of Table 3, preferably excluded are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described in the second column of Table 3 by the general formula of a- b, each of which are uniquely defined for the SEQ ID NO:X corresponding to that Contig Id in Table 1. Additionally, specific embodiments are directed to polynucleotide sequences excluding at least one, two, three, four, five, ten, or more of the specific polynucleotide sequences referenced by the Genbank Accession No. for each Contig Id which may be included in column 3 of Table 3. In no way is this listing meant to encompass all of the sequences which may be excluded by the general formula, it is just a representative example. Table 3. 12 13 16 W57563. W57776, W58586. W58587, W79329, W92948, W92949, AAO 1 1548, AAO 1 1527. AA023000. AA022467, AA024997, AA025209, AA025216, AA025227, AA025990. AA028003, AA033608. AA037401. AA039442, AA039443. AA043901. AA056925. AA057070, AA074081. AA083873, AA099028. AAl 12887, AAl 15001, AA114964, AA128132. AA125887, AA135310, AAl 36391, AA148227, AA149076, AA149077, AA148545, AA156636. AA1601 12, AA1601 13, AA 169459, AA18 I 734, AA187469, AA 187626, AA189064, AA191260, AA191538, AA207172, AA207171, AA224359, AA226905. AA226915, AA235559, AA459908 828517 Preferably excluded from the present invention are H 15804. H18452, AA 146592, one or more polynucleotides comprising a AA149939, AA149892, AA160732. nucleotide sequence described by the general AA191608, AA548983, AA554733. foπnula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to AA600759, AA865400, AA907885, 672 of SEQ ID NO:256, b is an integer of 15 to AA954237 686, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO:256, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14. 828898 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T61075, T91806, R09240, R09355. one or more polynucleotides comprising a T99060, T99658, R07031 , R07043, nucleotide sequence described by the general R07075, R07102, R28642, R32575, formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to R36973, R47863, R47864, H I 5908, 2308 of SEQ ID NO:257, b is an integer of 15 to HI 6014, HI 9893, H40060, H44782, 2322, where both a and b coπespond to the R92942, R92943, H59884, H59885, positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID H67802, H68075, N58069, N64287, NO:257. and where b is greater than or equal to a + N71857, N72594, N98414, W02374, 14. W30702, W31 135, W37192, W60618, AA045338, AA055209, AA055299, AAl 14871 , AA l 14872, AA120998, AA122326, AA 121537, AA127701 , AA 156728, AA181228, AA181833, AAl 92414, AAl 92434. AA468743, AA468763, AA523325, AA523458, AA526457, AA533984, F16728, AA584430, AA601952, AA613639, AA570586, AA665254, AA728791, AA728810, AA729554, AA729948, AA736948, AA827503, AA863088, AA865405, AA872707, AA87321 1, AA877782, AA879306, AA886586, AA894507, AA908568, AA919045, AA939288, AA960779, AI053399, AI053494, AI053497, AI053505, AI053537, A1053548, AI053565, AI053578, AI053607. AI053632, AI053648, AI053687, AI053698, AI053723, AI053746, AI053750, AI053867, AI053875, AI053904, AI053976, A1054008, AI054040, 17 NO , an w ere is greater t an or equa to a Polynucleotide and Polypeptide Variants The present invention is directed to variants of the polynucleotide sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA sequence contained in a cDNA clone contained in the deposit. The present invention also encompasses variants of the lung and lung cancer polypeptide sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide sequence encoded by the polynucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. "Variant" refers to a polynucleotide or polypeptide differing from the polynucleotide or polypeptide of the present invention, but retaining essential properties thereof. Generally, variants are overall closely similar, and, in many regions, identical to the polynucleotide or polypeptide of the present invention. The present invention is also directed to nucleic acid molecules which comprise, or alternatively consist of, a nucleotide sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%), identical to, for example, the nucleotide coding sequence in SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, the nucleotide coding sequence of the related cDNA contained in a deposited library or the complementary strand thereto, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA contained in a deposited library, and/or polynucleotide fragments of any of these nucleic acid molecules (e.g., those fragments described herein). Polypeptides encoded by these nucleic acid molecules are also encompassed by the invention. In another embodiment, the invention encompasses nucleic acid molecules which comprise or alternatively consist of, a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions, or alternatively, under low stringency conditions, to the nucleotide coding sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, the nucleotide coding sequence of the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, and/or polynucleotide fragments of any of these nucleic acid molecules (e.g., those fragments described herein). Polynucleotides which hybridize to the complement of these nucleic acid molecules under stringent hybridization conditions or alternatively, under lower stringency conditions, are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides. The present invention is also directed to polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, an amino acid sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%) identical to, for example, the polypeptide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, a polypeptide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, and/or polypeptide fragments of any of these polypeptides (e.g., those fragments described herein). Polynucleotides which hybridize to the complement of the nucleic acid molecules encoding these polypeptides under stringent hybridization conditions, or alternatively, under lower stringency conditions, are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides. By a nucleic acid having a nucleotide sequence at least, for example, 95% "identical" to a reference nucleotide sequence of the present invention, it is intended that the nucleotide sequence of the nucleic acid is identical to the reference sequence except that the nucleotide sequence may include up to five point mutations per each 100 nucleotides of the reference nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide. In other words, to obtain a nucleic acid having a nucleotide sequence at least 95%> identical to a reference nucleotide sequence, up to 5% of the nucleotides in the reference sequence may be deleted or substituted with another nucleotide, or a number of nucleotides up to 5% of the total nucleotides in the reference sequence may be inserted into the reference sequence. The query sequence may be, for example, an entire sequence referred to in Table 1, an ORF (open reading frame), or any fragment specified as described herein. As a practical matter, whether any particular nucleic acid molecule or polypeptide is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to a nucleotide sequence of the present invention can be determined conventionally using known computer programs. A preferred method for determining the best overall match between a query sequence (a sequence of the present invention) and a subject sequence, also referred to as a global sequence alignment, can be determined using the FASTDB computer program based on the algorithm of Brutlag et al. (Comp. App. Biosci. 6:237-245 (1990)). In a sequence alignment the query and subject sequences are both DNA sequences. An RNA sequence can be compared by converting U's to T's. The result of said global sequence alignment is in percent identity. Preferred parameters used in a FASTDB alignment of DNA sequences to calculate percent identiy are: Matrix=Unitary, k-tuple=4, Mismatch Penalty=l , Joining Penalty=30, Randomization Group Length=0, Cutoff Score=l, Gap Penalty=5, Gap Size Penalty 0.05, Window Size=500 or the lenght of the subject nucleotide sequence, whichever is shorter. If the subject sequence is shorter than the query sequence because of 5' or 3' deletions, not because of internal deletions, a manual correction must be made to the results. This is because the FASTDB program does not account for 5' and 3' truncations of the subject sequence when calculating percent identity. For subject sequences truncated at the 5' or 3' ends, relative to the query sequence, the percent identity is corrected by calculating the number of bases of the query sequence that are 5' and 3' of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned, as a percent of the total bases of the query sequence. Whether a nucleotide is matched/aligned is determined by results of the FASTDB sequence alignment. This percentage is then subtracted from the percent identity, calculated by the above FASTDB program using the specified parameters, to arrive at a final percent identity score. This corrected score is what is used for the purposes of the present invention. Only bases outside the 5' and 3' bases of the subject sequence, as displayed by the FASTDB alignment, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence, are calculated for the purposes of manually adjusting the percent identity score. For example, a 90 base subject sequence is aligned to a 100 base query sequence to determine percent identity. The deletions occur at the 5' end of the subject sequence and therefore, the FASTDB alignment does not show a matched/alignment of the first 10 bases at 5' end. The 10 unpaired bases represent 10%> of the sequence (number of bases at the 5' and 3' ends not matched/total number of bases in the query sequence) so 10% is subtracted from the percent identity score calculated by the FASTDB program. If the remaining 90 bases were perfectly matched the final percent identity would be 90%>. In another example, a 90 base subject sequence is compared with a 100 base query sequence. This time the deletions are internal deletions so that there are no bases on the 5' or 3' of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query. In this case the percent identity calculated by FASTDB is not manually corrected. Once again, only bases 5' and 3' of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence are manually corrected for. No other manual corrections are to made for the purposes of the present invention. By a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence at least, for example, 95% "identical" to a query amino acid sequence of the present invention, it is intended that the amino acid sequence of the subject polypeptide is identical to the query sequence except that the subject polypeptide sequence may include up to five amino acid alterations per each 100 amino acids of the query amino acid sequence. In other words, to obtain a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a query amino acid sequence, up to 5% of the amino acid residues in the subject sequence may be inserted, deleted, (indels) or substituted with another amino acid. These alterations of the reference sequence may occur at the amino or carboxy terminal positions of the reference amino acid sequence or anywhere between those terminal positions, interspersed either individually among residues in the reference sequence or in one or more contiguous groups within the reference sequence. As a practical matter, whether any particular polypeptide is at least 80%), 85%, 90% > , 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to, for instance, the amino acid sequence in SEQ ID NO:Y or a fragment thereof, the amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X or a fragment thereof, or the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, or a fragment thereof, can be determined conventionally using known computer programs. A preferred method for determing the best overall match between a query sequence (a sequence of the present invention) and a subject sequence, also referred to as a global sequence alignment, can be determined using the FASTDB computer program based on the algorithm of Brutlag et al. (Comp. App. Biosci.6:237- 245(1990)). In a sequence alignment the query and subject sequences are either both nucleotide sequences or both amino acid sequences. The result of said global sequence alignment is in percent identity. Preferred parameters used in a FASTDB amino acid alignment are: Matrix=PAM 0, k-tuple=2, Mismatch Penalty=l, Joining Penalty=20, Randomization Group Length^O, Cutoff Score=l , Window Size=sequence length, Gap Penalty=5, Gap Size Penalty=0.05, Window Size=500 or the length of the subject amino acid sequence, whichever is shorter. If the subject sequence is shorter than the query sequence due to N- or C-terminal deletions, not because of internal deletions, a manual correction must be made to the results. This is because the FASTDB program does not account for N- and C-terminal truncations of the subject sequence when calculating global percent identity. For subject sequences truncated at the N- and C-termini, relative to the query sequence, the percent identity is corrected by calculating the number of residues of the query sequence that are N- and C- terminal of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned with a corresponding subject residue, as a percent of the total bases of the query sequence. Whether a residue is matched/aligned is determined by results of the FASTDB sequence alignment. This percentage is then subtracted from the percent identity, calculated by the above FASTDB program using the specified parameters, to arrive at a final percent identity score. This final percent identity score is what is used for the purposes of the present invention. Only residues to the N- and C-termini of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence, are considered for the purposes of manually adjusting the percent identity score. That is, only query residue positions outside the farthest N- and C- terminal residues of the subject sequence. For example, a 90 amino acid residue subject sequence is aligned with a 100 residue query sequence to determine percent identity. The deletion occurs at the N-terminus of the subject sequence and therefore, the FASTDB alignment does not show a matching/alignment of the first 10 residues at the N-terminus. The 10 unpaired residues represent 10% of the sequence (number of residues at the N- and C- termini not matched/total number of residues in the query sequence) so 10% is subtracted from the percent identity score calculated by the FASTDB program. If the remaining 90 residues were perfectly matched the final percent identity would be 90%>. In another example, a 90 residue subject sequence is compared with a 100 residue query sequence. This time the deletions are internal deletions so there are no residues at the N- or C-termini of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query. In this case the percent identity calculated by FASTDB is not manually corrected. Once again, only residue positions outside the N- and C-terminal ends of the subject sequence, as displayed in the FASTDB alignment, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence are manually corrected for. No other manual corrections are to made for the purposes of the present invention. The variants may contain alterations in the coding regions, non-coding regions, or both. Especially preferred are polynucleotide variants containing alterations which produce silent substitutions, additions, or deletions, but do not alter the properties or activities of the encoded polypeptide. Nucleotide variants produced by silent substitutions due to the degeneracy of the genetic code are preferred. Moreover, variants in which less than 50, less than 40, less than 30, less than 20, less than 10, or 5-50, 5-25, 5- 10, 1-5, or 1-2 amino acids are substituted, deleted, or added in any combination are also preferred. Polynucleotide variants can be produced for a variety of reasons, e.g., to optimize codon expression for a particular host (change codons in the human mRNA to those preferred by a bacterial host such as E. coli). Naturally occurring variants are called "allelic variants," and refer to one of several alternate forms of a gene occupying a given locus on a chromosome of an organism. (Genes II, Lewin, B., ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1985).) These allelic variants can vary at either the polynucleotide and/or polypeptide level and are included in the present invention. Alternatively, non-naturally occurring variants may be produced by mutagenesis techniques or by direct synthesis. Using known methods of protein engineering and recombinant DNA technology, variants may be generated to improve or alter the characteristics of the polypeptides of the present invention. For instance, as discussed herein, one or more amino acids can be deleted from the N-terminus or C-terminus of the polypeptide of the present invention without substantial loss of biological function. The authors of Ron et al., J. Biol. Chem. 268: 2984- 2988 (1993), reported variant KGF proteins having heparin binding activity even after deleting 3, 8, or 27 amino-terminal amino acid residues. Similarly, Interferon gamma exhibited up to ten times higher activity after deleting 8-10 amino acid residues from the carboxy terminus of this protein. (Dobeli et al., J. Biotechnology 7: 199-216 (1988).) Moreover, ample evidence demonstrates that variants often retain a biological activity similar to that of the naturally occurring protein. For example, Gayle and coworkers (J. Biol. Chem 268:22105-221 1 1 (1993)) conducted extensive mutational analysis of human cytokine IL-1 a. They used random mutagenesis to generate over 3,500 individual IL-1 a mutants that averaged 2.5 amino acid changes per variant over the entire length of the molecule. Multiple mutations were examined at every possible amino acid position. The investigators found that "[mjost of the molecule could be altered with little effect on either [binding or biological activity]." (See, Abstract.) In fact, only 23 unique amino acid sequences, out of more than 3,500 nucleotide sequences examined, produced a protein that significantly differed in activity from wild-type. Furthermore, as discussed herein, even if deleting one or more amino acids from the N-terminus or C-terminus of a polypeptide results in modification or loss of one or more biological functions, other biological activities may still be retained. For example, the ability of a deletion variant to induce and/or to bind antibodies which recognize the secreted form will likely be retained when less than the majority of the residues of the secreted form are removed from the N-terminus or C-terminus. Whether a particular polypeptide lacking N- or C-terminal residues of a protein retains such immunogenic activities can readily be determined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known in the art. Thus, the invention further includes polypeptide variants which show a functional activity (e.g., biological activity) of the polypeptide of the invention of which they are a variant. Such variants include deletions, insertions, inversions, repeats, and substitutions selected according to general rules known in the art so as have little effect on activity. The present application is directed to nucleic acid molecules at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%), 98%., 99% or 100% identical to the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein or fragments thereof, (e.g., including but not limited to fragments encoding a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of an N and/or C terminal deletion), irrespective of whether they encode a polypeptide having functional activity. This is because even where a particular nucleic acid molecule does not encode a polypeptide having functional activity, one of skill in the art would still know how to use the nucleic acid molecule, for instance, as a hybridization probe or a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) primer. Uses of the nucleic acid molecules of the present invention that do not encode a polypeptide having functional activity include, inter alia, ( 1 ) isolating a gene or allelic or splice variants thereof in a cDNA library; (2) in situ hybridization (e.g., "FISH") to metaphase chromosomal spreads to provide precise chromosomal location of the gene, as described in Nerma et al., Human Chromosomes: A Manual of Basic Techniques, Pergamon Press, New York (1988); and (3) Northern Blot analysis for detecting mRNA expression in specific tissues. Preferred, however, are nucleic acid molecules having sequences at least 80%>, 85%), 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein, which do, in fact, encode a polypeptide having a functional activity of a polypeptide of the invention. Of course, due to the degeneracy of the genetic code, one of ordinary skill in the art will immediately recognize that a large number of the nucleic acid molecules having a sequence at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or 100% identical to, for example, the nucleic acid sequence of the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, the nucleic acid sequence referred to in Table 1 (SEQ ID NO:X), or fragments thereof, will encode polypeptides "having functional activity." In fact, since degenerate variants of any of these nucleotide sequences all encode the same polypeptide. in many instances, this will be clear to the skilled artisan even without performing the above described comparison assay. It will be further recognized in the art that, for such nucleic acid molecules that are not degenerate variants, a reasonable number will also encode a polypeptide having functional activity. This is because the skilled artisan is fully aware of amino acid substitutions that are either less likely or not likely to significantly effect protein function (e.g., replacing one aliphatic amino acid with a second aliphatic amino acid), as further described below. For example, guidance concerning how to make phenotypically silent amino acid substitutions is provided in Bowie et al., "Deciphering the Message in Protein Sequences: Tolerance to Amino Acid Substitutions," Science 247: 1306-1310 (1990), wherein the authors indicate that there are two main strategies for studying the tolerance of an amino acid sequence to change. The first strategy exploits the tolerance of amino acid substitutions by natural selection during the process of evolution. By comparing amino acid sequences in different species, conserved amino acids can be identified. These conserved amino acids are likely important for protein function. In contrast, the amino acid positions where substitutions have been tolerated by natural selection indicates that these positions are not critical for protein function. Thus, positions tolerating amino acid substitution could be modified while still maintaining biological activity of the protein. The second strategy uses genetic engineering to introduce amino acid changes at specific positions of a cloned gene to identify regions critical for protein function. For example, site directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis (introduction of single alanine mutations at every residue in the molecule) can be used. (Cunningham and Wells, Science 244: 1081-1085 (1989).) The resulting mutant molecules can then be tested for biological activity. As the authors state, these two strategies have revealed that proteins are surprisingly tolerant of amino acid substitutions. The authors further indicate which amino acid changes are likely to be permissive at certain amino acid positions in the protein. For example, most buried (within the tertiary structure of the protein) amino acid residues require nonpolar side chains, whereas few features of surface side chains are generally conserved. Moreover, tolerated conservative amino acid substitutions involve replacement of the aliphatic or hydrophobic amino acids Ala, Val, Leu and lie; replacement of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr; replacement of the acidic residues Asp and Glu; replacement of the amide residues Asn and Gin, replacement of the basic residues Lys, Arg, and His; replacement of the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr, and Trp, and replacement of the small-sized amino acids Ala, Ser, Thr, Met, and Gly. Besides conservative amino acid substitution, variants of the present invention include (i) substitutions with one or more of the non-conserved amino acid residues, where the substituted amino acid residues may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or (ii) substitution with one or more of amino acid residues having a substituent group, or (iii) fusion of the mature polypeptide with another compound, such as a compound to increase the stability and/or solubility of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or (iv) fusion of the polypeptide with additional amino acids, such as, for example, an IgG Fc fusion region peptide, or leader or secretory sequence, or a sequence facilitating purification. Such variant polypeptides are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art from the teachings herein. For example, polypeptide variants containing amino acid substitutions of charged amino acids with other charged or neutral amino acids may produce proteins with improved characteristics, such as less aggregation. Aggregation of pharmaceutical formulations both reduces activity and increases clearance due to the aggregate's immunogenic activity. (Pinckard et al., Clin. Exp. Immunol. 2:331-340 (1967); Robbins et al., Diabetes 36: 838-845 (1987); Cleland et al., Crit. Rev. Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems 10:307-377 (1993).) A further embodiment of the invention relates to a polypeptide which comprises the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence which contains at least one amino acid substitution, but not more than 50 amino acid substitutions, even more preferably, not more than 40 amino acid substitutions, still more preferably, not more than 30 amino acid substitutions, and still even more preferably, not more than 20 amino acid substitutions. Of course it is highly preferable for a polypeptide to have an amino acid sequence which comprises the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, an amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, and/or the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library which contains, in order of ever-increasing preference, at least one, but not more than 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 amino acid substitutions. In specific embodiments, the number of additions, substitutions, and/or deletions in the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y or fragments thereof (e.g., the mature form and/or other fragments described herein), an amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO:X or fragments thereof, and/or the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library or fragments thereof, is 1-5, 5-10, 5-25, 5-50, 10-50 or 50-150, conservative amino acid substitutions are preferable. Polynucleotide and Polypeptide Fragments The present invention is also directed to polynucleotide fragments of the lung and lung cancer polynucleotides (nucleic acids) of the invention. In the present invention, a "polynucleotide fragment" refers, for example, to a polynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence which: is a portion of the cDNA contained in a depostied cDNA clone; or is a portion of a polynucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide encoded by the cDNA contained in a deposited cDNA clone; or is a portion of the polynucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto; or is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a portion of the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y; or is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a portion of a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto. The nucleotide fragments of the invention are preferably at least about 15 nt, and more preferably at least about 20 nt, still more preferably at least about 30 nt, and even more preferably, at least about 40 nt, at least about 50 nt, at least about 75 nt, at least about 100 nt, at least about 125 nt or at least about 150 nt in length. A fragment "at least 20 nt in length," for example, is intended to include 20 or more contiguous bases from, for example, the sequence contained in the cDNA in a related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary stand thereto. In this context "about" includes the particularly recited value or a value larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) nucleotides. These nucleotide fragments have uses that include, but are not limited to, as diagnostic probes and primers as discussed herein. Of course, larger fragments (e.g., at least 150, 175, 200, 250, 500, 600, 1000, or 2000 nucleotides in length) are also encompassed by the invention. Moreover, representative examples of polynucleotide fragments of the invention, include, for example, fragments comprising, or alternatively consisting of, a sequence from about nucleotide number 1-50, 51-100, 101-150, 151-200, 201-250, 251-300, 301-350, 351- 400, 401-450, 451-500, 501-550, 551-600, 651-700,701- 750, 751 -800, 800-850, 851-900, 901-950, 951 -1000, 1001-1050, 1051-1 100, 1 101-1 150, 1 151- 1200, 1201-1250, 1251- 1300, 1301- 1350, 1351 - 1400, 1401-1450, 1451- 1500, 1501-1550, 1551- 1600, 1601-1650, 1651- 1700, 1701- 1750, 1751-1800, 1801-1850, 1851- 1900, 1901-1950, 1951-2000, 2001-2050, 2051-2100, 2101-2150, 2151-2200, 2201-2250, 2251-2300, 2301-2350, 2351-2400, 2401- 2450, 2451-2500, 2501-2550, 2551-2600, 2601-2650, 2651-2700, 2701-2750, 2751-2800, 2801-2850, 2851-2900, 2901-2950, 2951-3000, 3001-3050, 3051-3100, 3101-3150, 3151- 3200, 3201-3250, 3251-3300, 3301-3350, 3351-3400, 3401-3450, 3451-3500, 3501-3550, and 3551 to the end of SEQ ID NO:X, or the complementary strand thereto. In this context "about" includes the particularly recited range or a range larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 ) nucleotides, at either terminus or at both termini. Preferably, these fragments encode a polypeptide which has a functional activity (e.g., biological activity) of the polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide of which the sequence is a portion. More preferably, these fragments can be used as probes or primers as discussed herein. Polynucleotides which hybridize to one or more of these nucleic acid molecules under stringent hybridization conditions or alternatively, under lower stringency conditions, are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides or fragments. Moreover, representative examples of polynucleotide fragments of the invention, include, for example, fragments comprising, or alternatively consisting of, a sequence from about nucleotide number 1-50, 51-100, 101-150, 151-200, 201-250, 251-300, 301-350, 351- 400, 401-450, 451-500, 501-550, 551-600, 651-700,701- 750, 751-800, 800-850, 851-900, 901-950, 951-1000, 1001-1050, 1051-1 100, 1 101-1150, 1 151-1200, 1201-1250, 1251-1300, 1301-1350, 1351-1400, 1401- 1450, 1451-1500, 1501-1550, 1551-1600, 1601-1650, 1651- 1700, 1701-1750, 1751-1800, 1801-1850, 1851-1900, 1901 -1950, 1951-2000, 2001-2050, 2051-2100, 2101-2150, 2151-2200, 2201-2250, 2251-2300, 2301 -2350, 2351-2400, 2401- 2450, 2451-2500, 2501-2550, 2551-2600, 2601-2650, 2651-2700, 2701-2750, 2751-2800, 2801-2850, 2851-2900, 2901-2950, 2951-3000, 3001-3050, 3051-3100, 3101-3150, 3151- 3200, 3201-3250, 3251-3300, 3301-3350, 3351-3400, 3401-3450, 3451-3500, 3501-3550, and 3551 to the end of the cDNA nucleotide sequence contained in the deposited cDNA clone, or the complementary strand thereto. In this context "about" includes the particularly recited range, or a range larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) nucleotides, at either terminus or at both termini. Preferably, these fragments encode a polypeptide which has a functional activity (e.g., biological activity) of the polypeptide encoded by the cDNA nucleotide sequence contained in the deposited cDNA clone. More preferably, these fragments can be used as probes or primers as discussed herein. Polynucleotides which hybridize to one or more of these fragments under stringent hybridization conditions or alternatively, under lower stringency conditions, are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides or fragments. In the present invention, a "polypeptide fragment" refers to an amino acid sequence which is a portion of that contained in SEQ ID NO:Y, a portion of an amino acid sequence encoded by the polynucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, and/or encoded by the cDNA contained in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library. Protein (polypeptide) fragments may be "free-standing," or comprised within a larger polypeptide of which the fragment forms a part or region, most preferably as a single continuous region. Representative examples of polypeptide fragments of the invention, include, for example, fragments comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an amino acid sequence from about ammo acid number 1-20, 21-40, 41-60, 61-80, 81-100, 102-120, 121-140, 141-160, 161-180, 181-200, 201-220, 221-240, 241-260, 261-280, 281-300, 301-320, 321-340, 341-360, 361- 380, 381-400, 401-420, 421-440, 441-460, 461-480, 481-500, 501-520, 521-540, 541-560, 561-580, 581-600, 601-620, 621-640, 641-660, 661-680, 681-700, 701-720, 721-740, 741- 760, 761-780, 781-800, 801-820, 821-840, 841-860, 861-880, 881-900, 901-920, 921-940, 941-960, 961-980, 981-1000, 1001-1020, 1021-1040, 1041-1060, 1061-1080, 1081-1 100, 1 101-1 120, 1 121-1 140, 1 141 -1 160, 1 161- 1 180, and 1181 to the end of SEQ ID NO:Y. Moreover, polypeptide fragments of the invention may be at least about 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 1 10, 120, 130, 140, or 150 amino acids in length. In this context "about" includes the particularly recited ranges or values, or ranges or values larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) amino acids, at either terminus or at both termini. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptide fragments are also encompassed by the invention. Even if deletion of one or more amino acids from the N-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of one or more biological functions of the protein, other functional activities (e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bind a ligand) may still be retained. For example, the ability of shortened muteins to induce and/or bind to antibodies which recognize the complete or mature forms of the polypeptides generally will be retained when less than the majority of the residues of the complete or mature polypeptide are removed from the N-terminus. Whether a particular polypeptide lacking N-terminal residues of a complete polypeptide retains such immunologic activities can readily be determined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known in the art. It is not unlikely that a mutein with a large number of deleted N-terminal amino acid residues may retain some biological or immunogenic activities. In fact, peptides composed of as few as six amino acid residues may often evoke an immune response. Accordingly, polypeptide fragments of the invention include the secreted protein as well as the mature form. Further preferred polypeptide fragments include the secreted protein or the mature form having a continuous series of deleted residues from the amino or the carboxy terminus, or both. For example, any number of amino acids, ranging from 1-60, can be deleted from the amino terminus of either the secreted polypeptide or the mature form. Similarly, any number of amino acids, ranging from 1-30, can be deleted from the carboxy terminus of the secreted protein or mature form. Furthermore, any combination of the above amino and carboxy terminus deletions are preferred. Similarly, polynucleotides encoding these polypeptide fragments are also preferred. The present invention further provides polypeptides having one or more residues deleted from the amino terminus of the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide disclosed herein (e.g., a polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide sequence contained in SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA contained in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library). In particular, N-terminal deletions may be described by the general formula m-q, where q is a whole integer representing the total number of amino acid residues in a polypeptide of the invention (e.g., the polypeptide disclosed in SEQ ID NO:Y), and m is defined as any integer ranging from 2 to q-6. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Also as mentioned above, even if deletion of one or more amino acids from the C-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of one or more biological functions of the protein, other functional activities (e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bind a ligand) may still be retained. For example the ability of the shortened mutein to induce and/or bind to antibodies which recognize the complete or mature forms of the polypeptide generally will be retained when less than the majority of the residues of the complete or mature polypeptide are removed from the C-terminus. Whether a particular polypeptide lacking C-terminal residues of a complete polypeptide retains such immunologic activities can readily be determined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known in the art. It is not unlikely that a mutein with a large number of deleted C-terminal amino acid residues may retain some biological or immunogenic activities. In fact, peptides composed of as few as six amino acid residues may often evoke an immune response. Accordingly, the present invention further provides polypeptides having one or more residues from the carboxy terminus of the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide disclosed herein (e.g., a polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide sequence contained in SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA contained in deposited cDNA clone referenced in Table 1). In particular, C-terminal deletions may be described by the general formula 1-n, where n is any whole integer ranging from 6 to q-1, and where n corresponds to the position of an amino acid residue in a polypeptide of the invention. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. In addition, any of the above described N- or C-terminal deletions can be combined to produce a N- and C-terminal deleted polypeptide. The invention also provides polypeptides having one or more amino acids deleted from both the amino and the carboxyl termini, which may be described generally as having residues m-n of a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X (e.g., including, but not limited to, the preferred polypeptide disclosed as SEQ ID NO:Y), and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, where n and m are integers as described above. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Any polypeptide sequence contained in the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, encoded by the polynucleotide sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO:X, or encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library may be analyzed to determine certain preferred regions of the polypeptide. For example, the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, or the cDNA in a deposited cDNA clone may be analyzed using the default parameters of the DNASTAR computer algorithm (DNASTAR, Inc., 1228 S. Park St., Madison, WI 53715 USA; http://www.dnastar.com/). Polypeptide regions that may be routinely obtained using the DNASTAR computer algorithm include, but are not limited to, Garnier-Robson alpha-regions, beta-regions, turn-regions, and coil-regions, Chou-Fasman alpha-regions, beta-regions, and turn-regions, Kyte-Doolittle hydrophilic regions and hydrophobic regions, Eisenberg alpha- and beta-amphipathic regions, Karplus-Schulz flexible regions, Emini surface-forming regions and Jameson- Wolf regions of high antigenic index. Among highly preferred polynucleotides of the invention in this regard are those that encode polypeptides comprising regions that combine several structural features, such as several (e.g., 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the features set out above. Additionally, Kyte-Doolittle hydrophilic regions and hydrophobic regions, Emini surface-forming regions, and Jameson-Wolf regions of high antigenic index (i.e., containing four or more contiguous amino acids having an antigenic index of greater than or equal to 1.5, as identified using the default parameters of the Jameson- Wolf program) can routinely be used to determine polypeptide regions that exhibit a high degree of potential for antigenicity. Regions of high antigenicity are determined from data by DNASTAR analysis by choosing values which represent regions of the polypeptide which are likely to be exposed on the surface of the polypeptide in an environment in which antigen recognition may occur in the process of initiation of an immune response. Preferred polypeptide fragments of the invention are fragments comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an amino acid sequence that displays a functional activity of the polypeptide sequence of which the amino acid sequence is a fragment. By a polypeptide demonstrating a "functional activity" is meant, a polypeptide capable of displaying one or more known functional activities associated with a full-length (complete) protein of the invention. Such functional activities include, but are not limited to, biological activity, antigenicity [ability to bind (or compete with a polypeptide for binding) to an anti-polypeptide antibody], immunogenicity (ability to generate antibody which binds to a specific polypeptide of the invention), ability to form multimers with polypeptides of the invention, and ability to bind to a receptor or ligand for a polypeptide. Other preferred polypeptide fragments are biologically active fragments. Biologically active fragments are those exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical, to an activity of the polypeptide of the present invention. The biological activity of the fragments may include an improved desired activity, or a decreased undesirable activity. In preferred embodiments, polypeptides of the invention comprise, or alternatively consist of, one, two, three, four, five or more of the antigenic fragments of the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, or portions thereof. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Table 4. The present invention encompasses polypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an epitope of the polypeptide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:Y, or an epitope of the polypeptide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library or encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes to the complement of an epitope encoding sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, or an epitope encoding sequence contained in the deposited cDNA clone under stringent hybridization conditions, or alternatively, under lower stringency hybridization conditions, as defined supra. The present invention further encompasses polynucleotide sequences encoding an epitope of a polypeptide sequence of the invention (such as, for example, the sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO:X), polynucleotide sequences of the complementary strand of a polynucleotide sequence encoding an epitope of the invention, and polynucleotide sequences which hybridize to this complementary strand under stringent hybridization conditions or alternatively, under lower stringency hybridization conditions, as defined supra. The term "epitopes," as used herein, refers to portions of a polypeptide having antigenic or immunogenic activity in an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably in a human. In a preferred embodiment, the present invention encompasses a polypeptide comprising an epitope, as well as the polynucleotide encoding this polypeptide. An "immunogenic epitope," as used herein, is defined as a portion of a protein that elicits an antibody response in an animal, as determined by any method known in the art, for example, by the methods for generating antibodies described infra. (See, for example, Geysen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81 :3998- 4002 (1983)). The term "antigenic epitope," as used herein, is defined as a portion of a protein to which an antibody can immunospecifically bind its antigen as determined by any method well known in the art, for example, by the immunoassays described herein. Immunospecific binding excludes non-specific binding but does not necessarily exclude cross- reactivity with other antigens. Antigenic epitopes need not necessarily be immunogenic. Fragments which function as epitopes may be produced by any conventional means. (See, e.g., Houghten, R. A., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5135 (1985) further described in U.S. Patent No. 4,631 ,21 1.) In the present invention, antigenic epitopes preferably contain a sequence of at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 7, more preferably at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 1 1, at least 12, at least 13, at least 14, at least 15, at least 20, at least 25, at least 30, at least 40, at least 50, and, most preferably, between about 15 to about 30 amino acids. Preferred polypeptides comprising immunogenic or antigenic epitopes are at least 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100 amino acid residues in length. Additional non-exclusive preferred antigenic epitopes include the antigenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as portions thereof. Antigenic epitopes are useful, for example, to raise antibodies, including monoclonal antibodies, that specifically bind the epitope. Preferred antigenic epitopes include the antigenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as any combination of two, three, four, five or more of these antigenic epitopes. Antigenic epitopes can be used as the target molecules in immunoassays. (See, for instance, Wilson et al., Cell 37:767-778 (1984); Sutcliffe et al., Science 219:660-666 (1983)). Similarly, immunogenic epitopes can be used, for example, to induce antibodies according to methods well known in the art. (See, for instance, Sutcliffe et al., supra; Wilson et al., supra; Chow et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:910- 914; and Bittle et al., J. Gen. Virol. 66:2347-2354 (1985). Preferred immunogenic epitopes include the immunogenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as any combination of two, three, four, five or more of these immunogenic epitopes. The polypeptides comprising one or more immunogenic epitopes may be presented for eliciting an antibody response together with a carrier protein, such as an albumin, to an animal system (such as rabbit or mouse), or, if the polypeptide is of sufficient length (at least about 25 amino acids), the polypeptide may be presented without a carrier. However, immunogenic epitopes comprising as few as 8 to 10 amino acids have been shown to be sufficient to raise antibodies capable of binding to, at the very least, linear epitopes in a denatured polypeptide (e.g., in Western blotting). Epitope-bearing polypeptides of the present invention may be used to induce antibodies according to methods well known in the art including, but not limited to, in vivo immunization, in vitro immunization, and phage display methods. See, e.g., Sutcliffe et al., supra; Wilson et al., supra, and Bittle et al., J. Gen. Virol., 66:2347- 2354 (1985). If in vivo immunization is used, animals may be immunized with free peptide; however, anti-peptide antibody titer may be boosted by coupling the peptide to a macromolecular carrier, such as keyhole limpet hemacyanin (KLH) or tetanus toxoid. For instance, peptides containing cysteine residues may be coupled to a carrier using a linker such as maleimidobenzoyl- N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (MBS), while other peptides may be coupled to carriers using a more general linking agent such as glutaraldehyde. Animals such as rabbits, rats and mice are immunized with either free or carrier- coupled peptides, for instance, by intraperitoneal and/or intradermal injection of emulsions containing about 100 μg of peptide or carrier protein and Freund's adjuvant or any other adjuvant known for stimulating an immune response. Several booster injections may be needed, for instance, at intervals of about two weeks, to provide a useful titer of anti-peptide antibody which can be detected, for example, by ELISA assay using free peptide adsorbed to a solid surface. The titer of anti-peptide antibodies in serum from an immunized animal may be increased by selection of anti-peptide antibodies, for instance, by adsorption to the peptide on a solid support and elution of the selected antibodies according to methods well known in the art. As one of skill in the art will appreciate, and as discussed above, the polypeptides of the present invention , and immunogenic and/or antigenic epitope fragments thereof can be fused to other polypeptide sequences. For example, the polypeptides of the present invention may be fused with the constant domain of immunoglobulins (IgA, IgE, IgG, IgM), or portions thereof (CHI, CH2, CH3, or any combination thereof and portions thereof) resulting in chimeric polypeptides. Such fusion proteins may facilitate purification and may increase half-life in vivo. This has been shown for chimeric proteins consisting of the first two domains of the human CD4-polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions of the heavy or light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins. See, e.g., EP 394,827; Traunecker et al., Nature, 331 :84-86 (1988). Enhanced delivery of an antigen across the epithelial barrier to the immune system has been demonstrated for antigens (e.g., insulin) conjugated to an FcRn binding partner such as IgG or Fc fragments (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 96/22024 and WO 99/04813). IgG Fusion proteins that have a disulfide-linked dimeric structure due to the IgG portion desulfide bonds have also been found to be more efficient in binding and neutralizing other molecules than monomeric polypeptides or fragments thereof alone. See, e.g., Fountoulakis et al., J. Biochem., 270:3958-3964 (1995). Similarly, EP-A-O 464 533 (Canadian counterpart 2045869) discloses fusion proteins comprising various portions of constant region of immunoglobulin molecules together with another human protein or part thereof. In many cases, the Fc part in a fusion protein is beneficial in therapy and diagnosis, and thus can result in, for example, improved pharmacokinetic properties. (EP-A 0232 262.) Alternatively, deleting the Fc part after the fusion protein has been expressed, detected, and purified, may be desired. For example, the Fc portion may hinder therapy and diagnosis if the fusion protein is used as an antigen for immunizations. In drug discovery, for example, human proteins, such as hIL-5, have been fused with Fc portions for the purpose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists of hIL-5. (See, D. Bennett et al., J. Molecular Recognition 8:52-58 (1995); K. Johanson et al., J. Biol. Chem. 270:9459-9471 (1995).) Moreover, the polypeptides of the present invention can be fused to marker sequences, such as a peptide which facilitates purification of the fused polypeptide. In preferred embodiments, the marker amino acid sequence is a hexa-histidine peptide, such as the tag provided in a pQE vector (QIAGEN, Inc., 9259 Eton Avenue, Chatsworth, CA, 9131 1), among others, many of which are commercially available. As described in Gentz et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:821-824 (1989), for instance, hexa-histidine provides for convenient purification of the fusion protein. Another peptide tag useful for purification, the "HA" tag, corresponds to an epitope derived from the influenza hemagglutinin protein. (Wilson et al., Cell 37:767 (1984).) Thus, any of these above fusions can be engineered using the polynucleotides or the polypeptides of the present invention. Nucleic acids encoding the above epitopes can also be recombined with a gene of interest as an epitope tag (e.g., the hemagglutinin ("HA") tag or flag tag) to aid in detection and purification of the expressed polypeptide. For example, a system described by Janknecht et al. allows for the ready purification of non-denatured fusion proteins expressed in human cell lines (Janknecht et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:8972- 897 (1991)). In this system, the gene of interest is subcloned into a vaccinia recombination plasmid such that the open reading frame of the gene is translationally fused to an amino-terminal tag consisting of six histidine residues. The tag serves as a matrix binding domain for the fusion protein. Extracts from cells infected with the recombinant vaccinia virus are loaded onto Ni2+ nitriloacetic acid-agarose column and histidine-tagged proteins can be selectively eluted with imidazole-containing buffers. Additional fusion proteins of the invention may be generated through the techniques of gene-shuffling, motif-shuffling, exon-shuffling, and/or codon-shuffling (collectively referred to as "DNA shuffling"). DNA shuffling may be employed to modulate the activities of polypeptides of the invention, such methods can be used to generate polypeptides with altered activity, as well as agonists and antagonists of the polypeptides. See, generally, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,605,793; 5,81 1,238; 5,830,721 ; 5,834,252; and 5,837,458, and Patten et al., Curr. Opinion Biotechnol. 8:724-33 (1997); Harayama, Trends Biotechnol. 16(2):76-82 (1998); Hansson, et al., J. Mol. Biol. 287:265-76 (1999); and Lorenzo and Blasco, Biotechniques 24(2):308- 13 (1998) (each of these patents and publications are hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety). In one embodiment, alteration of polynucleotides corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X and the polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides may be achieved by DNA shuffling. DNA shuffling involves the assembly of two or more DNA segments by homologous or site-specific recombination to generate variation in the polynucleotide sequence. In another embodiment, polynucleotides of the invention, or the encoded polypeptides, may be altered by being subjected to random mutagenesis by error-prone PCR, random nucleotide insertion or other methods prior to recombination. In another embodiment, one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc., of a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the invention may be recombined with one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc. of one or more heterologous molecules. As discussed herein, any polypeptide of the present invention can be used to generate fusion proteins. For example, the polypeptide of the present invention, when fused to a second protein, can be used as an antigenic tag. Antibodies raised against the polypeptide of the present invention can be used to indirectly detect the second protein by binding to the polypeptide. Moreover, because secreted proteins target cellular locations based on trafficking signals, polypeptides of the present invention which are shown to be secreted can be used as targeting molecules once fused to other proteins. Examples of domains that can be fused to polypeptides of the present invention include not only heterologous signal sequences, but also other heterologous functional regions. The fusion does not necessarily need to be direct, but may occur through linker sequences. In certain preferred embodiments, proteins of the invention comprise fusion proteins wherein the polypeptides are N and/or C- terminal deletion mutants. In preferred embodiments, the application is directed to nucleic acid molecules at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the nucleic acid sequences encoding polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of the specific N- and C-terminal deletions mutants. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Moreover, fusion proteins may also be engineered to improve characteristics of the polypeptide of the present invention. For instance, a region of additional amino acids, particularly charged amino acids, may be added to the N-terminus of the polypeptide to improve stability and persistence during purification from the host cell or subsequent handling and storage. Also, peptide moieties may be added to the polypeptide to facilitate purification. Such regions may be removed prior to final preparation of the polypeptide. The addition of peptide moieties to facilitate handling of polypeptides are familiar and routine techniques in the art. Vectors. Host Cells, and Protein Production The present invention also relates to vectors containing the polynucleotide of the present invention, host cells, and the production of polypeptides by recombinant techniques. The vector may be, for example, a phage, plasmid, viral, or retroviral vector. Retroviral vectors may be replication competent or replication defective. In the latter case, viral propagation generally will occur only in complementing host cells. The polynucleotides of the invention may be joined to a vector containing a selectable marker for propagation in a host. Generally, a plasmid vector is introduced in a precipitate, such as a calcium phosphate precipitate, or in a complex with a charged lipid. If the vector is a virus, it may be packaged in vitro using an appropriate packaging cell line and then transduced into host cells. The polynucleotide insert should be operatively linked to an appropriate promoter, such as the phage lambda PL promoter, the E. coli lac, trp, phoA and tac promoters, the SV40 early and late promoters and promoters of retroviral LTRs, to name a few. Other suitable promoters will be known to the skilled artisan. The expression constructs will further contain sites for transcription initiation, termination, and, in the transcribed region, a ribosome binding site for translation. The coding portion of the transcripts expressed by the constructs will preferably include a translation initiating codon at the beginning and a termination codon (UAA, UGA or UAG) appropriately positioned at the end of the polypeptide to be translated. As indicated, the expression vectors will preferably include at least one selectable marker. Such markers include dihydrofolate reductase, G418 or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic cell culture and tetracycline, kanamycin or ampicillin resistance genes for culturing in E. coli and other bacteria. Representative examples of appropriate hosts include, but are not limited to, bacterial cells, such as E. coli, Streptomyces and Salmonella typhimurium cells; fungal cells, such as yeast cells (e.g., Saccharomyces cerevisiae or Pichia pastoris (ATCC Accession No. 201 178)); insect cells such as Drosophila S2 and Spodoptera Sf9 cells; animal cells such as CHO, COS, 293, and Bowes melanoma cells; and plant cells. Appropriate culture mediums and conditions for the above-described host cells are known in the art. Among vectors preferred for use in bacteria include pQE70, pQE60 and pQE- 9, available from QIAGEN, Inc.; pBluescript vectors, Phagescript vectors, pNH8A, pNHlόa, pNH18A, pNH46A, available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, Inc.; and ptrc99a, pKK223-3, pKK233-3, pDR540, pRIT5 available from Pharmacia Biotech, Inc. Among preferred eukaryotic vectors are pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXTl and pSG available from Stratagene; and pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG and pSVL available from Pharmacia. Preferred expression vectors for use in yeast systems include, but are not limited to pYES2, pYDl, pTEFl/Zeo, pYES2/GS, pPICZ, pGAPZ, pGAPZalph, pPIC9, pPIC3.5, pHIL-D2, pHIL-Sl, pPIC3.5K, P P1C9K, and PAO815 (all available from Invitrogen, Carlbad, CA). Other suitable vectors will be readily apparent to the skilled artisan. Introduction of the construct into the host cell can be effected by calcium phosphate transfection, DEAE-dextran mediated transfection, cationic lipid-mediated transfection, electroporation, transduction, infection, or other methods. Such methods are described in many standard laboratory manuals, such as Davis et al., Basic Methods In Molecular Biology (1986). It is specifically contemplated that the polypeptides of the present invention may in fact be expressed by a host cell lacking a recombinant vector. A polypeptide of this invention can be recovered and purified from recombinant cell cultures by well-known methods including ammonium sulfate or ethanol precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cation exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography and lectin chromatography. Most preferably, high performance liquid chromatography ("HPLC") is employed for purification. Polypeptides of the present invention can also be recovered from: products purified from natural sources, including bodily fluids, tissues and cells, whether directly isolated or cultured; products of chemical synthetic procedures; and products produced by recombinant techniques from a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host, including, for example, bacterial, yeast, higher plant, insect, and mammalian cells. Depending upon the host employed in a recombinant production procedure, the polypeptides of the present invention may be glycosylated or may be non-glycosylated. In addition, polypeptides of the invention may also include an initial modified methionine residue, in some cases as a result of host-mediated processes. Thus, it is well known in the art that the N-terminal methionine encoded by the translation initiation codon generally is removed with high efficiency from any protein after translation in all eukaryotic cells. While the N-terminal methionine on most proteins also is efficiently removed in most prokaryotes, for some proteins, this prokaryotic removal process is inefficient, depending on the nature of the amino acid to which the N-terminal methionine is covalently linked. In one embodiment, the yeast Pichia pastoris is used to express polypeptides of the invention in a eukaryotic system. Pichia pastoris is a methylotrophic yeast which can metabolize methanol as its sole carbon source. A main step in the methanol metabolization pathway is the oxidation of methanol to formaldehyde using O 2 . This reaction is catalyzed by the enzyme alcohol oxidase. In order to metabolize methanol as its sole carbon source, Pichia pastoris must generate high levels of alcohol oxidase due, in part, to the relatively low affinity of alcohol oxidase for O 2 . Consequently, in a growth medium depending on methanol as a main carbon source, the promoter region of one of the two alcohol oxidase genes (A OX1) is highly active. In the presence of methanol, alcohol oxidase produced from the A OX1 gene comprises up to approximately 30% of the total soluble protein in Pichia pastoris. See, Ellis, S.B., et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5: 1 11 1-21 (1985); Koutz. P.J, et al, Yeast 5: 167-77 (1989); Tschopp, J.F., et al, Nucl Acids Res. 15:3859-76 (1987). Thus, a heterologous coding sequence, such as, for example, a polynucleotide of the present invention, under the transcriptional regulation of all or part of the AOX1 regulatory sequence is expressed at exceptionally high levels in Pichia yeast grown in the 5 presence of methanol. In one example, the plasmid vector pPIC9K is used to express DNA encoding a polypeptide of the invention, as set forth herein, in a Pichea yeast system essentially as described in "Pichia Protocols: Methods in Molecular Biology," D.R. Higgins and J. Cregg, eds. The Humana Press, Totowa, NJ, 1998. This expression vector allows i Q expression and secretion of a polypeptide of the invention by virtue of the strong AOX1 promoter linked to the Pichia pastoris alkaline phosphatase (PHO) secretory signal peptide (i.e., leader) located upstream of a multiple cloning site. Many other yeast vectors could be used in place of pPIC9K, such as, pYES2, pYDl, pTEFl/Zeo, pYES2/GS, pPICZ, pGAPZ, pGAPZalpha, pPIC9, pPIC3.5, 15 pHIL-D2, pHIL-S l, pPIC3.5K, and PAO815, as one skilled in the art would readily appreciate, as long as the proposed expression construct provides appropriately located signals for transcription, translation, secretion (if desired), and the like, including an in-frame AUG as required. In another embodiment, high-level expression of a heterologous coding 0 sequence, such as, for example, a polynucleotide of the present invention, may be achieved by cloning the heterologous polynucleotide of the invention into an expression vector such as, for example, pGAPZ or pGAPZalpha, and growing the yeast culture in the absence of methanol. In addition to encompassing host cells containing the vector constructs 5 discussed herein, the invention also encompasses primary, secondary, and immortalized host cells of vertebrate origin, particularly mammalian origin, that have been engineered to delete or replace endogenous genetic material (e.g., coding sequence), and/or to include genetic material (e.g., heterologous polynucleotide sequences) that is operably associated with polynucleotides of the invention, and which activates, alters, and/or amplifies endogenous polynucleotides. For example, techniques known in the art may be used to operably associate heterologous control regions (e.g., promoter and/or enhancer) and endogenous polynucleotide sequences via homologous recombination (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,641,670, issued June 24, 1997; International Publication No. WO 96/2941 1, published September 26, 1996; International Publication No. WO 94/12650, published August 4, 1994; Koller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989); and Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435- 438 (1989), the disclosures of each of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties). In addition, polypeptides of the invention can be chemically synthesized using techniques known in the art (e.g., see Creighton, 1983, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Principles, W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y., and Hunkapiller et al., Nature, 310: 105-1 1 1 (1984)). For example, a polypeptide corresponding to a fragment of a polypeptide can be synthesized by use of a peptide synthesizer. Furthermore, if desired, nonclassical amino acids or chemical amino acid analogs can be introduced as a substitution or addition into the polypeptide sequence. Non-classical amino acids include, but are not limited to, to the D-isomers of the common amino acids, 2,4- diaminobutyric acid, a-amino isobutyric acid, 4-aminobutyric acid, Abu, 2-amino butyric acid, g-Abu, e-Ahx, 6-amino hexanoic acid, Aib, 2-amino isobutyric acid, 3-amino propionic acid, ornithine, norleucine, norvaline, hydroxyproline, sarcosine, citrulline, homocitrulline, cysteic acid, t-butylglycine, t-butylalanine, phenylglycine, cyclohexylalanine, b-alanine, fluoro-amino acids, designer amino acids such as b- methyl amino acids, Ca-methyl amino acids, Na-methyl amino acids, and amino acid analogs in general. Furthermore, the amino acid can be D (dextrorotary) or L (levorotary). Non-naturally occurring variants may be produced using art-known mutagenesis techniques, which include, but are not limited to oligonucleotide mediated mutagenesis, alanine scanning, PCR mutagenesis, site directed mutagenesis (see, e.g., Carter et al, Nucl Acids Res. 75:4331 (1986); and Zoller et al, Nucl Acids Res. 10:6481 (1982)), cassette mutagenesis (see, e.g., Wells et al, Gene 34:3 \5 (1985)), restriction selection mutagenesis (see, e.g., Wells et al, Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London SerA 377:415 (1986)). The invention additionally, encompasses polypeptides of the present invention which are differentially modified during or after translation, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including but not limited, to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH ; acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction; metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin; etc. Additional post-translational modifications encompassed by the invention include, for example, e.g., N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, processing of N-terminal or C-terminal ends), attachment of chemical moieties to the amino acid backbone, chemical modifications of N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, and addition or deletion of an N-terminal methionine residue as a result of procaryotic host cell expression. The polypeptides may also be modified with a detectable label, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein. Also provided by the invention are chemically modified derivatives of the polypeptides of the invention which may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immunogenicity (see U.S. Patent No. 4,179,337). The chemical moieties for derivitization may be selected from water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol and the like. The polypeptides may be modified at random positions within the molecule, or at predetermined positions within the molecule and may include one, two, three or more attached chemical moieties. The polymer may be of any molecular weight, and may be branched or unbranched. For polyethylene glycol, the preferred molecular weight is between about 1 kDa and about 100 kDa (the term "about" indicating that in preparations of polyethylene glycol, some molecules will weigh more, some less, than the stated molecular weight) for ease in handling and manufacturing. Other sizes may be used, depending on the desired therapeutic profile (e.g., the duration of sustained release desired, the effects, if any on biological activity, the ease in handling, the degree or lack of antigenicity and other known effects of the polyethylene glycol to a therapeutic protein or analog). For example, the polyethylene glycol may have an average molecular weight of about 200; 500; 1000; 1500; 2000; 2500; 3000; 3500 4000; 4500; 5000; 5500; 6000; 6500; 7000; 7500; 8000; 8500; 9000; 9500; 10,000 10,500; 1 1,000; 1 1 ,500; 12,000; 12,500; 13,000; 13,500; 14,000; 14,500; 15,000 15,500; 16,000; 16,500; 17,000; 17,500; 18,000; 18,500; 19,000; 19,500; 20,000 25,000; 30,000; 35,000; 40,000; 50,000; 55,000; 60,000; 65,000; 70,000; 75,000 80,000; 85,000; 90,000; 95,000; or 100,000 kDa. As noted above, the polyethylene glycol may have a branched structure. Branched polyethylene glycols are described, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 5,643,575; Morpurgo et al, Appl Biochem. Biotechnol. 56:59-12 (1996); Vorobjev et al, Nucleosides Nucleotides 18:2145-2150 (1999); and Caliceti et al, Bioconjug. Chem. 70:638-646 (1999), the disclosures of each of which are incoφorated herein by reference. The polyethylene glycol molecules (or other chemical moieties) should be attached to the protein with consideration of effects on functional or antigenic domains of the protein. There are a number of attachment methods available to those skilled in the art, e.g., EP 0 401 384, herein incoφorated by reference (coupling PEG to G-CSF), see also Malik et al., Exp. Hematol. 20: 1028-1035 (1992) (reporting pegylation of GM-CSF using tresyl chloride). For example, polyethylene glycol may be covalently bound through amino acid residues via a reactive group, such as, a free amino or carboxyl group. Reactive groups are those to which an activated polyethylene glycol molecule may be bound. The amino acid residues having a free amino group may include lysine residues and the N-terminal amino acid residues; those having a free carboxyl group may include aspartic acid residues glutamic acid residues and the C-terminal amino acid residue. Sulfhydryl groups may also be used as a reactive group for attaching the polyethylene glycol molecules. Preferred for therapeutic puφoses is attachment at an amino group, such as attachment at the N-terminus or lysine group. As suggested above, polyethylene glycol may be attached to proteins via linkage to any of a number of amino acid residues. For example, polyethylene glycol can be linked to a proteins via covalent bonds to lysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, or cysteine residues. One or more reaction chemistries may be employed to attach polyethylene glycol to specific amino acid residues (e.g., lysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, or cysteine) of the protein or to more than one type of amino acid residue (e.g., lysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, cysteine and combinations thereof) of the protein. One may specifically desire proteins chemically modified at the N-terminus. Using polyethylene glycol as an illustration of the present composition, one may select from a variety of polyethylene glycol molecules (by molecular weight, branching, etc.), the proportion of polyethylene glycol molecules to protein (polypeptide) molecules in the reaction mix, the type of pegylation reaction to be performed, and the method of obtaining the selected N-terminally pegylated protein. The method of obtaining the N-terminally pegylated preparation (i.e., separating this moiety from other monopegylated moieties if necessary) may be by purification of the N-terminally pegylated material from a population of pegylated protein molecules. Selective proteins chemically modified at the N-terminus modification may be accomplished by reductive alkylation which exploits differential reactivity of different types of primary amino groups (lysine versus the N-terminal) available for derivatization in a particular protein. Under the appropriate reaction conditions, substantially selective derivatization of the protein at the N-terminus with a carbonyl group containing polymer is achieved. As indicated above, pegylation of the proteins of the invention may be accomplished by any number of means. For example, polyethylene glycol may be attached to the protein either directly or by an intervening linker. Linkerless systems for attaching polyethylene glycol to proteins are described in Delgado et al, Crit. Rev. Thera. Drug Carrier Sys. 9:249-304 (1992); Francis et al, Intern. J. of Hematol. 68: \- \ ( 1998); U.S. Patent No. 4,002,53 1 ; U.S. Patent No. 5,349,052; WO 95/06058; and WO 98/32466, the disclosures of each of which are incoφorated herein by reference. One system for attaching polyethylene glycol directly to amino acid residues of proteins without an intervening linker employs tresylated MPEG, which is produced by the modification of monmethoxy polyethylene glycol (MPEG) using tresylchloride (ClSO 2 CH?CF ). Upon reaction of protein with tresylated MPEG, polyethylene glycol is directly attached to amine groups of the protein. Thus, the invention includes protein-polyethylene glycol conjugates produced by reacting proteins of the invention with a polyethylene glycol molecule having a 2,2,2-trifluoreothane sulphonyl group. Polyethylene glycol can also be attached to proteins using a number of different intervening linkers. For example, U.S. Patent No. 5,612,460, the entire disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference, discloses urethane linkers for connecting polyethylene glycol to proteins. Protein-polyethylene glycol conjugates wherein the polyethylene glycol is attached to the protein by a linker can also be produced by reaction of proteins with compounds such as MPEG- succinimidylsuccinate, MPEG activated with l , l'-carbonyldiimidazole, MPEG- 2,4,5-trichloropenylcarbonate, MPEG-p-nitrophenolcarbonate, and various MPEG- succinate derivatives. A number additional polyethylene glycol derivatives and reaction chemistries for attaching polyethylene glycol to proteins are described in WO 98/32466, the entire disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference. Pegylated protein products produced using the reaction chemistries set out herein are included within the scope of the invention. The number of polyethylene glycol moieties attached to each protein of the invention (i.e., the degree of substitution) may also vary. For example, the pegylated proteins of the invention may be linked, on average, to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 20, or more polyethylene glycol molecules. Similarly, the average degree of substitution within ranges such as 1-3, 2-4, 3-5, 4-6, 5-7, 6-8, 7-9, 8-10, 9-11, 10-12, 1 1 -13, 12- 14, 13-15, 14- 16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, or 18-20 polyethylene glycol moieties per protein molecule. Methods for determining the degree of substitution are discussed, for example, in Delgado et al, Crit. Rev. Thera. Drug Carrier Sys. 9:249- 304 (1992). The lung cancer antigen polypeptides of the invention may be in monomers or multimers (i.e., dimers, trimers, tetramers and higher multimers). Accordingly, the present invention relates to monomers and multimers of the polypeptides of the invention, their preparation, and compositions (preferably, Therapeutics) containing them. In specific embodiments, the polypeptides of the invention are monomers, dimers, trimers or tetramers. In additional embodiments, the multimers of the invention are at least dimers, at least trimers, or at least tetramers. Multimers encompassed by the invention may be homomers or heteromers. As used herein, the term homomer, refers to a multimer containing only polypeptides corresponding to the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y or an amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, and/or an amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA in a related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library (including fragments, variants, splice variants, and fusion proteins, corresponding to any one of these as described herein). These homomers may contain polypeptides having identical or different amino acid sequences. In a specific embodiment, a homomer of the invention is a multimer containing only polypeptides having an identical amino acid sequence. In another specific embodiment, a homomer of the invention is a multimer containing polypeptides having different amino acid sequences. In specific embodiments, the multimer of the invention is a homodimer (e.g., containing polypeptides having identical or different amino acid sequences) or a homotrimer (e.g., containing polypeptides having identical and/or different amino acid sequences). In additional embodiments, the homomeric multimer of the invention is at least a homodimer, at least a homotrimer, or at least a homotetramer. As used herein, the term heteromer refers to a multimer containing one or more heterologous polypeptides (i.e., polypeptides of different proteins) in addition to the polypeptides of the invention. In a specific embodiment, the multimer of the invention is a heterodimer, a heterotrimer, or a heterotetramer. In additional embodiments, the heteromeric multimer of the invention is at least a heterodimer, at least a heterotrimer, or at least a heterotetramer. Multimers of the invention may be the result of hydrophobic, hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent associations and/or may be indirectly linked, by for example, liposome formation. Thus, in one embodiment, multimers of the invention, such as, for example, homodimers or homotrimers, are formed when polypeptides of the invention contact one another in solution. In another embodiment, heteromultimers of the invention, such as, for example, heterotrimers or heterotetramers, are formed when polypeptides of the invention contact antibodies to the polypeptides of the invention (including antibodies to the heterologous polypeptide sequence in a fusion protein of the invention) in solution. In other embodiments, multimers of the invention are formed by covalent associations with and/or between the polypeptides of the invention. Such covalent associations may involve one or more amino acid residues contained in the polypeptide sequence (e.g., that recited in SEQ ID NO:Y, or contained in a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, and/or by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library). In one instance, the covalent associations are cross-linking between cysteine residues located within the polypeptide sequences which interact in the native (i.e., naturally occurring) polypeptide. In another instance, the covalent associations are the consequence of chemical or recombinant manipulation. Alternatively, such covalent associations may involve one or more amino acid residues contained in the heterologous polypeptide sequence in a fusion protein. In one example, covalent associations are between the heterologous sequence contained in a fusion protein of the invention (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925). In a specific example, the covalent associations are between the heterologous sequence contained in a Fc fusion protein of the invention (as described herein). In another specific example, covalent associations of fusion proteins of the invention are between heterologous polypeptide sequence from another protein that is capable of forming covalently associated multimers, such as for example, oseteoprotegerin (see, e.g., International Publication NO: WO 98/49305, the contents of which are herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). In another embodiment, two or more polypeptides of the invention are joined through peptide linkers. Examples include those peptide linkers described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,073,627 (hereby incoφorated by reference). Proteins comprising multiple polypeptides of the invention separated by peptide linkers may be produced using conventional recombinant DNA technology. Another method for preparing multimer polypeptides of the invention involves use of polypeptides of the invention fused to a leucine zipper or isoleucine zipper polypeptide sequence. Leucine zipper and isoleucine zipper domains are polypeptides that promote multimerization of the proteins in which they are found. Leucine zippers were originally identified in several DNA-binding proteins (Landschulz et al., Science 240: 1759, (1988)), and have since been found in a variety of different proteins. Among the known leucine zippers are naturally occurring peptides and derivatives thereof that dimerize or trimerize. Examples of leucine zipper domains suitable for producing soluble multimeric proteins of the invention are those described in PCT application WO 94/10308, hereby incoφorated by reference. Recombinant fusion proteins comprising a polypeptide of the invention fused to a polypeptide sequence that dimerizes or trimerizes in solution are expressed in suitable host cells, and the resulting soluble multimeric fusion protein is recovered from the culture supernatant using techniques known in the art. Trimeric polypeptides of the invention may offer the advantage of enhanced biological activity. Preferred leucine zipper moieties and isoleucine moieties are those that preferentially form trimers. One example is a leucine zipper derived from lung surfactant protein D (SPD), as described in Hoppe et al. (FEBS Letters 344: 191, (1994)) and in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/446,922, hereby incoφorated by reference. Other peptides derived from naturally occurring trimeric proteins may be employed in preparing trimeric polypeptides of the invention. In another example, proteins of the invention are associated by interactions between Flag® polypeptide sequence contained in fusion proteins of the invention containing Flag® polypeptide seuqence. In a further embodiment, associations proteins of the invention are associated by interactions between heterologous polypeptide sequence contained in Flag® fusion proteins of the invention and anti- Flag® antibody. The multimers of the invention may be generated using chemical techniques known in the art. For example, polypeptides desired to be contained in the multimers of the invention may be chemically cross-linked using linker molecules and linker molecule length optimization techniques known in the art (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Additionally, multimers of the invention may be generated using techniques known in the art to form one or more inter-molecule cross-links between the cysteine residues located within the sequence of the polypeptides desired to be contained in the multimer (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Further, polypeptides of the invention may be routinely modified by the addition of cysteine or biotin to the C-terminus or N-terminus of the polypeptide and techniques known in the art may be applied to generate multimers containing one or more of these modified polypeptides (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Additionally, techniques known in the art may be applied to generate liposomes containing the polypeptide components desired to be contained in the multimer of the invention (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Alternatively, multimers of the invention may be generated using genetic engineering techniques known in the art. In one embodiment, polypeptides contained in multimers of the invention are produced recombinantly using fusion protein technology described herein or otherwise known in the art (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). In a specific embodiment, polynucleotides coding for a homodimer of the invention are generated by ligating a polynucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide of the invention to a sequence encoding a linker polypeptide and then further to a synthetic polynucleotide encoding the translated product of the polypeptide in the reverse orientation from the original C-terminus to the N-terminus (lacking the leader sequence) (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). In another embodiment, recombinant techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art are applied to generate recombinant polypeptides of the invention which contain a transmembrane domain (or hyrophobic or signal peptide) and which can be incoφorated by membrane reconstitution techniques into liposomes (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Antibodies Further polypeptides of the invention relate to antibodies and T-cell antigen receptors (TCR) which immunospecifically bind a polypeptide, polypeptide fragment, or variant of SEQ ID NO:Y, and/or an epitope, of the present invention (as determined by immunoassays well known in the art for assaying specific antibody- antigen binding). Antibodies of the invention include, but are not limited to, polyclonal, monoclonal, multispecific, human, humanized or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab') fragments, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies (including, e.g., anti-Id antibodies to antibodies of the invention), and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above. The term "antibody," as used herein, refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site that immunospecifically binds an antigen. The immunoglobulin molecules of the invention can be of any type (e.g., IgG, IgE, IgM, IgD, IgA and IgY), class (e.g., IgG l, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgAl and IgA2) or subclass of immunoglobulin molecule. Most preferably the antibodies are human antigen-binding antibody fragments of the present invention and include, but are not limited to, Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2, Fd, single-chain Fvs (scFv), single-chain antibodies, disulfide-linked Fvs (sdFv) and fragments comprising either a VL or VH domain. Antigen-binding antibody fragments, including single-chain antibodies, may comprise the variable region(s) alone or in combination with the entirety or a portion of the following: hinge region, CHI, CH2, and CH3 domains. Also included in the invention are antigen-binding fragments also comprising any combination of variable region(s) with a hinge region, CHI, CH2, and CH3 domains. The antibodies of the invention may be from any animal origin including birds and mammals. Preferably, the antibodies are human, murine (e.g., mouse and rat), donkey, ship rabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, horse, or chicken. As used herein, "human" antibodies include antibodies having the amino acid sequence of a human immunoglobulin and include antibodies isolated from human immunoglobulin libraries or from animals transgenic for one or more human immunoglobulin and that do not express endogenous immunoglobulins, as described infra and, for example in, U.S. Patent No. 5,939,598 by Kucherlapati et al. The antibodies of the present invention may be monospecific, bispecific, trispecific or of greater multispecificity. Multispecific antibodies may be specific for different epitopes of a polypeptide of the present invention or may be specific for both a polypeptide of the present invention as well as for a heterologous epitope, such as a heterologous polypeptide or solid support material. See, e.g., PCT publications WO 93/17715; WO 92/08802; WO 91/00360; WO 92/05793; Tutt, et al, J. Immunol. 147:60-69 (1991); U.S. Patent Nos. 4,474,893; 4,714,681 ; 4,925,648; 5,573,920; 5,601,819; Kostelny et al., J. Immunol. 148: 1547-1553 (1992). Antibodies of the present invention may be described or specified in terms of the epitope(s) or portion(s) of a polypeptide of the present invention which they recognize or specifically bind. The epitope(s) or polypeptide portion(s) may be specified as described herein, e.g., by N-terminal and C-terminal positions, or by size in contiguous amino acid residues. Antibodies which specifically bind any epitope or polypeptide of the present invention may also be excluded. Therefore, the present invention includes antibodies that specifically bind polypeptides of the present invention, and allows for the exclusion of the same. Antibodies of the present invention may also be described or specified in terms of their cross-reactivity. Antibodies that do not bind any other analog, ortholog, or homolog of a polypeptide of the present invention are included. Antibodies that bind polypeptides with at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%>, at least 70%, at least 65%, at least 60%, at least 55%, and at least 50% identity (as calculated using methods known in the art and described herein) to a polypeptide of the present invention are also included in the present invention. In specific embodiments, antibodies of the present invention cross-react with murine, rat and/or rabbit homologs of human proteins and the corresponding epitopes thereof. Antibodies that do not bind polypeptides with less than 95%, less than 90%, less than 85%, less than 80%, less than 75%, less than 70%, less than 65%, less than 60%, less than 55%, and less than 50% identity (as calculated using methods known in the art and described herein) to a polypeptide of the present invention are also included in the present invention. In a specific embodiment, the above-described cross-reactivity is with respect to any single specific antigenic or immunogenic polypeptide, or combination(s) of 2, 3, 4, 5, or more of the specific antigenic and/or immunogenic polypeptides disclosed herein. Further included in the present invention are antibodies which bind polypeptides encoded by polynucleotides which hybridize to a polynucleotide of the present invention under stringent hybridization conditions (as described herein). Antibodies of the present invention may also be described or specified in terms of their binding affinity to a polypeptide of the invention. Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5 X 10 "2 M, 10 "2 M, 5 X 10 "3 M, 10° M, 5 X 10 "4 M, 10 "4 M, 5 X 10 "5 M, 10 "5 M, 5 X 10 "6 M, 10 "6 M, 5 X 10 "7 M, 10 7 M, 5 X 10 "8 M, 10 "8 M, 5 X 10 '9 M, 10 "9 M, 5 X 10 "10 M, 10 "10 M, 5 X 10 " " M, 10 " " M, 5 X 10 " 12 M, 10"12 M, 5 X 10 "n M, 10 "13 M, 5 X 10 "14 M, 10 " 14 M, 5 X 10- 15 M, or 10"15 M. The invention also provides antibodies that competitively inhibit binding of an antibody to an epitope of the invention as determined by any method known in the art for determining competitive binding, for example, the immunoassays described herein. In preferred embodiments, the antibody competitively inhibits binding to the epitope by at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85 %, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, or at least 50%. Antibodies of the present invention may act as agonists or antagonists of the polypeptides of the present invention. For example, the present invention includes antibodies which disrupt the receptor/ligand interactions with the polypeptides of the invention either partially or fully. Preferrably, antibodies of the present invention bind an antigenic epitope disclosed herein, or a portion thereof. The invention features both receptor-specific antibodies and ligand-specific antibodies. The invention also features receptor-specific antibodies which do not prevent ligand binding but prevent receptor activation. Receptor activation (i.e., signaling) may be determined by techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art. For example, receptor activation can be determined by detecting the phosphorylation (e.g., tyrosine or serine/threonine) of the receptor or its substrate by immunoprecipitation followed by western blot analysis (for example, as described supra). In specific embodiments, antibodies are provided that inhibit ligand activity or receptor activity by at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, or at least 50% of the activity in absence of the antibody. The invention also features receptor-specific antibodies which both prevent ligand binding and receptor activation as well as antibodies that recognize the receptor-ligand complex, and, preferably, do not specifically recognize the unbound receptor or the unbound ligand. Likewise, included in the invention are neutralizing antibodies which bind the ligand and prevent binding of the ligand to the receptor, as well as antibodies which bind the ligand, thereby preventing receptor activation, but do not prevent the ligand from binding the receptor. Further included in the invention are antibodies which activate the receptor. These antibodies may act as receptor agonists, i.e., potentiate or activate either all or a subset of the biological activities of the ligand-mediated receptor activation, for example, by inducing dimerization of the receptor. The antibodies may be specified as agonists, antagonists or inverse agonists for biological activities comprising the specific biological activities of the peptides of the invention disclosed herein. The above antibody agonists can be made using methods known in the art. See, e.g., PCT publication WO 96/40281 ; U.S. Patent No. 5,81 1 ,097; Deng et al., Blood 92(6): 1981-1988 ( 1998); Chen et al., Cancer Res. 58(16):3668-3678 (1998); Harrop et al., J. Immunol. 161 (4): 1786-1794 ( 1998); Zhu et al., Cancer Res. 58(15):3209-3214 (1998); Yoon et al., J. Immunol. 160(7):3170- 3179 (1998); Prat et al., J. Cell. Sci. 1 1 l(Pt2):237-247 ( 1998); Pitard et al., J. Immunol. Methods 205(2): 177- 190 (1997); Liautard et al., Cytokine 9(4):233-241 (1997); Carlson et al., J. Biol. Chem. 272(17): 1 1295-1 1301 (1997); Taryman et al., Neuron 14(4):755-762 (1995); Muller et al., Structure 6(9): 1 153- 1 167 (1998); Bartunek et al., Cytokine 8(1): 14-20 (1996) (which are all incoφorated by reference herein in their entireties). Antibodies of the present invention may be used, for example, but not limited to, to purify, detect, and target the polypeptides of the present invention, including both in vitro and in vivo diagnostic and therapeutic methods. For example, the antibodies have use in immunoassays for qualitatively and quantitatively measuring levels of the polypeptides of the present invention in biological samples. See, e.g., Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988) (incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety). As discussed in more detail below, the antibodies of the present invention may be used either alone or in combination with other compositions. The antibodies may further be recombinantly fused to a heterologous polypeptide at the N- or C-terminus or chemically conjugated (including covalently and non-covalently conjugations) to polypeptides or other compositions. For example, antibodies of the present invention may be recombinantly fused or conjugated to molecules useful as labels in detection assays and effector molecules such as heterologous polypeptides, drugs, radionuclides, or toxins. See, e.g., PCT publications WO 92/08495; WO 91/14438; WO 89/12624; U.S. Patent No. 5,314,995; and EP 396,387. The antibodies of the invention include derivatives that are modified, i.e, by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule to the antibody such that covalent attachment does not prevent the antibody from generating an anti-idiotypic response. For example, but not by way of limitation, the antibody derivatives include antibodies that have been modified, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation, phosphylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including, but not limited to specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc. Additionally, the derivative may contain one or more non-classical amino acids. The antibodies of the present invention may be generated by any suitable method known in the art. Polyclonal antibodies to an antigen-of- interest can be produced by various procedures well known in the art. For example, a polypeptide of the invention can be administered to various host animals including, but not limited to, rabbits, mice, rats, etc. to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies specific for the antigen. Various adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, and include but are not limited to, Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and corynebacterium parvum. Such adjuvants are also well known in the art. Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma, recombinant, and phage display technologies, or a combination thereof. For example, monoclonal antibodies can be produced using hybridoma techniques including those known in the art and taught, for example, in Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988); Hammerling, et al., in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell Hybridomas 563-681 (Elsevier, N.Y., 1981) (said references incoφorated by reference in their entireties). The term "monoclonal antibody" as used herein is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridoma technology. The term "monoclonal antibody" refers to an antibody that is derived from a single clone, including any eukaryotic, prokaryotic, or phage clone, and not the method by which it is produced. Methods for producing and screening for specific antibodies using hybridoma technology are routine and well known in the art and are discussed in detail in the Examples. In a non-limiting example, mice can be immunized with a polypeptide of the invention or a cell expressing such peptide. Once an immune response is detected, e.g., antibodies specific for the antigen are detected in the mouse serum, the mouse spleen is harvested and splenocytes isolated. The splenocytes are then fused by well known techniques to any suitable myeloma cells, for example cells from cell line SP20 available from the ATCC. Hybridomas are selected and cloned by limited dilution. The hybridoma clones are then assayed by methods known in the art for cells that secrete antibodies capable of binding a polypeptide of the invention. Ascites fluid, which generally contains high levels of antibodies, can be generated by immunizing mice with positive hybridoma clones. Accordingly, the present invention provides methods of generating monoclonal antibodies as well as antibodies produced by the method comprising culturing a hybridoma cell secreting an antibody of the invention wherein, preferably, the hybridoma is generated by fusing splenocytes isolated from a mouse immunized with an antigen of the invention with myeloma cells and then screening the hybridomas resulting from the fusion for hybridoma clones that secrete an antibody able to bind a polypeptide of the invention. Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques. For example, Fab and F(ab')2 fragments of the invention may be produced by proteolytic cleavage of immunoglobulin molecules, using enzymes such as papain (to produce Fab fragments) or pepsin (to produce F(ab')2 fragments). F(ab')2 fragments contain the variable region, the light chain constant region and the CHI domain of the heavy chain. For example, the antibodies of the present invention can also be generated using various phage display methods known in the art. In phage display methods, functional antibody domains are displayed on the surface of phage particles which carry the polynucleotide sequences encoding them. In a particular embodiment, such phage can be utilized to display antigen binding domains expressed from a repertoire or combinatorial antibody library (e.g., human or murine). Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds the antigen of interest can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead. Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and Ml 3 binding domains expressed from phage with Fab, Fv or disulfide stabilized Fv antibody domains recombinantly fused to either the phage gene III or gene VIII protein. Examples of phage display methods that can be used to make the antibodies of the present invention include those disclosed in Brinkman et al., J. Immunol. Methods 182:41 -50 (1995); Ames et al., J. Immunol. Methods 184: 177- 186 (1995); Kettleborough et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 24:952-958 (1994); Persic et al., Gene 187 9-18 (1997); Burton et al., Advances in Immunology 57: 191-280 (1994); PCT application No. PCT/GB91/01 134; PCT publications WO 90/02809; WO 91/10737; WO 92/01047; WO 92/18619; WO 93/1 1236; WO 95/15982; WO 95/20401 ; and U.S. Patent Nos. 5,698,426; 5,223,409; 5,403,484; 5,580,717; 5,427,908; 5,750,753; 5,821 ,047; 5,571 ,698; 5,427,908; 5,516,637; 5,780,225; 5,658,727; 5,733,743 and 5,969, 108; each of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. As described in the above references, after phage selection, the antibody coding regions from the phage can be isolated and used to generate whole antibodies, including human antibodies, or any other desired antigen binding fragment, and expressed in any desired host, including mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, yeast, and bacteria, e.g., as described in detail below. For example, techniques to recombinantly produce Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2 fragments can also be employed using methods known in the art such as those disclosed in PCT publication WO 92/22324; Mullinax et al., BioTechniques 12(6):864-869 (1992); and Sawai et al., AJRI 34:26- 34 (1995); and Better et al., Science 240: 1041-1043 ( 1988) (said references incoφorated by reference in their entireties). Examples of techniques which can be used to produce single-chain Fvs and antibodies include those described in U.S ' . Patents 4,946,778 and 5,258,498; Huston et al., Methods in Enzymology 203:46-88 ( 1991); Shu et al., PNAS 90:7995-7999 (1993); and Skerra et al., Science 240: 1038- 1040 (1988). For some uses, including in vivo use of antibodies in humans and in vitro detection assays, it may be preferable to use chimeric, humanized, or human antibodies. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions of the antibody are derived from different animal species, such as antibodies having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region. Methods for producing chimeric antibodies are known in the art. See e.g., Morrison, Science 229: 1202 (1985); Oi et al., BioTechniques 4:214 ( 1986); Gillies et al., (1989) J. Immunol. Methods 125: 191-202; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,807,715; 4,816,567; and 4,816397, which are incoφorated herein by reference in their entirety. Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species antibody that binds the desired antigen having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non- human species and a framework regions from a human immunoglobulin molecule. Often, framework residues in the human framework regions will be substituted with the corresponding residue from the CDR donor antibody to alter, preferably improve, antigen binding. These framework substitutions are identified by methods well known in the art, e.g., by modeling of the interactions of the CDR and framework residues to identify framework residues important for antigen binding and sequence comparison to identify unusual framework residues at particular positions. (See, e.g., Queen et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,585,089; Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323 (1988), which are incoφorated herein by reference in their entireties.) Antibodies can be humanized using a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, CDR-grafting (EP 239,400; PCT publication WO 91/09967; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,225,539; 5,530,101 ; and 5,585,089), veneering or resurfacing (EP 592,106; EP 519,596; Padlan, Molecular Immunology 28(4/5):489-498 (1991); Studnicka et al., Protein Engineering 7(6):805-814 (1994); Roguska. et al., PNAS 91 :969-973 (1994)), and chain shuffling (U.S. Patent No. 5,565,332). Completely human antibodies are particularly desirable for therapeutic treatment of human patients. Human antibodies can be made by a variety of methods known in the art including phage display methods described above using antibody libraries derived from human immunoglobulin sequences. See also, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,444,887 and 4,716,1 1 1 ; and PCT publications WO 98/46645, WO 98/50433, WO 98/24893, WO 98/16654, WO 96/34096, WO 96/33735, and WO 91/10741 ; each of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. Human antibodies can also be produced using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing functional endogenous immunoglobulins, but which can express human immunoglobulin genes. For example, the human heavy and light chain immunoglobulin gene complexes may be introduced randomly or by homologous recombination into mouse embryonic stem cells. Alternatively, the human variable region, constant region, and diversity region may be introduced into mouse embryonic stem cells in addition to the human heavy and light chain genes. The mouse heavy and light chain immunoglobulin genes may be rendered nonfunctional separately or simultaneously with the introduction of human immunoglobulin loci by homologous recombination. In particular, homozygous deletion of the JH region prevents endogenous antibody production. The modified embryonic stem cells are expanded and microinjected into blastocysts to produce chimeric mice. The chimeric mice are then bred to produce homozygous offspring which express human antibodies. The transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide of the invention. Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained from the immunized, transgenic mice using conventional hybridoma technology. The human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation. Thus, using such a technique, it is possible to produce therapeutically useful IgG, IgA, IgM and IgE antibodies. For an overview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonberg and Huszar, Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93 (1995). For a detailed discussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and human monoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies, see, e.g., PCT publications WO 98/24893; WO 92/01047; WO 96/34096; WO 96/33735; European Patent No. 0 598 877; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,413,923; 5,625,126; 5,633,425; 5,569,825; 5,661,016; 5,545,806; 5,814,318; 5,885,793; 5,916,771 ; and 5,939,598, which are incoφorated by reference herein in their entirety. In addition, companies such as Abgenix, Inc. (Freemont, CA) and Genpharm (San Jose, CA) can be engaged to provide human antibodies directed against a selected antigen using technology similar to that described above. Completely human antibodies which recognize a selected epitope can be generated using a technique referred to as "guided selection." In this approach a selected non-human monoclonal antibody, e.g., a mouse antibody, is used to guide the selection of a completely human antibody recognizing the same epitope. (Jespers et al., Bio/technology 12:899-903 (1988)). Further, antibodies to the polypeptides of the invention can, in turn, be utilized to generate anti-idiotype antibodies that "mimic" polypeptides of the invention using techniques well known to those skilled in the art. (See, e.g., Greenspan & Bona, FASEB J. 7(5):437-444; (1989) and Nissinoff, J. Immunol. 147(8):2429-2438 (1991)). For example, antibodies which bind to and competitively inhibit polypeptide multimerization and/or binding of a polypeptide of the invention to a ligand can be used to generate anti-idiotypes that "mimic" the polypeptide multimerization and/or binding domain and, as a consequence, bind to and neutralize polypeptide and/or its ligand. Such neutralizing anti-idiotypes or Fab fragments of such anti-idiotypes can be used in therapeutic regimens to neutralize polypeptide ligand. For example, such anti-idiotypic antibodies can be used to bind a polypeptide of the invention and/or to bind its ligands/receptors, and thereby block its biological activity. Polynucleotides Encoding Antibodies The invention further provides polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding an antibody of the invention and fragments thereof. The invention also encompasses polynucleotides that hybridize under stringent or alternatively, under lower stringency hybridization conditions, e.g., as defined supra, to polynucleotides that encode an antibody, preferably, that specifically binds to a polypeptide of the invention, preferably, an antibody that binds to a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y. The polynucleotides may be obtained, and the nucleotide sequence of the polynucleotides determined, by any method known in the art. For example, if the nucleotide sequence of the antibody is known, a polynucleotide encoding the antibody may be assembled from chemically synthesized oligonucleotides (e.g., as described in Kutmeier et al., BioTechniques 17:242 (1994)), which, briefly, involves the synthesis of overlapping oligonucleotides containing portions of the sequence encoding the antibody, annealing and ligating of those oligonucleotides, and then amplification of the ligated oligonucleotides by PCR. Alternatively, a polynucleotide encoding an antibody may be generated from nucleic acid from a suitable source. If a clone containing a nucleic acid encoding a particular antibody is not available, but the sequence of the antibody molecule is known, a nucleic acid encoding the immunoglobulin may be chemically synthesized or obtained from a suitable source (e.g., an antibody cDNA library, or a cDNA library generated from, or nucleic acid, preferably poly A+ RNA, isolated from, any tissue or cells expressing the antibody, such as hybridoma cells selected to express an antibody of the invention) by PCR amplification using synthetic primers hybridizable to the 3' and 5' ends of the sequence or by cloning using an oligonucleotide probe specific for the particular gene sequence to identify, e.g., a cDNA clone from a cDNA library that encodes the antibody. Amplified nucleic acids generated by PCR may then be cloned into replicable cloning vectors using any method well known in the art. Once the nucleotide sequence and corresponding amino acid sequence of the antibody is determined, the nucleotide sequence of the antibody may be manipulated using methods well known in the art for the manipulation of nucleotide sequences, e.g., recombinant DNA techniques, site directed mutagenesis, PCR, etc. (see, for example, the techniques described in Sambrook et al., 1990, Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, 2d Ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, NY and Ausubel et al., eds., 1998, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY, which are both incoφorated by reference herein in their entireties ), to generate antibodies having a different amino acid sequence, for example to create amino acid substitutions, deletions, and/or insertions. In a specific embodiment, the amino acid sequence of the heavy and/or light chain variable domains may be inspected to identify the sequences of the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) by methods that are well know in the art, e.g., by comparison to known amino acid sequences of other heavy and light chain variable regions to determine the regions of sequence hypervariability. Using routine recombinant DNA techniques, one or more of the CDRs may be inserted within framework regions, e.g., into human framework regions to humanize a non- human antibody, as described supra. The framework regions may be naturally occurring or consensus framework regions, and preferably human framework regions (see, e.g., Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol. 278: 457-479 (1998) for a listing of human framework regions). Preferably, the polynucleotide generated by the combination of the framework regions and CDRs encodes an antibody that specifically binds a polypeptide of the invention. Preferably, as discussed supra, one or more amino acid substitutions may be made within the framework regions, and, preferably, the amino acid substitutions improve binding of the antibody to its antigen. Additionally, such methods may be used to make amino acid substitutions or deletions of one or more variable region cysteine residues participating in an intrachain disulfide bond to generate antibody molecules lacking one or more intrachain disulfide bonds. Other alterations to the polynucleotide are encompassed by the present invention and within the skill of the art. In addition, techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies" (Morrison et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81 :851-855 (1984); Neuberger et al., Nature 312:604-608 (1984); Takeda et al., Nature 314:452-454 (1985)) by splicing genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used. As described supra, a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region, e.g., humanized antibodies. Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies (U.S. Patent No. 4,946,778; Bird, Science 242:423- 42 (1988); Huston et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:5879-5883 (1988); and Ward et al., Nature 334:544-54 (1989)) can be adapted to produce single chain antibodies. Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy and light chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge, resulting in a single chain polypeptide. Techniques for the assembly of functional Fv fragments in E. coli may also be used (Skerra et al., Science 242: 1038- 1041 (1988)). Methods of Producing Antibodies The antibodies of the invention can be produced by any method known in the art for the synthesis of antibodies, in particular, by chemical synthesis or preferably, by recombinant expression techniques. Recombinant expression of an antibody of the invention, or fragment, derivative or analog thereof, (e.g., a heavy or light chain of an antibody of the invention or a single chain antibody of the invention), requires construction of an expression vector containing a polynucleotide that encodes the antibody. Once a polynucleotide encoding an antibody molecule or a heavy or light chain of an antibody, or portion thereof (preferably containing the heavy or light chain variable domain), of the invention has been obtained, the vector for the production of the antibody molecule may be produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques well known in the art. Thus, methods for preparing a protein by expressing a polynucleotide containing an antibody encoding nucleotide sequence are described herein. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences and appropriate transcriptional and translational control signals. These methods include, for example, in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. The invention, thus, provides replicable vectors comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding an antibody molecule of the invention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, or a heavy or light chain variable domain, operably linked to a promoter. Such vectors may include the nucleotide sequence encoding the constant region of the antibody molecule (see, e.g., PCT Publication WO 86/05807; PCT Publication WO 89/01036; and U.S. Patent No. 5,122,464) and the variable domain of the antibody may be cloned into such a vector for expression of the entire heavy or light chain. The expression vector is transferred to a host cell by conventional techniques and the transfected cells are then cultured by conventional techniques to produce an antibody of the invention. Thus, the invention includes host cells containing a polynucleotide encoding an antibody of the invention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, or a single chain antibody of the invention, operably linked to a heterologous promoter. In preferred embodiments for the expression of double-chained antibodies, vectors encoding both the heavy and light chains may be co-expressed in the host cell for expression of the entire immunoglobulin molecule, as detailed below. A variety of host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express the antibody molecules of the invention. Such host-expression systems represent vehicles by which the coding sequences of interest may be produced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells which may, when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide coding sequences, express an antibody molecule of the invention in situ. These include but are not limited to microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E. coli, B. subtilis) transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; yeast (e.g., Saccharomyces, Pichia) transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing antibody coding sequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing antibody coding sequences; or mammalian cell systems (e.g., COS, CHO, BHK, 293, 3T3 cells) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter). Preferably, bacterial cells such as Escherichia coli, and more preferably, eukaryotic cells, especially for the expression of whole recombinant antibody molecule, are used for the expression of a recombinant antibody molecule. For example, mammalian cells such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO), in conjunction with a vector such as the major intermediate early gene promoter element from human cytomegalovirus is an effective expression system for antibodies (Foecking et al., Gene 45:101 (1986); Cockett et al., Bio/Technology 8:2 (1990)). In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the antibody molecule being expressed. For example, when a large quantity of such a protein is to be produced, for the generation of pharmaceutical compositions of an antibody molecule, vectors which direct the expression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readily purified may be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited, to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al., EMBO J. 2: 1791 (1983)), in which the antibody coding sequence may be ligated individually into the vector in frame with the lac Z coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, Nucleic Acids Res. 13:3101-3109 (1985); Van Heeke & Schuster, J. Biol. Chem. 24:5503- 5509 (1989)); and the like. pGEX vectors may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsoφtion and binding to matrix glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. The pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene product can be released from the GST moiety. In an insect system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes. The virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells. The antibody coding sequence may be cloned individually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter). In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems may be utilized. In cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, the antibody coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non- essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region El or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing the antibody molecule in infected hosts, (e.g., see Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81 :355-359 (1984)). Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted antibody coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety of origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. (see Bittner et al., Methods in Enzymol. 153:51-544 (1987)). In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen which modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g., glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein. Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post- translational processing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed. To this end, eukaryotic host cells which possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation. and phosphorylation of the gene product may be used. Such mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO, VERY, BHK, Hela, COS, MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, and in particular, breast cancer cell lines such as, for example, BT483, Hs578T, HTB2, BT20 and T47D, and normal mammary gland cell line such as, for example, CRL7030 and Hs578Bst. For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is preferred. For example, cell lines which stably express the antibody molecule may be engineered. Rather than using expression vectors which contain viral origins of replication, host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker. Following the introduction of the foreign DNA, engineered cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switched to a selective media. The selectable marker in the recombinant plasmid confers resistance to the selection and allows cells to stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes and grow to form foci which in turn can be cloned and expanded into cell lines. This method may advantageously be used to engineer cell lines which express the antibody molecule. Such engineered cell lines may be particularly useful in screening and evaluation of compounds that interact directly or indirectly with the antibody molecule. A number of selection systems may be used, including but not limited to the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., Cell 1 1 :223 (1977)), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska & Szybalski, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 48:202 (1992)), and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et al., Cell 22:817 (1980)) genes can be employed in tk-, hgprt- or aprt- cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for the following genes: dhfr, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al., Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:357 (1980); O'Hare et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78: 1527 (1981)); gpt, which confers resistance to mycophenolic acid (Mulligan & Berg, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:2072 (1981)); neo, which confers resistance to the aminoglycoside G- 418 Clinical Pharmacy 12:488-505; Wu and Wu, Biotherapy 3:87-95 (1991); Tolstoshev, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 32:573-596 (1993); Mulligan, Science 260:926-932 (1993); and Morgan and Anderson, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 62: 191 -217 (1993); May, 1993, TIB TECH 1 1(5): 155-215); and hygro, which confers resistance to hygromycin (Santerre et al.. Gene 30: 147 (1984)). Methods commonly known in the art of recombinant DNA technology may be routinely applied to select the desired recombinant clone, and such methods are described, for example, in Ausubel et al. (eds.), Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY (1993); Kriegler, Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY ( 1990); and in Chapters 12 and 13, Dracopoli et al. (eds), Current Protocols in Human Genetics, John Wiley & Sons, NY (1994); Colberre-Garapin et al., J. Mol. Biol. 150: 1 (1981), which are incoφorated by reference herein in their entireties. The expression levels of an antibody molecule can be increased by vector amplification (for a review, see Bebbington and Hentschel, The use of vectors based on gene amplification for the expression of cloned genes in mammalian cells in DNA cloning, Vol.3. (Academic Press, New York, 1987)). When a marker in the vector system expressing antibody is amplifiable, increase in the level of inhibitor present in culture of host cell will increase the number of copies of the marker gene. Since the amplified region is associated with the antibody gene, production of the antibody will also increase (Crouse et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 3:257 (1983)). The host cell may be co-transfected with two expression vectors of the invention, the first vector encoding a heavy chain derived polypeptide and the second vector encoding a light chain derived polypeptide. The two vectors may contain identical selectable markers which enable equal expression of heavy and light chain polypeptides. Alternatively, a single vector may be used which encodes, and is capable of expressing, both heavy and light chain polypeptides. In such situations, the light chain should be placed before the heavy chain to avoid an excess of toxic free heavy chain (Proudfoot, Nature 322:52 (1986); Kohler, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:2197 (1980)). The coding sequences for the heavy and light chains may comprise cDNA or genomic DNA. Once an antibody molecule of the invention has been produced by an animal, chemically synthesized, or recombinantly expressed, it may be purified by any method known in the art for purification of an immunoglobulin molecule, for example, by chromatography (e.g., ion exchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigen after Protein A, and sizing column chromatography), centrifugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of proteins. In addition, the antibodies of the present invention or fragments thereof can be fused to heterologous polypeptide sequences described herein or otherwise known in the art, to facilitate purification. The present invention encompasses antibodies recombinantly fused or chemically conjugated (including both covalently and non-covalently conjugations) to a polypeptide (or portion thereof, preferably at least 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 amino acids of the polypeptide) of the present invention to generate fusion proteins. The fusion does not necessarily need to be direct, but may occur through linker sequences. The antibodies may be specific for antigens other than polypeptides (or portion thereof, preferably at least 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 amino acids of the polypeptide) of the present invention. For example, antibodies may be used to target the polypeptides of the present invention to particular cell types, either in vitro or in vivo, by fusing or conjugating the polypeptides of the present invention to antibodies specific for particular cell surface receptors. Antibodies fused or conjugated to the polypeptides of the present invention may also be used in in vitro immunoassays and purification methods using methods known in the art. See e.g., Harbor et al., supra, and PCT publication WO 93/21232; EP 439,095; Naramura et al., Immunol. Lett. 39:91-99 (1994); U.S. Patent 5,474,981 ; Gillies et al., PNAS 89: 1428-1432 (1992); Fell et al., J. Immunol. 146:2446-2452(1991), which are incoφorated by reference in their entireties. The present invention further includes compositions comprising the polypeptides of the present invention fused or conjugated to antibody domains other than the variable regions. For example, the polypeptides of the present invention may be fused or conjugated to an antibody Fc region, or portion thereof. The antibody portion fused to a polypeptide of the present invention may comprise the constant region, hinge region, CH I domain, CH2 domain, and CH3 domain or any combination of whole domains or portions thereof. The polypeptides may also be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to form multimers. For example, Fc portions fused to the polypeptides of the present invention can form dimers through disulfide bonding between the Fc portions. Higher multimeric forms can be made by fusing the polypeptides to portions of IgA and IgM. Methods for fusing or conjugating the polypeptides of the present invention to antibody portions are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,336,603; 5,622,929; 5,359,046; 5,349,053; 5,447,851 ; 5,1 12,946; EP 307,434; EP 367,166; PCT publications WO 96/04388; WO 91/06570; Ashkenazi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88: 10535-10539 (1991); Zheng et al., J. Immunol. 154:5590-5600 (1995); and Vil et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89: 1 1337- 1 1341( 1992) (said references incorporated by reference in their entireties). As discussed, supra, the polypeptides corresponding to a polypeptide, polypeptide fragment, or a variant of SEQ ID NO:Y may be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to increase the in vivo half life of the polypeptides or for use in immunoassays using methods known in the art. Further, the polypeptides corresponding to SEQ ID NO:Y may be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to facilitate purification. One reported example describes chimeric proteins consisting of the first two domains of the human CD4-polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions of the heavy or light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins. (EP 394,827; Traunecker et al., Nature 331 :84-86 (1988). The polypeptides of the present invention fused or conjugated to an antibody having disulfide- linked dimeric structures (due to the IgG) may also be more efficient in binding and neutralizing other molecules, than the monomeric secreted protein or protein fragment alone. (Fountoulakis et al., J. Biochem. 270:3958-3964 (1995)). In many cases, the Fc part in a fusion protein is beneficial in therapy and diagnosis, and thus can result in, for example, improved pharmacokinetic properties. (EP A 232,262). Alternatively, deleting the Fc part after the fusion protein has been expressed, detected, and purified, would be desired. For example, the Fc portion may hinder therapy and diagnosis if the fusion protein is used as an antigen for immunizations. In drug discovery, for example, human proteins, such as hIL-5, have been fused with Fc portions for the puφose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists of hIL-5. (See, Bennett et al., J. Molecular Recognition 8:52-58 (1995); Johanson et al., J. Biol. Chem. 270:9459-9471 (1995). Moreover, the antibodies or fragments thereof of the present invention can be fused to marker sequences, such as a peptide to facilitate purification. In preferred embodiments, the marker amino acid sequence is a hexa-histidine peptide, such as the tag provided in a pQE vector (QIAGEN, Inc., 9259 Eton Avenue, Chatsworth, CA, 9131 1), among others, many of which are commercially available. As described in Gentz et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:821-824 (1989), for instance, hexa- histidine provides for convenient purification of the fusion protein. Other peptide tags useful for purification include, but are not limited to, the "HA" tag, which corresponds to an epitope derived from the influenza hemagglutinin protein (Wilson et al., Cell 37:767 (1984)) and the "flag" tag. The present invention further encompasses antibodies or fragments thereof conjugated to a diagnostic or therapeutic agent. The antibodies can be used diagnostically to, for example, monitor the development or progression of a tumor as part of a clinical testing procedure to, e.g., determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by coupling the antibody to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, radioactive materials, positron emitting metals using various positron emission tomographies, and nonradioactive paramagnetic metal ions. The detectable substance may be coupled or conjugated either directly to the antibody (or fragment thereof) or indirectly, through an intermediate (such as, for example, a linker known in the art) using techniques known in the art. See, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,741,900 for metal ions which can be conjugated to antibodies for use as diagnostics according to the present invention. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, Iuciferin, and aequorin; and examples of suitable radioactive material include 1251, 1311, 1 1 lln or 99Tc. Further, an antibody or fragment thereof may be conjugated to a therapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, e.g., a cytostatic or cytocidal agent, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion, e.g., alpha-emitters such as, for example, 213Bi. A cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells. Examples include paclitaxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1 - dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU), cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycin C, and cis- dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin), anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) and doxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents (e.g., vincristine and vinblastine). The conjugates of the invention can be used for modifying a given biological response, the therapeutic agent or drug moiety is not to be construed as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents. For example, the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing a desired biological activity. Such proteins may include, for example, a toxin such as abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin; a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, a-interferon, β-interferon, nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor, tissue plasminogen activator, an apoptotic agent, e.g., TNF-alpha, TNF-beta, AIM I (See, International Publication No. WO 97/33899), AIM II (See, International Publication No. WO 97/3491 1), Fas Ligand (Takahashi et al, Int. Immunol, 6: 1567-1574 ( 1994)), VEGI (See, International Publication No. WO 99/23105), a thrombotic agent or an anti- angiogenic agent, e.g., angiostatin or endostatin; or, biological response modifiers such as, for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1 ("IL-1 "), interleukin-2 ("IL-2"), interleukin-6 ("IL-6"), granulocyte macrophage colony stimulating factor ("GM- CSF"), granulocyte colony stimulating factor ("G-CSF"), or other growth factors. Antibodies may also be attached to solid supports, which are particularly useful for immunoassays or purification of the target antigen. Such solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass, cellulose, polyacrylamide, nylon, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride or polypropylene. Techniques for conjugating such therapeutic moiety to antibodies are well known, see, e.g., Arnon et al., "Monoclonal Antibodies For Immunotargeting Of Drugs In Cancer Therapy", in Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Reisfeld et al. (eds.), pp. 243-56 (Alan R. Liss, Inc. 1985); Hellstrom et al., "Antibodies For Drug Delivery", in Controlled Drug Delivery (2nd Ed.), Robinson et al. (eds.), pp. 623-53 (Marcel Dekker, Inc. 1987); Thoφe, "Antibody Carriers Of Cytotoxic Agents In Cancer Therapy: A Review", in Monoclonal Antibodies '84: Biological And Clinical Applications, Pinchera et al. (eds.), pp. 475-506 (1985); "Analysis, Results, And Future Prospective Of The Therapeutic Use Of Radiolabeled Antibody In Cancer Therapy", in Monoclonal Antibodies For Cancer Detection And Therapy, Baldwin et al. (eds.), pp. 303-16 (Academic Press 1985), and Thoφe et al., "The Preparation And Cytotoxic Properties Of Antibody-Toxin Conjugates", Immunol. Rev. 62: 1 19-58 (1982). Alternatively, an antibody can be conjugated to a second antibody to form an antibody heteroconjugate as described by Segal in U.S. Patent No. 4,676,980, which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. An antibody, with or without a therapeutic moiety conjugated to it, administered alone or in combination with cytotoxic factor(s) and/or cytokine(s) can be used as a therapeutic. Immunophenotyping The antibodies of the invention may be utilized for immunophenotyping of cell lines and biological samples. The translation product of the gene of the present invention may be useful as a cell specific marker, or more specifically as a cellular marker that is differentially expressed at various stages of differentiation and/or maturation of particular cell types. Monoclonal antibodies directed against a specific epitope, or combination of epitopes, will allow for the screening of cellular populations expressing the marker. Various techniques can be utilized using monoclonal antibodies to screen for cellular populations expressing the marker(s), and include magnetic separation using antibody-coated magnetic beads, "panning" with antibody attached to a solid matrix (i.e., plate), and flow cytometry (See, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,985,660; and Morrison et al, Cell, 96:131-49 (1999)). These techniques allow for the screening of particular populations of cells, such as might be found with hematological malignancies (i.e. minimal residual disease (MRD) in acute leukemic patients) and "non-self cells in transplantations to prevent Graft-versus-Host Disease (GVHD). Alternatively, these techniques allow for the screening of hematopoietic stem and progenitor cells capable of undergoing proliferation and/or differentiation, as might be found in human umbilical cord blood. Assays For Antibody Binding The antibodies of the invention may be assayed for immunospecific binding by any method known in the art. The immunoassays which can be used include but are not limited to competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as western blots, radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich" immunoassays, immunoprecipitation assays, precipitin reactions, gel diffusion precipitin reactions, immunodiffusion assays, agglutination assays, complement-fixation assays, immunoradiometric assays, fluorescent immunoassays, protein A immunoassays, to name but a few. Such assays are routine and well known in the art (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1 , John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, which is incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety). Exemplary immunoassays are described briefly below (but are not intended by way of limitation). Immunoprecipitation protocols generally comprise lysing a population of cells in a lysis buffer such as RIPA buffer (1% NP-40 or Triton X- 100, 1% sodium deoxycholate, 0.1% SDS, 0.15 M NaCl, 0.01 M sodium phosphate at pH 7.2, 1% Trasylol) supplemented with protein phosphatase and/or protease inhibitors (e.g., EDTA, PMSF, aprotinin, sodium vanadate), adding the antibody of interest to the cell lysate, incubating for a period of time (e.g., 1-4 hours) at 4° C, adding protein A and/or protein G sepharose beads to the cell lysate, incubating for about an hour or more at 4° C, washing the beads in lysis buffer and resuspending the beads in SDS/sample buffer. The ability of the antibody of interest to immunoprecipitate a particular antigen can be assessed by, e.g., western blot analysis. One of skill in the art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modified to increase the binding of the antibody to an antigen and decrease the background (e.g., pre-clearing the cell lysate with sepharose beads). For further discussion regarding immunoprecipitation protocols see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 10.16.1. Western blot analysis generally comprises preparing protein samples, electrophoresis of the protein samples in a polyacrylamide gel (e.g., 8%>- 20%) SDS- PAGE depending on the molecular weight of the antigen), transferring the protein sample from the polyacrylamide gel to a membrane such as nitrocellulose, PVDF or nylon, blocking the membrane in blocking solution (e.g., PBS with 3% BSA or nonfat milk), washing the membrane in washing buffer (e.g., PBS-Tween 20), blocking the membrane with primary antibody (the antibody of interest) diluted in blocking buffer, washing the membrane in washing buffer, blocking the membrane with a secondary antibody (which recognizes the primary antibody, e.g., an anti-human antibody) conjugated to an enzymatic substrate (e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase) or radioactive molecule (e.g., 32P or 1251) diluted in blocking buffer, washing the membrane in wash buffer, and detecting the presence of the antigen. One of skill in the art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modified to increase the signal detected and to reduce the background noise. For further discussion regarding western blot protocols see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 10.8.1. ELISAs comprise preparing antigen, coating the well of a 96 well microtiter plate with the antigen, adding the antibody of interest conjugated to a detectable compound such as an enzymatic substrate (e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase) to the well and incubating for a period of time, and detecting the presence of the antigen. In ELISAs the antibody of interest does not have to be conjugated to a detectable compound; instead, a second antibody (which recognizes the antibody of interest) conjugated to a detectable compound may be added to the well. Further, instead of coating the well with the antigen, the antibody may be coated to the well. In this case, a second antibody conjugated to a detectable compound may be added following the addition of the antigen of interest to the coated well. One of skill in the art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modified to increase the signal detected as well as other variations of ELISAs known in the art. For further discussion regarding ELISAs see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 1 1.2.1. The binding affinity of an antibody to an antigen and the off-rate of an antibody-antigen interaction can be determined by competitive binding assays. One example of a competitive binding assay is a radioimmunoassay comprising the incubation of labeled antigen (e.g., 3H or 1251) with the antibody of interest in the presence of increasing amounts of unlabeled antigen, and the detection of the antibody bound to the labeled antigen. The affinity of the antibody of interest for a particular antigen and the binding off-rates can be determined from the data by scatchard plot analysis. Competition with a second antibody can also be determined using radioimmunoassays. In this case, the antigen is incubated with antibody of interest conjugated to a labeled compound (e.g., 3H or 1251) in the presence of increasing amounts of an unlabeled second antibody. Therapeutic Uses The present invention is further directed to antibody-based therapies which involve administering antibodies of the invention to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, patient for treating one or more of the disclosed diseases, disorders, or conditions. Therapeutic compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, antibodies of the invention (including fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof as described herein) and nucleic acids encoding antibodies of the invention (including fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof and anti-idiotypic antibodies as described herein). The antibodies of the invention can be used to treat, inhibit or prevent diseases, disorders or conditions associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention, including, but not limited to, any one or more of the diseases, disorders, or conditions described herein. The treatment and/or prevention of diseases, disorders, or conditions associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention includes, but is not limited to, alleviating symptoms associated with those diseases, disorders or conditions. Antibodies of the invention may be provided in pharmaceutically acceptable compositions as known in the art or as described herein. A summary of the ways in which the antibodies of the present invention may be used therapeutically includes binding polynucleotides or polypeptides of the present invention locally or systemically in the body or by direct cytotoxicity of the antibody, e.g. as mediated by complement (CDC) or by effector cells (ADCC). Some of these approaches are described in more detail below. Armed with the teachings provided herein, one of ordinary skill in the art will know how to use the antibodies of the present invention for diagnostic, monitoring or therapeutic puφoses without undue experimentation. The antibodies of this invention may be advantageously utilized in combination with other monoclonal or chimeric antibodies, or with lymphokines or < hematopoietic growth factors (such as, e.g., IL-2, IL-3 and IL-7), for example, which serve to increase the number or activity of effector cells which interact with the antibodies. The antibodies of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with other types of treatments (e.g., radiation therapy, chemotherapy, hormonal therapy, immunotherapy and anti-tumor agents). Generally, administration of products of a species origin or species reactivity (in the case of antibodies) that is the same species as that of the patient is preferred. Thus, in a preferred embodiment, human antibodies, fragments derivatives, analogs, or nucleic acids, are administered to a human patient for therapy or prophylaxis. It is preferred to use high affinity and/or potent in vivo inhibiting and/or neutralizing antibodies against polypeptides or polynucleotides of the present invention, fragments or regions thereof, for both immunoassays directed to and therapy of disorders related to polynucleotides or polypeptides, including fragments thereof, of the present invention. Such antibodies, fragments, or regions, will preferably have an affinity for polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention, including fragments thereof. Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5 X 10 "2 M, 10 "2 M, 5 X 10 "3 M, 10 "3 M, 5 X 10 " 4 M, 10 "4 M, 5 X 10 "5 M, 10 "5 M, 5 X 10 '6 M, 10 "6 M, 5 X 10 "7 M, 10 "7 M, 5 X 10 '8 M, 10 "8 M, 5 X 10 "9 M, 10 "9 M, 5 X 10 "lϋ M, 10 "10 M, 5 X 10 " " M, 10 " 1 1 M, 5 X 10 "12 M, 10 "12 M, 5 X 10 "13 M, 10 " 13 M, 5 X 10 "14 M, 10 "14 M, 5 X 10 "15 M, and 10 "15 M. Gene Therapy In a specific embodiment, nucleic acids comprising sequences encoding antibodies or functional derivatives thereof, are administered to treat, inhibit or prevent a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention, by way of gene therapy. Gene therapy refers to therapy performed by the administration to a subject of an expressed or expressible nucleic acid. In this embodiment of the invention, the nucleic acids produce their encoded protein that mediates a therapeutic effect. Any of the methods for gene therapy available in the art can be used according to the present invention. Exemplary methods are described below. For general reviews of the methods of gene therapy, see Goldspiel et al., Clinical Pharmacy 12:488-505 (1993); Wu and Wu, Biotherapy 3:87-95 (1991); Tolstoshev, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 32:573-596 (1993); Mulligan, Science 260:926-932 (1993); and Morgan and Anderson, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 62: 191-217 (1993); May, TIBTECH 1 1(5): 155-215 (1993). Methods commonly known in the art of recombinant DNA technology which can be used are described in Ausubel et al. (eds.), Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY (1993); and Kriegler, Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY (1990). In a preferred aspect, the compound comprises nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody, said nucleic acid sequences being part of expression vectors that express the antibody or fragments or chimeric proteins or heavy or light chains thereof in a suitable host. In particular, such nucleic acid sequences have promoters operably linked to the antibody coding region, said promoter being inducible or constitutive, and, optionally, tissue-specific. In another particular embodiment, nucleic acid molecules are used in which the antibody coding sequences and any other desired sequences are flanked by regions that promote homologous recombination at a desired site in the genome, thus providing for intrachromosomal expression of the antibody encoding nucleic acids (Koller and Smithies, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989); Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 (1989). In specific embodiments, the expressed antibody molecule is a single chain antibody; alternatively, the nucleic acid sequences include sequences encoding both the heavy and light chains, or fragments thereof, of the antibody. Delivery of the nucleic acids into a patient may be either direct, in which case the patient is directly exposed to the nucleic acid or nucleic acid- carrying vectors, or indirect, in which case, cells are first transformed with the nucleic acids in vitro, then transplanted into the patient. These two approaches are known, respectively, as in vivo or ex vivo gene therapy. In a specific embodiment, the nucleic acid sequences are directly administered in vivo, where it is expressed to produce the encoded product. This can be accomplished by any of numerous methods known in the art, e.g., by constructing them as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that they become intracellular, e.g., by infection using defective or attenuated retrovirals or other viral vectors (see U.S. Patent No. 4,980,286), or by direct injection of naked DNA, or by use of microparticle bombardment (e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont), or coating with lipids or cell-surface receptors or transfecting agents, encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, or microcapsules, or by administering them in linkage to a peptide which is known to enter the nucleus, by administering it in linkage to a ligand subject to receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432 (1987)) (which can be used to target cell types specifically expressing the receptors), etc. In another embodiment, nucleic acid-ligand complexes can be formed in which the ligand comprises a fusogenic viral peptide to disrupt endosomes, allowing the nucleic acid to avoid lysosomal degradation. In yet another embodiment, the nucleic acid can be targeted in vivo for cell specific uptake and expression, by targeting a specific receptor (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 92/06180; WO 92/22635; WO92/20316; WO93/14188, WO 93/20221). Alternatively, the nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly and incoφorated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous recombination (Koller and Smithies, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989); Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 (1989)). In a specific embodiment, viral vectors that contains nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody of the invention are used. For example, a retroviral vector can be used (see Miller et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:581-599 (1993)). These retroviral vectors contain the components necessary for the correct packaging of the viral genome and integration into the host cell DNA. The nucleic acid sequences encoding the antibody to be used in gene therapy are cloned into one or more vectors, which facilitates delivery of the gene into a patient. More detail about retroviral vectors can be found in Boesen et al., Biotherapy 6:291-302 (1994), which describes the use of a retroviral vector to deliver the mdrl gene to hematopoietic stem cells in order to make the stem cells more resistant to chemotherapy. Other references illustrating the use of retroviral vectors in gene therapy are: Clowes et al., J. Clin. Invest. 93:644- 651 ( 1994); Kiem et al., Blood 83: 1467-1473 (1994); Salmons and Gunzberg, Human Gene Therapy 4: 129-141 (1993); and Grossman and Wilson, Curr. Opin. in Genetics and Devel. 3: 1 10-1 14 (1993). Adenoviruses are other viral vectors that can be used in gene therapy. Adenoviruses are especially attractive vehicles for delivering genes to respiratory epithelia. Adenoviruses naturally infect respiratory epithelia where they cause a mild disease. Other targets for adenovirus-based delivery systems are liver, the central nervous system, endothelial cells, and muscle. Adenoviruses have the advantage of being capable of infecting non-dividing cells. Kozarsky and Wilson, Current Opinion in Genetics and Development 3:499-503 ( 1993) present a review of adenovirus-based gene therapy. Bout et al., Human Gene Therapy 5:3-10 (1994) demonstrated the use of adenovirus vectors to transfer genes to the respiratory epithelia of rhesus monkeys. Other instances of the use of adenoviruses in gene therapy can be found in Rosenfeld et al., Science 252:431-434 (1991); Rosenfeld et al., Cell 68: 143- 155 (1992); Mastrangeli et al., J. Clin. Invest. 91 :225-234 (1993); PCT Publication WO94/12649; and Wang, et al., Gene Therapy 2:775-783 (1995). In a preferred embodiment, adenovirus vectors are used. Adeno-associated virus (AAV) has also been proposed for use in gene therapy (Walsh et al., Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 204:289-300 (1993); U.S. Patent No. 5,436,146). Another approach to gene therapy involves transferring a gene to cells in tissue culture by such methods as electroporation, lipofection, calcium phosphate mediated transfection, or viral infection. Usually, the method of transfer includes the transfer of a selectable marker to the cells. The cells are then placed under selection to isolate those cells that have taken up and are expressing the transferred gene. Those cells are then delivered to a patient. In this embodiment, the nucleic acid is introduced into a cell prior to administration in vivo of the resulting recombinant cell. Such introduction can be carried out by any method known in the art, including but not limited to transfection, electroporation, microinjection, infection with a viral or bacteriophage vector containing the nucleic acid sequences, cell fusion, chromosome-mediated gene transfer, microcell-mediated gene transfer, spheroplast fusion, etc. Numerous techniques are known in the art for the introduction of foreign genes into cells (see, e.g., Loeffler and Behr, Meth. Enzymol. 217:599-618 (1993); Cohen et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:618-644 (1993); Cline, Pharmac. Ther. 29:69-92m (1985) and may be used in accordance with the present invention, provided that the necessary developmental and physiological functions of the recipient cells are not disrupted. The technique should provide for the stable transfer of the nucleic acid to the cell, so that the nucleic acid is expressible by the cell and preferably heritable and expressible by its cell progeny. The resulting recombinant cells can be delivered to a patient by various methods known in the art. Recombinant blood cells (e.g., hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells) are preferably administered intravenously. The amount of cells envisioned for use depends on the desired effect, patient state, etc., and can be determined by one skilled in the art. Cells into which a nucleic acid can be introduced for puφoses of gene therapy encompass any desired, available cell type, and include but are not limited to epithelial cells, endothelial cells, keratinocytes, fibroblasts, muscle cells, hepatocytes; blood cells such as Tlymphocytes, Blymphocytes, monocytes, macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils, megakaryocytes, granulocytes; various stem or progenitor cells, in particular hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells, e.g., as obtained from bone marrow, umbilical cord blood, peripheral blood, fetal liver, etc. In a preferred embodiment, the cell used for gene therapy is autologous to the patient. In an embodiment in which recombinant cells are used in gene therapy, nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody are introduced into the cells such that they are expressible by the cells or their progeny, and the recombinant cells are then administered in vivo for therapeutic effect. In a specific embodiment, stem or progenitor cells are used. Any stem and/or progenitor cells which can be isolated and maintained in vitro can potentially be used in accordance with this embodiment of the present invention (see e.g. PCT Publication WO 94/08598; Stemple and Anderson, Cell 71 :973-985 (1992); Rheinwald, Meth. Cell Bio. 21A:229 (1980); and Pittelkow and Scott, Mayo Clinic Proc. 61 :771 (1986)). In a specific embodiment, the nucleic acid to be introduced for puφoses of gene therapy comprises an inducible promoter operably linked to the coding region, such that expression of the nucleic acid is controllable by controlling the presence or absence of the appropriate inducer of transcription. Demonstration of Therapeutic or Prophylactic Activity The compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are preferably tested in vitro, and then in vivo for the desired therapeutic or prophylactic activity, prior to use in humans. For example, in vitro assays to demonstrate the therapeutic or prophylactic utility of a compound or pharmaceutical composition include, the effect of a compound on a cell line or a patient tissue sample. The effect of the compound or composition on the cell line and/or tissue sample can be determined utilizing techniques known to those of skill in the art including, but not limited to, rosette formation assays and cell lysis assays. In accordance with the invention, in vitro assays which can be used to determine whether administration of a specific compound is indicated, include in vitro cell culture assays in which a patient tissue sample is grown in culture, and exposed to or otherwise administered a compound, and the effect of such compound upon the tissue sample is observed. Therapeutic/Prophylactic Administration and Composition The invention provides methods of treatment, inhibition and prophylaxis by administration to a subject of an effective amount of a compound or pharmaceutical composition of the invention, preferably a polypeptide or antibody of the invention. In a preferred aspect, the compound is substantially purified (e.g., substantially free from substances that limit its effect or produce undesired side-effects). The subject is preferably an animal, including but not limited to animals such as cows, pigs, horses, chickens, cats, dogs, etc., and is preferably a mammal, and most preferably human. Formulations and methods of administration that can be employed when the compound comprises a nucleic acid or an immunoglobulin are described above; additional appropriate formulations and routes of administration can be selected from among those described herein below. Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a compound of the invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, recombinant cells capable of expressing the compound, receptor- mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432 (1987)), construction of a nucleic acid as part of a retroviral or other vector, etc. Methods of introduction include but are not limited to intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, and oral routes. The compounds or compositions may be administered by any convenient route, for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absoφtion through epithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with other biologically active agents. Administration can be systemic or local. In addition, it may be desirable to introduce the pharmaceutical compounds or compositions of the invention into the central nervous system by any suitable route, including intraventricular and intrathecal injection; intraventricular injection may be facilitated by an intraventricular catheter, for example, attached to a reservoir, such as an Ommaya reservoir. Pulmonary administration can also be employed, e.g., by use of an inhaler or nebulizer, and formulation with an aerosolizing agent. In a specific embodiment, it may be desirable to administer the pharmaceutical compounds or compositions of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion during surgery, topical application, e.g., in conjunction with a wound dressing after surgery, by injection, by means of a catheter, by means of a suppository, or by means of an implant, said implant being of a porous, non-porous, or gelatinous material, including membranes, such as sialastic membranes, or fibers. Preferably, when administering a protein, including an antibody, of the invention, care must be taken to use materials to which the protein does not absorb. In another embodiment, the compound or composition can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353- 365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid.) In yet another embodiment, the compound or composition can be delivered in a controlled release system. In one embodiment, a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 ( 1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321 :574 (1989)). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J., Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61 (1983); see also Levy et al., Science 228: 190 (1985); During et al, Ann. Neurol. 25:351 (1989); Howard et al., J.Neurosurg. 71 : 105 (1989)). In yet another embodiment, a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 1 15-138 (1984)). Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990)). In a specific embodiment where the compound of the invention is a nucleic acid encoding a protein, the nucleic acid can be administered in vivo to promote expression of its encoded protein, by constructing it as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that it becomes intracellular, e.g., by use of a retroviral vector (see U.S. Patent No. 4,980,286), or by direct injection, or by use of microparticle bombardment (e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont), or coating with lipids or cell-surface receptors or transfecting agents, or by administering it in linkage to a homeobox- like peptide which is known to enter the nucleus (see e.g., Joliot et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88: 1864-1868 (1991)), etc. Alternatively, a nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly and incoφorated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous recombination. The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions. Such compositions comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In a specific embodiment, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable" means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans. The term "carrier" refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. The composition, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents. These compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. The composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and carriers such as triglycerides. Oral formulation can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences" by E.W. Martin. Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the compound, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient. The formulation should suit the mode of administration. In a preferred embodiment, the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to human beings. Typically, compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer. Where necessary, the composition may also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection. Generally, the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration. The compounds of the invention can be formulated as neutral or salt forms. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those formed with anions such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with cations such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferric hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc. The amount of the compound of the invention which will be effective in the treatment, inhibition and prevention of a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention can be determined by standard clinical techniques. In addition, in vitro assays may optionally be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges. The precise dose to be employed in the formulation will also depend on the route of administration, and the seriousness of the disease or disorder, and should be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each patient's circumstances. Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems. For antibodies, the dosage administered to a patient is typically 0.1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg of the patient's body weight. Preferably, the dosage administered to a patient is between 0.1 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg of the patient's body weight, more preferably 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg of the patient's body weight. Generally, human antibodies have a longer half-life within the human body than antibodies from other species due to the immune response to the foreign polypeptides. Thus, lower dosages of human antibodies and less frequent administration is often possible. Further, the dosage and frequency of administration of antibodies of the invention may be reduced by enhancing uptake and tissue penetration (e.g., into the brain) of the antibodies by modifications such as, for example, lipidation. The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration. Diagnosis and Imaging Labeled antibodies, and derivatives and analogs thereof, which specifically bind to a polypeptide of interest can be used for diagnostic puφoses to detect, diagnose, or monitor diseases, disorders, and/or conditions associated with the aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention. The invention provides for the detection of aberrant expression of a polypeptide of interest, comprising (a) assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest in cells or body fluid of an individual using one or more antibodies specific to the polypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of gene expression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of aberrant expression. The invention provides a diagnostic assay for diagnosing a disorder, comprising (a) assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest in cells or body fluid of an individual using one or more antibodies specific to the polypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of gene expression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a particular disorder. With respect to cancer, the presence of a relatively high amount of transcript in biopsied tissue from an individual may indicate a predisposition for the development of the disease, or may provide a means for detecting the disease prior to the appearance of actual clinical symptoms. A more definitive diagnosis of this type may allow health professionals to employ preventative measures or aggressive treatment earlier thereby preventing the development or further progression of the cancer. Antibodies of the invention can be used to assay protein levels in a biological sample using classical immunohistological methods known to those of skill in the art (e.g., see Jalkanen, et al., J. Cell. Biol. 101 :976-985 ( 1985); Jalkanen, et al., J. Cell . Biol. 105:3087-3096 (1987)). Other antibody-based methods useful for detecting protein gene expression include immunoassays, such as the enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and the radioimmunoassay (RIA). Suitable antibody assay labels are known in the art and include enzyme labels, such as, glucose oxidase; radioisotopes, such as iodine (1251, 1211), carbon (14C), sulfur (35S), tritium (3H), indium (1 12In), and technetium (99Tc); luminescent labels, such as luminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin. One aspect of the invention is the detection and diagnosis of a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression of a polypeptide of interest in an animal, preferably a mammal and most preferably a human. In one embodiment, diagnosis comprises: a) administering (for example, parenterally, subcutaneously, or intraperitoneally) to a subject an effective amount of a labeled molecule which specifically binds to the polypeptide of interest; b) waiting for a time interval following the administering for permitting the labeled molecule to preferentially concentrate at sites in the subject where the polypeptide is expressed (and for unbound labeled molecule to be cleared to background level); c) determining background level; and d) detecting the labeled molecule in the subject, such that detection of labeled molecule above the background level indicates that the subject has a particular disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression of the polypeptide of interest. Background level can be determined by various methods including, comparing the amount of labeled molecule detected to a standard value previously determined for a particular system. It will be understood in the art that the size of the subject and the imaging system used will determine the quantity of imaging moiety needed to produce diagnostic images. In the case of a radioisotope moiety, for a human subject, the quantity of radioactivity injected will normally range from about 5 to 20 millicuries of 99mTc. The labeled antibody or antibody fragment will then preferentially accumulate at the location of cells which contain the specific protein. In vivo tumor imaging is described in S.W. Burchiel et al., "Immunopharmacokinetics of Radiolabeled Antibodies and Their Fragments." (Chapter 13 in Tumor Imaging: The Radiochemical Detection of Cancer, S.W. Burchiel and B. A. Rhodes, eds., Masson Publishing Inc. (1982). Depending on several variables, including the type of label used and the mode of administration, the time interval following the administration for permitting the labeled molecule to preferentially concentrate at sites in the subject and for unbound labeled molecule to be cleared to background level is 6 to 48 hours or 6 to 24 hours or 6 to 12 hours. In another embodiment the time interval following administration is 5 to 20 days or 5 to 10 days. In an embodiment, monitoring of the disease or disorder is carried out by repeating the method for diagnosing the disease or disease, for example, one month after initial diagnosis, six months after initial diagnosis, one year after initial diagnosis, etc. Presence of the labeled molecule can be detected in the patient using methods known in the art for in vivo scanning. These methods depend upon the type of label used. Skilled artisans will be able to determine the appropriate method for detecting a particular label. Methods and devices that may be used in the diagnostic methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, computed tomography (CT), whole body scan such as position emission tomography (PET), magnetic resonance imaging (MR1), and sonography. In a specific embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a radioisotope and is detected in the patient using a radiation responsive surgical instrument (Thurston et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,441,050). In another embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a fluorescent compound and is detected in the patient using a fluorescence responsive scanning instrument. In another embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a positron emitting metal and is detected in the patent using positron emission-tomography. In yet another embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a paramagnetic label and is detected in a patient using magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). Kits The present invention provides kits that can be used in the above methods. In one embodiment, a kit comprises an antibody of the invention, preferably a purified antibody, in one or more containers. In a specific embodiment, the kits of the present invention contain a substantially isolated polypeptide comprising an epitope which is specifically immunoreactive with an antibody included in the kit. Preferably, the kits of the present invention further comprise a control antibody which does not react with the polypeptide of interest. In another specific embodiment, the kits of the present invention contain a means for detecting the binding of an antibody to a polypeptide of interest (e.g., the antibody may be conjugated to a detectable substrate such as a fluorescent compound, an enzymatic substrate, a radioactive compound or a luminescent compound, or a second antibody which recognizes the first antibody may be conjugated to a detectable substrate). In another specific embodiment of the present invention, the kit is a diagnostic kit for use in screening serum containing antibodies specific against prohferative and/or cancerous polynucleotides and polypeptides Such a kit may include a control antibody that does not react with the polypeptide of interest Such a kit may include a substantially isolated polypeptide antigen comprising an epitope which is specifically immunoreactive with at least one anti-polypeptide antigen antibody Further, such a kit includes means for detecting the binding of said antibody to the antigen (e g , the antibody may be conjugated to a fluorescent compound such as fluorescein or rhodamine which can be detected by flow cytometry) In specific embodiments, the kit may include a recombinantly produced or chemically synthesized polypeptide antigen The polypeptide antigen of the kit may also be attached to a solid support In a more specific embodiment the detecting means of the above-described kit includes a solid support to which said polypeptide antigen is attached Such a kit may also include a non-attached reporter-labeled anti-human antibody In this embodiment, binding of the antibody to the polypeptide antigen can be detected by binding of the said reporter-labeled antibody In an additional embodiment, the invention includes a diagnostic kit for use in screening serum containing antigens of the polypeptide of the invention The diagnostic kit includes a substantially isolated antibody specifically immunoreactive with polypeptide or polynucleotide antigens, and means for detecting the binding of the polynucleotide or polypeptide antigen to the antibody In one embodiment, the antibody is attached to a solid support In a specific embodiment, the antibody may be a monoclonal antibody The detecting means of the kit may include a second, labeled monoclonal antibody Alternatively, or in addition, the detecting means may include a labeled, competing antigen In one diagnostic configuration, test serum is reacted with a solid phase reagent having a surface-bound antigen obtained by the methods of the present invention After binding with specific antigen antibody to the reagent and removing unbound serum components by washing, the reagent is reacted with reporter-labeled anti-human antibody to bind reporter to the reagent in proportion to the amount of bound anti-antigen antibody on the solid support. The reagent is again washed to remove unbound labeled antibody, and the amount of reporter associated with the reagent is determined. Typically, the reporter is an enzyme which is detected by incubating the solid phase in the presence of a suitable fluorometric, luminescent or colorimetric substrate (Sigma, St. Louis, MO). The solid surface reagent in the above assay is prepared by known techniques for attaching protein material to solid support material, such as polymeric beads, dip sticks, 96-well plate or filter material. These attachment methods generally include non-specific adsoφtion of the protein to the support or covalent attachment of the protein, typically through a free amine group, to a chemically reactive group on the solid support, such as an activated carboxyl, hydroxyl, or aldehyde group. Alternatively, streptavidin coated plates can be used in conjunction with biotinylated antigen(s). Thus, the invention provides an assay system or kit for carrying out this diagnostic method. The kit generally includes a support with surface- bound recombinant antigens, and a reporter-labeled anti-human antibody for detecting surface-bound anti-antigen antibody. Uses of the Polynucleotides Each of the polynucleotides identified herein can be used in numerous ways as reagents. The following description should be considered exemplary and utilizes known techniques. The lung cancer antigen polynucleotides of the present invention are useful for chromosome identification. There exists an ongoing need to identify new chromosome markers, since few chromosome marking reagents, based on actual sequence data (repeat polymoφhisms), are presently available. Each sequence is specifically targeted to and can hybridize with a particular location on an individual human chromosome, thus each polynucleotide of the present invention can routinely be used as a chromosome marker using techniques known in the art. Briefly, sequences can be mapped to chromosomes by preparing PCR primers (preferably at least 15 bp (e.g., 15-25 bp) from the sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:X, or the complement thereto. Primers can optionally be selected using computer analysis so that primers do not span more than one predicted exon in the genomic DNA. These primers are then used for PCR screening of somatic cell hybrids containing individual human chromosomes. Only those hybrids containing the human gene corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X will yield an amplified fragment. Similarly, somatic hybrids provide a rapid method of PCR mapping the polynucleotides to particular chromosomes. Three or more clones can be assigned per day using a single thermal cycler. Moreover, sublocalization of the polynucleotides can be achieved with panels of specific chromosome fragments. Other gene mapping strategies that can be used include in situ hybridization, prescreening with labeled flow-sorted chromosomes, preselection by hybridization to construct chromosome specific-cDNA libraries, and computer mapping techniques (See, e.g., Shuler, Trends Biotechnol 16:456-459 (1998) which is hereby incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Precise chromosomal location of the polynucleotides can also be achieved using fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH) of a metaphase chromosomal spread. This technique uses polynucleotides as short as 500 or 600 bases; however, polynucleotides 2,000-4,000 bp are preferred. For a review of this technique, see Verma et al., "Human Chromosomes: a Manual of Basic Techniques," Pergamon Press, New York (1988). For chromosome mapping, the polynucleotides can be used individually (to mark a single chromosome or a single site on that chromosome) or in panels (for marking multiple sites and/or multiple chromosomes). Thus, the present invention also provides a method for chromosomal localization which involves (a) preparing PCR primers from the polynucleotide sequences in Table 3 and SEQ ID NO:X and (b) screening somatic cell hybrids containing individual chromosomes. The polynucleotides of the present invention would likewise be useful for radiation hybrid mapping, HAPPY mapping, and long range restriction mapping. For a review of these techniques and others known in the art, see, e.g. Dear, "Genome Mapping: A Practical Approach," 1RL Press at Oxford University Press, London (1997); Aydin, J. Mol. Med. 77:691-694 (1999); Hacia et al., Mol. Psychiatry 3:483- 492 (1998); Herrick et al., Chromosome Res. 7:409-423 (1999); Hamilton et al., Methods Cell Biol. 62:265-280 (2000); and/or Ott, J. Hered. 90:68-70 (1999) each of which is hereby incoφorated by reference in its entirety. Once a polynucleotide has been mapped to a precise chromosomal location, the physical position of the polynucleotide can be used in linkage analysis. Linkage analysis establishes coinheritance between a chromosomal location and presentation of a particular disease. (Disease mapping data are found, for example, in V. McKusick, Mendelian Inheritance in Man (available on line through Johns Hopkins University Welch Medical Library).) Assuming 1 megabase mapping resolution and one gene per 20 kb, a cDNA precisely localized to a chromosomal region associated with the disease could be one of 50-500 potential causative genes. Thus, once coinheritance is established, differences in a polynucleotide of the invention and the corresponding gene between affected and unaffected individuals can be examined. First, visible structural alterations in the chromosomes, such as deletions or translocations, are examined in chromosome spreads or by PCR. If no structural alterations exist, the presence of point mutations are ascertained. Mutations observed in some or all affected individuals, but not in normal individuals, indicates that the mutation may cause the disease. However, complete sequencing of the polypeptide and the corresponding gene from several normal individuals is required to distinguish the mutation from a polymoφhism. If a new polymoφhism is identified, this polymoφhic polypeptide can be used for further linkage analysis. Furthermore, increased or decreased expression of the gene in affected individuals as compared to unaffected individuals can be assessed using the polynucleotides of the invention. Any of these alterations (altered expression, chromosomal rearrangement, or mutation) can be used as a diagnostic or prognostic marker. Thus, the invention provides a method of detecting increased or decreased expression levels of the lung cancer polynucleotides in affected individuals as compared to unaffected individuals using polynucleotides of the present invention and techniques known in the art, including but not limited to the method described in Example 1 1. Any of these alterations (altered expression, chromosomal rearrangement, or mutation) can be used as a diagnostic or prognostic marker. Thus, the invention also provides a diagnostic method useful during diagnosis of a lung related disorder, including lung cancer, involving measuring the expression level of lung cancer polynucleotides in lung tissue or other cells or body fluid from an individual and comparing the measured gene expression level with a standard lung cancer polynucleotide expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the gene expression level compared to the standard is indicative of a lung related disorder. In still another embodiment, the invention includes a kit for analyzing samples for the presence of proliferative and/or cancerous polynucleotides derived from a test subject. In a general embodiment, the kit includes at least one polynucleotide probe containing a nucleotide sequence that will specifically hybridize with a polynucleotide of the invention and a suitable container. In a specific embodiment, the kit includes two polynucleotide probes defining an internal region of the polynucleotide of the invention, where each probe has one strand containing a 31 'mer-end internal to the region. In a further embodiment, the probes may be useful as primers for polymerase chain reaction amplification. Where a diagnosis of a lung related disorder, including, for example, diagnosis of a tumor, has already been made according to conventional methods, the present invention is useful as a prognostic indicator, whereby patients exhibiting enhanced or depressed lung cancer polynucleotide expression will experience a worse clinical outcome relative to patients expressing the gene at a level nearer the standard level. By "measuring the expression level of lung cancer polynucleotides" is intended qualitatively or quantitatively measuring or estimating the level of the lung cancer polypeptide or the level of the mRNA encoding the lung cancer polypeptide in a first biological sample either directly (e.g., by determining or estimating absolute protein level or mRNA level) or relatively (e.g., by comparing to the lung cancer polypeptide level or mRNA level in a second biological sample). Preferably, the lung cancer polypeptide level or mRNA level in the first biological sample is measured or estimated and compared to a standard lung cancer polypeptide level or mRNA level, the standard being taken from a second biological sample obtained from an individual not having the lung related disorder or being determined by averaging levels from a population of individuals not having a lung related disorder. As will be appreciated in the art, once a standard lung cancer polypeptide level or mRNA level is known, it can be used repeatedly as a standard for comparison. By "biological sample" is intended any biological sample obtained from an individual, body fluid, cell line, tissue culture, or other source which contains lung cancer polypeptide or the corresponding mRNA. As indicated, biological samples include body fluids (such as sputum, lymph, sera, plasma, urine, synovial fluid and spinal fluid) which contain the lung cancer polypeptide, lung tissue, and other tissue sources found to express the lung cancer polypeptide. Methods for obtaining tissue biopsies and body fluids from mammals are well known in the art. Where the biological sample is to include mRNA, a tissue biopsy is the preferred source. The method(s) provided above may preferrably be applied in a diagnostic method and/or kits in which polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention are attached to a solid support. In one exemplary method, the support may be a "gene chip" or a "biological chip" as described in US Patents 5,837,832, 5,874,219, and 5,856,174. Further, such a gene chip with lung cancer polynucleotides attached may be used to identify polymorphisms between the lung cancer polynucleotide sequences, with polynucleotides isolated from a test subject. The knowledge of such polymoφhisms (i.e. their location, as well as, their existence) would be beneficial in identifying disease loci for many disorders, such as for example, in neural disorders, immune system disorders, muscular disorders, reproductive disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, pulmonary disorders, cardiovascular disorders, renal disorders, proliferative disorders, and/or cancerous diseases and conditions, though most preferably in lung related proliferative, and/or cancerous diseases and conditions. Such a method is described in US Patents 5,858,659 and 5,856,104. The US Patents referenced supra are hereby incoφorated by reference in their entirety herein. The present invention encompasses lung cancer polynucleotides that are chemically synthesized, or reproduced as peptide nucleic acids (PNA), or according to other methods known in the art. The use of PNAs would serve as the preferred form if the polynucleotides of the invention are incoφorated onto a solid support, or gene chip. For the puφoses of the present invention, a peptide nucleic acid (PNA) is a polyamide type of DNA analog and the monomeric units for adenine, guanine, thymine and cytosine are available commercially (Perceptive Biosystems). Certain components of DNA, such as phosphorus, phosphorus oxides, or deoxyribose derivatives, are not present in PNAs. As disclosed by P. E. Nielsen, M. Egholm, R. H. Berg and O. Buchardt, Science 254, 1497 (1991); and M. Egholm, O. Buchardt, L.Christensen, C. Behrens, S. M. Freier, D. A. Driver, R. H. Berg, S. K. Kim, B. Norden, and P. E. Nielsen, Nature 365, 666 (1993), PNAs bind specifically and tightly to complementary DNA strands and are not degraded by nucleases. In fact, PNA binds more strongly to DNA than DNA itself does. This is probably because there is no electrostatic repulsion between the two strands, and also the polyamide backbone is more flexible. Because of this, PNA/DNA duplexes bind under a wider range of stringency conditions than DNA/DNA duplexes, making it easier to perform multiplex hybridization. Smaller probes can be used than with DNA due to the strong binding. In addition, it is more likely that single base mismatches can be determined with PNA/DNA hybridization because a single mismatch in a PNA/DNA 15-mer lowers the melting point (T.sub.m) by 8°-20° C, vs. 4°-16° C for the DNA/DNA 15- mer duplex. Also, the absence of charge groups in PNA means that hybridization can be done at low ionic strengths and reduce possible interference by salt during the analysis. The present invention have uses which include, but are not limited to, detecting cancer in mammals. In particular the invention is useful during diagnosis of pathological cell proliferative neoplasias which include, but are not limited to: acute myelogenous leukemias including acute monocytic leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, acute myelomonocytic leukemia, acute erythroleukemia, acute megakaryocytic leukemia, and acute undifferentiated leukemia, etc.; and chronic myelogenous leukemias including chronic myelomonocytic leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia, etc. Preferred mammals include monkeys, apes, cats, dogs, cows, pigs, horses, rabbits and humans. Particularly preferred are humans. Pathological cell proliferative disorders are often associated with inappropriate activation of proto-oncogenes. (Gelmann, E. P. et al., "The Etiology of Acute Leukemia: Molecular Genetics and Viral Oncology," in Neoplastic Diseases of the Blood, Vol 1., Wiernik, P. H. et al. eds., 161-182 (1985)). Neoplasias are now believed to result from the qualitative alteration of a normal cellular gene product, or from the quantitative modification of gene expression by insertion into the chromosome of a viral sequence, by chromosomal translocation of a gene to a more actively transcribed region, or by some other mechanism. (Gelmann et al., supra) It is likely that mutated or altered expression of specific genes is involved in the pathogenesis of some leukemias, among other tissues and cell types. (Gelmann et al., supra) Indeed, the human counteφarts of the oncogenes involved in some animal neoplasias have been amplified or translocated in some cases of human leukemia and carcinoma. (Gelmann et al., supra) For example, c-myc expression is highly amplified in the non-lymphocytic leukemia cell line HL-60. When HL-60 cells are chemically induced to stop proliferation, the level of c-myc is found to be downregulated. (International Publication Number WO 91/15580). However, it has been shown that exposure of HL-60 cells to a DNA construct that is complementary to the 5' end of c-myc or c- myb blocks translation of the corresponding mRNAs which downregulates expression of the c-myc or c-myb proteins and causes arrest of cell proliferation and differentiation of the treated cells. (International Publication Number WO 91/15580; Wickstrom et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 85: 1028 ( 1988); Anfossi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 86:3379 (1989)). However, the skilled artisan would appreciate the present invention's usefulness is not limited to treatment of proliferative disorders of hematopoietic cells and tissues, in light of the numerous cells and cell types of varying origins which are known to exhibit proliferative phenotypes. In addition to the foregoing, a lung cancer antigen polynucleotide can be used to control gene expression through triple helix formation or through antisense DNA or RNA. Antisense techniques are discussed, for example, in Okano, J. Neurochem. 56: 560 (1991); "Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988). Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance Lee et al., Nucleic Acids Research 6: 3073 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241 : 456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251 : 1360 (1991). Both methods rely on binding of the polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA. For these techniques, preferred polynucleotides are usually oligonucleotides 20 to 40 bases in length and complementary to either the region of the gene involved in transcription (triple helix - see Lee et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 6:3073 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241:456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251 : 1360 (1991) ) or to the mRNA itself (antisense - Okano, J. Neurochem. 56:560 (1991); Oligodeoxy-nucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988).) Triple helix formation optimally results in a shut-off of RNA transcription from DNA, while antisense RNA hybridization blocks translation of an mRNA molecule into polypeptide. The oligonucleotide described above can also be delivered to cells such that the antisense RNA or DNA may be expressed in vivo to inhibit production of polypeptide of the present invention antigens. Both techniques are effective in model systems, and the information disclosed herein can be used to design antisense or triple helix polynucleotides in an effort to treat disease, and in particular, for the treatment of proliferative diseases and/or conditions. Polynucleotides of the present invention are also useful in gene therapy. One goal of gene therapy is to insert a normal gene into an organism having a defective gene, in an effort to correct the genetic defect. The polynucleotides disclosed in the present invention offer a means of targeting such genetic defects in a highly accurate manner. Another goal is to insert a new gene that was not present in the host genome, thereby producing a new trait in the host cell. The polynucleotides are also useful for identifying individuals from minute biological samples. The United States military, for example, is considering the use of restriction fragment length polymoφhism (RFLP) for identification of its personnel. In this technique, an individual's genomic DNA is digested with one or more restriction enzymes, and probed on a Southern blot to yield unique bands for identifying personnel. This method does not suffer from the current limitations of "Dog Tags" which can be lost, switched, or stolen, making positive identification difficult. The polynucleotides of the present invention can be used as additional DNA markers for RFLP. The polynucleotides of the present invention can also be used as an alternative to RFLP, by determining the actual base-by-base DNA sequence of selected portions of an individual's genome. These sequences can be used to prepare PCR primers for amplifying and isolating such selected DNA, which can then be sequenced. Using this technique, individuals can be identified because each individual will have a unique set of DNA sequences. Once an unique ID database is established for an individual, positive identification of that individual, living or dead, can be made from extremely small tissue samples. Forensic biology also benefits from using DNA-based identification techniques as disclosed herein. DNA sequences taken from very small biological samples such as tissues, e.g., hair or skin, or body fluids, e.g., blood, saliva, semen, synovial fluid, amniotic fluid, breast milk, lymph, pulmonary sputum or surfactant, urine, fecal matter, etc., can be amplified using PCR. In one prior art technique, gene sequences amplified from polymoφhic loci, such as DQa class II HLA gene, are used in forensic biology to identify individuals. (Erlich, H., PCR Technology, Freeman and Co. (1992).) Once these specific polymoφhic loci are amplified, they are digested with one or more restriction enzymes, yielding an identifying set of bands on a Southern blot probed with DNA corresponding to the DQa class II HLA gene. Similarly, polynucleotides of the present invention can be used as polymoφhic markers for forensic puφoses. There is also a need for reagents capable of identifying the source of a particular tissue. Such need arises, for example, in forensics when presented with tissue of unknown origin. Appropriate reagents can comprise, for example, DNA probes or primers specific to lung or lung cancer polynucleotides prepared from the sequences of the present invention. Panels of such reagents can identify tissue by species and/or by organ type. In a similar fashion, these reagents can be used to screen tissue cultures for contamination. The polynucleotides of the present invention are also useful as hybridization probes for differential identification of the tissue(s) or cell type(s) present in a biological sample. Similarly, polypeptides and antibodies directed to polypeptides of the present invention are useful to provide immunological probes for differential identification of the tissue(s) (e.g., immunohistochemistry assays) or cell type(s) (e.g., immunocytochemistry assays). In addition, for a number of disorders of the above tissues or cells, significantly higher or lower levels of gene expression of the polynucleotides/polypeptides of the present invention may be detected in certain tissues (e.g., tissues expressing polypeptides and/or polynucleotides of the present invention, lung and lung cancer tissues and/or cancerous and/or wounded tissues) or bodily fluids (e.g., sputum, serum, plasma, urine, synovial fluid or spinal fluid) taken from an individual having such a disorder, relative to a "standard" gene expression level, i.e., the expression level in healthy tissue from an individual not having the disorder. Thus, the invention provides a diagnostic method of a disorder, which involves: (a) assaying gene expression level in cells or body fluid of an individual; (b) comparing the gene expression level with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a disorder. In the very least, the polynucleotides of the present invention can be used as molecular weight markers on Southern gels, as diagnostic probes for the presence of a specific mRNA in a particular cell type, as a probe to "subtract-out" known sequences in the process of discovering novel polynucleotides, for selecting and making oligomers for attachment to a "gene chip" or other support, to raise anti-DNA antibodies using DNA immunization techniques, and as an antigen to elicit an immune response. Uses of the Polypeptides Each of the polypeptides identified herein can be used in numerous ways. The following description should be considered exemplary and utilizes known techniques. Polypeptides and antibodies directed to polypeptides of the present invention are useful to provide immunological probes for differential identification of the tissue(s) (e.g., immunohistochemistry assays such as, for example, ABC immunoperoxidase (Hsu et al., J. Histochem. Cytochem. 29:577-580 (1981)) or cell type(s) (e.g., immunocytochemistry assays). Antibodies can be used to assay levels of polypeptides encoded by polynucleotides of the invention in a biological sample using classical immunohistological methods known to those of skill in the art (e.g., see Jalkanen, et al., J. Cell. Biol. 101 :976-985 (1985); Jalkanen, et al., J. Cell. Biol. 105:3087-3096 (1987)). Other antibody-based methods useful for detecting protein gene expression include immunoassays, such as the enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and the radioimmunoassay (RIA). Suitable antibody assay labels are known in the art and include enzyme labels, such as, glucose oxidase; radioisotopes, such as iodine ( ,31 I, 125 I, 123 I, 12, I), carbon ( 14 C), sulfur ( 35 S), tritium ( 3 H), indium ( 1 15m In, 113m In, 112 In, , π In), and technetium ( 99 Tc, 99m Tc), thallium ( 201 Ti), gallium ( 68 Ga, 67 Ga), palladium ( 103 Pd), molybdenum ( 99 Mo), xenon ( , 33 Xe), fluorine ( 18 F), 153 Sm, 177 Lu, ,59 Gd, ,49 Pm, 140 La, 175 Yb, 166 Ho, 90 Y, 47 Sc, 186 Re, , 88 Re, , 42 Pr, 1 05 Rh, 97 Ru; luminescent labels, such as luminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin. In addition to assaying levels of polypeptide of the present invention in a biological sample, proteins can also be detected in vivo by imaging. Antibody labels or markers for in vivo imaging of protein include those detectable by X-radiography, NMR or ESR. For X-radiography, suitable labels include radioisotopes such as barium or cesium, which emit detectable radiation but are not overtly harmful to the subject. Suitable markers for NMR and ESR include those with a detectable characteristic spin, such as deuterium, which may be incoφorated into the antibody by labeling of nutrients for the relevant hybridoma. A protein-specific antibody or antibody fragment which has been labeled with an appropriate detectable imaging moiety, such as a radioisotope (for example, 131 I, , 12 In, 99m Tc, ( 13 I I, 125 I, 123 I, 12I I), carbon ( 14 C), sulfur ( 35 S), tritium ( 3 H), indium ( 1 15n Tn, l l 3m In, " 2 In, , π In), and technetium ( 99 Tc, 9 m Tc), thallium ( 201 Ti), gallium ( 68 Ga, 67 Ga), palladium ( l ϋ3 Pd), molybdenum ( 99 Mo), xenon ( 133 Xe), fluorine ( 18 F, 153 Sm, 177 Lu, ,59 Gd, ,49 Pm, 140 La, 175 Yb, 166 Ho, 90 Y, 47 Sc, 186 Re, 188 Re, ,42 Pr, 105 Rh, 97 Ru), a radio-opaque substance, or a material detectable by nuclear magnetic resonance, is introduced (for example, parenterally, subcutaneously or intraperitoneally) into the mammal to be examined for immune system disorder. It will be understood in the art that the size of the subject and the imaging system used will determine the quantity of imaging moiety needed to produce diagnostic images. In the case of a radioisotope moiety, for a human subject, the quantity of radioactivity injected will normally range from about 5 to 20 millicuries of 99m Tc. The labeled antibody or antibody fragment will then preferentially accumulate at the location of cells which express the polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide of the invention. In vivo tumor imaging is described in S.W. Burchiel et al., "Immunopharmacokinetics of Radiolabeled Antibodies and Their Fragments" (Chapter 13 in Tumor Imaging: The Radiochemical Detection of Cancer, S.W. Burchiel and B. A. Rhodes, eds., Masson Publishing Inc. (1982)). In one embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specific delivery of compositions of the invention to cells by administering polypeptides of the invention (e.g., polypeptides encoded by polynucleotides of the invention and/or antibodies) that are associated with heterologous polypeptides or nucleic acids. In one example, the invention provides a method for delivering a therapeutic protein into the targeted cell. In another example, the invention provides a method for delivering a single stranded nucleic acid (e.g., antisense or ribozymes) or double stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA that can integrate into the cell's genome or replicate episomally and that can be transcribed) into the targeted cell. In another embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specific destruction of cells (e.g., the destruction of tumor cells) by administering polypeptides of the invention in association with toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs. By "toxin" is meant one or more compounds that bind and activate endogenous cytotoxic effector systems, radioisotopes, holotoxins, modified toxins, catalytic subunits of toxins, or any molecules or enzymes not normally present in or on the surface of a cell that under defined conditions cause the cell's death. Toxins that may be used according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes known in the art, compounds such as, for example, antibodies (or complement fixing containing portions thereof) that bind an inherent or induced endogenous cytotoxic effector system, thymidine kinase, endonuclease, RNAse, alpha toxin, ricin, abrin, Pseudomonas exotoxin A, diphtheria toxin, saporin, momordin, gelonin, pokeweed antiviral protein, alpha-sarcin and cholera toxin. "Toxin" also includes a cytostatic or cytocidal agent, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion, e.g., alpha-emitters such as, for example, 213 Bi, or other radioisotopes such as, for example, ,03 Pd, 133 Xe, , 31 I, 68 Ge, 57 Co, 65 Zn, 85 Sr, 32 P, 35 S, 90 Y, 153 Sm, 153 Gd, 169 Yb, 51 Cr, 54 Mn, 75 Se, , , 3 Sn, 90 Yttrιum, 1 , 7 Tin, 186 Rhenium, 166 Holmium, and 188 Rhenium; luminescent labels, such as luminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin. Techniques known in the art may be applied to label polypeptides of the invention (including antibodies). Such techniques include, but are not limited to, the use of bifunctional conjugating agents (see e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,756,065; 5,714,631 ; 5,696,239; 5,652,361 ; 5,505,931 ; 5,489,425; 5,435,990; 5,428, 139; 5,342,604; 5,274,1 19; 4,994,560; and 5,808,003; the contents of each of which are hereby incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Thus, the invention provides a diagnostic method of a disorder, which involves (a) assaying the expression level of a lung cancer polypeptide of the present invention in cells or body fluid of an individual, or more preferrably, assaying the expression level of a lung cancer polypeptide of the present invention in lung cells or sputum of an individual; and (b) comparing the assayed polypeptide expression level with a standard polypeptide expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a disorder. With respect to cancer, the presence of a relatively high amount of transcript in biopsied tissue from an individual may indicate a predisposition for the development of the disease, or may provide a means for detecting the disease prior to the appearance of actual clinical symptoms. A more definitive diagnosis of this type may allow health professionals to employ preventative measures or aggressive treatment earlier thereby preventing the development or further progression of the cancer. Moreover, lung cancer antigen polypeptides of the present invention can be used to treat or prevent diseases or conditions such as, for example, neural disorders, immune system disorders, muscular disorders, reproductive disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, pulmonary disorders, cardiovascular disorders, renal disorders, proliferative disorders, and/or cancerous diseases and conditions, preferably proliferative disorders of the lung, and/or cancerous disease and conditions. For example, patients can be administered a polypeptide of the present invention in an effort to replace absent or decreased levels of the polypeptide (e.g., insulin), to supplement absent or decreased levels of a different polypeptide (e.g., hemoglobin S for hemoglobin B, SOD, catalase, DNA repair proteins), to inhibit the activity of a polypeptide (e.g., an oncogene or tumor supressor), to activate the activity of a polypeptide (e.g., by binding to a receptor), to reduce the activity of a membrane bound receptor by competing with it for free ligand (e.g., soluble TNF receptors used in reducing inflammation), or to bring about a desired response (e.g., blood vessel growth inhibition, enhancement of the immune response to proliferative cells or tissues). Similarly, antibodies directed to a polypeptide of the present invention can also be used to treat disease (as described supra, and elsewhere herein). For example, administration of an antibody directed to a polypeptide of the present invention can bind, and/or neutralize the polypeptide, and/or reduce overproduction of the polypeptide. Similarly, administration of an antibody can activate the polypeptide, such as by binding to a polypeptide bound to a membrane (receptor). At the very least, the polypeptides of the present invention can be used as molecular weight markers on SDS-PAGE gels or on molecular sieve gel filtration columns using methods well known to those of skill in the art. Polypeptides can also be used to raise antibodies, which in turn are used to measure protein expression from a recombinant cell, as a way of assessing transformation of the host cell. Moreover, the polypeptides of the present invention can be used to test the following biological activities. Gene Therapy Methods Another aspect of the present invention is to gene therapy methods for treating or preventing disorders, diseases and conditions. The gene therapy methods relate to the introduction of nucleic acid (DNA, RNA and antisense DNA or RNA) sequences into an animal to achieve expression of the polypeptide of the present invention. This method requires a polynucleotide which codes for a polypeptide of the present invention operatively linked to a promoter and any other genetic elements necessary for the expression of the polypeptide by the target tissue. Such gene therapy and delivery techniques are known in the art, see, for example, WO90/1 1092, which is herein incoφorated by reference. Thus, for example, cells from a patient may be engineered with a polynucleotide (DNA or RNA) comprising a promoter operably linked to a polynucleotide of the present invention ex vivo, with the engineered cells then being provided to a patient to be treated with the polypeptide of the present invention. Such methods are well-known in the art. For example, see Belldegrun, A., et al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 85: 207-216 (1993); Ferrantini, M. et al., Cancer Research 53: 1 107-1 112 (1993); Ferrantini, M. et al., J. Immunology 153: 4604-4615 (1994); Kaido, T., et al., Int. J. Cancer 60: 221-229 (1995); Ogura, H., et al., Cancer Research 50: 5102-5106 (1990); Santodonato, L., et al., Human Gene Therapy 7: 1-10 (1996); Santodonato, L., et al., Gene Therapy 4: 1246-1255 ( 1997); and Zhang, J.-F. et al., Cancer Gene Therapy 3: 31-38 (1996)), which are herein incoφorated by reference. In one embodiment, the cells which are engineered are arterial cells. The arterial cells may be reintroduced into the patient through direct injection to the artery, the tissues surrounding the artery, or through catheter injection. As discussed in more detail below, the polynucleotide constructs can be delivered by any method that delivers injectable materials to the cells of an animal, such as, injection into the interstitial space of tissues (heart, muscle, skin, lung, liver, and the like). The polynucleotide constructs may be delivered in a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid or aqueous carrier. In one embodiment, the polynucleotide of the present invention is delivered as a naked polynucleotide. The term "naked" polynucleotide, DNA or RNA refers to sequences that are free from any delivery vehicle that acts to assist, promote or facilitate entry into the cell, including viral sequences, viral particles, liposome formulations, lipofectin or precipitating agents and the like. However, the polynucleotide of the present invention can also be delivered in liposome formulations and lipofectin formulations and the like can be prepared by methods well known to those skilled in the art. Such methods are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,593,972, 5,589,466, and 5,580,859, which are herein incoφorated by reference. The polynucleotide vector constructs used in the gene therapy method are preferably constructs that will not integrate into the host genome nor will they contain sequences that allow for replication. Appropriate vectors include pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXTl and pSG available from Stratagene; pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG and pSVL available from Pharmacia; and pEFl/V5, pcDNA3.1, and pRc/CMV2 available from Invitrogen. Other suitable vectors will be readily apparent to the skilled artisan. Any strong promoter known to those skilled in the art can be used for driving the expression of the polynucleotide sequence. Suitable promoters include adenoviral promoters, such as the adenoviral major late promoter; or heterologous promoters, such as the cytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter; the respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) promoter; inducible promoters, such as the MMT promoter, the metallothionein promoter; heat shock promoters; the albumin promoter; the ApoAI promoter; human globin promoters; viral thymidine kinase promoters, such as the Heφes Simplex thymidine kinase promoter; retroviral LTRs; the b-actin promoter; and human growth hormone promoters. The promoter also may be the native promoter for the polynucleotide of the present invention. Unlike other gene therapy techniques, one major advantage of introducing naked nucleic acid sequences into target cells is the transitory nature of the polynucleotide synthesis in the cells. Studies have shown that non-replicating DNA sequences can be introduced into cells to provide production of the desired polypeptide for periods of up to six months. The polynucleotide construct can be delivered to the interstitial space of tissues within the an animal, including of muscle, skin, brain, lung, liver, spleen, bone marrow, thymus, heart, lymph, blood, bone, cartilage, pancreas, kidney, gall bladder, stomach, intestine, testis, ovary, uterus, rectum, nervous system, eye, gland, and connective tissue. Interstitial space of the tissues comprises the intercellular, fluid, mucopolysaccharide matrix among the reticular fibers of organ tissues, elastic fibers in the walls of vessels or chambers, collagen fibers of fibrous tissues, or that same matrix within connective tissue ensheathing muscle cells or in the lacunae of bone. It is similarly the space occupied by the plasma of the circulation and the lymph fluid of the lymphatic channels. Delivery to the interstitial space of muscle tissue is preferred for the reasons discussed below. They may be conveniently delivered by injection into the tissues comprising these cells. They are preferably delivered to and expressed in persistent, non-dividing cells which are differentiated, although delivery and expression may be achieved in non-differentiated or less completely differentiated cells, such as, for example, stem cells of blood or skin fibroblasts. In vivo muscle cells are particularly competent in their ability to take up and express polynucleotides. For the naked nucleic acid sequence injection, an effective dosage amount of DNA or RNA will be in the range of from about 0.05 mg/kg body weight to about 50 mg/kg body weight. Preferably the dosage will be from about 0.005 mg/kg to about 20 mg/kg and more preferably from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg. Of course, as the artisan of ordinary skill will appreciate, this dosage will vary according to the tissue site of injection. The appropriate and effective dosage of nucleic acid sequence can readily be determined by those of ordinary skill in the art and may depend on the condition being treated and the route of administration. The preferred route of administration is by the parenteral route of injection into the interstitial space of tissues. However, other parenteral routes may also be used, such as, inhalation of an aerosol formulation particularly for delivery to lungs or bronchial tissues, throat or mucous membranes of the nose. In addition, naked DNA constructs can be delivered to arteries during angioplasty by the catheter used in the procedure. The naked polynucleotides are delivered by any method known in the art, including, but not limited to, direct needle injection at the delivery site, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, and so-called "gene guns". These delivery methods are known in the art. The constructs may also be delivered with delivery vehicles such as viral sequences, viral particles, liposome formulations, lipofectin, precipitating agents, etc. Such methods of delivery are known in the art. In certain embodiments, the polynucleotide constructs are complexed in a liposome preparation. Liposomal preparations for use in the instant invention include cationic (positively charged), anionic (negatively charged) and neutral preparations. However, cationic liposomes are particularly preferred because a tight charge complex can be formed between the cationic liposome and the polyanionic nucleic acid. Cationic liposomes have been shown to mediate intracellular delivery of plasmid DNA (Feigner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1987) 84:7413-7416, which is herein incoφorated by reference); mRNA (Malone et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1989) 86:6077-6081 , which is herein incorporated by reference); and purified transcription factors (Debs et al., J. Biol. Chem. (1990) 265: 10189-10192, which is herein incoφorated by reference), in functional form. Cationic liposomes are readily available. For example, N[l-2,3-dioleyloxy)propyl]-N,N,N-triethylammonium (DOTMA) liposomes are particularly useful and are available under the trademark Lipofectin, from GIBCO BRL, Grand Island, N.Y. (See, also, Feigner et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA (1987) 84:7413-7416, which is herein incoφorated by reference). Other commercially available liposomes include transfectace (DDAB/DOPE) and DOTAP/DOPE (Boehringer). Other cationic liposomes can be prepared from readily available materials using techniques well known in the art. See, e.g. PCT Publication No. WO 90/11092 (which is herein incoφorated by reference) for a description of the synthesis of DOTAP (l,2-bis(oleoyloxy)-3-(trimethylammonio)propane) liposomes. Preparation of DOTMA liposomes is explained in the literature, see, e.g., P. Feigner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:7413-7417, which is herein incoφorated by reference. Similar methods can be used to prepare liposomes from other cationic lipid materials. Similarly, anionic and neutral liposomes are readily available, such as from Avanti Polar Lipids (Birmingham, Ala.), or can be easily prepared using readily available materials. Such materials include phosphatidyl, choline, cholesterol, phosphatidyl ethanolamine, dioleoylphosphatidyl choline (DOPC), dioleoylphosphatidyl glycerol (DOPG), dioleoylphoshatidyl ethanolamine (DOPE), among others. These materials can also be mixed with the DOTMA and DOTAP starting materials in appropriate ratios. Methods for making liposomes using these materials are well known in the art. For example, commercially dioleoylphosphatidyl choline (DOPC), dioleoylphosphatidyl glycerol (DOPG), and dioleoylphosphatidyl ethanolamine (DOPE) can be used in various combinations to make conventional liposomes, with or without the addition of cholesterol. Thus, for example, DOPG/DOPC vesicles can be prepared by drying 50 mg each of DOPG and DOPC under a stream of nitrogen gas into a sonication vial. The sample is placed under a vacuum pump overnight and is hydrated the following day with deionized water. The sample is then sonicated for 2 hours in a capped vial, using a Heat Systems model 350 sonicator equipped with an inverted cup (bath type) probe at the maximum setting while the bath is circulated at 15EC. Alternatively, negatively charged vesicles can be prepared without sonication to produce multilamellar vesicles or by extrusion through nucleopore membranes to produce unilamellar vesicles of discrete size. Other methods are known and available to those of skill in the art. The liposomes can comprise multilamellar vesicles (MLVs), small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs), or large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs), with SUVs being preferred. The various liposome-nucleic acid complexes are prepared using methods well known in the art. See, e.g., Straubinger et al., Methods of Immunology (1983), 101 :512-527, which is herein incoφorated by reference. For example, MLVs containing nucleic acid can be prepared by depositing a thin film of phospholipid on the walls of a glass tube and subsequently hydrating with a solution of the material to be encapsulated. SUVs are prepared by extended sonication of MLVs to produce a homogeneous population of unilamellar liposomes. The material to be entrapped is added to a suspension of preformed MLVs and then sonicated. When using liposomes containing cationic lipids, the dried lipid film is resuspended in an appropriate solution such as sterile water or an isotonic buffer solution such as 10 mM Tris/NaCl, sonicated, and then the preformed liposomes are mixed directly with the DNA. The liposome and DNA form a very stable complex due to binding of the positively charged liposomes to the cationic DNA. SUVs find use with small nucleic acid fragments. LUVs are prepared by a number of methods, well known in the art. Commonly used methods include Ca 2+ -EDTA chelation (Papahadjopoulos et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta (1975) 394:483; Wilson et al., Cell (1979) 17:77); ether injection (Deamer, D. and Bangham, A., Biochim. Biophys. Acta ( 1976) 443:629; Ostro et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. (1977) 76:836; Fraley et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1979) 76:3348); detergent dialysis (Enoch, H. and Strittmatter, P., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1979) 76: 145); and reverse-phase evaporation (REV) (Fraley et al., J. Biol. Chem. (1980) 255: 10431 ; Szoka, F. and Papahadjopoulos, D., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1978) 75: 145; Schaefer-Ridder et al., Science (1982) 215: 166), which are herein incoφorated by reference. Generally, the ratio of DNA to liposomes will be from about 10: 1 to about 1 : 10. Preferably, the ration will be from about 5:1 to about 1 :5. More preferably, the ration will be about 3: 1 to about 1 :3. Still more preferably, the ratio will be about 1 : 1. U.S. Patent No. 5,676,954 (which is herein incoφorated by reference) reports on the injection of genetic material, complexed with cationic liposomes carriers, into mice. U.S. Patent Nos. 4,897,355, 4,946,787, 5,049,386, 5,459, 127, 5,589,466, 5,693,622, 5,580,859, 5,703,055, and international publication no. WO 94/9469 (which are herein incoφorated by reference) provide cationic lipids for use in transfecting DNA into cells and mammals. U.S. Patent Nos. 5,589,466, 5,693,622, 5,580,859, 5,703,055, and international publication no. WO 94/9469 (which are herein incoφorated by reference) provide methods for delivering DNA-cationic lipid complexes to mammals. In certain embodiments, cells are engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, using a retroviral particle containing RNA which comprises a sequence encoding a polypeptide of the present invention. Retroviruses from which the retroviral plasmid vectors may be derived include, but are not limited to, Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus, spleen necrosis virus, Rous sarcoma Virus, Harvey Sarcoma Virus, avian leukosis virus, gibbon ape leukemia virus, human immunodeficiency virus, Myeloproliferative Sarcoma Virus, and mammary tumor virus. The retroviral plasmid vector is employed to transduce packaging cell lines to form producer cell lines. Examples of packaging cells which may be transfected include, but are not limited to, the PE501, PA317, R-2, R-AM, PA12, T19-14X, VT- 19-17-H2, RCRE, RCRIP, GP+E-86, GP+envAml2, and DAN cell lines as described in Miller, Human Gene Therapy 1 :5-14 (1990), which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. The vector may transduce the packaging cells through any means known in the art. Such means include, but are not limited to, electroporation, the use of liposomes, and CaPO 4 precipitation. In one alternative, the retroviral plasmid vector may be encapsulated into a liposome, or coupled to a lipid, and then administered to a host. The producer cell line generates infectious retroviral vector particles which include polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the present invention. Such retroviral vector particles then may be employed, to transduce eukaryotic cells, either in vitro or in vivo. The transduced eukaryotic cells will express a polypeptide of the present invention. In certain other embodiments, cells are engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, with polynucleotide contained in an adenovirus vector. Adenovirus can be manipulated such that it encodes and expresses a polypeptide of the present invention, and at the same time is inactivated in terms of its ability to replicate in a normal lytic viral life cycle. Adenovirus expression is achieved without integration of the viral DNA into the host cell chromosome, thereby alleviating concerns about insertional mutagenesis. Furthermore, adenoviruses have been used as live enteric vaccines for many years with an excellent safety profile (Schwartz, A. R. et al. (1974) Am. Rev. Respir. Dis.109:233-238). Finally, adenovirus mediated gene transfer has been demonstrated in a number of instances including transfer of alpha- 1 -antitrypsin and CFTR to the lungs of cotton rats (Rosenfeld, M. A. et al. (1991) Science 252:431-434; Rosenfeld et al., (1992) Cell 68: 143-155). Furthermore, extensive studies to attempt to establish adenovirus as a causative agent in human cancer were uniformly negative (Green, M. et al. (1979) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 76:6606). Suitable adenoviral vectors useful in the present invention are described, for example, in Kozarsky and Wilson, Curr. Opin. Genet. Devel. 3:499-503 (1993); Rosenfeld et al., Cell 68: 143-155 (1992); Engelhardt et al., Human Genet. Ther. 4:759-769 (1993); Yang et al., Nature Genet. 7:362-369 (1994); Wilson et al., Nature 365:691-692 (1993); and U.S. Patent No. 5,652,224, which are herein incoφorated by reference. For example, the adenovirus vector Ad2 is useful and can be grown in human 293 cells. These cells contain the El region of adenovirus and constitutively express Ela and Elb, which complement the defective adenoviruses by providing the products of the genes deleted from the vector. In addition to Ad2, other varieties of adenovirus (e.g., Ad3, Ad5, and Ad7) are also useful in the present invention. Preferably, the adenoviruses used in the present invention are replication deficient. Replication deficient adenoviruses require the aid of a helper virus and/or packaging cell line to form infectious particles. The resulting virus is capable of infecting cells and can express a polynucleotide of interest which is operably linked to a promoter, but cannot replicate in most cells. Replication deficient adenoviruses may be deleted in one or more of all or a portion of the following genes: Ela, Elb, E3, E4, E2a, or LI through L5. In certain other embodiments, the cells are engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, using an adeno-associated virus (AAV). AAVs are naturally occurring defective viruses that require helper viruses to produce infectious particles (Muzyczka, N., Curr. Topics in Microbiol. Immunol. 158:97 (1992)). It is also one of the few viruses that may integrate its DNA into non-dividing cells. Vectors containing as little as 300 base pairs of AAV can be packaged and can integrate, but space for exogenous DNA is limited to about 4.5 kb. Methods for producing and using such AAVs are known in the art. See, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 5, 139,941 , 5,173,414, 5,354,678, 5,436,146, 5,474,935, 5,478,745, and 5,589,377. For example, an appropriate AAV vector for use in the present invention will include all the sequences necessary for DNA replication, encapsidation, and host-cell integration. The polynucleotide construct is inserted into the AAV vector using standard cloning methods, such as those found in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Press (1989). The recombinant AAV vector is then transfected into packaging cells which are infected with a helper virus, using any standard technique, including lipofection, electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitation, etc. Appropriate helper viruses include adenoviruses, cytomegaloviruses, vaccinia viruses, or heφes viruses. Once the packaging cells are transfected and infected, they will produce infectious AAV viral particles which contain the polynucleotide construct. These viral particles are then used to transduce eukaryotic cells, either ex vivo or in vivo. The transduced cells will contain the polynucleotide construct integrated into its genome, and will express a polypeptide of the invention. Another method of gene therapy involves operably associating heterologous control regions and endogenous polynucleotide sequences (e.g. encoding a polypeptide of the present invention) via homologous recombination (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,641,670, issued June 24, 1997; International Publication No. WO 96/2941 1 , published September 26, 1996; International Publication No. WO 94/12650, published August 4, 1994; Koller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 ( 1989); and Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 (1989). This method involves the activation of a gene which is present in the target cells, but which is not normally expressed in the cells, or is expressed at a lower level than desired. Polynucleotide constructs are made, using standard techniques known in the art, which contain the promoter with targeting sequences flanking the promoter. Suitable promoters are described herein. The targeting sequence is sufficiently complementary to an endogenous sequence to permit homologous recombination of the promoter-targeting sequence with the endogenous sequence. The targeting sequence will be sufficiently near the 5' end of the desired endogenous polynucleotide sequence so the promoter will be operably linked to the endogenous sequence upon homologous recombination. The promoter and the targeting sequences can be amplified using PCR. Preferably, the amplified promoter contains distinct restriction enzyme sites on the 5' and 3' ends. Preferably, the 3' end of the first targeting sequence contains the same restriction enzyme site as the 5' end of the amplified promoter and the 5' end of the second targeting sequence contains the same restriction site as the 3' end of the amplified promoter. The amplified promoter and targeting sequences are digested and ligated together. The promoter-targeting sequence construct is delivered to the cells, either as naked polynucleotide, or in conjunction with transfection-facilitating agents, such as liposomes, viral sequences, viral particles, whole viruses, lipofection, precipitating agents, etc., described in more detail above. The P promoter-targeting sequence can be delivered by any method, included direct needle injection, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, particle accelerators, etc. The methods are described in more detail below. The promoter-targeting sequence construct is taken up by cells. Homologous recombination between the construct and the endogenous sequence takes place, such that an endogenous sequence is placed under the control of the promoter. The promoter then drives the expression of the endogenous sequence. Preferably, the polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the present invention contains a secretory signal sequence that facilitates secretion of the protein. Typically, the signal sequence is positioned in the coding region of the polynucleotide to be expressed towards or at the 5' end of the coding region. The signal sequence may be homologous or heterologous to the polynucleotide of interest and may be homologous or heterologous to the cells to be transfected. Additionally, the signal sequence may be chemically synthesized using methods known in the art. Any mode of administration of any of the above-described polynucleotides constructs can be used so long as the mode results in the expression of one or more molecules in an amount sufficient to provide a therapeutic effect. This includes direct needle injection, systemic injection, catheter infusion, biolistic injectors, particle accelerators (i.e., "gene guns"), gelfoam sponge depots, other commercially available depot materials, osmotic pumps (e.g., Alza minipumps), oral or suppositorial solid (tablet or pill) pharmaceutical formulations, and decanting or topical applications during surgery. For example, direct injection of naked calcium phosphate-precipitated plasmid into rat liver and rat spleen or a protein-coated plasmid into the portal vein has resulted in gene expression of the foreign gene in the rat livers (Kaneda et al., Science 243:375 ( 1989)). A preferred method of local administration is by direct injection. Preferably, a recombinant molecule of the present invention complexed with a delivery vehicle is administered by direct injection into or locally within the area of arteries. Administration of a composition locally within the area of arteries refers to injecting the composition centimeters and preferably, millimeters within arteries. Another method of local administration is to contact a polynucleotide construct of the present invention in or around a surgical wound. For example, a patient can undergo surgery and the polynucleotide construct can be coated on the surface of tissue inside the wound or the construct can be injected into areas of tissue inside the wound. Therapeutic compositions useful in systemic administration, include recombinant molecules of the present invention complexed to a targeted delivery vehicle of the present invention. Suitable delivery vehicles for use with systemic administration comprise liposomes comprising ligands for targeting the vehicle to a particular site. Preferred methods of systemic administration, include intravenous injection, aerosol, oral and percutaneous (topical) delivery. Intravenous injections can be performed using methods standard in the art. Aerosol delivery can also be performed using methods standard in the art (see, for example, Stribling et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 189: 11277-1 1281, 1992, which is incoφorated herein by reference). Oral delivery can be performed by complexing a polynucleotide construct of the present invention to a carrier capable of withstanding degradation by digestive enzymes in the gut of an animal. Examples of such carriers, include plastic capsules or tablets, such as those known in the art. Topical delivery can be performed by mixing a polynucleotide construct of the present invention with a lipophilic reagent (e.g., DMSO) that is capable of passing into the skin. Determining an effective amount of substance to be delivered can depend upon a number of factors including, for example, the chemical structure and biological activity of the substance, the age and weight of the animal, the precise condition requiring treatment and its severity, and the route of administration. The frequency of treatments depends upon a number of factors, such as the amount of polynucleotide constructs administered per dose, as well as the health and history of the subject. The precise amount, number of doses, and timing of doses will be determined by the attending physician or veterinarian. Therapeutic compositions of the present invention can be administered to any animal, preferably to mammals and birds. Preferred mammals include humans, dogs, cats, mice, rats, rabbits sheep, cattle, horses and pigs, with humans being particularly preferred. Biological Activities Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention, can be used in assays to test for one or more biological activities. If these polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention, do exhibit activity in a particular assay, it is likely that these molecules may be involved in the diseases associated with the biological activity. Thus, the polynucleotides and polypeptides, and agonists or antagonists could be used to treat the associated disease. Immune Activity A polypeptide or polynucleotide, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may be useful in treating deficiencies or disorders of the immune system, by activating or inhibiting the proliferation, differentiation, or mobilization (chemotaxis) of immune cells. Immune cells develop through a process called hematopoiesis, producing myeloid (platelets, red blood cells, neutrophils, and macrophages) and lymphoid (B and T lymphocytes) cells from pluripotent stem cells. The etiology of these immune deficiencies or disorders may be genetic, somatic, such as cancer or some autoimmune disorders, acquired (e.g., by chemotherapy or toxins), or infectious. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention can be used as a marker or detector of a particular immune system disease or disorder. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may be useful in treating or detecting deficiencies or disorders of hematopoietic cells. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention could be used to increase differentiation and proliferation of hematopoietic cells, including the pluripotent stem cells, in an effort to treat those disorders associated with a decrease in certain (or many) types hematopoietic cells. Examples of immunologic deficiency syndromes include, but are not limited to: blood protein disorders (e.g. agammaglobulinemia, dysgammaglobulinemia), ataxia telangiectasia, common variable immunodeficiency, Digeorge Syndrome, HIV infection, HTLV-BLV infection, leukocyte adhesion deficiency syndrome, lymphopenia, phagocyte bactericidal dysfunction, severe combined immunodeficiency (SCIDs), Wiskott-Aldrich Disorder, anemia, thrombocytopenia, or hemoglobinuria. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention could also be used to modulate hemostatic (the stopping of bleeding) or thrombolytic activity (clot formation). For example, by increasing hemostatic or thrombolytic activity, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention could be used to treat blood coagulation disorders (e.g., afibrinogenemia, factor deficiencies), blood platelet disorders (e.g. thrombocytopenia), or wounds resulting from trauma, surgery, or other causes. Alternatively, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention that can decrease hemostatic or thrombolytic activity could be used to inhibit or dissolve clotting. These molecules could be important in the treatment of heart attacks (infarction), strokes, or scarring. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may also be useful in treating or detecting autoimmune disorders. Many autoimmune disorders result from inappropriate recognition of self as foreign material by immune cells. This inappropriate recognition results in an immune response leading to the destruction of the host tissue. Therefore, the administration of polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention that can inhibit an immune response, particularly the proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis of T-cells, may be an effective therapy in preventing autoimmune disorders. Examples of autoimmune disorders that can be treated or detected include, but are not limited to: Addison's Disease, hemolytic anemia, antiphospholipid syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, dermatitis, allergic encephalomyelitis, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's Syndrome, Graves' Disease, Multiple Sclerosis, Myasthenia Gravis, Neuritis, Ophthalmia, Bullous Pemphigoid, Pemphigus, Polyendocrinopathies, Puφura, Reiter's Disease, Stiff-Man Syndrome, Autoimmune Thyroiditis, Systemic Lupus Erythematosus, Autoimmune Pulmonary Inflammation, Guillain-Barre Syndrome, insulin dependent diabetes mellitis, and autoimmune inflammatory eye disease. Similarly, allergic reactions and conditions, such as asthma (particularly allergic asthma) or other respiratory problems, may also be treated by polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Moreover, these molecules can be used to treat anaphylaxis, hypersensitivity to an antigenic molecule, or blood group incompatibility. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may also be used to treat and/or prevent organ rejection or graft-versus-host disease (GVHD). Organ rejection occurs by host immune cell destruction of the transplanted tissue through an immune response. Similarly, an immune response is also involved in GVHD, but, in this case, the foreign transplanted immune cells destroy the host tissues. The administration of polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention that inhibits an immune response, particularly the proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis of T-cells, may be an effective therapy in preventing organ rejection or GVHD. Similarly, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may also be used to modulate inflammation. For example, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may inhibit the proliferation and differentiation of cells involved in an inflammatory response. These molecules can be used to treat inflammatory conditions, both chronic and acute conditions, including chronic prostatitis, granulomatous prostatitis and malacoplakia, inflammation associated with infection (e.g., septic shock, sepsis, or systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS)), ischemia-reperfusion injury, • - endotoxin lethality, arthritis, complement-mediated hyperacute rejection, nephritis, cytokine or chemokine induced lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, or resulting from over production of cytokines (e.g., TNF or IL-1.) Hyperproliferative Disorders Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention can be used to treat or detect hypeφroliferative disorders, including neoplasms. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may inhibit the proliferation of the disorder through direct or indirect interactions. Alternatively, Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may proliferate other cells which can inhibit the hypeφroliferative disorder. For example, by increasing an immune response, particularly increasing antigenic qualities of the hyperproliferative disorder or by proliferating, differentiating, or mobilizing T-cells, hyperproliferative disorders can be treated. This immune response may be increased by either enhancing an existing immune response, or by initiating a new immune response. Alternatively, decreasing an immune response may also be a method of treating hypeφroliferative disorders, such as a chemotherapeutic agent. Examples of hypeφroliferative disorders that can be treated or detected by Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention include, but are not limited to neoplasms located in the: colon, abdomen, bone, breast, digestive system, liver, pancreas, peritoneum, endocrine glands (adrenal, parathyroid, pituitary, testicles, ovary, thymus, thyroid), eye, head and neck, nervous (central and peripheral), lymphatic system, pelvic, skin, soft tissue, spleen, thoracic, and urogenital. Similarly, other hypeφroliferative disorders can also be treated or detected by polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Examples of such hyperproliferative disorders include, but are not limited to: hypergammaglobulinemia, lymphoproliferative disorders, paraproteinemias, puφura, sarcoidosis, Sezary Syndrome, Waldenstron's Macroglobulinemia, Gaucher's Disease, histiocytosis, and any other hypeφroliferative disease, besides neoplasia, located in an organ system listed above. One preferred embodiment utilizes polynucleotides of the present invention to inhibit aberrant cellular division, by gene therapy using the present invention, and/or protein fusions or fragments thereof. Thus, the present invention provides a method for treating cell proliferative disorders by inserting into an abnormally proliferating cell a polynucleotide of the present invention, wherein said polynucleotide represses said expression. Another embodiment of the present invention provides a method of treating cell-proliferative disorders in individuals comprising administration of one or more active gene copies of the present invention to an abnormally proliferating cell or cells. In a preferred embodiment, polynucleotides of the present invention is a DNA construct comprising a recombinant expression vector effective in expressing a DNA sequence encoding said polynucleotides. In another preferred embodiment of the present invention, the DNA construct encoding the poynucleotides of the present invention is inserted into cells to be treated utilizing a retrovirus, or more preferrably an adenoviral vector (See G J. Nabel, et. al., PNAS 1999 96: 324-326, which is hereby incoφorated by reference). In a most preferred embodiment, the viral vector is defective and will not transform non-proliferating cells, only proliferating cells. Moreover, in a preferred embodiment, the polynucleotides of the present invention inserted into proliferating cells either alone, or in combination with or fused to other polynucleotides, can then be modulated via an external stimulus (i.e. magnetic, specific small molecule, chemical, or drug administration, etc.), which acts upon the promoter upstream of said polynucleotides to induce expression of the encoded protein product. As such the beneficial therapeutic affect of the present invention may be expressly modulated (i.e. to increase, decrease, or inhibit expression of the present invention) based upon said external stimulus. Polynucleotides of the present invention may be useful in repressing expression of oncogenic genes or antigens. By "repressing expression of the oncogenic genes " is intended the suppression of the transcription of the gene, the degradation of the gene transcript (pre-message RNA), the inhibition of splicing, the destruction of the messenger RNA, the prevention of the post-translational modifications of the protein, the destruction of the protein, or the inhibition of the normal function of the protein. For local administration to abnormally proliferating cells, polynucleotides of the present invention may be administered by any method known to those of skill in the art including, but not limited to transfection, electroporation, microinjection of cells, or in vehicles such as liposomes, lipofectin, or as naked polynucleotides, or any other method described throughout the specification. The polynucleotide of the present invention may be delivered by known gene delivery systems such as, but not limited to, retroviral vectors (Gilboa, J. Virology 44:845 (1982); Hocke, Nature 320:275 (1986); Wilson, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:3014), vaccinia virus system (Chakrabarty et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 5:3403 (1985) or other efficient DNA delivery systems (Yates et al., Nature 313:812 (1985)) known to those skilled in the art. These references are exemplary only and are hereby incoφorated by reference. In order to specifically deliver or transfect cells which are abnormally proliferating and spare non-dividing cells, it is preferable to utilize a retrovirus, or adenoviral (as described in the art and elsewhere herein) delivery system known to those of skill in the art. Since host DNA replication is required for retroviral DNA to integrate and the retrovirus will be unable to self replicate due to the lack of the retrovirus genes needed for its life cycle. Utilizing such a retroviral delivery system for polynucleotides of the present invention will target said gene and constructs to abnormally proliferating cells and will spare the non-dividing normal cells. The polynucleotides of the present invention may be delivered directly to cell proliferative disorder/disease sites in internal organs, body cavities and the like by use of imaging devices used to guide an injecting needle directly to the disease site. The polynucleotides of the present invention may also be administered to disease sites at the time of surgical intervention. By "cell proliferative disease" is meant any human or animal disease or disorder, affecting any one or any combination of organs, cavities, or body parts, which is characterized by single or multiple local abnormal proliferations of cells, groups of cells, or tissues, whether benign or malignant. Any amount of the polynucleotides of the present invention may be administered as long as it has a biologically inhibiting effect on the proliferation of the treated cells. Moreover, it is possible to administer more than one of the polynucleotide of the present invention simultaneously to the same site. By "biologically inhibiting" is meant partial or total growth inhibition as well as decreases in the rate of proliferation or growth of the cells. The biologically inhibitory dose may be determined by assessing the effects of the polynucleotides of the present invention on target malignant or abnormally proliferating cell growth in tissue culture, tumor growth in animals and cell cultures, or any other method known to one of ordinary skill in the art. The present invention is further directed to antibody-based therapies which involve administering of anti-polypeptides and anti-polynucleotide antibodies to a mammalian, preferably human, patient for treating one or more of the described disorders. Methods for producing anti-polypeptides and anti-polynucleotide antibodies polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies are described in detail elsewhere herein. Such antibodies may be provided in pharmaceutically acceptable compositions as known in the art or as described herein. A summary of the ways in which the antibodies of the present invention may be used therapeutically includes binding polynucleotides or polypeptides of the present invention locally or systemically in the body or by direct cytotoxicity of the antibody, e.g. as mediated by complement (CDC) or by effector cells (ADCC). Some of these approaches are described in more detail below. Armed with the teachings provided herein, one of ordinary skill in the art will know how to use the antibodies of the present invention for diagnostic, monitoring or therapeutic puφoses without undue experimentation. In particular, the antibodies, fragments and derivatives of the present invention are useful for treating a subject having or developing cell proliferative and/or differentiation disorders as described herein. Such treatment comprises administering a single or multiple doses of the antibody, or a fragment, derivative, or a conjugate thereof. The antibodies of this invention may be advantageously utilized in combination with other monoclonal or chimeric antibodies, or with lymphokines or hematopoietic growth factors, for example., which serve to increase the number or activity of effector cells which interact with the antibodies. It is preferred to use high affinity and/or potent in vivo inhibiting and/or neutralizing antibodies against polypeptides or polynucleotides of the present invention, fragments or regions thereof, for both immunoassays directed to and therapy of disorders related to polynucleotides or polypeptides, including fragements thereof, of the present invention. Such antibodies, fragments, or regions, will preferably have an affinity for polynucleotides or polypeptides, including fragements thereof. Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5X10 "6 M, 10 "6 M, 5X10 "7 M, 10 "7 M, 5X10 "8 M, 10 "8 M, 5X10 "9 M, 10 "9 M, 5X10 "10 M, 10 " 10 M, 5X10 "π M, 10 "π M, 5X10 "12 M, 10 "12 M, 5X10 ", 3 M, 10 "13 M, 5X10 " 14 M, 10 "14 M, 5X10 "15 M, and 10 "15 M. Moreover, polypeptides of the present invention are useful in inhibiting the angiogenesis of proliferative cells or tissues, either alone, as a protein fusion, or in combination with other polypeptides directly or indirectly, as described elsewhere herein. In a most preferred embodiment, said anti-angiogenesis effect may be achieved indirectly, for example, through the inhibition of hematopoietic, tumor- specific cells, such as tumor-associated macrophages (See Joseph IB, et al. J Natl Cancer Inst, 90(21): 1648-53 (1998), which is hereby incoφorated by reference). Antibodies directed to polypeptides or polynucleotides of the present invention may also result in inhibition of angiogenesis directly, or indirectly (See Witte L, et al., Cancer Metastasis Rev. 17(2): 155-61 ( 1998), which is hereby incorporated by reference)). Polypeptides, including protein fusions, of the present invention, or fragments thereof may be useful in inhibiting proliferative cells or tissues through the induction of apoptosis. Said polypeptides may act either directly, or indirectly to induce apoptosis of proliferative cells and tissues, for example in the activation of a death- domain receptor, such as tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor- 1 , CD95 (Fas/APO-1), TNF-receptor-related apoptosis-mediated protein (TRAMP) and TNF-related apoptosis-inducing ligand (TRAIL) receptor- 1 and -2 (See Schulze-Osthoff K, et.al., Eur J Biochem 254(3):439-59 (1998), which is hereby incoφorated by reference). Moreover, in another preferred embodiment of the present invention, said polypeptides may induce apoptosis through other mechanisms, such as in the activation of other proteins which will activate apoptosis, or through stimulating the expression of said proteins, either alone or in combination with small molecule drugs or adjuviants, such as apoptonin, galectins, thioredoxins, antiinflammatory proteins (See for example, Mutat Res 400(l-2):447-55 (1998), Med Hypotheses.50(5):423-33 (1998), Chem Biol Interact. Apr 24; 1 1 1-1 12:23-34 (1998), J Mol Med.76(6):402-12 (1998), Int J Tissue React;20(l):3-15 (1998), which are all hereby incoφorated by reference). Polypeptides, including protein fusions to, or fragments thereof, of the present invention are useful in inhibiting the metastasis of proliferative cells or tissues. Inhibition may occur as a direct result of administering polypeptides, or antibodies directed to said polypeptides as described elsewere herein, or indirectly, such as activating the expression of proteins known to inhibit metastasis, for example alpha 4 integrins, (See, e.g., Curr Top Microbiol Immunol 1998;231 : 125-41, which is hereby incoφorated by reference). Such thereapeutic affects of the present invention may be achieved either alone, or in combination with small molecule drugs or adjuvants. In another embodiment, the invention provides a method of delivering compositions containing the polypeptides of the invention (e.g., compositions containing polypeptides or polypeptide antibodes associated with heterologous polypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, or prodrugs) to targeted cells expressing the polypeptide of the present invention. Polypeptides or polypeptide antibodes of the invention may be associated with with heterologous polypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, or prodrugs via hydrophobic, hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent interactions. Polypeptides, protein fusions to, or fragments thereof, of the present invention are useful in enhancing the immunogenicity and/or antigenicity of proliferating cells or tissues, either directly, such as would occur if the polypeptides of the present invention 'vaccinated' the immune response to respond to proliferative antigens and immunogens, or indirectly, such as in activating the expression of proteins known to enhance the immune response (e.g. chemokines), to said antigens and immunogens. Cardiovascular Disorders Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may be used to treat cardiovascular disorders, including peripheral artery disease, such as limb ischemia. Cardiovascular disorders include cardiovascular abnormalities, such as arterio- arterial fistula, arteriovenous fistula, cerebral arteriovenous malformations, congenital heart defects, pulmonary atresia, and Scimitar Syndrome. Congenital heart defects include aortic coarctation, cor triatriatum, coronary vessel anomalies, crisscross heart, dextrocardia, patent ductus arteriosus, Ebstein's anomaly, Eisenmenger complex, hypoplastic left heart syndrome, levocardia, tetralogy of fallot, transposition of great vessels, double outlet right ventricle, tricuspid atresia, persistent truncus arteriosus, and heart septal defects, such as aortopulmonary septal defect, endocardial cushion defects, Lutembacher's Syndrome, trilogy of Fallot, ventricular heart septal defects. Cardiovascular disorders also include heart disease, such as arrhythmias, carcinoid heart disease, high cardiac output, low cardiac output, cardiac tamponade, endocarditis (including bacterial), heart aneurysm, cardiac arrest, congestive heart failure, congestive cardiomyopathy, paroxysmal dyspnea, cardiac edema, heart hypertrophy, congestive cardiomyopathy, left ventricular hypertrophy, right ventricular hypertrophy, post-infarction heart rupture, ventricular septal rupture, heart valve diseases, myocardial diseases, myocardial ischemia, peπcardial effusion, pericarditis (including constπctive and tuberculous), pneumopeπcardium, postpeπcardiotomy syndrome, pulmonary heart disease, rheumatic heart disease, ventricular dysfunction, hyperemia, cardiovascular pregnancy complications, Scimitar Syndrome, cardiovascular syphilis, and cardiovascular tuberculosis. Arrhythmias include sinus arrhythmia, atnal fibrillation, atπal flutter, bradycardia, extrasystole, Adams-Stokes Syndrome, bundle-branch block, sinoatπal block, long QT syndrome, parasystole, Lown-Ganong-Levine Syndrome, Mahaim- type pre-excitation syndrome, Wolff-Parkinson- White syndrome, sick sinus syndrome, tachycardias, and ventricular fibrillation Tachycardias include paroxysmal tachycardia, supraventπcular tachycardia, accelerated ldioventπcular rhythm, atπoventπcular nodal reentry tachycardia, ectopic atπal tachycardia, ectopic junctional tachycardia, sinoatπal nodal reentry tachycardia, sinus tachycardia, Torsades de Pointes, and ventricular tachycardia Heart valve disease include aortic valve insufficiency, aortic valve stenosis, hear murmurs, aortic valve prolapse, mitral valve prolapse, tπcuspid valve prolapse, mitral valve insufficiency, mitral valve stenosis, pulmonary atresia, pulmonary valve insufficiency, pulmonary valve stenosis, tπcuspid atresia, tπcuspid valve insufficiency, and tπcuspid valve stenosis Myocardial diseases include alcoholic cardiomyopathy, congestive cardiomyopathy, hypertrophic cardiomyopathy, aortic subvalvular stenosis, pulmonary subvalvular stenosis, restrictive cardiomyopathy, Chagas cardiomyopathy, endocardial fibroelastosis, endomyocardial fibrosis, Kearns Syndrome, myocardial reperfusion injury, and myocarditis Myocardial ischemias include coronary disease, such as angina pectoπs, coronary aneurysm, coronary arteriosclerosis, coronary thrombosis, coronary vasospasm, myocardial infarction and myocardial stunning Cardiovascular diseases also include vascular diseases such as aneurysms, angiodysplasia, angiomatosis, bacillary angiomatosis, Hippel-Lindau Disease, Klippel-Trenaunay- Weber Syndrome, Sturge- Weber Syndrome, angioneurotic edema, aortic diseases, Takayasu's Arteritis, aortitis, Leriche's Syndrome, arterial occlusive diseases, arteritis, enarteritis, polyarteritis nodosa, cerebrovascular disorders, diabetic angiopathies, diabetic retinopathy, embolisms, thrombosis, erythromelalgia, hemorrhoids, hepatic veno-occlusive disease, hypertension, hypotension, ischemia, peripheral vascular diseases, phlebitis, pulmonary veno-occlusive disease, Raynaud's disease, CREST syndrome, retinal vein occlusion, Scimitar syndrome, superior vena cava syndrome, telangiectasia, atacia telangiectasia, hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia, varicocele, varicose veins, varicose ulcer, vasculitis, and venous insufficiency. Aneurysms include dissecting aneurysms, false aneurysms, infected aneurysms, ruptured aneurysms, aortic aneurysms, cerebral aneurysms, coronary aneurysms, heart aneurysms, and iliac aneurysms. Arterial occlusive diseases include arteriosclerosis, intermittent claudication, carotid stenosis, fibromuscular dysplasias, mesenteric vascular occlusion, Moyamoya disease, renal artery obstruction, retinal artery occlusion, and thromboangiitis obliterans. Cerebrovascular disorders include carotid artery diseases, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, cerebral aneurysm, cerebral anoxia, cerebral arteriosclerosis, cerebral arteriovenous malformation, cerebral artery diseases, cerebral embolism and thrombosis, carotid artery thrombosis, sinus thrombosis, Wallenberg's syndrome, cerebral hemorrhage, epidural hematoma, subdural hematoma, subaraxhnoid hemorrhage, cerebral infarction, cerebral ischemia (including transient), subclavian steal syndrome, peri ventricular leukomalacia, vascular headache, cluster headache, migraine, and vertebrobasilar insufficiency. Embolisms include air embolisms, amniotic fluid embolisms, cholesterol embolisms, blue toe syndrome, fat embolisms, pulmonary embolisms, and thromoboembolisms. Thrombosis include coronary thrombosis, hepatic vein thrombosis, retinal vein occlusion, carotid artery thrombosis, sinus thrombosis, Wallenberg's syndrome, and thrombophlebitis. Ischemia includes cerebral ischemia, ischemic colitis, compartment syndromes, anterior compartment syndrome, myocardial ischemia, reperfusion injuries, and peripheral limb ischemia. Vasculitis includes aortitis, arteritis, Behcet's Syndrome, Churg-Strauss Syndrome, mucocutaneous lymph node syndrome, thromboangiitis obliterans, hypersensitivity vasculitis, Schoenlein-Henoch puφura, allergic cutaneous vasculitis, and Wegener's granulomatosis. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention, are especially effective for the treatment of critical limb ischemia and coronary disease. Polypeptides may be administered using any method known in the art, including, but not limited to, direct needle injection at the delivery site, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, biolistic injectors, particle accelerators, gelfoam sponge depots, other commercially available depot materials, osmotic pumps, oral or suppositorial solid pharmaceutical formulations, decanting or topical applications during surgery, aerosol delivery. Such methods are known in the art. Polypeptides may be administered as part of a Therapeutic, described in more detail below. Methods of delivering polynucleotides are described in more detail herein. Anti-Angiogenesis Activity The naturally occurring balance between endogenous stimulators and inhibitors of angiogenesis is one in which inhibitory influences predominate. Rastinejad et al, Cell 5(5:345-355 (1989). In those rare instances in which neovascularization occurs under normal physiological conditions, such as wound healing, organ regeneration, embryonic development, and female reproductive processes, angiogenesis is stringently regulated and spatially and temporally delimited. Under conditions of pathological angiogenesis such as that characterizing solid tumor growth, these regulatory controls fail. Unregulated angiogenesis becomes pathologic and sustains progression of many neoplastic and non-neoplastic diseases. A number of serious diseases are dominated by abnormal neovascularization including solid tumor growth and metastases, arthritis, some types of eye disorders, and psoriasis. See, e.g., reviews by Moses et al. Biotech. 9:630-634 (1991); Folkman et al, N. Engl J. Med, 335: 1757- 1763 (1995); Auerbach et al, J. Microvasc. Res. 29:401-41 1 ( 1985); Folkman, Advances in Cancer Research, eds. Klein and Weinhouse, Academic Press, New York, pp. 175-203 ( 1985); Patz, Am. J. Opthalmol 94:1X5-143 (1982); and Folkman et al, Science 227:719-725 (1983). In a number of pathological conditions, the process of angiogenesis contributes to the disease state. For example, significant data have accumulated which suggest that the growth of solid tumors is dependent on angiogenesis. Folkman and Klagsbrun, Science 235:442-441 (1987). The polynucleotides encoding a polypeptide of the present invention may be administered along with other polynucleotides encoding an angiogenic protein. Examples of angiogenic proteins include, but are not limited to, acidic and basic fibroblast growth factors, VEGF-1, VEGF-2, VEGF-3, epidermal growth factor alpha and beta, platelet-derived endothelial cell growth factor, platelet-derived growth factor, tumor necrosis factor alpha, hepatocyte growth factor, insulin like growth factor, colony stimulating factor, macrophage colony stimulating factor, granulocyte/macrophage colony stimulating factor, and nitric oxide synthase. The present invention provides for treatment of diseases or disorders associated with neovascularization by administration of the polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Malignant and metastatic conditions which can be treated with the polynucleotides and polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention include, but are not limited to, malignancies, solid tumors, and cancers described herein and otherwise known in the art (for a review of such disorders, see Fishman et al, Medicine, 2d Ed., J. B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia (1985)). Thus, the present invention provides a method of treating an angiogenesis-related disease and/or disorder, comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist of the invention. For example, polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be utilized in a variety of additional methods in order to therapeutically treat a cancer or tumor. Cancers which may be treated with polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists include, but are not limited to solid tumors, including lung, prostate, breast, ovarian, stomach, pancreas, larynx, esophagus, testes, liver, parotid, biliary tract, colon, rectum, cervix, uterus, endometrium, kidney, bladder, thyroid cancer; primary tumors and metastases; melanomas; glioblastoma; Kaposi's sarcoma; leiomyosarcoma; non- small cell lung cancer; colorectal cancer; advanced malignancies; and blood born tumors such as leukemias. For example, polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be delivered topically, in order to treat cancers such as skin cancer, head and neck tumors, breast tumors, and Kaposi's sarcoma. Within yet other aspects, polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be utilized to treat superficial forms of bladder cancer by, for example, intravesical administration. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be delivered directly into the tumor, or near the tumor site, via injection or a catheter. Of course, as the artisan of ordinary skill will appreciate, the appropriate mode of administration will vary according to the cancer to be treated. Other modes of delivery are discussed herein. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be useful in treating other disorders, besides cancers, which involve angiogenesis. These disorders include, but are not limited to: benign tumors, for example hemangiomas, acoustic neuromas, neurofibromas, trachomas, and pyogenic granulomas; artheroscleric plaques; ocular angiogenic diseases, for example, diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, macular degeneration, corneal graft rejection, neovascular glaucoma, retrolental fibroplasia, rubeosis, retinoblastoma, uvietis and Pterygia (abnormal blood vessel growth) of the eye; rheumatoid arthritis; psoriasis; delayed wound healing; endometriosis; vasculogenesis; granulations; hypertrophic scars (keloids); nonunion fractures; scleroderma; trachoma; vascular adhesions; myocardial angiogenesis; coronary collaterals; cerebral collaterals; arteriovenous malformations; ischemic limb angiogenesis; Osier- Webber Syndrome; plaque neovascularization; telangiectasia; hemophiliac joints: angiofibroma; fibromuscular dysplasia; wound granulation; Crohn's disease; and atherosclerosis. For example, within one aspect of the present invention methods are provided for treating hypertrophic scars and keloids, comprising the step of administering a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist of the invention to a hypertrophic scar or keloid. Within one embodiment of the present invention polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists are directly injected into a hypertrophic scar or keloid, in order to prevent the progression of these lesions. This therapy is of particular value in the prophylactic treatment of conditions which are known to result in the development of hypertrophic scars and keloids (e.g., burns), and is preferably initiated after the proliferative phase has had time to progress (approximately 14 days after the initial injury), but before hypertrophic scar or keloid development. As noted above, the present invention also provides methods for treating neovascular diseases of the eye, including for example, corneal neovascularization, neovascular glaucoma, proliferative diabetic retinopathy, retrolental fibroplasia and macular degeneration. Moreover, Ocular disorders associated with neovascularization which can be treated with the polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention (including agonists and/or antagonists) include, but are not limited to: neovascular glaucoma, diabetic retinopathy, retinoblastoma, retrolental fibroplasia, uveitis, retinopathy of prematurity macular degeneration, corneal graft neovascularization, as well as other eye inflammatory diseases, ocular tumors and diseases associated with choroidal or iris neovascularization. See, e.g., reviews by Waltman et al, Am. J. Ophthal 85:104- 710 (1978) and Gartner et al, Surv. Ophthal. 22:291-312 (1978). Thus, within one aspect of the present invention methods are provided for treating neovascular diseases of the eye such as corneal neovascularization (including corneal graft neovascularization), comprising the step of administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound (as described above) to the cornea, such that the formation of blood vessels is inhibited. Briefly, the cornea is a tissue which normally lacks blood vessels. In certain pathological conditions however, capillaries may extend into the cornea from the pericorneal vascular plexus of the limbus. When the cornea becomes vascularized, it also becomes clouded, resulting in a decline in the patient's visual acuity. Visual loss may become complete if the cornea completely opacitates. A wide variety of disorders can result in corneal neovascularization, including for example, corneal infections (e.g., trachoma, heφes simplex keratitis, leishmaniasis and onchocerciasis), immunological processes (e.g., graft rejection and Stevens- Johnson's syndrome), alkali burns, trauma, inflammation (of any cause), toxic and nutritional deficiency states, and as a complication of wearing contact lenses. Within particularly preferred embodiments of the invention, may be prepared for topical administration in saline (combined with any of the preservatives and antimicrobial agents commonly used in ocular preparations), and administered in eyedrop form. The solution or suspension may be prepared in its pure form and administered several times daily. Alternatively, anti-angiogenic compositions, prepared as described above, may also be administered directly to the cornea. Within preferred embodiments, the anti-angiogenic composition is prepared with a muco- adhesive polymer which binds to cornea. Within further embodiments, the anti- angiogenic factors or anti-angiogenic compositions may be utilized as an adjunct to conventional steroid therapy. Topical therapy may also be useful prophylactically in corneal lesions which are known to have a high probability of inducing an angiogenic response (such as chemical burns). In these instances the treatment, likely in combination with steroids, may be instituted immediately to help prevent subsequent complications. Within other embodiments, the compounds described above may be injected directly into the corneal stroma by an ophthalmologist under microscopic guidance. The preferred site of injection may vary with the moφhology of the individual lesion, but the goal of the administration would be to place the composition at the advancing front of the vasculature (i.e., interspersed between the blood vessels and the normal cornea). In most cases this would involve perilimbic corneal injection to "protect" the cornea from the advancing blood vessels. This method may also be utilized shortly after a corneal insult in order to prophylactically prevent corneal neovascularization. In this situation the material could be injected in the perilimbic cornea interspersed between the corneal lesion and its undesired potential limbic blood supply. Such methods may also be utilized in a similar fashion to prevent capillary invasion of transplanted corneas. In a sustained-release form injections might only be required 2- 3 times per year. A steroid could also be added to the injection solution to reduce inflammation resulting from the injection itself. Within another aspect of the present invention, methods are provided for treating neovascular glaucoma, comprising the step of administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist to the eye, such that the formation of blood vessels is inhibited. In one embodiment, the compound may be administered topically to the eye in order to treat early forms of neovascular glaucoma. Within other embodiments, the compound may be implanted by injection into the region of the anterior chamber angle. Within other embodiments, the compound may also be placed in any location such that the compound is continuously released into the aqueous humor. Within another aspect of the present invention, methods are provided for treating proliferative diabetic retinopathy, comprising the step of administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist to the eyes, such that the formation of blood vessels is inhibited. Within particularly preferred embodiments of the invention, proliferative diabetic retinopathy may be treated by injection into the aqueous humor or the vitreous, in order to increase the local concentration of the polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist in the retina. Preferably, this treatment should be initiated prior to the acquisition of severe disease requiring photocoagulation. Within another aspect of the present invention, methods are provided for treating retrolental fibroplasia, comprising the step of administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist to the eye, such that the formation of blood vessels is inhibited. The compound may be administered topically, via intravitreous injection and/or via intraocular implants. Additionally, disorders which can be treated with the polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists include, but are not limited to, hemangioma, arthritis, psoriasis, angiofibroma, atherosclerotic plaques, delayed wound healing, granulations, hemophilic joints, hypertrophic scars, nonunion fractures, Osier- Weber syndrome, pyogenic granuloma, scleroderma, trachoma, and vascular adhesions. Moreover, disorders and/or states, which can be treated with be treated with the the polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists include, but are not limited to, solid tumors, blood born tumors such as leukemias, tumor metastasis, Kaposi's sarcoma, benign tumors, for example hemangiomas, acoustic neuromas, neurofibromas, trachomas, and pyogenic granulomas, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, ocular angiogenic diseases, for example, diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, macular degeneration, corneal graft rejection, neovascular glaucoma, retrolental fibroplasia, rubeosis, retinoblastoma, and uvietis, delayed wound healing, endometriosis, vascluogenesis, granulations, hypertrophic scars (keloids), nonunion fractures, scleroderma, trachoma, vascular adhesions, myocardial angiogenesis, coronary collaterals, cerebral collaterals, arteriovenous malformations, ischemic limb angiogenesis, Osier-Webber Syndrome, plaque neovascularization, telangiectasia, hemophiliac joints, angiofibroma fibromuscular dysplasia, wound granulation, Crohn's disease, atherosclerosis, birth control agent by preventing vascularization required for embryo implantation controlling menstruation, diseases that have angiogenesis as a pathologic consequence such as cat scratch disease (Rochele minalia quintosa), ulcers (Helicobacter pylori), Bartonellosis and bacillary angiomatosis. In one aspect of the birth control method, an amount of the compound sufficient to block embryo implantation is administered before or after intercourse and fertilization have occurred, thus providing an effective method of birth control, possibly a "morning after" method. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists may also be used in controlling menstruation or administered as either a peritoneal lavage fluid or for peritoneal implantation in the treatment of endometriosis. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists of the present invention may be incorporated into surgical sutures in order to prevent stitch granulomas. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists may be utilized in a wide variety of surgical procedures. For example, within one aspect of the present invention a compositions (in the form of, for example, a spray or film) may be utilized to coat or spray an area prior to removal of a tumor, in order to isolate normal surrounding tissues from malignant tissue, and/or to prevent the spread of disease to surrounding tissues. Within other aspects of the present invention, compositions (e.g., in the form of a spray) may be delivered via endoscopic procedures in order to coat tumors, or inhibit angiogenesis in a desired locale. Within yet other aspects of the present invention, surgical meshes which have been coated with anti- angiogenic compositions of the present invention may be utilized in any procedure wherein a surgical mesh might be utilized. For example, within one embodiment of the invention a surgical mesh laden with an anti-angiogenic composition may be utilized during abdominal cancer resection surgery (e.g., subsequent to colon resection) in order to provide support to the structure, and to release an amount of the anti- angiogenic factor. Within further aspects of the present invention, methods are provided for treating tumor excision sites, comprising administering a polynucleotide, polypeptide, agonist and/or agonist to the resection margins of a tumor subsequent to excision, such that the local recurrence of cancer and the formation of new blood vessels at the site is inhibited. Within one embodiment of the invention, the anti-angiogenic compound is administered directly to the tumor excision site (e.g., applied by swabbing, brushing or otherwise coating the resection margins of the tumor with the anti-angiogenic compound). Alternatively, the anti-angiogenic compounds may be incoφorated into known surgical pastes prior to administration. Within particularly preferred embodiments of the invention, the anti-angiogenic compounds are applied after hepatic resections for malignancy, and after neurosurgical operations. Within one aspect of the present invention, polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists may be administered to the resection margin of a wide variety of tumors, including for example, breast, colon, brain and hepatic tumors. For example, within one embodiment of the invention, anti-angiogenic compounds may be administered to the site of a neurological tumor subsequent to excision, such that the formation of new blood vessels at the site are inhibited. The polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists of the present invention may also be administered along with other anti-angiogenic factors. Representative examples of other anti-angiogenic factors include: Anti-Invasive Factor, retinoic acid and derivatives thereof, paclitaxel, Suramin, Tissue Inhibitor of Metalloproteinase-1 , Tissue Inhibitor of Metalloproteinase-2, Plasminogen Activator Inhibitor- 1 , Plasminogen Activator Inhibitor-2, and various forms of the lighter "d group" transition metals. Lighter "d group" transition metals include, for example, vanadium, molybdenum, tungsten, titanium, niobium, and tantalum species. Such transition metal species may form transition metal complexes. Suitable complexes of the above-mentioned transition metal species include oxo transition metal complexes. Representative examples of vanadium complexes include oxo vanadium complexes such as vanadate and vanadyl complexes. Suitable vanadate complexes include metavanadate and orthovanadate complexes such as, for example, ammonium metavanadate, sodium metavanadate, and sodium orthovanadate. Suitable vanadyl complexes include, for example, vanadyl acetylacetonate and vanadyl sulfate including vanadyl sulfate hydrates such as vanadyl sulfate mono- and trihydrates. Representative examples of tungsten and molybdenum complexes also include oxo complexes. Suitable oxo tungsten complexes include tungstate and tungsten oxide complexes. Suitable tungstate complexes include ammonium tungstate, calcium tungstate, sodium tungstate dihydrate, and tungstic acid. Suitable tungsten oxides include tungsten (IV) oxide and tungsten (VI) oxide. Suitable oxo molybdenum complexes include molybdate, molybdenum oxide, and molybdenyl complexes. Suitable molybdate complexes include ammonium molybdate and its hydrates, sodium molybdate and its hydrates, and potassium molybdate and its hydrates. Suitable molybdenum oxides include molybdenum (VI) oxide, molybdenum (VI) oxide, and molybdic acid. Suitable molybdenyl complexes include, for example, molybdenyl acetylacetonate. Other suitable tungsten and molybdenum complexes include hydroxo derivatives derived from, for example, glycerol, tartaric acid, and sugars. A wide variety of other anti-angiogenic factors may also be utilized within the context of the present invention. Representative examples include platelet factor 4; protamine sulphate; sulphated chitin derivatives (prepared from queen crab shells), (Murata et al., Cancer Res. 51 :22-26, 1991); Sulphated Polysaccharide Peptidoglycan Complex (SP- PG) (the function of this compound may be enhanced by the presence of steroids such as estrogen, and tamoxifen citrate); Staurosporine; modulators of matrix metabolism, including for example, proline analogs, cishydroxyproline, d,L- 3,4-dehydroproline, Thiaproline, alpha,alpha-dipyridyl, aminopropionitrile fumarate; 4-propyl-5-(4-pyridinyl)-2(3H)-oxazolone; Methotrexate; Mitoxantrone; Heparin; Interferons; 2 Macroglobulin-serum; ChIMP-3 (Pavloff et al., J. Bio. Chem. 267: 17321-17326, 1992); Chymostatin (Tomkinson et al., Biochem J. 286:475-480, 1992); Cyclodextrin Tetradecasulfate; Eponemycin; Camptothecin; Fumagillin (Ingber et al., Nature 348:555-557, 1990); Gold Sodium Thiomalate ("GST"; Matsubara and Ziff, J. Clin. Invest. 79: 1440-1446, 1987); anticollagenase-serum; alpha2-antiplasmin (Holmes et al., J. Biol. Chem. 262(4): 1659- 1664, 1987); Bisantrene (National Cancer Institute); Lobenzarit disodium (N-(2)-carboxyphenyl-4- chloroanthronilic acid disodium or "CCA"; Takeuchi et al., Agents Actions 36:312- 316, 1992); Thalidomide; Angostatic steroid; AGM-1470; carboxynaminolmidazole; and metalloproteinase inhibitors such as BB94. Diseases at the Cellular Level Diseases associated with increased cell survival or the inhibition of apoptosis that could be treated or detected by polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as antagonists or agonists of the present invention, include cancers (such as follicular lymphomas, carcinomas with p53 mutations, and hormone-dependent tumors, including, but not limited to colon cancer, cardiac tumors, pancreatic cancer, melanoma, retinoblastoma, glioblastoma, lung cancer, intestinal cancer, testicular cancer, stomach cancer, neuroblastoma, myxoma, myoma, lymphoma, endothelioma, osteoblastoma, osteoclastoma, osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, adenoma, breast cancer, prostate cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma and ovarian cancer); autoimmune disorders (such as, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, biliary cirrhosis, Behcet's disease, Crohn's disease, polymyositis, systemic lupus erythematosus and immune-related glomerulonephritis and rheumatoid arthritis) and viral infections (such as heφes viruses, pox viruses and adenoviruses), inflammation, graft v. host disease, acute graft rejection, and chronic graft rejection. In preferred embodiments, polynucleotides, polypeptides, and/or antagonists of the invention are used to inhibit growth, progression, and/or metasis of cancers, in particular those listed above. Additional diseases or conditions associated with increased cell survival that could be treated or detected by polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention include, but are not limited to, progression, and/or metastases of malignancies and related disorders such as leukemia (including acute leukemias (e.g., acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia (including myeloblastic, promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic, and erythroleukemia)) and chronic leukemias (e.g., chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia and chronic lymphocytic leukemia)), polycythemia vera, lymphomas (e.g., Hodgkin's disease and non-Hodgkin's disease), multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, and solid tumors including, but not limited to, sarcomas and carcinomas such as fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma. lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilm's tumor, cervical cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, menangioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, and retinoblastoma. Diseases associated with increased apoptosis that could be treated or detected by polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, include AIDS; neurodegenerative disorders (such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Retinitis pigmentosa, Cerebellar degeneration and brain tumor or prior associated disease); autoimmune disorders (such as, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, biliary cirrhosis, Behcet's disease, Crohn's disease, polymyositis, systemic lupus erythematosus and immune-related glomerulonephritis and rheumatoid arthritis) myelodysplastic syndromes (such as aplastic anemia), graft v. host disease, ischemic injury (such as that caused by myocardial infarction, stroke and reperfusion injury), liver injury (e.g., hepatitis related liver injury, ischemia/reperfusion injury, cholestosis (bile duct injury) and liver cancer); toxin-induced liver disease (such as that caused by alcohol), septic shock, cachexia and anorexia. Wound Healing and Epithelial Cell Proliferation In accordance with yet a further aspect of the present invention, there is provided a process for utilizing polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, for therapeutic puφoses, for example, to stimulate epithelial cell proliferation and basal keratinocytes for the puφose of wound healing, and to stimulate hair follicle production and healing of dermal wounds. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may be clinically useful in stimulating wound healing including surgical wounds, excisional wounds, deep wounds involving damage of the dermis and epidermis, eye tissue wounds, dental tissue wounds, oral cavity wounds, diabetic ulcers, dermal ulcers, cubitus ulcers, arterial ulcers, venous stasis ulcers, burns resulting from heat exposure or chemicals, and other abnormal wound healing conditions such as uremia, malnutrition, vitamin deficiencies and complications associted with systemic treatment with steroids, radiation therapy and antineoplastic drugs and antimetabolites. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to promote dermal reestablishment subsequent to dermal loss Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to increase the adherence of skin grafts to a wound bed and to stimulate re-epithelialization from the wound bed. The following are types of grafts that polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to increase adherence to a wound bed: autografts, artificial skin, allografts, autodermic graft, autoepdermic grafts, avacular grafts, Blair-Brown grafts, bone graft, brephoplastic grafts, cutis graft, delayed graft, dermic graft, epidermic graft, fascia graft, full thickness graft, heterologous graft, xenograft, homologous graft, hypeφlastic graft, lamellar graft, mesh graft, mucosal graft, Ollier- Thiersch graft, omenpal graft, patch graft, pedicle graft, penetrating graft, split skin graft, thick split graft. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, can be used to promote skin strength and to improve the appearance of aged skin. It is believed that polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, will also produce changes in hepatocyte proliferation, and epithelial cell proliferation in the lung, breast, pancreas, stomach, small intesting, and large intestine. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could promote proliferation of epithelial cells such as sebocytes, hair follicles, hepatocytes, type II pneumocytes, mucin-producing goblet cells, and other epithelial cells and their progenitors contained within the skin, lung, liver, and gastrointestinal tract. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may promote proliferation of endothelial cells, keratinocytes, and basal keratinocytes. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could also be used to reduce the side effects of gut toxicity that result from radiation, chemotherapy treatments or viral infections. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may have a cytoprotective effect on the small intestine mucosa. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may also stimulate healing of mucositis (mouth ulcers) that result from chemotherapy and viral infections. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could further be used in full regeneration of skin in full and partial thickness skin defects, including burns, (i.e., repopulation of hair follicles, sweat glands, and sebaceous glands), treatment of other skin defects such as psoriasis. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to treat epidermolysis bullosa, a defect in adherence of the epidermis to the underlying dermis which results in frequent, open and painful blisters by accelerating reepithelialization of these lesions. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could also be used to treat gastric and doudenal ulcers and help heal by scar formation of the mucosal lining and regeneration of glandular mucosa and duodenal mucosal lining more rapidly. Inflamamatory bowel diseases, such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis, are diseases which result in destruction of the mucosal surface of the small or large intestine, respectively. Thus, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to promote the resurfacing of the mucosal surface to aid more rapid healing and to prevent progression of inflammatory bowel disease. Treatment with polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the present invention, is expected to have a significant effect on the production of mucus throughout the gastrointestinal tract and could be used to protect the intestinal mucosa from injurious substances that are ingested or following surgery. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to treat diseases associate with the under expression. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to prevent and heal damage to the lungs due to various pathological states. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, which could stimulate proliferation and differentiation and promote the repair of alveoli and brochiolar epithelium to prevent or treat acute or chronic lung damage. For example, emphysema, which results in the progressive loss of aveoli, and inhalation injuries, i.e., resulting from smoke inhalation and burns, that cause necrosis of the bronchiolar epithelium and alveoli could be effectively treated using polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Also, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to stimulate the proliferation of and differentiation of type II pneumocytes, which may help treat or prevent disease such as hyaline membrane diseases, such as infant respiratory distress syndrome and bronchopulmonary displasia, in premature infants. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could stimulate the proliferation and differentiation of hepatocytes and, thus, could be used to alleviate or treat liver diseases and pathologies such as fulminant liver failure caused by cirrhosis, liver damage caused by viral hepatitis and toxic substances (i.e., acetaminophen, carbon tetraholoride and other hepatotoxins known in the art). In addition, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used treat or prevent the onset of diabetes mellitus. In patients with newly diagnosed Types I and II diabetes, where some islet cell function remains, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to maintain the islet function so as to alleviate, delay or prevent permanent manifestation of the disease. Also, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used as an auxiliary in islet cell transplantation to improve or promote islet cell function. Neurological Diseases In accordance with yet a further aspect of the present invention, there is provided a process for utilizing polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, for therapeutic puφoses, for example, to stimulate neurological cell proliferation and/or differentiation. Therefore, polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or antagonists of the invention may be used to treat and/or detect neurologic diseases. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention, can be used as a marker or detector of a particular nervous system disease or disorder. Examples of neurologic diseases which can be treated or detected with polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists, and/or antagonists of the present invention include brain diseases, such as metabolic brain diseases which includes phenylketonuria such as maternal phenylketonuria, pyruvate carboxylase deficiency, pyruvate dehydrogenase complex deficiency, Wernicke's Encephalopathy, brain edema, brain neoplasms such as cerebellar neoplasms which include infratentorial neoplasms, cerebral ventricle neoplasms such as choroid plexus neoplasms, hypothalamic neoplasms, supratentorial neoplasms, canavan disease, cerebellar diseases such as cerebellar ataxia which include spinocerebellar degeneration such as ataxia telangiectasia, cerebellar dyssynergia, Friederich's Ataxia, Machado-Joseph Disease, olivopontocerebellar atrophy, cerebellar neoplasms such as infratentorial neoplasms, diffuse cerebral sclerosis such as encephalitis periaxialis, globoid cell leukodystrophy, metachromatic leukodystrophy and subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, cerebrovascular disorders (such as carotid artery diseases which include carotid artery thrombosis, carotid stenosis and Moyamoya Disease, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, cerebral aneurysm, cerebral anoxia, cerebral arteriosclerosis, cerebral arteriovenous malformations, cerebral artery diseases, cerebral embolism and thrombosis such as carotid artery thrombosis, sinus thrombosis and Wallenberg's Syndrome, cerebral hemorrhage such as epidural hematoma, subdural hematoma and subarachnoid hemorrhage, cerebral infarction, cerebral ischemia such as transient cerebral ischemia, Subclavian Steal Syndrome and vertebrobasilar insufficiency, vascular dementia such as multi-infarct dementia, periventricular leukomalacia, vascular headache such as cluster headache, migraine, dementia such as AIDS Dementia Complex, presenile dementia such as Alzheimer's Disease and Creutzfeldt- Jakob Syndrome, senile dementia such as Alzheimer's Disease and progressive supranuclear palsy, vascular dementia such as multi-infarct dementia, encephalitis which include encephalitis periaxialis, viral encephalitis such as epidemic encephalitis, Japanese Encephalitis, St. Louis Encephalitis, tick-borne encephalitis and West Nile Fever, acute disseminated encephalomyelitis, meningoencephalitis such as uveomeningoencephalitic syndrome, Postencephalitic Parkinson Disease and subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, encephalomalacia such as periventricular leukomalacia, epilepsy such as generalized epilepsy which includes infantile spasms, absence epilepsy, myoclonic epilepsy which includes MERRF Syndrome, tonic- clonic epilepsy, partial epilepsy such as complex partial epilepsy, frontal lobe epilepsy and temporal lobe epilepsy, post-traumatic epilepsy, status epilepticus such as Epilepsia Partialis Continua, Hallervorden-Spatz Syndrome, hydrocephalus such as Dandy-Walker Syndrome and normal pressure hydrocephalus, hypothalamic diseases such as hypothalamic neoplasms, cerebral malaria, narcolepsy which includes cataplexy, bulbar poliomyelitis, cerebri pseudotumor, Rett Syndrome, Reye's Syndrome, thalamic diseases, cerebral toxoplasmosis, intracranial tuberculoma and Zellweger Syndrome, central nervous system infections such as AIDS Dementia Complex, Brain Abscess, subdural empyema, encephalomyelitis such as Equine Encephalomyelitis, Venezuelan Equine Encephalomyelitis, Necrotizing Hemorrhagic Encephalomyelitis, Visna, cerebral malaria, meningitis such as arachnoiditis, aseptic meningtitis such as viral meningtitis which includes lymphocytic choriomeningitis. Bacterial meningtitis which includes Haemophilus Meningtitis, Listeria Meningtitis, Meningococcal Meningtitis such as Waterhouse-Friderichsen Syndrome, Pneumococcal Meningtitis and meningeal tuberculosis, fungal meningitis such as Cryptococcal Meningtitis, subdural effusion, meningoencephalitis such as uvemeningoencephalitic syndrome, myelitis such as transverse myelitis, neurosyphilis such as tabes dorsalis, poliomyelitis which includes bulbar poliomyelitis and postpoliomyelitis syndrome, prion diseases (such as Creutzfeldt-Jakob Syndrome, Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy, Gerstmann-Straussler Syndrome, Kuru, Scrapie) cerebral toxoplasmosis, central nervous system neoplasms such as brain neoplasms that include cerebellear neoplasms such as infratentorial neoplasms, cerebral ventricle neoplasms such as choroid plexus neoplasms, hypothalamic neoplasms and supratentorial neoplasms, meningeal neoplasms, spinal cord neoplasms which include epidural neoplasms, demyelinating diseases such as Canavan Diseases, diffuse cerebral sceloris which includes adrenoleukodystrophy, encephalitis periaxialis, globoid cell leukodystrophy, diffuse cerebral sclerosis such as metachromatic leukodystrophy, allergic encephalomyelitis, necrotizing hemorrhagic encephalomyelitis, progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy, multiple sclerosis, central pontine myelinolysis, transverse myelitis, neuromyelitis optica, Scrapie, Swayback, Chronic Fatigue Syndrome, Visna, High Pressure Nervous Syndrome, Meningism, spinal cord diseases such as amyotonia congenita, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, spinal muscular atrophy such as Werdnig-Hoffmann Disease, spinal cord compression, spinal cord neoplasms such as epidural neoplasms, syringomyelia, Tabes Dorsalis, Stiff-Man Syndrome, mental retardation such as Angelman Syndrome, Cri-du-Chat Syndrome, De Lange's Syndrome, Down Syndrome, Gangliosidoses such as gangliosidoses G(M1), Sandhoff Disease, Tay-Sachs Disease, Hartnup Disease, homocystinuria, Laurence-Moon- Biedl Syndrome, Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome, Maple Syrup Urine Disease, mucolipidosis such as fucosidosis, neuronal ceroid-lipofuscinosis, oculocerebrorenal syndrome, phenylketonuria such as maternal phenylketonuria, Prader-Willi Syndrome, Rett Syndrome, Rubinstein-Taybi Syndrome, Tuberous Sclerosis, WAGR Syndrome, nervous system abnormalities such as holoprosencephaly, neural tube defects such as anencephaly which includes hydrangencephaly, Arnold-Chairi Deformity, encephalocele, meningocele, meningomyelocele, spinal dysraphism such as spina bifida cystica and spina bifida occulta, hereditary motor and sensory neuropathies which include Charcot-Marie Disease, Hereditary optic atrophy, Refsum's Disease, hereditary spastic paraplegia, Werdnig-Hoffmann Disease, Hereditary Sensory and Autonomic Neuropathies such as Congenital Analgesia and Familial Dysautonomia, Neurologic manifestations (such as agnosia that include Gerstmann's Syndrome, Amnesia such as retrograde amnesia, apraxia, neurogenic bladder, cataplexy, communicative disorders such as hearing disorders that includes deafness, partial hearing loss, loudness recruitment and tinnitus, language disorders such as aphasia which include agraphia, anomia, broca aphasia, and Wemicke Aphasia, Dyslexia such as Acquired Dyslexia, language development disorders, speech disorders such as aphasia which includes anomia, broca aphasia and Wemicke Aphasia, articulation disorders, communicative disorders such as speech disorders which include dysarthria, echolalia, mutism and stuttering, voice disorders such as aphonia and hoarseness, decerebrate state, delirium, fasciculation, hallucinations, meningism, movement disorders such as angelman syndrome, ataxia, athetosis, chorea, dystonia, hypokinesia, muscle hypotonia, myoclonus, tic, torticollis and tremor, muscle hypertonia such as muscle rigidity such as stiff-man syndrome, muscle spasticity, paralysis such as facial paralysis which includes Heφes Zoster Oticus, Gastroparesis, Hemiplegia, ophthalmoplegia such as diplopia, Duane's Syndrome, Homer's Syndrome, Chronic progressive external ophthalmoplegia such as Kearns Syndrome, Bulbar Paralysis, Tropical Spastic Paraparesis, Paraplegia such as Brown-Sequard Syndrome, quadriplegia, respiratory paralysis and vocal cord paralysis, paresis, phantom limb, taste disorders such as ageusia and dysgeusia, vision disorders such as amblyopia, blindness, color vision defects, diplopia, hemianopsia, scotoma and subnormal vision, sleep disorders such as hypersomnia which includes Kleine-Levin Syndrome, insomnia, and somnambulism, spasm such as trismus, unconsciousness such as coma, persistent vegetative state and syncope and vertigo, neuromuscular diseases such as amyotonia congenita, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Lambert-Eaton Myasthenic Syndrome, motor neuron disease, muscular atrophy such as spinal muscular atrophy, Charcot-Marie Disease and Werdnig-Hoffmann Disease, Postpoliomyelitis Syndrome, Muscular Dystrophy, Myasthenia Gravis, Myotonia Atrophica, Myotonia Confenita, Nemaline Myopathy, Familial Periodic Paralysis, Multiplex Paramyloclonus, Tropical Spastic Paraparesis and Stiff-Man Syndrome, peripheral nervous system diseases such as acrodynia, amyloid neuropathies, autonomic nervous system diseases such as Adie's Syndrome, Barre-Lieou Syndrome, Familial Dysautonomia, Homer's Syndrome, Reflex Sympathetic Dystrophy and Shy-Drager Syndrome, Cranial Nerve Diseases such as Acoustic Nerve Diseases such as Acoustic Neuroma which includes Neurofibromatosis 2, Facial Nerve Diseases such as Facial Neuralgia,Melkersson- Rosenthal Syndrome, ocular motility disorders which includes amblyopia, nystagmus, oculomotor nerve paralysis, ophthalmoplegia such as Duane's Syndrome, Homer's Syndrome, Chronic Progressive External Ophthalmoplegia which includes Kearns Syndrome, Strabismus such as Esotropia and Exotropia, Oculomotor Nerve Paralysis, Optic Nerve Diseases such as Optic Atrophy which includes Hereditary Optic Atrophy, Optic Disk Drusen, Optic Neuritis such as Neuromyelitis Optica, Papilledema, Trigeminal Neuralgia, Vocal Cord Paralysis, Demyelinating Diseases such as Neuromyelitis Optica and Swayback, Diabetic neuropathies such as diabetic foot, nerve compression syndromes such as caφal tunnel syndrome, tarsal tunnel syndrome, thoracic outlet syndrome such as cervical rib syndrome, ulnar nerve compression syndrome, neuralgia such as causalgia, cervico-brachial neuralgia, facial neuralgia and trigeminal neuralgia, neuritis such as experimental allergic neuritis, optic neuritis, polyneuritis, polyradiculoneuritis and radiculities such as polyradiculitis, hereditary motor and sensory neuropathies such as Charcot-Marie Disease, Hereditary Optic Atrophy, Refsum's Disease, Hereditary Spastic Paraplegia and Werdnig-Hoffmann Disease, Hereditary Sensory and Autonomic Neuropathies which include Congenital Analgesia and Familial Dysautonomia, POEMS Syndrome, Sciatica, Gustatory Sweating and Tetany). Infectious Disease Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention can be used to treat or detect infectious agents. For example, by increasing the immune response, particularly increasing the proliferation and differentiation of B and/or T cells, infectious diseases may be treated. The immune response may be increased by either enhancing an existing immune response, or by initiating a new immune response. Alternatively, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention may also directly inhibit the infectious agent, without necessarily eliciting an immune response. Viruses are one example of an infectious agent that can cause disease or symptoms that can be treated or detected by a polynucleotide or polypeptide and/or agonist or antagonist of the present invention. Examples of viruses, include, but are not limited to Examples of viruses, include, but are not limited to the following DNA and RNA viruses and viral families: Arbovirus, Adenoviridae, Arenaviridae, Arterivirus, Birnaviridae, Bunyaviridae, Caliciviridae, Circoviridae, Coronaviridae, Dengue, EBV, HIV, Flaviviridae, Hepadnaviridae (Hepatitis), Heφesviridae (such as, Cytomegalovirus, Herpes Simplex, Herpes Zoster), Mononegavirus (e.g., Paramyxoviridae, Morbillivirus, Rhabdoviridae), Orthomyxoviridae (e.g., Influenza A, Influenza B, and parainfluenza), Papiloma virus, Papovaviridae, Parvoviridae, Picornaviridae, Poxviridae (such as Smallpox or Vaccinia), Reoviridae (e.g., Rotavirus), Retroviridae (HTLV-I, HTLV-II, Lentivirus), and Togaviridae (e.g., Rubivirus). Viruses falling within these families can cause a variety of diseases or symptoms, including, but not limited to: arthritis, bronchiollitis, respiratory syncytial virus, encephalitis, eye infections (e.g., conjunctivitis, keratitis), chronic fatigue syndrome, hepatitis (A, B, C, E, Chronic Active, Delta), Japanese B encephalitis, Junin, Chikungunya, Rift Valley fever, yellow fever, meningitis, opportunistic infections (e.g., AIDS), pneumonia, Burkitt's Lymphoma, chickenpox, hemorrhagic fever, Measles, Mumps, Parainfluenza, Rabies, the common cold, Polio, leukemia, Rubella, sexually transmitted diseases, skin diseases (e.g., Kaposi's, warts), and viremia. polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention, can be used to treat or detect any of these symptoms or diseases. In specific embodiments, polynucleotides, polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat: meningitis, Dengue, EBV, and/or hepatitis (e.g., hepatitis B). In an additional specific embodiment polynucleotides, polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat patients nonresponsive to one or more other commercially available hepatitis vaccines. In a further specific embodiment polynucleotides, polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat AIDS. Similarly, bacterial or fungal agents that can cause disease or symptoms and that can be treated or detected by a polynucleotide or polypeptide and/or agonist or antagonist of the present invention include, but not limited to, include, but not limited to, the following Gram-Negative and Gram-positive bacteria and bacterial families and fungi: Actinomycetales (e.g., Corynebacterium, Mycobacterium, Norcardia), Cryptococcus neoformans, Aspergillosis, Bacillaceae (e.g., Anthrax, Clostridium), Bacteroidaceae, Blastomycosis, Bordetella, Borrelia (e.g., Borrelia burgdorferi, Brucellosis, Candidiasis, Campylobacter, Coccidioidomycosis, Cryptococcosis, Dermatocycoses, E. coli (e.g., Enterotoxigenic E. coli and Enterohemorrhagic E. coli), Enterobacteriaceae (Klebsiella, Salmonella (e.g., Salmonella typhi, and Salmonella paratyphi), Serratia, Yersinia), Erysipelothrix, Helicobacter, Legionellosis, Leptospirosis, Listeria, Mycoplasmatales, Mycobacterium leprae, Vibrio cholerae, Neisseriaceae (e.g., Acinetobacter, Gonorrhea, Menigococcal), Meisseria meningitidis, Pasteurellacea Infections (e.g., Actinobacillus, Heamophilus (e.g., Heamophilus influenza type B), Pasteurella), Pseudomonas, Rickettsiaceae, Chlamydiaceae, Syphilis, Shigella spp., Staphylococcal, Meningiococcal, Pneumococcal and Streptococcal (e.g., Streptococcus pneumoniae and Group B Streptococcus). These bacterial or fungal families can cause the following diseases or symptoms, including, but not limited to: bacteremia, endocarditis, eye infections (conjunctivitis, tuberculosis, uveitis), gingivitis, opportunistic infections (e.g., AIDS related infections), paronychia, prosthesis-related infections, Reiter's Disease, respiratory tract infections, such as Whooping Cough or Empyema, sepsis, Lyme Disease, Cat-Scratch Disease, Dysentery, Paratyphoid Fever, food poisoning, Typhoid, pneumonia, Gonorrhea, meningitis (e.g., mengitis types A and B), Chlamydia, Syphilis, Diphtheria. Leprosy, Paratuberculosis. Tuberculosis, Lupus, Botulism, gangrene, tetanus, impetigo, Rheumatic Fever. Scarlet Fever, sexually transmitted diseases, skin diseases (e.g., cellulitis, dermatocycoses), toxemia, urinary tract infections, wound infections. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the invention, can be used to treat or detect any of these symptoms or diseases. In specific embodiments, Ppolynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat: tetanus, Diptheria, botulism, and/or meningitis type B. Moreover, parasitic agents causing disease or symptoms that can be treated or detected by a polynucleotide or polypeptide and/or agonist or antagonist of the present invention include, but not limited to, the following families or class: Amebiasis, Babesiosis, Coccidiosis, Cryptosporidiosis, Dientamoebiasis, Dourine, Ectoparasitic, Giardiasis, Helminthiasis, Leishmaniasis, Theileriasis, Toxoplasmosis, Trypanosomiasis, and Trichomonas and Sporozoans (e.g., Plasmodium virax, Plasmodium falciparium, Plasmodium malariae and Plasmodium ovale). These parasites can cause a variety of diseases or symptoms, including, but not limited to: Scabies, Trombiculiasis, eye infections, intestinal disease (e.g., dysentery, giardiasis), liver disease, lung disease, opportunistic infections (e.g., AIDS related), malaria, pregnancy complications, and toxoplasmosis. polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention, can be used to treat or detect any of these symptoms or diseases. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention of the present invention could either be by administering an effective amount of a polypeptide to the patient, or by removing cells from the patient, supplying the cells with a polynucleotide of the present invention, and returning the engineered cells to the patient (ex vivo therapy). Moreover, the polypeptide or polynucleotide of the present invention can be used as an antigen in a vaccine to raise an immune response against infectious disease. Regeneration Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention can be used to differentiate, proliferate, and attract cells, leading to the regeneration of tissues. (See, Science 276:59-87 (1997).) The regeneration of tissues could be used to repair, replace, or protect tissue damaged by congenital defects, trauma (wounds, bums, incisions, or ulcers), age, disease (e.g. osteoporosis, osteocarthritis, periodontal disease, liver failure), surgery, including cosmetic plastic surgery, fibrosis, reperfusion injury, or systemic cytokine damage. Tissues that could be regenerated using the present invention include organs (e.g., pancreas, liver, intestine, kidney, skin, endothelium), muscle (smooth, skeletal or cardiac), vasculature (including vascular and lymphatics), nervous, hematopoietic, and skeletal (bone, cartilage, tendon, and ligament) tissue. Preferably, regeneration occurs without or decreased scarring. Regeneration also may include angiogenesis. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may increase regeneration of tissues difficult to heal. For example, increased tendon/ligament regeneration would quicken recovery time after damage. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention could also be used prophylactically in an effort to avoid damage. Specific diseases that could be treated include of tendinitis, caφal tunnel syndrome, and other tendon or ligament defects. A further example of tissue regeneration of non-healing wounds includes pressure ulcers, ulcers associatedwith vascular insufficiency, surgical, and traumatic wounds. Similarly, nerve and brain tissue could also be regenerated by using polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, to proliferate and differentiate nerve cells. Diseases that could be treated using this method include central and peripheral nervous system diseases, neuropathies, or mechanical and traumatic disorders (e.g., spinal cord disorders, head trauma, cerebrovascular disease, and stoke). Specifically, diseases associated with peripheral nerve injuries, peripheral neuropathy (e.g., resulting from chemotherapy or other medical therapies), localized neuropathies, and central nervous system diseases (e.g., Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, and Shy-Drager syndrome), could all be treated using the polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Chemotaxis Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention may have chemotaxis activity. A chemotaxic molecule attracts or mobilizes cells (e.g., monocytes, fibroblasts, neutrophils, T-cells, mast cells, eosinophils, epithelial and/or endothelial cells) to a particular site in the body, such as inflammation, infection, or site of hypeφroliferation. The mobilized cells can then fight off and/or heal the particular trauma or abnormality. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention may increase chemotaxic activity of particular cells. These chemotactic molecules can then be used to treat inflammation, infection, hypeφroliferative disorders, or any immune system disorder by increasing the number of cells targeted to a particular location in the body. For example, chemotaxic molecules can be used to treat wounds and other trauma to tissues by attracting immune cells to the injured location. Chemotactic molecules of the present invention can also attract fibroblasts, which can be used to treat wounds. It is also contemplated that polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention may inhibit chemotactic activity. These molecules could also be used to treat disorders. Thus, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention could be used as an inhibitor of chemotaxis. Binding Activity A polypeptide of the present invention may be used to screen for molecules that bind to the polypeptide or for molecules to which the polypeptide binds. The binding of the polypeptide and the molecule may activate (agonist), increase, inhibit (antagonist), or decrease activity of the polypeptide or the molecule bound. Examples of such molecules include antibodies, oligonucleotides, proteins (e.g., receptors),or small molecules. Preferably, the molecule is closely related to the natural ligand of the polypeptide, e.g., a fragment of the ligand, or a natural substrate, a ligand, a structural or functional mimetic. (See, Coligan et al., Current Protocols in Immunology l(2):Chapter 5 (1991).) Similarly, the molecule can be closely related to the natural receptor to which the polypeptide binds, or at least, a fragment of the receptor capable of being bound by the polypeptide (e.g., active site). In either case, the molecule can be rationally designed using known techniques. Preferably, the screening for these molecules involves producing appropriate cells which express the polypeptide. Preferred cells include cells from mammals, yeast, Drosophila, or E. coli. Cells expressing the polypeptide (or cell membrane containing the expressed polypeptide) are then preferably contacted with a test compound potentially containing the molecule to observe binding, stimulation, or inhibition of activity of either the polypeptide or the molecule. The assay may simply test binding of a candidate compound to the polypeptide, wherein binding is detected by a label, or in an assay involving competition with a labeled competitor. Further, the assay may test whether the candidate compound results in a signal generated by binding to the polypeptide. Alternatively, the assay can be carried out using cell-free preparations, polypeptide/molecule affixed to a solid support, chemical libraries, or natural product mixtures. The assay may also simply comprise the steps of mixing a candidate compound with a solution containing a polypeptide, measuring polypeptide/molecule activity or binding, and comparing the polypeptide/molecule activity or binding to a standard. Preferably, an ELISA assay can measure polypeptide level or activity in a sample (e.g., biological sample) using a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody. The antibody can measure polypeptide level or activity by either binding, directly or indirectly, to the polypeptide or by competing with the polypeptide for a substrate. Additionally, the receptor to which the polypeptide of the present invention binds can be identified by numerous methods known to those of skill in the art, for example, ligand panning and FACS sorting (Coligan, et al., Current Protocols in Immun., 1(2), Chapter 5, (1991)). For example, expression cloning is employed wherein polyadenylated RNA is prepared from a cell responsive to the polypeptides, for example, NIH3T3 cells which are known to contain multiple receptors for the FGF family proteins, and SC-3 cells, and a cDNA library created from this RNA is divided into pools and used to transfect COS cells or other cells that are not responsive to the polypeptides. Transfected cells which are grown on glass slides are exposed to the polypeptide of the present invention, after they have been labelled. The polypeptides can be labeled by a variety of means including iodination or inclusion of a recognition site for a site-specific protein kinase. Following fixation and incubation, the slides are subjected to auto- radiographic analysis. Positive pools are identified and sub-pools are prepared and re-transfected using an iterative sub-pooling and re-screening process, eventually yielding a single clones that encodes the putative receptor. As an alternative approach for receptor identification, the labeled polypeptides can be photoaffinity linked with cell membrane or extract preparations that express the receptor molecule. Cross-linked material is resolved by PAGE analysis and exposed to X-ray film. The labeled complex containing the receptors of the polypeptides can be excised, resolved into peptide fragments, and subjected to protein microsequencing. The amino acid sequence obtained from microsequencing would be used to design a set of degenerate oligonucleotide probes to screen a cDNA library to identify the genes encoding the putative receptors. Moreover, the techniques of gene-shuffling, motif-shuffling, exon-shuffling, and/or codon-shuffling (collectively referred to as "DNA shuffling") may be employed to modulate the activities of the polypeptide of the present invention thereby effectively generating agonists and antagonists of the polypeptide of the present invention. See generally, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,605,793, 5,81 1,238, 5,830,721, 5,834,252, and 5,837,458, and Patten, P. A., et al, Curr. Opinion Biotechnol. 8:724- 33 (1997); Harayama, S. Trends Biotechnol 16(2):76-82 (1998); Hansson, L. O., et al, J. Mol. Biol. 287:265-76 ( 1999); and Lorenzo, M. M. and Blasco, R. Biotechniques 24(2):308-13 (1998) (each of these patents and publications are hereby incoφorated by reference). In one embodiment, alteration of polynucleotides and corresponding polypeptides may be achieved by DNA shuffling. DNA shuffling involves the assembly of two or more DNA segments into a desired molecule by homologous, or site-specific, recombination. In another embodiment, polynucleotides and corresponding polypeptides may be alterred by being subjected to random mutagenesis by error-prone PCR, random nucleotide insertion or other methods prior to recombination. In another embodiment, one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc., of the polypeptide of the present invention may be recombined with one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc. of one or more heterologous molecules. In preferred embodiments, the heterologous molecules are family members. In further preferred embodiments, the heterologous molecule is a growth factor such as, for example, platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF), insulin-like growth factor (IGF-I), transforming growth factor (TGF)-alpha, epidermal growth factor (EGF), fibroblast growth factor (FGF), TGF- beta, bone moφhogenetic protein (BMP)-2, BMP-4, BMP-5, BMP-6, BMP-7, activins A and B, decapentaplegic(dρp), 60 A, OP-2, dorsalin, growth differentiation factors (GDFs), nodal, MIS, inhibin-alpha, TGF-betal, TGF-beta2, TGF-beta3, TGF- beta5, and glial-derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF). Other preferred fragments are biologically active fragments of the polypeptide of the present invention. Biologically active fragments are those exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical, to an activity of the polypeptide of the present invention. The biological activity of the fragments may include an improved desired activity, or a decreased undesirable activity. Additionally, this invention provides a method of screening compounds to identify those which modulate the action of the polypeptide of the present invention. An example of such an assay comprises combining a mammalian fibroblast cell, a the polypeptide of the present invention, the compound to be screened and ^ [H] thymidine under cell culture conditions where the fibroblast cell would normally proliferate. A control assay may be performed in the absence of the compound to be screened and compared to the amount of fibroblast proliferation in the presence of the compound to determine if the compound stimulates proliferation by determining the uptake of ^[H] thymidine in each case. The amount of fibroblast cell proliferation is measured by liquid scintillation chromatography which measures the incoφoration of [H] thymidine. Both agonist and antagonist compounds may be identified by this procedure. In another method, a mammalian cell or membrane preparation expressing a receptor for a polypeptide of the present invention is incubated with a labeled polypeptide of the present invention in the presence of the compound. The ability of the compound to enhance or block this interaction could then be measured. Alternatively, the response of a known second messenger system following interaction of a compound to be screened and the receptor is measured and the ability of the compound to bind to the receptor and elicit a second messenger response is measured to determine if the compound is a potential agonist or antagonist. Such second messenger systems include but are not limited to, cAMP guanylate cyclase, ion channels or phosphoinositide hydrolysis. All of these above assays can be used as diagnostic or prognostic markers. The molecules discovered using these assays can be used to treat disease or to bring about a particular result in a patient (e.g., blood vessel growth) by activating or inhibiting the polypeptide/molecule. Moreover, the assays can discover agents which may inhibit or enhance the production of the polypeptides of the invention from suitably manipulated cells or tissues. Therefore, the invention includes a method of identifying compounds which bind to a polypeptide of the invention comprising the steps of: (a) incubating a candidate binding compound with a polypeptide of the present invention; and (b) determining if binding has occurred. Moreover, the invention includes a method of identifying agonists/antagonists comprising the steps of: (a) incubating a candidate compound with a polypeptide of the present invention, (b) assaying a biological activity, and (b) determining if a biological activity of the polypeptide has been altered. Targeted Delivery In another embodiment, the invention provides a method of delivering compositions to targeted cells expressing a receptor for a polypeptide of the invention, or cells expressing a cell bound form of a polypeptide of the invention. As discussed herein, polypeptides or antibodies of the invention may be associated with heterologous polypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, or prodrugs via hydrophobic, hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent interactions. In one embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specific delivery of compositions of the invention to cells by administering polypeptides of the invention (including antibodies) that are associated with heterologous polypeptides or nucleic acids. In one example, the invention provides a method for delivering a therapeutic protein into the targeted cell. In another example, the invention provides a method for delivering a single stranded nucleic acid (e.g., antisense or ribozymes) or double stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA that can integrate into the cell's genome or replicate episomally and that can be transcribed) into the targeted cell. In another embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specific destruction of cells (e.g., the destruction of tumor cells) by administering polypeptides of the invention (e.g., polypeptides of the invention or antibodies of the invention) in association with toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs. By "toxin" is meant compounds that bind and activate endogenous cytotoxic effector systems, radioisotopes, holotoxins, modified toxins, catalytic subunits of toxins, or any molecules or enzymes not normally present in or on the surface of a cell that under defined conditions cause the cell's death. Toxins that may be used according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes known in the art, compounds such as, for example, antibodies (or complement fixing containing portions thereof) that bind an inherent or induced endogenous cytotoxic effector system, thymidine kinase, endonuclease, RNAse, alpha toxin, ricin, abrin, Pseudomonas exotoxin A, diphtheria toxin, saporin, momordin, gelonin, pokeweed antiviral protein, alpha-sarcin and cholera toxin. By "cytotoxic prodrug" is meant a non-toxic compound that is converted by an enzyme, normally present in the cell, into a cytotoxic compound. Cytotoxic prodrugs that may be used according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, glutamyl derivatives of benzoic acid mustard alkylating agent, phosphate derivatives of etoposide or mitomycin C, cytosine arabinoside, daunorubisin, and phenoxyacetamide derivatives of doxorubicin. Drug Screening Further contemplated is the use of the polypeptides of the present invention, or the polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides, to screen for molecules which modify the activities of the polypeptides of the present invention. Such a method would include contacting the polypeptide of the present invention with a selected compound(s) suspected of having antagonist or agonist activity, and assaying the activity of these polypeptides following binding. This invention is particularly useful for screening therapeutic compounds by using the polypeptides of the present invention, or binding fragments thereof, in any of a variety of drug screening techniques. The polypeptide or fragment employed in such a test may be affixed to a solid support, expressed on a cell surface, free in solution, or located intracellularly. One method of drug screening utilizes eukaryotic or prokaryotic host cells which are stably transformed with recombinant nucleic acids expressing the polypeptide or fragment. Drugs are screened against such transformed cells in competitive binding assays. One may measure, for example, the formulation of complexes between the agent being tested and a polypeptide of the present invention. Thus, the present invention provides methods of screening for drugs or any other agents which affect activities mediated by the polypeptides of the present invention. These methods comprise contacting such an agent with a polypeptide of the present invention or a fragment thereof and assaying for the presence of a complex between the agent and the polypeptide or a fragment thereof, by methods well known in the art. In such a competitive binding assay, the agents to screen are typically labeled. Following incubation, free agent is separated from that present in bound form, and the amount of free or uncomplexed label is a measure of the ability of a particular agent to bind to the polypeptides of the present invention. Another technique for drug screening provides high throughput screening for compounds having suitable binding affinity to the polypeptides of the present invention, and is described in great detail in European Patent Application 84/03564, published on September 13, 1984, which is incoφorated herein by reference herein. Briefly stated, large numbers of different small peptide test compounds are synthesized on a solid substrate, such as plastic pins or some other surface. The peptide test compounds are reacted with polypeptides of the present invention and washed. Bound polypeptides are then detected by methods well known in the art. Purified polypeptides are coated directly onto plates for use in the aforementioned drug screening techniques. In addition, non-neutralizing antibodies may be used to capture the peptide and immobilize it on the solid support. This invention also contemplates the use of competitive drug screening assays in which neutralizing antibodies capable of binding polypeptides of the present invention specifically compete with a test compound for binding to the polypeptides or fragments thereof. In this manner, the antibodies are used to detect the presence of any peptide which shares one or more antigenic epitopes with a polypeptide of the invention. Antisense And Ribozvme (Antagonists) In specific embodiments, antagonists according to the present invention are nucleic acids corresponding to the sequences contained in SEQ ID NO:X, or the complementary strand thereof, and/or to nucleotide sequences contained in the cDNA contained in the related cDNA clone identified in Table 1. In one embodiment, antisense sequence is generated internally, by the organism, in another embodiment, the antisense sequence is separately administered (see, for example, O'Connor, J., Neurochem. 56:560 (1991). Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL ( 1988). Antisense technology can be used to control gene expression through antisense DNA or RNA, or through triple-helix formation. Antisense techniques are discussed for example, in Okano, J., Neurochem. 56:560 (1991); Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988). Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance, Lee et al., Nucleic Acids Research 6:3073 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241 :456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251 : 1300 (1991). The methods are based on binding of a polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA. For example, the use of c-myc and c-myb antisense RNA constructs to inhibit the growth of the non- lymphocytic leukemia cell line HL-60 and other cell lines was previously described. (Wickstrom et al. (1988); Anfossi et al. (1989)). These experiments were performed in vitro by incubating cells with the oligoribonucleotide. A similar procedure for in vivo use is described in WO 91/15580. Briefly, a pair of oligonucleotides for a given antisense RNA is produced as follows: A sequence complimentary to the first 15 bases of the open reading frame is flanked by an EcoRl site on the 5 end and a Hindlll site on the 3 end. Next, the pair of oligonucleotides is heated at 90°C for one minute and then annealed in 2X ligation buffer (20mM TRIS HC1 pH 7.5, lOmM MgC12, 10MM dithiothreitol (DTT) and 0.2 mM ATP) and then ligated to the EcoRl/Hind III site of the retroviral vector PMV7 (WO 91/15580). For example, the 5' coding portion of a polynucleotide that encodes the polypeptide of the present invention may be used to design an antisense RNA oligonucleotide of from about 10 to 40 base pairs in length. A DNA oligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription thereby preventing transcription and the production of the receptor. The antisense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA in vivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecule into receptor polypeptide. In one embodiment, the antisense nucleic acid of the invention is produced intracellularly by transcription from an exogenous sequence. For example, a vector or a portion thereof, is transcribed, producing an antisense nucleic acid (RNA) of the invention. Such a vector would contain a sequence encoding the antisense nucleic acid. Such a vector can remain episomal or become chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed to produce the desired antisense RNA. Such vectors can be constructed by recombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art. Vectors can be plasmid, viral, or others known in the art, used for replication and expression in vertebrate cells. Expression of the sequence encoding the polypeptide of the present invnetion or fragments thereof, can be by any promoter known in the art to act in vertebrate, preferably human cells. Such promoters can be inducible or constitutive. Such promoters include, but are not limited to, the SV40 early promoter region (Bemoist and Chambon, Nature 29:304-310 (1981), the promoter contained in the 3' long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus (Yamamoto et al., Cell 22:787-797 (1980), the heφes thymidine promoter (Wagner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 78: 1441-1445 (1981), the regulatory sequences of the metallothionein gene (Brinster, et al., Nature 296:39-42 (1982)), etc. The antisense nucleic acids of the invention comprise a sequence complementary to at least a portion of an RNA transcript of a gene of the present invention. However, absolute complementarity, although preferred, is not required. A sequence "complementary to at least a portion of an RNA," referred to herein, means a sequence having sufficient complementarity to be able to hybridize with the RNA, forming a stable duplex; in the case of double stranded antisense nucleic acids, a single strand of the duplex DNA may thus be tested, or triplex formation may be assayed. The ability to hybridize will depend on both the degree of complementarity and the length of the antisense nucleic acid. Generally, the larger the hybridizing nucleic acid, the more base mismatches with a RNA it may contain and still form a stable duplex (or triplex as the case may be). One skilled in the art can ascertain a tolerable degree of mismatch by use of standard procedures to determine the melting point of the hybridized complex. Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5' end of the message, e.g., the 5' untranslated sequence up to and including the AUG initiation codon, should work most efficiently at inhibiting translation. However, sequences complementary to the 3' untranslated sequences of mRNAs have been shown to be effective at inhibiting translation of mRNAs as well. See generally, Wagner, R., 1994, Nature 372:333-335. Thus, oligonucleotides complementary to either the 5'- or 3'- non- translated, non- coding regions of polynucleotide sequences described herein could be used in an antisense approach to inhibit translation of endogenous mRNA. Oligonucleotides complementary to the 5' untranslated region of the mRNA should include the complement of the AUG start codon. Antisense oligonucleotides complementary to mRNA coding regions are less efficient inhibitors of translation but could be used in accordance with the invention. Whether designed to hybridize to the 5'-, 3'- or coding region of mRNA of the present invention, antisense nucleic acids should be at least six nucleotides in length, and are preferably oligonucleotides ranging from 6 to about 50 nucleotides in length. In specific aspects the oligonucleotide is at least 10 nucleotides, at least 17 nucleotides, at least 25 nucleotides or at least 50 nucleotides. The polynucleotides of the invention can be DNA or RNA or chimeric mixtures or derivatives or modified versions thereof, single-stranded or double- stranded. The oligonucleotide can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, for example, to improve stability of the molecule, hybridization, etc. The oligonucleotide may include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al., 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:6553- 6556; Lemaitre et al., 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 84:648-652; PCT Publication No. WO88/09810, published December 15, 1988) or the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO89/10134, published April 25, 1988), hybridization- triggered cleavage agents. (See, e.g., Krol et al., 1988, BioTechniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents. (See, e.g., Zon, 1988, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549). To this end, the oligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc. The antisense oligonucleotide may comprise at least one modified base moiety which is selected from the group including, but not limited to, 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xantine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, ino sine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methylguanine, 1 -methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5 - m eth o xy a m i n o m eth y l - 2 - t h i o u r a c i l , b e ta - D-mannosylqueosine, 5'-methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil, 2-methylthio-N6- isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine, 2-thiocytosine, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine. The antisense oligonucleotide may also comprise at least one modified sugar moiety selected from the group including, but not limited to, arabinose, 2-fluoroarabinose, xylulose, and hexose. In yet another embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide comprises at least one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group including, but not limited to, a phosphorothioate, a phosphorodithioate, a phosphoramidothioate, a phosphoramidate, a phosphordiamidate, a methylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analog thereof. In yet another embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide is an a-anomeric oligonucleotide. An a-anomeric oligonucleotide forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual b-units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gautier et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625-6641). The oligonucleotide is a 2'-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6131 -6148), or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al., 1987, FEBS Lett. 215:327-330). Polynucleotides of the invention may be synthesized by standard methods known in the art, e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.). As examples, phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by the method of Stein et al. (1988, Nucl. Acids Res. 16:3209), methylphosphonate oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlled pore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:7448-7451), etc. While antisense nucleotides complementary to the coding region sequence could be used, those complementary to the transcribed untranslated region are most preferred. Potential antagonists according to the invention also include catalytic RNA, or a ribozyme (See, e.g., PCT International Publication WO 90/1 1364, published October 4, 1990; Sarver et al, Science 247: 1222-1225 (1990). While ribozymes that cleave mRNA at site specific recognition sequences can be used to destroy mRNAs, the use of hammerhead ribozymes is preferred. Hammerhead ribozymes cleave mRNAs at locations dictated by flanking regions that form complementary base pairs with the target mRNA. The sole requirement is that the target mRNA have the following sequence of two bases: 5'-UG-3'. The construction and production of hammerhead ribozymes is well known in the art and is described more fully in Haseloff and Gerlach, Nature 334:585-591 (1988). There are numerous potential hammerhead ribozyme cleavage sites within the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X. Preferably, the ribozyme is engineered so that the cleavage recognition site is located near the 5' end of the mRNA; i.e., to increase efficiency and minimize the intracellular accumulation of non-functional mRNA transcripts. As in the antisense approach, the ribozymes of the invention can be composed of modified oligonucleotides (e.g. for improved stability, targeting, etc.) and should be delivered to cells which express in vivo. DNA constructs encoding the ribozyme may be introduced into the cell in the same manner as described above for the introduction of antisense encoding DNA. A preferred method of delivery involves using a DNA construct "encoding" the ribozyme under the control of a strong constitutive promoter, such as, for example, pol III or pol II promoter, so that transfected cells will produce sufficient quantities of the ribozyme to destroy endogenous messages and inhibit translation. Since ribozymes unlike antisense molecules, are catalytic, a lower intracellular concentration is required for efficiency. Antagonist/agonist compounds may be employed to inhibit the cell growth and proliferation effects of the polypeptides of the present invention on neoplastic cells and tissues, i.e. stimulation of angiogenesis of tumors, and, therefore, retard or prevent abnormal cellular growth and proliferation, for example, in tumor formation or growth. The antagonist/agonist may also be employed to prevent hyper-vascular diseases, and prevent the proliferation of epithelial lens cells after extracapsular cataract surgery. Prevention of the mitogenic activity of the polypeptides of the present invention may also be desirous in cases such as restenosis after balloon angioplasty. The antagonist/agonist may also be employed to prevent the growth of scar tissue during wound healing. The antagonist/agonist may also be employed to treat the diseases described herein. Thus, the invention provides a method of treating disorders or diseases, including but not limited to the disorders or diseases listed throughout this application, associated with overexpression of a polynucleotide of the present invention by administering to a patient (a) an antisense molecule directed to the polynucleotide of the present invention, and/or (b) a ribozyme directed to the polynucleotide of the present invention. Other Activities A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention, as a result of the ability to stimulate vascular endothelial cell growth, may be employed in treatment for stimulating re-vascularization of ischemic tissues due to various disease conditions such as thrombosis, arteriosclerosis, and other cardiovascular conditions. The polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed to stimulate angiogenesis and limb regeneration, as discussed above. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed for treating wounds due to injuries, bu s, post-operative tissue repair, and ulcers since they are mitogenic to various cells of different origins, such as fibroblast cells and skeletal muscle cells, and therefore, facilitate the repair or replacement of damaged or diseased tissue. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed stimulate neuronal growth and to treat and prevent neuronal damage which occurs in certain neuronal disorders or neuro-degenerative conditions such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, and AIDS-related complex. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may have the ability to stimulate chondrocyte growth, therefore, they may be employed to enhance bone and periodontal regeneration and aid in tissue transplants or bone grafts. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may be also be employed to prevent skin aging due to sunburn by stimulating keratinocyte growth. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed for preventing hair loss, since FGF family members activate hair-forming cells and promotes melanocyte growth. Along the same lines, a polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may be employed to stimulate growth and differentiation of hematopoietic cells and bone marrow cells when used in combination with other cytokines. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed to maintain organs before transplantation or for supporting cell culture of primary tissues. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed for inducing tissue of mesodermal origin to differentiate in early embryos. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also increase or decrease the differentiation or proliferation of embryonic stem cells, besides, as discussed above, hematopoietic lineage. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be used to modulate mammalian characteristics, such as body height, weight, hair color, eye color, skin, percentage of adipose tissue, pigmentation, size, and shape (e.g., cosmetic surgery). Similarly, a polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may be used to modulate mammalian metabolism affecting catabolism, anabolism, processing, utilization, and storage of energy. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may be used to change a mammal's mental state or physical state by influencing biorhythms, caricadic rhythms, depression (including depressive disorders), tendency for violence, tolerance for pain, reproductive capabilities (preferably by Activin or Inhibin-like activity), hormonal or endocrine levels, appetite, libido, memory, stress, or other cognitive qualities. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be used as a food additive or preservative, such as to increase or decrease storage capabilities, fat content, lipid, protein, carbohydrate, vitamins, minerals, cofactors or other nutritional components. The above-recited applications have uses in a wide variety of hosts. Such hosts include, but are not limited to, human, murine, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, horse, mouse, rat, hamster, pig, micro-pig, chicken, goat, cow, sheep, dog, cat, non- human primate, and human. In specific embodiments, the host is a mouse, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, chicken, rat, hamster, pig, sheep, dog or cat. In preferred embodiments, the host is a mammal. In most preferred embodiments, the host is a human. Other Preferred Embodiments Other preferred embodiments of the claimed invention include an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 50 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is a nucleic acid molecule wherein said sequence of contiguous nucleotides is included in the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X in the range of positions identified as "Start" and "End" in columns 7 and 8 as defined for SEQ ID NO:X in Table 1. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 150 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 500 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. A further preferred embodiment is a nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95%) identical to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X in the range of positions identified as "Start" and "End" in columns 7 and 8 as defined for SEQ ID NO:X in Table 1. A further preferred embodiment is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95%> identical to the complete nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule which hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions to a nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit, wherein said nucleic acid molecule which hybridizes does not hybridize under stringent hybridization conditions to a nucleic acid molecule having a nucleotide sequence consisting of only A residues or of only T residues. Also preferred is a composition of matter comprising a DNA molecule which comprises a cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95%> identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence of the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule, wherein said sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides is included in the nucleotide sequence of an open reading frame sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95%> identical to sequence of at least 150 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. A further preferred embodiment is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95%> identical to sequence of at least 500 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. A further preferred embodiment is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to the complete nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. A further preferred embodiment is a method for detecting in a biological sample a nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95%) identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto; and a nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit; which method comprises a step of comparing a nucleotide sequence of at least one nucleic acid molecule in said sample with a sequence selected from said group and determining whether the sequence of said nucleic acid molecule in said sample is at least 95%> identical to said selected sequence. Also preferred is the above method wherein said step of comparing sequences comprises determining the extent of nucleic acid hybridization between nucleic acid molecules in said sample and a nucleic acid molecule comprising said sequence selected from said group. Similarly, also preferred is the above method wherein said step of comparing sequences is performed by comparing the nucleotide sequence determined from a nucleic acid molecule in said sample with said sequence selected from said group. The nucleic acid molecules can comprise DNA molecules or RNA molecules. A further preferred embodiment is a method for identifying the species, tissue or cell type of a biological sample which method comprises a step of detecting nucleic acid molecules in said sample, if any, comprising a nucleotide sequence that is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto; and a nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is the above method for identifying the species, tissue or cell type of a biological sample which comprises a step of detecting nucleic acid molecules comprising a nucleotide sequence in a panel of at least two nucleotide sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from said group. Also preferred is a method for diagnosing in a subject a pathological condition associated with abnormal structure or expression of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X; or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone identified in Table 1 which encodes a protein, wherein the method comprises a step of detecting in a biological sample obtained from said subject nucleic acid molecules, if any, comprising a nucleotide sequence that is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto; and a nucleotide sequence of the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is the above method for diagnosing a pathological condition which comprises a step of detecting nucleic acid molecules comprising a nucleotide sequence in a panel of at least two nucleotide sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 95%> identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from said group. Also preferred is a composition of matter comprising isolated nucleic acid molecules wherein the nucleotide sequences of said nucleic acid molecules comprise a panel of at least two nucleotide sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 95%> identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto; and a nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. The nucleic acid molecules can comprise DNA molecules or RNA molecules. Also preferred is a composition of matter comprising isolated nucleic acid molecules wherein the nucleotide sequences of said nucleic acid molecules comprise a DNA microarray or "chip" of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000 or 4000 nucleotide sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said DNA microarray or "chip" is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto; and a nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. The nucleic acid molecules can comprise DNA molecules or RNA molecules. Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 90%> identical to a sequence of at least about 10 contiguous amino acids in the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NON; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID ΝO:X; and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95%> identical to a sequence of at least about 30 contiguous amino acids in the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95%> identical to a sequence of at least about 100 contiguous amino acids in the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to the complete amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least about 10 contiguous amino acids in the complete amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Also preferred is a polypeptide wherein said sequence of contiguous amino acids is included in the amino acid sequence of a portion of said polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 ; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and/or the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y. Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 30 contiguous amino acids in the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95%> identical to a sequence of at least about 100 contiguous amino acids in the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Further preferred is an isolated antibody which binds specifically to a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that is at least 90%> identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: a polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is a method for detecting in a biological sample a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence which is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: a polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 ; which method comprises a step of comparing an amino acid sequence of at least one polypeptide molecule in said sample with a sequence selected from said group and determining whether the sequence of said polypeptide molecule in said sample is at least 90% identical to said sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids. Also preferred is the above method wherein said step of comparing an amino acid sequence of at least one polypeptide molecule in said sample with a sequence selected from said group comprises determining the extent of specific binding of polypeptides in said sample to an antibody which binds specifically to a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that is at least 90%> identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: a polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Also preferred is the above method wherein said step of comparing sequences is performed by comparing the amino acid sequence determined from a polypeptide molecule in said sample with said sequence selected from said group. Also preferred is a method for identifying the species, tissue or cell type of a biological sample which method comprises a step of detecting polypeptide molecules in said sample, if any, comprising an amino acid sequence that is at least 90%) identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Also preferred is the above method for identifying the species, tissue or cell type of a biological sample, which method comprises a step of detecting polypeptide molecules comprising an amino acid sequence in a panel of at least two amino acid sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the above group. Also preferred is a method for diagnosing in a subject a pathological condition associated with abnormal structure or expression of a nucleic acid sequence identified in Table 1 encoding a polypeptide, which method comprises a step of detecting in a biological sample obtained from said subject polypeptide molecules comprising an amino acid sequence in a panel of at least two amino acid sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 90%> identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. In any of these methods, the step of detecting said polypeptide molecules includes using an antibody. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide wherein said polypeptide comprises an amino acid sequence that is at least 90%) identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of: polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NON; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID ΝO:X; and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule, wherein said nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide has been optimized for expression of said polypeptide in a prokaryotic host. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule, wherein said polypeptide comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of: polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Further preferred is a method of making a recombinant vector comprising inserting any of the above isolated nucleic acid molecule into a vector. Also preferred is the recombinant vector produced by this method. Also preferred is a method of making a recombinant host cell comprising introducing the vector into a host cell, as well as the recombinant host cell produced by this method. Also preferred is a method of making an isolated polypeptide comprising culturing this recombinant host cell under conditions such that said polypeptide is expressed and recovering said polypeptide. Also preferred is this method of making an isolated polypeptide, wherein said recombinant host cell is a eukaryotic cell and said polypeptide is a human protein comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of: polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. The isolated polypeptide produced by this method is also preferred. Also preferred is a method of treatment of an individual in need of an increased level of a protein activity, which method comprises administering to such an individual a Therapeutic comprising an amount of an isolated polypeptide, polynucleotide, immunogenic fragment or analogue thereof, binding agent, antibody, or antigen binding fragment of the claimed invention effective to increase the level of said protein activity in said individual. Also preferred is a method of treatment of an individual in need of a decreased level of a protein activity, which method comprised administering to such an individual a Therapeutic comprising an amount of an isolated polypeptide, polynucleotide, immunogenic fragment or analogue thereof, binding agent, antibody, or antigen binding fragment of the claimed invention effective to decrease the level of said protein activity in said individual. Having generally described the invention, the same will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples, which are provided by way of illustration and are not intended as limiting. Examples Example I: Isolation of a Selected cDNA Clone From the Deposited Sample Each deposited cDNA clone is contained in a plasmid vector. Table 5 identifies the vectors used to construct the cDNA library from which each clone was isolated. In many cases, the vector used to construct the library is a phage vector from which a plasmid has been excised. The following correlates the related plasmid for each phage vector used in constructing the cDNA library. For example, where a particular clone is identified in Table 5 as being isolated in the vector "Lambda Zap," the corresponding deposited clone is in "pBluescript." Vector Used to Construct Library Corresponding Deposited Plasmid Lambda Zap pBluescript (pBS) Uni-Zap XR pBluescript (pBS) Zap Express pBK lafmid BA plafmid BA pSportl pSportl pCMVSport 2.0 pCMVSport 2.0 pCMVSport 3.0 pCMVSport 3.0 pCR ® 2.1 pCR ® 2.1 Vectors Lambda Zap (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128,256 and 5,286,636), Uni-Zap XR (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128, 256 and 5,286,636), Zap Express (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128,256 and 5,286,636), pBluescript (pBS) (Short, J. M. et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 16:7583-7600 (1988); Alting-Mees, M. A. and Short, J. M., Nucleic Acids Res. 17:9494 (1989)) and pBK (Alting-Mees, M. A. et al., Strategies 5:58-61 (1992)) are commercially available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, Inc., 1101 1 N. Torrey Pines Road, La Jolla, CA, 92037. pBS contains an ampicillin resistance gene and pBK contains a neomycin resistance gene. Both can be transformed into E. coli strain XL-1 Blue, also available from Stratagene. pBS comes in 4 forms SK+, SK-, KS+ and KS. The S and K refers to the orientation of the polylinker to the T7 and T3 primer sequences which flank the polylinker region ("S" is for Sacl and "K" is for Kpnl which are the first sites on each respective end of the linker). "+" or "-" refer to the orientation of the fl origin of replication ("ori"), such that in one orientation, single stranded rescue initiated from the f 1 ori generates sense strand DNA and in the other, antisense. Vectors pSportl, pCMVSport 2.0 and pCMVSport 3.0, were obtained from Life Technologies, Inc., P. O. Box 6009, Gaithersburg, MD 20897. All Sport vectors contain an ampicillin resistance gene and may be transformed into E. coli strain DH10B. also available from Life Technologies. (See, for instance, Gruber, C. E., et al., Focus 15:59 (1993).) Vector lafmid BA (Bento Soares, Columbia University, NY) contains an ampicillin resistance gene and can be transformed into E. coli strain XL-1 Blue. Vector pCR ® 2.1, which is available from Invitrogen, 1600 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, CA 92008, contains an ampicillin resistance gene and may be transformed into E. coli strain DH10B, available from Life Technologies. (See, for instance, Clark, J. M., Nuc. Acids Res. 16:9677-9686 (1988) and Mead, D. et al., Bio/Technology 9: (1991).) Preferably, a polynucleotide of the present invention does not comprise the phage vector sequences identified for the particular clone in Table 5, as well as the corresponding plasmid vector sequences designated above. The deposited material in the sample assigned the ATCC Deposit Number cited by reference to Table 2 and 5 for any given cDNA clone also may contain one or more additional plasmids, each comprising a cDNA clone different from that given clone. Thus, deposits sharing the same ATCC Deposit Number contain at least a plasmid for each cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. TABLE 5 Two approaches can be used to isolate a particular clone from the deposited sample of plasmid DNAs cited for that clone in Table 5. First, a plasmid is. directly isolated by screening the clones using a polynucleotide probe corresponding to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X. Particularly, a specific polynucleotide with 30-40 nucleotides is synthesized using an Applied Biosystems DNA synthesizer according to the sequence reported. The oligonucleotide is labeled, for instance, with 32 P-γ-ATP using T4 polynucleotide kinase and purified according to routine methods. (E.g., Maniatis et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring, NY (1982).) The plasmid mixture is transformed into a suitable host, as indicated above (such as XL- 1 Blue (Stratagene)) using techniques known to those of skill in the art, such as those provided by the vector supplier or in related publications or patents cited above. The transformants are plated on 1.5% agar plates (containing the appropriate selection agent, e.g., ampicillin) to a density of about 150 transformants (colonies) per plate. These plates are screened using Nylon membranes according to routine methods for bacterial colony screening (e.g., Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Edit., (1989), Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, pages 1.93 to 1.104), or other techniques known to those of skill in the art. Alternatively, two primers of 17-20 nucleotides derived from both ends of the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X are synthesized and used to amplify the desired cDNA using the deposited cDNA plasmid as a template. The polymerase chain reaction is carried out under routine conditions, for instance, in 25 μl of reaction mixture with 0.5 ug of the above cDNA template. A convenient reaction mixture is 1.5-5 mM MgCl?, 0.01% (w/v) gelatin, 20 μM each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP, 25 pmol of each primer and 0.25 Unit of Taq polymerase. Thirty five cycles of PCR (denaturation at 94°C for 1 min; annealing at 55°C for 1 min; elongation at 72°C for 1 min) are performed with a Perkin-Elmer Cetus automated thermal cycler. The amplified product is analyzed by agarose gel electrophoresis and the DNA band with expected molecular weight is excised and purified. The PCR product is verified to be the selected sequence by subcloning and sequencing the DNA product. Several methods are available for the identification of the 5' or 3' non-coding portions of a gene which may not be present in the deposited clone. These methods include but are not limited to, filter probing, clone enrichment using specific probes, and protocols similar or identical to 5' and 3' "RACE" protocols which are well known in the art. For instance, a method similar to 5' RACE is available for generating the missing 5' end of a desired full- length transcript. (Fromont-Racine et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 21(7): 1683-1684 (1993).) Briefly, a specific RNA oligonucleotide is ligated to the 5' ends of a population of RNA presumably containing full-length gene RNA transcripts. A primer set containing a primer specific to the ligated RNA oligonucleotide and a primer specific to a known sequence of the gene of interest is used to PCR amplify the 5' portion of the desired full- length gene. This amplified product may then be sequenced and used to generate the full length gene. This above method starts with total RNA isolated from the desired source, although poly-A+ RNA can be used. The RNA preparation can then be treated with phosphatase if necessary to eliminate 5' phosphate groups on degraded or damaged RNA which may interfere with the later RNA ligase step. The phosphatase should then be inactivated and the RNA treated with tobacco acid pyrophosphatase in order to remove the cap structure present at the 5' ends of messenger RNAs. This reaction leaves a 5' phosphate group at the 5' end of the cap cleaved RNA which can then be ligated to an RNA oligonucleotide using T4 RNA ligase. This modified RNA preparation is used as a template for first strand cDNA synthesis using a gene specific oligonucleotide. The first strand synthesis reaction is used as a template for PCR amplification of the desired 5' end using a primer specific to the ligated RNA oligonucleotide and a primer specific to the known sequence of the gene of interest. The resultant product is then sequenced and analyzed to confirm that the 5' end sequence belongs to the desired gene. Example 2: Isolation of Genomic Clones Corresponding to a Polynucleotide A human genomic PI library (Genomic Systems, Inc.) is screened by PCR using primers selected for the sequence corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X, according to the method described in Example 1. (See also, Sambrook.) Example 3: Tissue specific expression analysis The Human Genome Sciences, Inc. (HGS) database is derived from sequencing tissue specific cDNA libraries. Libraries generated from a particular tissue are selected and the specific tissue expression pattern of EST groups or assembled contigs within these libraries is determined by comparison of the expression patterns of those groups or contigs within the entire database. ESTs which show tissue specific expression are selected. The original clone from which the specific EST sequence was generated, is obtained from the catalogued library of clones and the insert amplified by PCR using methods known in the art. The PCR product is denatured then transferred in 96 well format to a nylon membrane (Schleicher and Scheull) generating an array filter of tissue specific clones. Housekeeping genes, maize genes, and known tissue specific genes are included on the filters. These targets can be used in signal normalization and to validate assay sensitivity. Additional targets are included to monitor probe length and specificity of hybridization. Radioactively labeled hybridization probes are generated by first strand cDNA synthesis per the manufacturer's instructions (Life Technologies) from mRNA/RNA samples prepared from the specific tissue being analyzed. The hybridization probes are purified by gel exclusion chromatography, quantitated, and hybridized with the array filters in hybridization bottles at 65°C overnight. The filters are washed under stringent conditions and signals are captured using a Fuji phosphorimager. Data is extracted using AIS software and following background subtraction, signal normalization is performed. This includes a normalization of filter-wide expression levels between different experimental runs. Genes that are differentially expressed in the tissue of interest are identified and the full length sequence of these clones is generated. Example 4: Chromosomal Mapping of the Polynucleotides An oligonucleotide primer set is designed according to the sequence at the 5' end of SEQ ID NO:X. This primer preferably spans about 100 nucleotides. This primer set is then used in a polymerase chain reaction under the following set of conditions : 30 seconds, 95°C; 1 minute, 56°C; 1 minute, 70°C. This cycle is repeated 32 times followed by one 5 minute cycle at 70°C. Human, mouse, and hamster DNA is used as template in addition to a somatic cell hybrid panel containing individual chromosomes or chromosome fragments (Bios, Inc). The reactions is analyzed on either 8% polyacrylamide gels or 3.5 % agarose gels. Chromosome mapping is determined by the presence of an approximately 100 bp PCR fragment in the particular somatic cell hybrid. Example 5: Bacterial Expression of a Polypeptide A polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the present invention is amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' and 3' ends of the DNA sequence, as outlined in Example 1, to synthesize insertion fragments. The primers used to amplify the cDNA insert should preferably contain restriction sites, such as BamHI and Xbal, at the 5' end of the primers in order to clone the amplified product into the expression vector. For example, BamHI and Xbal correspond to the restriction enzyme sites on the bacterial expression vector pQE-9. (Qiagen, Inc., Chatsworth, CA). This plasmid vector encodes antibiotic resistance (Amp r ), a bacterial origin of replication (ori), an IPTG-regulatable promoter/operator (P/O), a ribosome binding site (RBS), a 6-histidine tag (6-His), and restriction enzyme cloning sites. The pQE-9 vector is digested with BamHI and Xbal and the amplified fragment is ligated into the pQE-9 vector maintaining the reading frame initiated at the bacterial RBS. The ligation mixture is then used to transform the E. coli strain M15/rep4 (Qiagen, Inc.) which contains multiple copies of the plasmid pREP4, which expresses the lad repressor and also confers kanamycin resistance (Kan 1* ). Transformants are identified by their ability to grow on LB plates and ampicillin/kanamycin resistant colonies are selected. Plasmid DNA is isolated and confirmed by restriction analysis. Clones containing the desired constructs are grown overnight (O/N) in liquid culture in LB media supplemented with both Amp (100 ug/ml) and Kan (25 ug/ml). The O/N culture is used to inoculate a large culture at a ratio of 1 : 100 to 1 :250. The cells are grown to an optical density 600 (O.D. 600 ) of between 0.4 and 0.6. IPTG (Isopropyl-B-D-thiogalacto pyranoside) is then added to a final concentration of 1 mM. IPTG induces by inactivating the lad repressor, clearing the P/O leading to increased gene expression. Cells are grown for an extra 3 to 4 hours. Cells are then harvested by centrifugation (20 mins at 6000Xg). The cell pellet is solubilized in the chaotropic agent 6 Molar Guanidine HC1 by stirring for 3-4 hours at 4°C. The cell debris is removed by centrifugation, and the supernatant containing the polypeptide is loaded onto a nickel-nitrilo- tri-acetic acid ("Ni-NTA") affinity resin column (available from QIAGEN, Inc., supra). Proteins with a 6 x His tag bind to the Ni-NTA resin with high affinity and can be purified in a simple one-step procedure (for details see: The QIAexpressionist (1995) QIAGEN, Inc., supra). Briefly, the supernatant is loaded onto the column in 6 M guanidine-HCl, pH 8, the column is first washed with 10 volumes of 6 M guanidine-HCl, pH 8, then washed with 10 volumes of 6 M guanidine-HCl pH 6, and finally the polypeptide is eluted with 6 M guanidine-HCl, pH 5. The purified protein is then renatured by dialyzing it against phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) or 50 mM Na-acetate, pH 6 buffer plus 200 mM NaCl. Alternatively, the protein can be successfully refolded while immobilized on the Ni-NTA column. The recommended conditions are as follows: renature using a linear 6M-1M urea gradient in 500 mM NaCl, 20% glycerol, 20 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.4, containing protease inhibitors. The renaturation should be performed over a period of 1.5 hours or more. After renaturation the proteins are eluted by the addition of 250 mM immidazole. Immidazole is removed by a final dialyzing step against PBS or 50 mM sodium acetate pH 6 buffer plus 200 mM NaCl. The purified protein is stored at 4° C or frozen at -80° C. In addition to the above expression vector, the present invention further includes an expression vector comprising phage operator and promoter elements operatively linked to a polynucleotide of the present invention, called pHE4a. (ATCC Accession Number 209645, deposited on February 25, 1998.) This vector contains: 1) a neomycinphosphotransferase gene as a selection marker, 2) an E. coli origin of replication, 3) a T5 phage promoter sequence, 4) two lac operator sequences, 5) a Shine-Delgarno sequence, and 6) the lactose operon repressor gene (laclq). The origin of replication (oriC) is derived from pUC19 (LTI, Gaithersburg, MD). The promoter sequence and operator sequences are made synthetically. DNA can be inserted into the pHEa by restricting the vector with Ndel and Xbal, BamHI, Xhol, or Asp718, running the restricted product on a gel, and isolating the larger fragment (the stuffer fragment should be about 310 base pairs). The DNA insert is generated according to the PCR protocol described in Example 1 , using PCR primers having restriction sites for Ndel (5' primer) and Xbal, BamHI, Xhol, or Asp718 (3' primer). The PCR insert is gel purified and restricted with compatible enzymes. The insert and vector are ligated according to standard protocols. The engineered vector could easily be substituted in the above protocol to express protein in a bacterial system. Example 6: Purification of a Polypeptide from an Inclusion Body The following alternative method can be used to purify a polypeptide expressed in E coli when it is present in the form of inclusion bodies. Unless otherwise specified, all of the following steps are conducted at 4-10°C. Upon completion of the production phase of the E. coli fermentation, the cell culture is cooled to 4-10°C and the cells harvested by continuous centrifugation at 15,000 rpm (Heraeus Sepatech). On the basis of the expected yield of protein per unit weight of cell paste and the amount of purified protein required, an appropriate amount of cell paste, by weight, is suspended in a buffer solution containing 100 mM Tris, 50 mM EDTA, pH 7.4. The cells are dispersed to a homogeneous suspension using a high shear mixer. The cells are then lysed by passing the solution through a microfluidizer (Microfuidics, Corp. or APV Gaulin, Inc.) twice at 4000-6000 psi. The homogenate is then mixed with NaCl solution to a final concentration of 0.5 M NaCl, followed by centrifugation at 7000 xg for 15 min. The resultant pellet is washed again using 0.5M NaCl, 100 mM Tris, 50 mM EDTA, pH 7.4. The resulting washed inclusion bodies are solubilized with 1.5 M guanidine hydrochloride (GuHCl) for 2-4 hours. After 7000 xg centrifugation for 15 min., the pellet is discarded and the polypeptide containing supernatant is incubated at 4°C overnight to allow further GuHCl extraction. Following high speed centrifugation (30,000 xg) to remove insoluble particles, the GuHCl solubilized protein is refolded by quickly mixing the GuHCl extract with 20 volumes of buffer containing 50 mM sodium, pH 4.5, 150 mM NaCl, 2 mM EDTA by vigorous stirring. The refolded diluted protein solution is kept at 4°C without mixing for 12 hours prior to further purification steps. To clarify the refolded polypeptide solution, a previously prepared tangential filtration unit equipped with 0.16 μm membrane filter with appropriate surface area (e.g., Filtron), equilibrated with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0 is employed. The filtered sample is loaded onto a cation exchange resin (e.g., Poros HS-50, Perseptive Biosystems). The column is washed with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0 and eluted with 250 mM, 500 mM, 1000 mM, and 1500 mM NaCl in the same buffer, in a stepwise manner. The absorbance at 280 nm of the effluent is continuously monitored. Fractions are collected and further analyzed by SDS- PAGE. Fractions containing the polypeptide are then pooled and mixed with 4 volumes of water. The diluted sample is then loaded onto a previously prepared set of tandem columns of strong anion (Poros HQ-50, Perseptive Biosystems) and weak anion (Poros CM-20, Perseptive Biosystems) exchange resins. The columns are equilibrated with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0. Both columns are washed with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0, 200 mM NaCl. The CM-20 column is then eluted using a 10 column volume linear gradient ranging from 0.2 M NaCl, 50 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0 to 1.0 M NaCl, 50 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.5. Fractions are collected under constant A 8 o monitoring of the effluent. Fractions containing the polypeptide (determined, for instance, by 16% SDS-PAGE) are then pooled. The resultant polypeptide should exhibit greater than 95% purity after the above refolding and purification steps. No major contaminant bands should be observed from Commassie blue stained 16% SDS-PAGE gel when 5 μg of purified protein is loaded. The purified protein can also be tested for endotoxin/LPS contamination, and typically the LPS content is less than 0.1 ng/ml according to LAL assays. Example 7: Cloning and Expression of a Polypeptide in a Baculovirus Expression System In this example, the plasmid shuttle vector pA2 is used to insert a polynucleotide into a baculovirus to express a polypeptide. This expression vector contains the strong polyhedrin promoter of the Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcMNPV) followed by convenient restriction sites such as BamHI, Xba I and Asp718. The polyadenylation site of the simian virus 40 ("SV40") is used for efficient polyadenylation. For easy selection of recombinant virus, the plasmid contains the beta-galactosidase gene from E. coli under control of a weak Drosophila promoter in the same orientation, followed by the polyadenylation signal of the polyhedrin gene. The inserted genes are flanked on both sides by viral sequences for cell-mediated homologous recombination with wild-type viral DNA to generate a viable virus that express the cloned polynucleotide. Many other baculovirus vectors can be used in place of the vector above, such as pAc373, pVL941, and pAcIMl, as one skilled in the art would readily appreciate, as long as the construct provides appropriately located signals for transcription, translation, secretion and the like, including a signal peptide and an in-frame AUG as required. Such vectors are described, for instance, in Luckow et al., Virology 170:31-39 (1989). Specifically, the cDNA sequence contained in the deposited clone, including the AUG initiation codon, is amplified using the PCR protocol described in Example 1. If a naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce the polypeptide of the present invention, the pA2 vector does not need a second signal peptide. Alternatively, the vector can be modified (pA2 GP) to include a baculovirus leader sequence, using the standard methods described in Summers et al., "A Manual of Methods for Baculovirus Vectors and Insect Cell Culture Procedures," Texas Agricultural Experimental Station Bulletin No. 1555 (1987). The amplified fragment is isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean," BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.). The fragment then is digested with appropriate restriction enzymes and again purified on a 1% agarose gel. The plasmid is digested with the corresponding restriction enzymes and optionally, can be dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphatase, using routine procedures known in the art. The DNA is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean" BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.). The fragment and the dephosphorylated plasmid are ligated together with T4 DNA ligase. E. coli HB101 or other suitable E. coli hosts such as XL-1 Blue (Stratagene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, CA) cells are transformed with the ligation mixture and spread on culture plates. Bacteria containing the plasmid are identified by digesting DNA from individual colonies and analyzing the digestion product by gel electrophoresis. The sequence of the cloned fragment is confirmed by DNA sequencing. Five μg of a plasmid containing the polynucleotide is co-transfected with 1.0 μg of a commercially available linearized baculovirus DNA ("BaculoGold™ baculovirus DNA", Pharmingen, San Diego, CA), using the lipofection method described by Feigner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:7413-7417 (1987). One μg of BaculoGold™ virus DNA and 5 μg of the plasmid are mixed in a sterile well of a microtiter plate containing 50 μl of serum-free Grace's medium (Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg, MD). Afterwards, 10 μl Lipofectin plus 90 μl Grace's medium are added, mixed and incubated for 15 minutes at room temperature. Then the transfection mixture is added drop-wise to Sf9 insect cells (ATCC CRL 171 1) seeded in a 35 mm tissue culture plate with 1 ml Grace's medium without serum. The plate is then incubated for 5 hours at 27° C. The transfection solution is then removed from the plate and 1 ml of Grace's insect medium supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum is added. Cultivation is then continued at 27° C for four days. After four days the supernatant is collected and a plaque assay is performed, as described by Summers and Smith, supra. An agarose gel with "Blue Gal" (Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg) is used to allow easy identification and isolation of gal-expressing clones, which produce blue-stained plaques. (A detailed description of a "plaque assay" of this type can also be found in the user's guide for insect cell culture and baculovirology distributed by Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg, page 9-10.) After appropriate incubation, blue stained plaques are picked with the tip of a micropipettor (e.g., Eppendorf). The agar containing the recombinant viruses is then resuspended in a microcentrifuge tube containing 200 μl of Grace's medium and the suspension containing the recombinant baculovirus is used to infect Sf9 cells seeded in 35 mm dishes. Four days later the supematants of these culture dishes are harvested and then they are stored at 4° C. To verify the expression of the polypeptide, Sf9 cells are grown in Grace's medium supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated FBS. The cells are infected with the recombinant baculovirus containing the polynucleotide at a multiplicity of infection ("MOI") of about 2. If radiolabeled proteins are desired, 6 hours later the medium is removed and is replaced with SF900 II medium minus methionine and cysteine (available from Life Technologies Inc., Rockville, MD). After 42 hours, 5 μCi of 33 S-methionine and 5 μCi 35 S-cysteine (available from Amersham) are added. The cells are further incubated for 16 hours and then are harvested by centrifugation. The proteins in the supernatant as well as the intracellular proteins are analyzed by SDS-PAGE followed by autoradiography (if radiolabeled). Microsequencing of the amino acid sequence of the amino terminus of purified protein may be used to determine the amino terminal sequence of the produced protein. Example 8: Expression of a Polypeptide in Mammalian Cells The polypeptide of the present invention can be expressed in a mammalian cell. A typical mammalian expression vector contains a promoter element, which mediates the initiation of transcription of mRNA, a protein coding sequence, and signals required for the termination of transcription and polyadenylation of the transcript. Additional elements include enhancers, Kozak sequences and intervening sequences flanked by donor and acceptor sites for RNA splicing. Highly efficient transcription is achieved with the early and late promoters from SV40, the long terminal repeats (LTRs) from Retroviruses, e.g., RSV, HTLVI, HIVI and the early promoter of the cytomegalovirus (CMV). However, cellular elements can also be used (e.g., the human actin promoter). Suitable expression vectors for use in practicing the present invention include, for example, vectors such as pSVL and pMSG (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), pRSVcat (ATCC 37152), pSV2dhfr (ATCC 37146), pBC12MI (ATCC 67109), pCMVSport 2.0, and pCMVSport 3.0. Mammalian host cells that could be used include, human Hela, 293, H9 and Jurkat cells, mouse NIH3T3 and C127 cells, Cos 1 , Cos 7 and CV1 , quail QC 1-3 cells, mouse L cells and Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells. Alternatively, the polypeptide can be expressed in stable cell lines containing the polynucleotide integrated into a chromosome. The co-transfection with a selectable marker such as DHFR, gpt, neomycin, hygromycin allows the identification and isolation of the transfected cells. The transfected gene can also be amplified to express large amounts of the encoded protein. The DHFR (dihydrofolate reductase) marker is useful in developing cell lines that carry several hundred or even several thousand copies of the gene of interest. (See, e.g., Alt, F. W., et al., J. Biol. Chem. 253: 1357-1370 (1978); Hamlin, J. L. and Ma, C, Biochem. et Biophys. Acta, 1097: 107-143 (1990); Page, M. J. and Sydenham, M. A., Biotechnology 9:64- 68 (1991).) Another useful selection marker is the enzyme glutamine synthase (GS) (Murphy et al., Biochem J. 227:277-279 (1991 ); Bebbington et al., Bio/Technology 10: 169-175 (1992). Using these markers, the mammalian cells are grown in selective medium and the cells with the highest resistance are selected. These cell lines contain the amplified gene(s) integrated into a chromosome. Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) and NSO cells are often used for the production of proteins. Derivatives of the plasmid pSV2-dhfr (ATCC Accession No. 37146), the expression vectors pC4 (ATCC Accession No. 209646) and pC6 (ATCC Accession No.209647) contain the strong promoter (LTR) of the Rous Sarcoma Virus (Cullen et al., Molecular and Cellular Biology, 438-447 (March, 1985)) plus a fragment of the CMV-enhancer (Boshart et al., Cell 41 :521-530 (1985).) Multiple cloning sites, e.g., with the restriction enzyme cleavage sites BamHI, Xbal and Asp718, facilitate the cloning of the gene of interest. The vectors also contain the 3' intron, the polyadenylation and termination signal of the rat preproinsulin gene, and the mouse DHFR gene under control of the SV40 early promoter. Specifically, the plasmid pC6, for example, is digested with appropriate restriction enzymes and then dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphates by procedures known in the art. The vector is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel. A polynucleotide of the present invention is amplified according to the protocol outlined in Example 1. If a naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce the polypeptide of the present invention, the vector does not need a second signal peptide. Alternatively, if a naturally occurring signal sequence is not used, the vector can be modified to include a heterologous signal sequence. (See, e.g., WO 96/34891.) The amplified fragment is isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean," BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.). The fragment then is digested with appropriate restriction enzymes and again purified on a 1% agarose gel. The amplified fragment is then digested with the same restriction enzyme and purified on a 1 % agarose gel. The isolated fragment and the dephosphorylated vector are then ligated with T4 DNA ligase. E. coli HB101 or XL-1 Blue cells are then transformed and bacteria are identified that contain the fragment inserted into plasmid pC6 using, for instance, restriction enzyme analysis. Chinese hamster ovary cells lacking an active DHFR gene is used for transfection. Five μg of the expression plasmid pC6 or pC4 is cotransfected with 0.5 μg of the plasmid pSVneo using lipofectin (Feigner et al., supra). The plasmid pSV2-neo contains a dominant selectable marker, the neo gene from Tn5 encoding an enzyme that confers resistance to a group of antibiotics including G418. The cells are seeded in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 1 mg/ml G418. After 2 days, the cells are trypsinized and seeded in hybridoma cloning plates (Greiner, Germany) in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 10, 25, or 50 ng/ml of metothrexate plus 1 mg/ml G418. After about 10- 14 days single clones are trypsinized and then seeded in 6-well petri dishes or 10 ml flasks using different concentrations of methotrexate (50 nM, 100 nM, 200 nM, 400 nM, 800 nM). Clones growing at the highest concentrations of methotrexate are then transferred to new 6- well plates containing even higher concentrations of methotrexate (1 μM, 2 μM, 5 μM, 10 mM, 20 mM). The same procedure is repeated until clones are obtained which grow at a concentration of 100 - 200 μM. Expression of the desired gene product is analyzed, for instance, by SDS-PAGE and Western blot or by reversed phase HPLC analysis. Example 9: Protein Fusions The polypeptides of the present invention are preferably fused to other proteins. These fusion proteins can be used for a variety of applications. For example, fusion of the present polypeptides to His-tag, HA-tag, protein A, IgG domains, and maltose binding protein facilitates purification. (See Example 5; see also EP A 394,827; Traunecker, et al., Nature 331 :84-86 (1988).) Similarly, fusion to IgG-1, IgG-3, and albumin increases the halflife time in vivo. Nuclear localization signals fused to the polypeptides of the present invention can target the protein to a specific subcellular localization, while covalent heterodimer or homodimers can increase or decrease the activity of a fusion protein. Fusion proteins can also create chimeric molecules having more than one function. Finally, fusion proteins can increase solubility and/or stability of the fused protein compared to the non- fiised protein. All of the types of fusion proteins described above can be made by modifying the following protocol, which outlines the fusion of a polypeptide to an IgG molecule, or the protocol described in Example 5. Briefly, the human Fc portion of the IgG molecule can be PCR amplified, using primers that span the 5' and 3' ends of the sequence described below. These primers also should have convenient restriction enzyme sites that will facilitate cloning into an expression vector, preferably a mammalian expression vector. For example, if pC4 (Accession No. 209646) is used, the human Fc portion can be ligated into the BamHI cloning site. Note that the 3 ' BamHI site should be destroyed. Next, the vector containing the human Fc portion is re-restricted with BamHI, linearizing the vector, and a polynucleotide of the present invention, isolated by the PCR protocol described in Example 1 , is ligated into this BamHI site. Note that the polynucleotide is cloned without a stop codon, otherwise a fusion protein will not be produced. If the naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce the polypeptide of the present invention, pC4 does not need a second signal peptide. Alternatively, if the naturally occurring signal sequence is not used, the vector can be modified to include a heterologous signal sequence. (See, e.g., WO 96/34891.) Human IgG Fc region- GGGATCCGGAGCCCAAATCTTCTGAC AAAACTC ACAC ATGCCCACCGTGCCCAG CACCTGAATTCGAGGGTGCACCGTCAGTCTTCCTCTTCCCCCCAAAACCCAAGGA CACCCTCATGATCTCCCGGACTCCTGAGGTCACATGCGTGGTGGTGGACGTAAGC CACGAAGACCCTGAGGTCAAGTTCAACTGGTACGTGGACGGCGTGGAGGTGCAT AATGCCAAGACAAAGCCGCGGGAGGAGCAGTACAACAGCACGTACCGTGTGGTC AGCGTCCTC ACCGTCCTGC ACC AGGACTGGCTG AATGGC A AGGAGTAC AAGTGC AAGGTCTCCAACAAAGCCCTCCCAACCCCCATCGAGAAAACCATCTCCAAAGCC AAAGGGCAGCCCCGAGAACCACAGGTGTACACCCTGCCCCCATCCCGGGATGAG CTGACCAAGAACCAGGTCAGCCTGACCTGCCTGGTCAAAGGCTTCTATCCAAGC GACATCGCCGTGGAGTGGGAGAGCAATGGGCAGCCGGAGAACAACTACAAGAC CACGCCTCCCGTGCTGGACTCCGACGGCTCCTTCTTCCTCTACAGCAAGCTCACC GTGGACAAGAGCAGGTGGCAGCAGGGGAACGTCTTCTCATGCTCCGTGATGCAT GAGGCTCTGCACAACCACTACACGCAGAAGAGCCTCTCCCTGTCTCCGGGTAAAT GAGTGCGACGGCCGCGACTCTAGAGGAT (SEQ ID NO.887) Example 10: Production of an Antibody from a Polypeptide a) Hybridoma Technology The antibodies of the present invention can be prepared by a variety of methods. (See, Current Protocols, Chapter 2.) As one example of such methods, cells expressing polypeptide of the present invention are administered to an animal to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies In a preferred method, a preparation of polypeptide of the present invention is prepared and purified to render it substantially free of natural contaminants. Such a preparation is then introduced into an animal in order to produce polyclonal antisera of greater specific activity. Monoclonal antibodies specific for polypeptide of the present invention are prepared using hybridoma technology. (Kohler et al.. Nature 256:495 (1975); Kohler et al, Eur. J. Immunol. 6:51 1 (1976); Kohler et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 6:292 (1976); Hammerling et al., in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell Hybridomas, Elsevier, N.Y., pp. 563-681 (1981)). In general, an animal (preferably a mouse) is immunized with polypeptide of the present invention or, more preferably, with a secreted polypeptide of the present invention- expressing cell. Such polypeptide-expressing cells are cultured in any suitable tissue culture medium, preferably in Earle's modified Eagle's medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (inactivated at about 56°C), and supplemented with about 10 g/1 of nonessential amino acids, about 1.000 U/ml of penicillin, and about 100 μg/ml of streptomycin. The splenocytes of such mice are extracted and fused with a suitable myeloma cell line. Any suitable myeloma cell line may be employed in accordance with the present invention; however, it is preferable to employ the parent myeloma cell line (SP2O), available from the ATCC. After fusion, the resulting hybridoma cells are selectively maintained in HAT medium, and then cloned by limiting dilution as described by Wands et al. (Gastroenterology 80:225-232 (1981)). The hybridoma cells obtained through such a selection are then assayed to identify clones which secrete antibodies capable of binding the polypeptide of the present invention. Alternatively, additional antibodies capable of binding to polypeptide of the present invention can be produced in a two-step procedure using anti-idiotypic antibodies. Such a method makes use of the fact that antibodies are themselves antigens, and therefore, it is possible to obtain an antibody which binds to a second antibody. In accordance with this method, protein specific antibodies are used to immunize an animal, preferably a mouse. The splenocytes of such an animal are then used to produce hybridoma cells, and the hybridoma cells are screened to identify clones which produce an antibody whose ability to bind to the polypeptide of the present invention-specific antibody can be blocked by polypeptide of the present invention. Such antibodies comprise anti-idiotypic antibodies to the polypeptide of the present invention-specific antibody and are used to immunize an animal to induce formation of further polypeptide of the present invention-specific antibodies. For in vivo use of antibodies in humans, an antibody is "humanized". Such antibodies can be produced using genetic constructs derived from hybridoma cells producing the monoclonal antibodies described above. Methods for producing chimeric and humanized antibodies are known in the art and are discussed herein. (See, for review, Morrison, Science 229: 1202 ( 1985); Oi et al., BioTechniques 4:214 (1986); Cabilly et al., U.S. Patent No. 4,816,567; Taniguchi et al., EP 171496; Morrison et al, EP 173494; Neuberger et al., WO 8601533; Robinson et al., WO 8702671 ; Boulianne et al., Nature 312:643 (1984); Neuberger et al., Nature 314:268 (1985).) b) Isolation Of Antibody Fragments Directed Against Polypeptide of the Present Invention From A Library Of scFvs Naturally occurring V-genes isolated from human PBLs are constructed into a library of antibody fragments which contain reactivities against polypeptide of the present invention to which the donor may or may not have been exposed (see e.g., U.S. Patent 5,885,793 incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety). Rescue of the Library. A library of scFvs is constructed from the RNA of human PBLs as described in PCT publication WO 92/01047. To rescue phage displaying antibody fragments, approximately 109 E. coli harboring the phagemid are used to inoculate 50 ml of 2xTY containing 1% glucose and 100 μg/ml of ampicillin (2xTY- AMP-GLU) and grown to an O.D. of 0.8 with shaking. Five ml of this culture is used to innoculate 50 ml of 2xTY- AMP-GLU, 2 x 108 TU of delta gene 3 helper (Ml 3 delta gene III, see PCT publication WO 92/01047) are added and the culture incubated at 37°C for 45 minutes without shaking and then at 37°C for 45 minutes with shaking. The culture is centrifuged at 4000 r.p.m. for 10 min. and the pellet resuspended in 2 liters of 2xTY containing 100 μg/ml ampicillin and 50 ug/ml kanamycin and grown overnight. Phage are prepared as described in PCT publication WO 92/01047. Ml 3 delta gene III is prepared as follows: Ml 3 delta gene III helper phage does not encode gene III protein, hence the phage(mid) displaying antibody fragments have a greater avidity of binding to antigen. Infectious M13 delta gene III particles are made by growing the helper phage in cells harboring a pUC19 derivative supplying the wild type gene III protein during phage moφhogenesis. The culture is incubated for 1 hour at 37° C without shaking and then for a further hour at 37°C with shaking. Cells are spun down (IEC-Centra 8,400 r.p.m. for 10 min), resuspended in 300 ml 2xTY broth containing 100 μg ampicillin/ml and 25 μg kanamycin/ml (2xTY-AMP- KAN) and grown overnight, shaking at 37°C. Phage particles are purified and concentrated from the culture medium by two PEG- precipitations (Sambrook et al., 1990), resuspended in 2 ml PBS and passed through a 0.45 μm filter (Minisart NML; Sartorius) to give a final concentration of approximately 1013 transducing units/ml (ampicillin-resistant clones). Panning of the Library. Immunotubes (Nunc) are coated overnight in PBS with 4 ml of either 100 μg/ml or 10 μg/ml of a polypeptide of the present invention. Tubes are blocked with 2% Marvel-PBS for 2 hours at 37°C and then washed 3 times in PBS. Approximately 1013 TU of phage is applied to the tube and incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature tumbling on an over and under turntable and then left to stand for another 1.5 hours. Tubes are washed 10 times with PBS 0.1% Tween-20 and 10 times with PBS. Phage are eluted by adding 1 ml of 100 mM triethylamine and rotating 15 minutes on an under and over turntable after which the solution is immediately neutralized with 0.5 ml of 1.0M Tris-HCl, pH 7.4. Phage are then used to infect 10 ml of mid-log E. coli TGI by incubating eluted phage with bacteria for 30 minutes at 37°C. The E. coli are then plated on TYE plates containing 1% glucose and 100 μg/ml ampicillin. The resulting bacterial library is then rescued with delta gene 3 helper phage as described above to prepare phage for a subsequent round of selection. This process is then repeated for a total of 4 rounds of affinity purification with tube-washing increased to 20 times with PBS, 0.1% Tween-20 and 20 times with PBS for rounds 3 and 4. Characterization of Binders. Eluted phage from the 3rd and 4th rounds of selection are used to infect E. coli HB 2151 and soluble scFv is produced (Marks, et al., 1991) from single colonies for assay. ELISAs are performed with microtitre plates coated with either 10 pg/ml of the polypeptide of the present invention in 50 mM bicarbonate pH 9.6. Clones positive in ELISA are further characterized by PCR fingerprinting (see, e.g., PCT publication WO 92/01047) and then by sequencing. These ELISA positive clones may also be further characterized by techniques known in the art, such as, for example, epitope mapping, binding affinity, receptor signal transduction, ability to block or competitively inhibit antibody/antigen binding, and competitive agonistic or antagonistic activity. Example 11: Method of Determining Alterations in a Gene Corresponding to a Polynucleotide RNA isolated from entire families or individual patients presenting with a phenotype of interest (such as a disease) is be isolated. cDNA is then generated from these RNA samples using protocols known in the art. (See, Sambrook.) The cDNA is then used as a template for PCR, employing primers surrounding regions of interest in SEQ ID NO:X; and/or the nucleotide sequence of the related cDNA in the cDNA clone contained in a deposited library. Suggested PCR conditions consist of 35 cycles at 95 degrees C for 30 seconds; 60-120 seconds at 52-58 degrees C; and 60-120 seconds at 70 degrees C, using buffer solutions described in Sidransky et al., Science 252:706 (1991). PCR products are then sequenced using primers labeled at their 5' end with T4 polynucleotide kinase, employing SequiTherm Polymerase. (Epicentre Technologies). The intron-exon borders of selected exons is also determined and genomic PCR products analyzed to confirm the results. PCR products harboring suspected mutations is then cloned and sequenced to validate the results of the direct sequencing. PCR products is cloned into T-tailed vectors as described in Holton et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 19: 1 156 (1991) and sequenced with T7 polymerase (United States Biochemical). Affected individuals are identified by mutations not present in unaffected individuals. Genomic rearrangements are also observed as a method of determining alterations in a gene corresponding to a polynucleotide. Genomic clones isolated according to Example 2 are nick-translated with digoxigenindeoxy-uridine 5'-triphosphate (Boehringer Manheim), and FISH performed as described in Johnson et al., Methods Cell Biol. 35:73-99 (1991). Hybridization with the labeled probe is carried out using a vast excess of human cot- 1 DNA for specific hybridization to the corresponding genomic locus. Chromosomes are counterstained with 4,6-diamino-2-phenylidole and propidium iodide, producing a combination of C- and R-bands. Aligned images for precise mapping are obtained using a triple-band filter set (Chroma Technology, Brattleboro, VT) in combination with a cooled charge-coupled device camera (Photometries, Tucson, AZ) and variable excitation wavelength filters. (Johnson et al., Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl., 8:75 (1991 ).) Image collection, analysis and chromosomal fractional length measurements are performed using the ISee Graphical Program System. (Inovision Coφoration, Durham, NC.) Chromosome alterations of the genomic region hybridized by the probe are identified as insertions, deletions, and translocations. These alterations are used as a diagnostic marker for an associated disease. Example 12: Method of Detecting Abnormal Levels of a Polypeptide in a Biological Sample A polypeptide of the present invention can be detected in a biological sample, and if an increased or decreased level of the polypeptide is detected, this polypeptide is a marker for a particular phenotype. Methods of detection are numerous, and thus, it is understood that one skilled in the art can modify the following assay to fit their particular needs. For example, antibody-sandwich ELISAs are used to detect polypeptides in a sample, preferably a biological sample. Wells of a microtiter plate are coated with specific antibodies, at a final concentration of 0.2 to 10 ug/ml. The antibodies are either monoclonal or polyclonal and are produced by the method described in Example 10. The wells are blocked so that non-specific binding of the polypeptide to the well is reduced. The coated wells are then incubated for > 2 hours at RT with a sample containing the polypeptide. Preferably, serial dilutions of the sample should be used to validate results. The plates are then washed three times with deionized or distilled water to remove unbounded polypeptide. Next, 50 ul of specific antibody-alkaline phosphatase conjugate, at a concentration of 25-400 ng, is added and incubated for 2 hours at room temperature. The plates are again washed three times with deionized or distilled water to remove unbounded conjugate. Add 75 ul of 4-methylumbelliferyl phosphate (MUP) or p-nitrophenyl phosphate (NPP) substrate solution to each well and incubate 1 hour at room temperature. Measure the reaction by a microtiter plate reader. Prepare a standard curve, using serial dilutions of a control sample, and plot polypeptide concentration on the X-axis (log scale) and fluorescence or absorbance of the Y-axis (linear scale). Inteφolate the concentration of the polypeptide in the sample using the standard curve. Example 13: Formulation The invention also provides methods of treatment and/or prevention of diseases or disorders (such as, for example, any one or more of the diseases or disorders disclosed herein) by administration to a subject of an effective amount of a Therapeutic. By therapeutic is meant a polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (including fragments and variants), agonists or antagonists thereof, and/or antibodies thereto, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier type (e.g., a sterile carrier). The Therapeutic will be formulated and dosed in a fashion consistent with good medical practice, taking into account the clinical condition of the individual patient (especially the side effects of treatment with the Therapeutic alone), the site of delivery, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to practitioners. The "effective amount" for p poses herein is thus determined by such considerations. As a general proposition, the total pharmaceutically effective amount of the Therapeutic administered parenterally per dose will be in the range of about lug/kg/day to 10 mg/kg/day of patient body weight, although, as noted above, this will be subject to therapeutic discretion. More preferably, this dose is at least 0.01 mg/kg/day, and most preferably for humans between about 0.01 and 1 mg/kg/day for the hormone. If given continuously, the Therapeutic is typically administered at a dose rate of about 1 ug/kg/hour to about 50 ug/kg/hour, either by 1-4 injections per day or by continuous subcutaneous infusions, for example, using a mini-pump. An intravenous bag solution may also be employed. The length of treatment needed to observe changes and the interval following treatment for responses to occur appears to vary depending on the desired effect. Therapeutics can be are administered orally, rectally, parenterally, intracistemally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, gels, drops or transdermal patch), bucally, or as an oral or nasal spray. "Pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" refers to a non-toxic solid, semisolid or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any. The term "parenteral" as used herein refers to modes of administration which include intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrasternal, subcutaneous and intraarticular injection and infusion. Therapeutics of the invention are also suitably administered by sustained-release systems. Suitable examples of sustained-release Therapeutics are administered orally, rectally, parenterally, intracistemally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, gels, drops or transdermal patch), bucally, or as an oral or nasal spray. "Pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" refers to a non-toxic solid, semisolid or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any type. The term "parenteral" as used herein refers to modes of administration which include intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrasternal, subcutaneous and intraarticular injection and infusion. Therapeutics of the invention are also suitably administered by sustained-release systems. Suitable examples of sustained-release Therapeutics include suitable polymeric materials (such as, for example, semi-permeable polymer matrices in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or mirocapsules), suitable hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, and sparingly soluble derivatives (such as, for example, a sparingly soluble salt). Sustained-release matrices include polylactides (U.S. Pat. No. 3,773,919, EP 58,481), copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman et al., Biopolymers 22:547-556 (1983)), poly (2- hydroxyethyl methacrylate) (Langer et al., J. Biomed. Mater. Res. 15: 167-277 (1981), and Langer, Chem. Tech. 12:98-105 (1982)), ethylene vinyl acetate (Langer et al., Id.) or poly-D- (-)-3-hydroxybutyric acid (EP 133,988). Sustained-release Therapeutics also include liposomally entrapped Therapeutics of the invention (see generally, Langer, Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 317 -327 and 353-365 (1989)). Liposomes containing the Therapeutic are prepared by methods known per se: DE 3,218,121; Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (USA) 82:3688-3692 ( 1985); Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (USA) 77:4030-4034 (1980); EP 52,322; EP 36,676; EP 88,046; EP 143,949; EP 142,641; Japanese Pat. Appl. 83-118008; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045 and 4,544,545; and EP 102,324. Ordinarily, the liposomes are of the small (about 200-800 Angstroms) unilamellar type in which the lipid content is greater than about 30 mol. percent cholesterol, the selected proportion being adjusted for the optimal Therapeutic. In yet an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are delivered by way of a pump (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321 :574 (1989)). Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249:1527-1533 (1990)). For parenteral administration, in one embodiment, the Therapeutic is formulated generally by mixing it at the desired degree of purity, in a unit dosage injectable form (solution, suspension, or emulsion), with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, i.e., one that is non-toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed and is compatible with other ingredients of the formulation. For example, the formulation preferably does not include oxidizing agents and other compounds that are known to be deleterious to the Therapeutic. Generally, the formulations are prepared by contacting the Therapeutic uniformly and intimately with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both. Then, if necessary, the product is shaped into the desired formulation. Preferably the carrier is a parenteral carrier, more preferably a solution that is isotonic with the blood of the recipient. Examples of such carrier vehicles include water, saline, Ringer's solution, and dextrose solution. Non-aqueous vehicles such as fixed oils and ethyl oleate are also useful herein, as well as liposomes. The carrier suitably contains minor amounts of additives such as substances that enhance isotonicity and chemical stability. Such materials are non- toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed, and include buffers such as phosphate, citrate, succinate, acetic acid, and other organic acids or their salts; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid; low molecular weight (less than about ten residues) polypeptides, e.g., polyarginine or tripeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids, such as glycine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, or arginine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates including cellulose or its derivatives, glucose, manose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugar alcohols such as mannitol or sorbitol; counterions such as sodium; and/or nonionic surfactants such as polysorbates, poloxamers, or PEG. The Therapeutic is typically formulated in such vehicles at a concentration of about 0.1 mg/ml to 100 mg/ml, preferably 1-10 mg/ml, at a pH of about 3 to 8. It will be understood that the use of certain of the foregoing excipients, carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of polypeptide salts. Any pharmaceutical used for therapeutic administration can be sterile. Sterility is readily accomplished by filtration through sterile filtration membranes (e.g., 0.2 micron membranes). Therapeutics generally are placed into a container having a sterile access port, for example, an intravenous solution bag or vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle. Therapeutics ordinarily will be stored in unit or multi-dose containers, for example, sealed ampoules or vials, as an aqueous solution or as a lyophilized formulation for reconstitution. As an example of a lyophilized formulation, 10-ml vials are filled with 5 ml of sterile-filtered 1% (w/v) aqueous Therapeutic solution, and the resulting mixture is lyophilized. The infusion solution is prepared by reconstituting the lyophilized Therapeutic using bacteriostatic Water-for-Injection. The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the Therapeutics of the invention. Associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration. In addition, the Therapeutics may be employed in conjunction with other therapeutic compounds. The Therapeutics of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with adjuvants. Adjuvants that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, alum, alum plus deoxycholate (ImmunoAg), MTP-PE (Biocine Coφ.), QS21 (Genentech, Inc.), BCG, and MPL. In a specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with alum. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with QS-21. Further adjuvants that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, Monophosphoryl lipid immunomodulator, AdjuVax 100a, QS-21, QS- 18, CRL1005, Aluminum salts, MF-59, and Virosomal adjuvant technology. Vaccines that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, vaccines directed toward protection against MMR (measles, mumps, rubella), polio, varicella, tetanus/diptheria, hepatitis A, hepatitis B, haemophilus influenzae B, whooping cough, pneumonia, influenza, Lyme's Disease, rotavirus, cholera, yellow fever, Japanese encephalitis, poliomyelitis, rabies, typhoid fever, and pertussis. Combinations may be administered either concomitantly, e.g., as an admixture, separately but simultaneously or concurrently; or sequentially. This includes presentations in which the combined agents are administered together as a therapeutic mixture, and also procedures in which the combined agents are administered separately but simultaneously, e.g., as through separate intravenous lines into the same individual . Administration "in combination" further includes the separate administration of one of the compounds or agents given first, followed by the second. The Therapeutics of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents. Therapeutic agents that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include but not limited to, other members of the TNF family, chemotherapeutic agents, antibiotics, steroidal and non-steroidal anti-inflammatories, conventional immunotherapeutic agents, cytokines and/or growth factors. Combinations may be administered either concomitantly, e.g., as an admixture, separately but simultaneously or concurrently; or sequentially. This includes presentations in which the combined agents are administered together as a therapeutic mixture, and also procedures in which the combined agents are administered separately but simultaneously, e.g., as through separate intravenous lines into the same individual. Administration "in combination" further includes the separate administration of one of the compounds or agents given first, followed by the second. In one embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with members of the TNF family. TNF, TNF-related or TNF-like molecules that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, soluble forms of TNF-alpha, lymphotoxin-alpha (LT-alpha, also known as TNF-beta), LT-beta (found in complex heterotrimer LT-alpha2-beta), OPGL, FasL, CD27L, CD30L, CD40L, 4-1 BBL, DcR3, OX40L, TNF-gamma (International Publication No. WO 96/14328), AIM-I (International Publication No. WO 97/33899), endokine-alpha (International Publication No. WO 98/07880), TR6 (International Publication No. WO 98/30694), OPG, and neutrokine-alpha (International Publication No. WO 98/18921, OX40, and nerve growth factor (NGF), and soluble forms of Fas, CD30, CD27, CD40 and 4-IBB, TR2 (International Publication No. WO 96/34095), DR3 (International Publication No. WO 97/33904), DR4 (International Publication No. WO 98/32856), TR5 (International Publication No. WO 98/30693), TR6 (International Publication No. WO 98/30694), TR7 (International Publication No. WO 98/41629), TRANK, TR9 (International Publication No. WO 98/56892),TR10 (International Publication No. WO 98/54202), 312C2 (International Publication No. WO 98/06842), and TR12, and soluble forms CD154, CD70, and CD153. In certain embodiments, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with antiretroviral agents, nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, non- nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, and/or protease inhibitors. Nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include, but are not limited to, RETROVIR™ (zidovudine/AZT), VIDEX™ (didanosine/ddl), HIVID ™ (zalcitabine/ddC), ZERIT™ (stavudine/d4T), EPIVIR™ (lamivudine/3TC), and COMBIVIR™ (zidovudine/lamivudine). Non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include, but are not limited to, VIRAMUNE™ (nevirapine), RESCRIPTOR™ (delavirdine), and SUSTIVA™ (efavirenz). Protease inhibitors that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include, but are not limited to, CRIXIVAN™ (indinavir), NORVIR™ (ritonavir), INVIRASE ™ (saquinavir), and VIRACEPT™ (nelfinavir). In a specific embodiment, antiretroviral agents, nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, and/or protease inhibitors may be used in any combination with Therapeutics of the invention to treat AIDS and/or to prevent or treat HIV infection. In other embodiments, Therapeutics of the invention may be administered in combination with anti-opportunistic infection agents. Anti-opportunistic agents that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include, but are not limited to, TRIMETHOPRIM-SULFAMETHOXAZOLE ™ , DAPSONE PENTAMIDINE™, ATOVAQUONE™, ISONIAZID™, RIF AMPIN™, PYRAZINAMIDE ETHAMBUTOL ™ , RIFABUTIN™ , CLARITHROMYCIN™ , AZITHROMYCIN GANCICLOVIR ™ , FOSCARNET™ , CIDOFOVIR ™ , FLUCONAZOLE ITRACONAZOLE™ , KETOCONAZOLE™ , ACYCLOVIR™ , FAMCICOLVIR 1 PYRIMETHAMINE™, LEUCOVORIN™ , NEUPOGEN™ (filgrastim/G-CSF), and LEUKINE™ (sargramostim/GM-CSF). In a specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with TRIMETHOPRIM-SULFAMETHOXAZOLE™ , DAPSONE™, PENTAMIDINE™, and/or ATOVAQUONE ™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with ISONIAZID™, RIFAMPIN™ , PYRAZINAMIDE™, and/or ETHAMBUTOL™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic Mycobacterium avium complex infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with RIFABUTIN™, CLARITHROMYCIN™ , a n d / o r AZITHROMYCIN ™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with GANCICLOVIR™, FOSCARNET™ , and/or CIDOFOVIR™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic cytomegalovirus infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with FLUCONAZOLE™ , ITRACONAZOLE™, and/or KETOCONAZOLE™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic fungal infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with ACYCLOVIR™ and/or FAMCICOLVIR™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic heφes simplex virus type I and/or type II infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with PYRIMETH AMINE™ and or LEUCOVORIN™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic Toxoplasma gondii infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with LEUCOVORIN™ and/or NEUPOGEN™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic bacterial infection. In a further embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with an antiviral agent. Antiviral agents that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, acyclovir, ribavirin, amantadine, and remantidine. In a further embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with an antibiotic agent. Antibiotic agents that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, amoxicillin, beta-lactamases, aminoglycosides, beta-lactam (glycopeptide), beta-lactamases, Clindamycin, chloramphenicol, cephalosporins, ciprofloxacin, ciprofloxacin, erythromycin, fluoroquinolones, macrolides, metronidazole, penicillins, quinolones, rifampin, streptomycin, sulfonamide, tetracyclines, trimethoprim, trimethoprim-sulfamthoxazole, and vancomycin. Conventional nonspecific immunosuppressive agents, that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, steroids, cyclosporine, cyclosporine analogs, cyclophosphamide methylprednisone, prednisone, azathioprine, FK-506, 15-deoxyspergualin, and other immunosuppressive agents that act by suppressing the function of responding T cells. In specific embodiments, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with immunosuppressants. Immunosuppressants preparations that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, ORTHOCLONE™ (OKT3), SANDIMMUNE™/NEORAL™/SANGDYA™ (cyclosporin), PROGRAF™ (tacrolimus), CELLCEPT™ (mycophenolate), Azathioprine, glucorticosteroids, and RAPAMUNE™ (sirolimus). In a specific embodiment, immunosuppressants may be used to prevent rejection of organ or bone marrow transplantation. In an additional embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered alone or in combination with one or more intravenous immune globulin preparations. Intravenous immune globulin preparations that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but not limited to, GAMMAR™, IVEEGAM™, SANDOGLOBULIN™, GAMMAGARD S/D™, and GAMIMUNE™ . In a specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with intravenous immune globulin preparations in transplantation therapy (e.g., bone marrow transplant). In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered alone or in combination with an anti-inflammatory agent. Anti-inflammatory agents that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, glucocorticoids and the nonsteroidal anti-inflammatories, aminoarylcarboxylic acid derivatives, arylacetic acid derivatives, arylbutyric acid derivatives, arylcarboxylic acids, arylpropionic acid derivatives, pyrazoles, pyrazolones, salicylic acid derivatives, thiazinecarboxamides, e-acetamidocaproic acid, S-adenosylmethionine, 3-amino-4- hydroxybutyric acid, amixetrine, bendazac, benzydamine, bucolome, difenpiramide, ditazol, emorfazone, guaiazulene, nabumetone, nimesulide, orgotein, oxaceprol, paranyline, perisoxal, pifoxime, proquazone, proxazole, and tenidap. In another embodiment, compostions of the invention are administered in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent. Chemotherapeutic agents that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, antibiotic derivatives (e.g., doxorubicin, bleomycin, daunorubicin, and dactinomycin); antiestrogens (e.g., tamoxifen); antimetabolites (e.g., fluorouracil, 5-FU, methotrexate, floxuridine, interferon alpha-2b, glutamic acid, plicamycin, mercaptopurine, and 6-thioguanine); cytotoxic agents (e.g., carmustine, BCNU, lomustine, CCNU, cytosine arabinoside, cyclophosphamide, estramustine, hydroxyurea, procarbazine, mitomycin, busulfan, cis-platin, and vincristine sulfate); hormones (e.g., medroxyprogesterone, estramustine phosphate sodium, ethinyl estradiol, estradiol, megestrol acetate, methyltestosterone, diethylstilbestrol diphosphate, chlorotrianisene, and testolactone); nitrogen mustard derivatives (e.g., mephalen, chorambucil, mechlorethamine (nitrogen mustard) and thiotepa); steroids and combinations (e.g., bethamethasone sodium phosphate); and others (e.g., dicarbazine, asparaginase, mitotane, vincristine sulfate, vinblastine sulfate, and etoposide). In a specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with CHOP (cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, vincristine, and prednisone) or any combination of the components of CHOP. In another embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with Rituximab. In a further embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered with Rituxmab and CHOP, or Rituxmab and any combination of the components of CHOP. In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with cytokines. Cytokines that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, IL2, IL3, IL4, IL5, IL6, IL7, IL10, IL12, IL13, IL15, anti-CD40, CD40L, IFN-gamma and TNF-alpha. In another embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention may be administered with any interleukin, including, but not limited to, IL-1 alpha, IL-lbeta, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-1 1, IL- 12, IL- 13 , IL- 14, IL- 15, IL- 16, IL- 17, IL- 18, IL- 19, IL-20, and IL-21. In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with angiogenic proteins. Angiogenic proteins that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, Glioma Derived Growth Factor (GDGF), as disclosed in European Patent Number EP-399816; Platelet Derived Growth Factor-A (PDGF-A), as disclosed in European Patent Number EP-6821 10; Platelet Derived Growth Factor-B (PDGF-B), as disclosed in European Patent Number EP-282317; Placental Growth Factor (PIGF), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 92/06194; Placental Growth Factor-2 (P1GF-2), as disclosed in Hauser et al., Gorwth Factors, 4:259-268 (1993); Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor (VEGF), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 90/13649; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-A (VEGF-A), as disclosed in European Patent Number EP-506477; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-2 (VEGF-2), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 96/39515; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor B (VEGF-3); Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor B-186 (VEGF- B186), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 96/26736; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-D (VEGF-D), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 98/02543; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-D (VEGF-D), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 98/07832; and Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-E (VEGF-E), as disclosed in German Patent Number DEI 9639601. The above mentioned references are incoφorated herein by reference herein. In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with hematopoietic growth factors. Hematopoietic growth factors that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, LEUKINE™ (SARGRAMOSTIM™) and NEUPOGEN ™ (FILGRASTIM™). In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with Fibroblast Growth Factors. Fibroblast Growth Factors that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, FGF-1, FGF-2, FGF-3, FGF-4, FGF-5, FGF-6, FGF-7, FGF-8, FGF-9, FGF-10, FGF-1 1, FGF-12, FGF- 13 , FGF- 14, and FGF- 15. In additional embodiments, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with other therapeutic or prophylactic regimens, such as, for example, radiation therapy. Example 14: Method of Treating Decreased Levels of the Polypeptide The present invention relates to a method for treating an individual in need of an increased level of a polypeptide of the invention in the body comprising administering to such an individual a composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an agonist of the invention (including polypeptides of the invention). Moreover, it will be appreciated that conditions caused by a decrease in the standard or normal expression level of a polypeptide of the present invention in an individual can be treated by administering the agonist or antagonist of the present invention. Thus, the invention also provides a method of treatment of an individual in need of an increased level of the polypeptide comprising administering to such an individual a Therapeutic comprising an amount of the agonist or antagonist to increase the activity level of the polypeptide in such an individual. For example, a patient with decreased levels of a polypeptide receives a daily dose 0.1-100 ug kg of the agonist or antagonist for six consecutive days. The exact details of the dosing scheme, based on administration and formulation, are provided in Example 13. Example 15: Method of Treating Increased Levels of the Polypeptide The present invention also relates to a method of treating an individual in need of a decreased level of a polypeptide of the invention in the body comprising administering to such an individual a composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of the invention (including polypeptides and antibodies of the invention). In one example, antisense technology is used to inhibit production of a polypeptide of the present invention. This technology is one example of a method of decreasing levels of a polypeptide, due to a variety of etiologies, such as cancer. For example, a patient diagnosed with abnormally increased levels of a polypeptide is administered intravenously antisense polynucleotides at 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 and 3.0 mg/kg day for 21 days. This treatment is repeated after a 7-day rest period if the treatment was well tolerated. The formulation of the antisense polynucleotide is provided in Example 13. Example 16: Method of Treatment Using Gene Therapy-Ex Vivo One method of gene therapy transplants fibroblasts, which are capable of expressing a polypeptide, onto a patient. Generally, fibroblasts are obtained from a subject by skin biopsy. The resulting tissue is placed in tissue-culture medium and separated into small pieces. Small chunks of the tissue are placed on a wet surface of a tissue culture flask, approximately ten pieces are placed in each flask. The flask is turned upside down, closed tight and left at room temperature over night. After 24 hours at room temperature, the flask is inverted and the chunks of tissue remain fixed to the bottom of the flask and fresh media (e.g., Ham's F12 media, with 10% FBS, penicillin and streptomycin) is added. The flasks are then incubated at 37 degree C for approximately one week. At this time, fresh media is added and subsequently changed every several days. After an additional two weeks in culture, a monolayer of fibroblasts emerge. The monolayer is trypsinized and scaled into larger flasks. pMV-7 (Kirschmeier, P.T. et al., DNA, 7:219-25 (1988)), flanked by the long terminal repeats of the Moloney murine sarcoma virus, is digested with EcoRI and Hindlll and subsequently treated with calf intestinal phosphatase. The linear vector is fractionated on agarose gel and purified, using glass beads. The cDNA encoding a polypeptide of the present invention can be amplified using PCR primers which correspond to the 5' and 3' end sequences respectively as set forth in Example 1 using primers and having appropriate restriction sites and initiation/stop codons, if necessary. Preferably, the 5' primer contains an EcoRI site and the 3' primer includes a Hindlll site. Equal quantities of the Moloney murine sarcoma virus linear backbone and the amplified EcoRI and Hindlll fragment are added together, in the presence of T4 DNA ligase. The resulting mixture is maintained under conditions appropriate for ligation of the two fragments. The ligation mixture is then used to transform bacteria HB101, which are then plated onto agar containing kanamycin for the puφose of confirming that the vector has the gene of interest properly inserted. The amphotropic pA317 or GP+aml2 packaging cells are grown in tissue culture to confluent density in Dulbecco's Modified Eagles Medium (DMEM) with 10% calf serum (CS), penicillin and streptomycin. The MSV vector containing the gene is then added to the media and the packaging cells transduced with the vector. The packaging cells now produce infectious viral particles containing the gene (the packaging cells are now referred to as producer cells). Fresh media is added to the transduced producer cells, and subsequently, the media is harvested from a 10 cm plate of confluent producer cells. The spent media, containing the infectious viral particles, is filtered through a millipore filter to remove detached producer cells and this media is then used to infect fibroblast cells. Media is removed from a sub- confluent plate of fibroblasts and quickly replaced with the media from the producer cells. This media is removed and replaced with fresh media. If the titer of virus is high, then virtually all fibroblasts will be infected and no selection is required. If the titer is very low, then it is necessary to use a retroviral vector that has a selectable marker, such as neo or his. Once the fibroblasts have been efficiently infected, the fibroblasts are analyzed to determine whether protein is produced. The engineered fibroblasts are then transplanted onto the host, either alone or after having been grown to confluence on cytodex 3 microcarrier beads. Example 17: Gene Therapy Using Endogenous Genes Corresponding To Polynucleotides of tbe Invention Another method of gene therapy according to the present invention involves operably associating the endogenous polynucleotide sequence of the invention with a promoter via homologous recombination as described, for example, in U.S. Patent NO: 5,641,670, issued June 24, 1997; International Publication NO: WO 96/2941 1, published September 26, 1996; International Publication NO: WO 94/12650, published August 4, 1994; Koller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 86:8932-8935 (1989); and Zijlstra et al., Nature, 342:435-438 (1989). This method involves the activation of a gene which is present in the target cells, but which is not expressed in the cells, or is expressed at a lower level than desired. Polynucleotide constructs are made which contain a promoter and targeting sequences, which are homologous to the 5' non-coding sequence of endogenous polynucleotide sequence, flanking the promoter. The targeting sequence will be sufficiently near the 5' end of the polynucleotide sequence so the promoter will be operably linked to the endogenous sequence upon homologous recombination. The promoter and the targeting sequences can be amplified using PCR. Preferably, the amplified promoter contains distinct restriction enzyme sites on the 5' and 3' ends. Preferably, the 3' end of the first targeting sequence contains the same restriction enzyme site as the 5' end of the amplified promoter and the 5' end of the second targeting sequence contains the same restriction site as the 3' end of the amplified promoter. The amplified promoter and the amplified targeting sequences are digested with the appropriate restriction enzymes and subsequently treated with calf intestinal phosphatase. The digested promoter and digested targeting sequences are added together in the presence of T4 DΝA ligase. The resulting mixture is maintained under conditions appropriate for ligation of the two fragments. The construct is size fractionated on an agarose gel then purified by phenol extraction and ethanol precipitation. In this Example, the polynucleotide constructs are administered as naked polynucleotides via electroporation. However, the polynucleotide constructs may also be administered with transfection-facilitating agents, such as liposomes, viral sequences, viral particles, precipitating agents, etc. Such methods of delivery are known in the art. Once the cells are transfected, homologous recombination will take place which results in the promoter being operably linked to the endogenous polynucleotide sequence. This results in the expression of polynucleotide corresponding to the polynucleotide in the cell. Expression may be detected by immunological staining, or any other method known in the art. Fibroblasts are obtained from a subject by skin biopsy. The resulting tissue is placed in DMEM + 10% fetal calf serum. Exponentially growing or early stationary phase fibroblasts are trypsinized and rinsed from the plastic surface with nutrient medium. An aliquot of the cell suspension is removed for counting, and the remaining cells are subjected to centrifugation. The supernatant is aspirated and the pellet is resuspended in 5 ml of electroporation buffer (20 mM HEPES pH 7.3, 137 mM NaCl, 5 mM KC1, 0.7 mM Na 2 HPO 4 , 6 mM dextrose). The cells are recentrifuged, the supernatant aspirated, and the cells resuspended in electroporation buffer containing 1 mg/ml acetylated bovine serum albumin. The final cell suspension contains approximately 3X10 cells/ml. Electroporation should be performed immediately following resuspension. Plasmid DNA is prepared according to standard techniques. For example, to construct a plasmid for targeting to the locus corresponding to the polynucleotide of the invention, plasmid pUC 18 (MBI Fermentas, Amherst, NY) is digested with Hindlll. The CMV promoter is amplified by PCR with an Xbal site on the 5' end and a BamHI site on the 3'end. Two non-coding sequences are amplified via PCR: one non-coding sequence (fragment 1) is amplified with a Hindlll site at the 5' end and an Xba site at the 3'end; the other non-coding sequence (fragment 2) is amplified with a BamHI site at the 5'end and a Hindlll site at the 3'end. The CMV promoter and the fragments (1 and 2) are digested with the appropriate enzymes (CMV promoter - Xbal and BamHI; fragment 1 - Xbal; fragment 2 - BamHI) and ligated together. The resulting ligation product is digested with Hindlll, and ligated with the Hindlll-digested pUC18 plasmid. Plasmid DNA is added to a sterile cuvette with a 0.4 cm electrode gap (Bio-Rad). The final DNA concentration is generally at least 120 μg/ml. 0.5 ml of the cell suspension (containing approximately 1.5.X10 6 cells) is then added to the cuvette, and the cell suspension and DNA solutions are gently mixed. Electroporation is performed with a Gene-Pulser apparatus (Bio-Rad). Capacitance and voltage are set at 960 μF and 250-300 V, respectively. As voltage increases, cell survival decreases, but the percentage of surviving cells that stably incoφorate the introduced DNA into their genome increases dramatically. Given these parameters, a pulse time of approximately 14-20 mSec should be observed. Electroporated cells are maintained at room temperature for approximately 5 min, and the contents of the cuvette are then gently removed with a sterile transfer pipette. The cells are added directly to 10 ml of prewarmed nutrient media (DMEM with 15% calf serum) in a 10 cm dish and incubated at 37 degree C. The following day, the media is aspirated and replaced with 10 ml of fresh media and incubated for a further 16-24 hours. The engineered fibroblasts are then injected into the host, either alone or after having been grown to confluence on cytodex 3 microcarrier beads. The fibroblasts now produce the protein product. The fibroblasts can then be introduced into a patient as described above. Example 18: Method of Treatment Using Gene Therapy - In Vivo Another aspect of the present invention is using in vivo gene therapy methods to treat disorders, diseases and conditions. The gene therapy method relates to the introduction of naked nucleic acid (DNA, RNA, and antisense DNA or RNA) sequences into an animal to increase or decrease the expression of the polypeptide. The polynucleotide of the present invention may be operatively linked to a promoter or any other genetic elements necessary for the expression of the polypeptide by the target tissue. Such gene therapy and delivery techniques and methods are known in the art, see, for example, WO90/1 1092, WO98/1 1779; U.S. Patent NO. 5693622, 5705151, 5580859; Tabata et al., Cardiovasc. Res. 35(3):470-479 (1997); Chao et al., Pharmacol. Res. 35(6):517-522 (1997); Wolff, Neuromuscul. Disord. 7(5):314-318 (1997); Schwartz et al., Gene Ther. 3(5):405-41 1 (1996); Tsurumi et al., Circulation 94(12):3281-3290 (1996) (incoφorated herein by reference). The polynucleotide constructs may be delivered by any method that delivers injectable materials to the cells of an animal, such as, injection into the interstitial space of tissues (heart, muscle, skin, lung, liver, intestine and the like). The polynucleotide constructs can be delivered in a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid or aqueous carrier. The term "naked" polynucleotide, DNA or RNA, refers to sequences that are free from any delivery vehicle that acts to assist, promote, or facilitate entry into the cell, including viral sequences, viral particles, liposome formulations, lipofectin or precipitating agents and the like. However, the polynucleotides of the present invention may also be delivered in liposome formulations (such as those taught in Feigner P.L. et al. (1995) Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 772:126-139 and Abdallah B. et al. (1995) Biol. Cell 85(l): l-7) which can be prepared by methods well known to those skilled in the art. The polynucleotide vector constructs used in the gene therapy method are preferably constructs that will not integrate into the host genome nor will they contain sequences that allow for replication. Any strong promoter known to those skilled in the art can be used for driving the expression of DNA. Unlike other gene therapies techniques, one major advantage of introducing naked nucleic acid sequences into target cells is the transitory nature of the polynucleotide synthesis in the cells. Studies have shown that non-replicating DNA sequences can be introduced into cells to provide production of the desired polypeptide for periods of up to six months. The polynucleotide construct can be delivered to the interstitial space of tissues within the an animal, including of muscle, skin, brain, lung, liver, spleen, bone marrow, thymus, heart, lymph, blood, bone, cartilage, pancreas, kidney, gall bladder, stomach, intestine, testis, ovary, uterus, rectum, nervous system, eye, gland, and connective tissue. Interstitial space of the tissues comprises the intercellular fluid, mucopolysaccharide matrix among the reticular fibers of organ tissues, elastic fibers in the walls of vessels or chambers, collagen fibers of fibrous tissues, or that same matrix within connective tissue ensheathing muscle cells or in the lacunae of bone. It is similarly the space occupied by the plasma of the circulation and the lymph fluid of the lymphatic channels. Delivery to the interstitial space of muscle tissue is preferred for the reasons discussed below. They may be conveniently delivered by injection into the tissues comprising these cells. They are preferably delivered to and expressed in persistent, non-dividing cells which are differentiated, although delivery and expression may be achieved in non-differentiated or less completely differentiated cells, such as, for example, stem cells of blood or skin fibroblasts. In vivo muscle cells are particularly competent in their ability to take up and express polynucleotides. For the naked polynucleotide injection, an effective dosage amount of DNA or RNA will be in the range of from about 0.05 g/kg body weight to about 50 mg/kg body weight. Preferably the dosage will be from about 0.005 mg/kg to about 20 mg/kg and more preferably from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg. Of course, as the artisan of ordinary skill will appreciate, this dosage will vary according to the tissue site of injection. The appropriate and effective dosage of nucleic acid sequence can readily be determined by those of ordinary skill in the art and may depend on the condition being treated and the route of administration. The preferred route of administration is by the parenteral route of injection into the interstitial space of tissues. However, other parenteral routes may also be used, such as, inhalation of an aerosol formulation particularly for delivery to lungs or bronchial tissues, throat or mucous membranes of the nose. In addition, naked polynucleotide constructs can be delivered to arteries during angioplasty by the catheter used in the procedure. The dose response effects of injected polynucleotide in muscle in vivo is determined as follows. Suitable template DNA for production of mRNA coding for polypeptide of the present invention is prepared in accordance with a standard recombinant DNA methodology. The template DNA, which may be either circular or linear, is either used as naked DNA or complexed with liposomes. The quadriceps muscles of mice are then injected with various amounts of the template DNA. Five to six week old female and male Balb/C mice are anesthetized by intraperitoneal injection with 0.3 ml of 2.5% Avertin. A 1.5 cm incision is made on the anterior thigh, and the quadriceps muscle is directly visualized. The template DNA is injected in 0.1 ml of carrier in a 1 cc syringe through a 27 gauge needle over one minute, approximately 0.5 cm from the distal insertion site of the muscle into the knee and about 0.2 cm deep. A suture is placed over the injection site for future localization, and the skin is closed with stainless steel clips. After an appropriate incubation time (e.g., 7 days) muscle extracts are prepared by excising the entire quadriceps. Every fifth 15 um cross-section of the individual quadriceps muscles is histochemically stained for protein expression. A time course for protein expression may be done in a similar fashion except that quadriceps from different mice are harvested at different times. Persistence of DNA in muscle following injection may be determined by Southern blot analysis after preparing total cellular DNA and HIRT supematants from injected and control mice. The results of the above experimentation in mice can be use to extrapolate proper dosages and other treatment parameters in humans and other animals using naked DNA. Example 19: Transgenic Animals The polypeptides of the invention can also be expressed in transgenic animals. Animals of any species, including, but not limited to, mice, rats, rabbits, hamsters, guinea pigs, pigs, micro-pigs, goats, sheep, cows and non-human primates, e.g., baboons, monkeys, and chimpanzees may be used to generate transgenic animals. In a specific embodiment, techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art, are used to express polypeptides of the invention in humans, as part of a gene therapy protocol. Any technique known in the art may be used to introduce the transgene (i.e., polynucleotides of the invention) into animals to produce the founder lines of transgenic animals. Such techniques include, but are not limited to, pronuclear microinjection (Paterson et al., Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 40:691-698 (1994); Carver et al., Biotechnology (NY) 1 1 : 1263-1270 (1993); Wright et al., Biotechnology (NY) 9:830-834 (1991); and Hoppe et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191 (1989)); retrovirus mediated gene transfer into germ lines (Van der Putten et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA 82:6148-6152 (1985)), blastocysts or embryos gene targeting in embryonic stem cells (Thompson et al., Cell 56:313-321 (1989)) electroporation of cells or embryos (Lo, 1983, Mol Cell. Biol. 3: 1803- 1814 (1983)) introduction of the polynucleotides of the invention using a gene gun (see, e.g., Ulmer et al, Science 259: 1745 ( 1993); introducing nucleic acid constructs into embryonic pleuripotent stem cells and transferring the stem cells back into the blastocyst; and sperm-mediated gene transfer (Lavitrano et al., Cell 57:717-723 (1989); etc. For a review of such techniques, see Gordon, "Transgenic Animals," Intl. Rev. Cytol. 1 15: 171-229 (1989), which is incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety. Any technique known in the art may be used to produce transgenic clones containing polynucleotides of the invention, for example, nuclear transfer into enucleated oocytes of nuclei from cultured embryonic, fetal, or adult cells induced to quiescence (Campell et al., Nature 380:64-66 (1996); Wilmut et al., Nature 385:810-813 (1997)). The present invention provides for transgenic animals that carry the transgene in all their cells, as well as animals which carry the transgene in some, but not all their cells, i.e., mosaic animals or chimeric. The transgene may be integrated as a single transgene or as multiple copies such as in concatamers, e.g., head-to-head tandems or head-to-tail tandems. The transgene may also be selectively introduced into and activated in a particular cell type by following, for example, the teaching of Lasko et al. (Lasko et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:6232-6236 (1992)). The regulatory sequences required for such a cell-type specific activation will depend upon the particular cell type of interest, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art. When it is desired that the polynucleotide transgene be integrated into the chromosomal site of the endogenous gene, gene targeting is preferred. Briefly, when such a technique is to be utilized, vectors containing some nucleotide sequences homologous to the endogenous gene are designed for the purpose of integrating, via homologous recombination with chromosomal sequences, into and disrupting the function of the nucleotide sequence of the endogenous gene. The transgene may also be selectively introduced into a particular cell type, thus inactivating the endogenous gene in only that cell type, by following, for example, the teaching of Gu et al. (Gu et al., Science 265: 103-106 (1994)). The regulatory sequences required for such a cell-type specific inactivation will depend upon the particular cell type of interest, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art. Once transgenic animals have been generated, the expression of the recombinant gene may be assayed utilizing standard techniques. Initial screening may be accomplished by Southern blot analysis or PCR techniques to analyze animal tissues to verify that integration of the transgene has taken place. The level of mRNA expression of the transgene in the tissues of the transgenic animals may also be assessed using techniques which include, but are not limited to, Northern blot analysis of tissue samples obtained from the animal, in situ hybridization analysis, and reverse transcriptase-PCR (rt-PCR). Samples of transgenic gene- expressing tissue may also be evaluated immunocytochemically or immunohistochemically using antibodies specific for the transgene product. Once the founder animals are produced, they may be bred, inbred, outbred, or crossbred to produce colonies of the particular animal. Examples of such breeding strategies include, but are not limited to: outbreeding of founder animals with more than one integration site in order to establish separate lines; inbreeding of separate lines in order to produce compound transgenics that express the transgene at higher levels because of the effects of additive expression of each transgene; crossing of heterozygous transgenic animals to produce animals homozygous for a given integration site in order to both augment expression and eliminate the need for screening of animals by DNA analysis; crossing of separate homozygous lines to produce compound heterozygous or homozygous lines; and breeding to place the transgene on a distinct background that is appropriate for an experimental model of interest. Transgenic animals of the invention have uses which include, but are not limited to, animal model systems useful in elaborating the biological function of polypeptides of the present invention, studying conditions and/or disorders associated with aberrant expression, and in screening for compounds effective in ameliorating such conditions and/or disorders. Example 20: Knock-Out Animals Endogenous gene expression can also be reduced by inactivating or "knocking out" the gene and/or its promoter using targeted homologous recombination. (E.g., see Smithies et al., Nature 317:230-234 (1985); Thomas & Capecchi, Cell 51 :503-512 (1987); Thompson et al., Cell 5:313-321 (1989); each of which is incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety). For example, a mutant, non-functional polynucleotide of the invention (or a completely unrelated DNA sequence) flanked by DNA homologous to the endogenous polynucleotide sequence (either the coding regions or regulatory regions of the gene) can be used, with or without a selectable marker and/or a negative selectable marker, to transfect cells that express polypeptides of the invention in vivo. In another embodiment, techniques known in the art are used to generate knockouts in cells that contain, but do not express the gene of interest. Insertion of the DNA construct, via targeted homologous recombination, results in inactivation of the targeted gene. Such approaches are particularly suited in research and agricultural fields where modifications to embryonic stem cells can be used to generate animal offspring with an inactive targeted gene (e.g., see Thomas & Capecchi 1987 and Thompson 1989, supra). However this approach can be routinely adapted for use in humans provided the recombinant DNA constructs are directly administered or targeted to the required site in vivo using appropriate viral vectors that will be apparent to those of skill in the art. In further embodiments of the invention, cells that are genetically engineered to express the polypeptides of the invention, or alternatively, that are genetically engineered not to express the polypeptides of the invention (e.g., knockouts) are administered to a patient in vivo. Such cells may be obtained from the patient (i.e., animal, including human) or an MHC compatible donor and can include, but are not limited to fibroblasts, bone marrow cells, blood cells (e.g., lymphocytes), adipocytes, muscle cells, endothelial cells etc. The cells are genetically engineered in vitro using recombinant DNA techniques to introduce the coding sequence of polypeptides of the invention into the cells, or alternatively, to disrupt the coding sequence and/or endogenous regulatory sequence associated with the polypeptides of the invention, e.g., by transduction (using viral vectors, and preferably vectors that integrate the transgene into the cell genome) or transfection procedures, including, but not limited to, the use of plasmids, cosmids, YACs, naked DNA, electroporation, liposomes, etc. The coding sequence of the polypeptides of the invention can be placed under the control of a strong constitutive or inducible promoter or promoter/enhancer to achieve expression, and preferably secretion, of the polypeptides of the invention. The engineered cells which express and preferably secrete the polypeptides of the invention can be introduced into the patient systemically, e.g., in the circulation, or intraperitoneally. Alternatively, the cells can be incoφorated into a matrix and implanted in the body, e.g.. genetically engineered fibroblasts can be implanted as part of a skin graft; genetically engineered endothelial cells can be implanted as part of a lymphatic or vascular graft. (See, for example, Anderson et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,399,349; and Mulligan & Wilson, U.S. Patent No. 5,460,959 each of which is incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety). When the cells to be administered are non-autologous or non-MHC compatible cells, they can be administered using well known techniques which prevent the development of a host immune response against the introduced cells. For example, the cells may be introduced in an encapsulated form which, while allowing for an exchange of components with the immediate extracellular environment, does not allow the introduced cells to be recognized by the host immune system. Transgenic and "knock-out" animals of the invention have uses which include, but are not limited to, animal model systems useful in elaborating the biological function of polypeptides of the present invention, studying conditions and/or disorders associated with aberrant expression, and in screening for compounds effective in ameliorating such conditions and/or disorders. Example 22: Assays Detecting Stimulation or Inhibition of B cell Proliferation and Differentiation Generation of functional humoral immune responses requires both soluble and cognate signaling between B-lineage cells and their microenvironment. Signals may impart a positive stimulus that allows a B-lineage cell to continue its programmed development, or a negative stimulus that instructs the cell to arrest its current developmental pathway. To date, numerous stimulatory and inhibitory signals have been found to influence B cell responsiveness including IL-2, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL10, IL-13, IL-14 and IL-15. Interestingly, these signals are by themselves weak effectors but can, in combination with various co-stimulatory proteins, induce activation, proliferation, differentiation, homing, tolerance and death among B cell populations. One of the best studied classes of B-cell co-stimulatory proteins is the TNF- superfamily. Within this family CD40, CD27, and CD30 along with their respective ligands CD 154, CD70, and CD 153 have been found to regulate a variety of immune responses. Assays which allow for the detection and/or observation of the proliferation and differentiation of these B-cell populations and their precursors are valuable tools in determining the effects various proteins may have on these B-cell populations in terms of proliferation and differentiation. Listed below are two assays designed to allow for the detection of the differentiation, proliferation, or inhibition of B-cell populations and their precursors. In Vitro Assay- Agonists or antagonists of the invention can be assessed for its ability to induce activation, proliferation, differentiation or inhibition and/or death in B-cell populations and their precursors. The activity of the agonists or antagonists of the invention on purified human tonsillar B cells, measured qualitatively over the dose range from 0.1 to 10,000 ng/mL, is assessed in a standard B-lymphocyte co-stimulation assay in which purified tonsillar B cells are cultured in the presence of either formalin-fixed Staphylococcus aureus Cowan I (SAC) or immobilized anti-human IgM antibody as the priming agent. Second signals such as IL-2 and IL-15 synergize with SAC and IgM crosslinking to elicit B cell proliferation as measured by tritiated-thymidine incoφoration. Novel synergizing agents can be readily identified using this assay. The assay involves isolating human tonsillar B cells by magnetic bead (MACS) depletion of CD3-positive cells. The resulting cell population is greater than 95% B cells as assessed by expression of CD45R(B220). Various dilutions of each sample are placed into individual wells of a 96-well plate to which are added 10 5 B-cells suspended in culture medium (RPMI 1640 containing 10% FBS, 5 X 10 "5 M 2ME, lOOU/ml penicillin, lOug/ml streptomycin, and 10 "5 dilution of SAC) in a total volume of 150ul. Proliferation or inhibition is quantitated by a 20h pulse (luCi/well) with 3H-thymidine (6.7 Ci/mM) beginning 72h post factor addition. The positive and negative controls are IL2 and medium respectively. In Vivo Assay- BALB/c mice are injected (i.p.) twice per day with buffer only, or 2 mg/Kg of agonists or antagonists of the invention, or truncated forms thereof. Mice receive this treatment for 4 consecutive days, at which time they are sacrificed and various tissues and serum collected for analyses. Comparison of H&E sections from normal spleens and spleens treated with agonists or antagonists of the invention identify the results of the activity of the agonists or antagonists on spleen cells, such as the diffusion of peri-arterial lymphatic sheaths, and/or significant increases in the nucleated cellularity of the red pulp regions, which may indicate the activation of the differentiation and proliferation of B-cell populations. Immunohistochemical studies using a B cell marker, anti-CD45R(B220), are used to determine whether any physiological changes to splenic cells, such as splenic disorganization, are due to increased B-cell representation within loosely defined B-cell zones that infiltrate established T-cell regions. Flow cytometric analyses of the spleens from mice treated with agonist or antagonist is used to indicate whether the agonists or antagonists specifically increases the proportion of ThB+, CD45R(B220)dull B cells over that which is observed in control mice. Likewise, a predicted consequence of increased mature B-cell representation in vivo is a relative increase in serum Ig titers. Accordingly, serum IgM and IgA levels are compared between buffer and agonists or antagonists-treated mice. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 23: T Cell Proliferation Assay A CD3-induced proliferation assay is performed on PBMCs and is measured by the uptake of 3 H-thymidine. The assay is performed as follows. Ninety-six well plates are coated with 100 μl/well of mAb to CD3 (HIT3a, Pharmingen) or isotype-matched control mAb (B33.1) overnight at 4 degrees C (1 μg/ml in .05M bicarbonate buffer, pH 9.5), then washed three times with PBS. PBMC are isolated by F/H gradient centrifugation from human peripheral blood and added to quadruplicate wells (5 x 10 /well) of mAb coated plates in RPMI containing 10% FCS and P/S in the presence of varying concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention (total volume 200 ul). Relevant protein buffer and medium alone are controls. After 48 hr. culture at 37 degrees C, plates are spun for 2 min. at 1000 φtn and 100 μl of supernatant is removed and stored -20 degrees C for measurement of IL-2 (or other cytokines) if effect on proliferation is observed. Wells are supplemented with 100 ul of medium containing 0 5 uCi of H- thymidine and cultured at 37 degrees C for 18-24 hr Wells are harvested and incoφoration of 3 H-thymιdιne used as a measure of proliferation Antι-CD3 alone is the positive control for proliferation IL-2 ( 100 U/ml) is also used as a control which enhances proliferation Control antibody which does not induce proliferation of T cells is used as the negative controls for the effects of agonists or antagonists of the invention The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g , gene therapy). Example 24 Effect of Agonists or Antagonists of the Invention on the Expression of MHC Class II, Costimulatory and Adhesion Molecules and Cell Differentiation of Monocytes and Monocyte-Dertved Human Dendritic Cells Dendritic cells are generated by the expansion of proliferating precursors found in the peripheral blood- adherent PBMC or elutriated monocytic fractions are cultured for 7-10 days with GM-CSF (50 ng/ml) and IL-4 (20 ng/ml). These dendritic cells have the characteristic phenotype of immature cells (expression of CD1, CD80, CD86, CD40 and MHC class II antigens). Treatment with activating factors, such as TNF-α, causes a rapid change in surface phenotype (increased expression of MHC class I and II, costimulatory and adhesion molecules, downregulation of FCγRII, upregulation of CD83). These changes correlate with increased antigen-presenting capacity and with functional maturation of the dendritic cells. FACS analysis of surface antigens is performed as follows. Cells are treated 1-3 days with increasing concentrations of agonist or antagonist of the invention or LPS (positive control), washed with PBS containing 1% BSA and 0.02 mM sodium azide, and then incubated with 1 20 dilution of appropriate FITC- or PE-labeled monoclonal antibodies for 30 minutes at 4 degrees C. After an additional wash, the labeled cells are analyzed by flow cytometry on a FACScan (Becton Dickinson). Effect on the production of cvtokines Cytokines generated by dendπtic cells, in particular IL-12, are important in the initiation of T-cell dependent immune responses. IL-12 strongly influences the development of Thl helper T-cell immune response, and induces cytotoxic T and NK cell function. An ELISA is used to measure the IL- 12 release as follows. Dendritic cells (10 6 /ml) are treated with increasing concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention for 24 hours. LPS (100 ng/ml) is added to the cell culture as positive control. Supematants from the cell cultures are then collected and analyzed for IL-12 content using commercial ELISA kit (e..g, R & D Systems (Minneapolis, MN)). The standard protocols provided with the kits are used. Effect on the expression of MHC Class II. costimulatory and adhesion molecules. Three major families of cell surface antigens can be identified on monocytes: adhesion molecules, molecules involved in antigen presentation, and Fc receptor. Modulation of the expression of MHC class II antigens and other costimulatory molecules, such as B7 and ICAM-1, may result in changes in the antigen presenting capacity of monocytes and ability to induce T cell activation. Increase expression of Fc receptors may correlate with improved monocyte cytotoxic activity, cytokine release and phagocytosis. FACS analysis is used to examine the surface antigens as follows. Monocytes are treated 1-5 days with increasing concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention or LPS (positive control), washed with PBS containing 1% BSA and 0.02 mM sodium azide, and then incubated with 1 :20 dilution of appropriate FITC- or PE-labeled monoclonal antibodies for 30 minutes at 4 degreesC. After an additional wash, the labeled cells are analyzed by flow cytometry on a FACScan (Becton Dickinson). Monocyte activation and/or increased survival. Assays for molecules that activate (or alternatively, inactivate) monocytes and/or increase monocyte survival (or alternatively, decrease monocyte survival) are known in the art and may routinely be applied to determine whether a molecule of the invention functions as an inhibitor or activator of monocytes. Agonists or antagonists of the invention can be screened using the three assays described below. For each of these assays, Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) are purified from single donor leukopacks (American Red Cross, Baltimore, MD) by centrifugation through a Histopaque gradient (Sigma). Monocytes are isolated from PBMC by counterflow centrifugal elutriation. Monocyte Survival Assay. Human peripheral blood monocytes progressively lose viability when cultured in absence of serum or other stimuli. Their death results from internally regulated process (apoptosis). Addition to the culture of activating factors, such as TNF-alpha dramatically improves cell survival and prevents DNA fragmentation. Propidium iodide (PI) staining is used to measure apoptosis as follows. Monocytes are cultured for 48 hours in polypropylene tubes in serum-free medium (positive control), in the presence of 100 ng/ml TNF-alpha (negative control), and in the presence of varying concentrations of the compound to be tested. Cells are suspended at a concentration of 2 x 10 6 /ml in PBS containing PI at a final concentration of 5 μg/ml, and then incubaed at room temperature for 5 minutes before FACScan analysis. PI uptake has been demonstrated to correlate with DNA fragmentation in this experimental paradigm. Effect on cytokine release. An important function of monocytes/macrophages is their regulatory activity on other cellular populations of the immune system through the release of cytokines after stimulation. An ELISA to measure cytokine release is performed as follows. Human monocytes are incubated at a density of 5x l0 5 cells/ml with increasing concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention and under the same conditions, but in the absence of agonists or antagonists. For IL-12 production, the cells are primed overnight with IFN (100 U/ml) in presence of agonist or antagonist of the invention. LPS (10 ng/ml) is then added. Conditioned media are collected after 24h and kept frozen until use. Measurement of TNF-alpha, IL-10, MCP-1 and IL-8 is then performed using a commercially available ELISA kit (e. g, R & D Systems (Minneapolis, MN)) and applying the standard protocols provided with the kit. Oxidative burst. Purified monocytes are plated in 96-w plate at 2-lxl0 5 cell/well. Increasing concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention are added to the wells in a total volume of 0.2 ml culture medium (RPMI 1640 + 10% FCS, glutamine and antibiotics). After 3 days incubation, the plates are centrifuged and the medium is removed from the wells. To the macrophage monolayers, 0.2 ml per well of phenol red solution (140 mM NaCl, 10 mM potassium phosphate buffer pH 7.0, 5.5 mM dextrose, 0.56 mM phenol red and 19 U/ml of HRPO) is added, together with the stimulant (200 nM PMA). The plates are incubated at 37°C for 2 hours and the reaction is stopped by adding 20 μl IN NaOH per well. The absorbance is read at 610 nm. To calculate the amount of H?O 2 produced by the macrophages, a standard curve of a H 2 O 2 solution of known molarity is performed for each experiment. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 25: Biological Effects of Agonists or Antagonists of the Invention Astrocyte and Neuronal Assays. Agonists or antagonists of the invention, expressed in Escherichia coli and purified as described above, can be tested for activity in promoting the survival, neurite outgrowth, or phenotypic differentiation of cortical neuronal cells and for inducing the proliferation of glial fibrillary acidic protein immunopositive cells, astrocytes. The selection of cortical cells for the bioassay is based on the prevalent expression of FGF-1 and FGF-2 in cortical structures and on the previously reported enhancement of cortical neuronal survival resulting from FGF-2 treatment. A thymidine incoφoration assay, for example, can be used to elucidate an agonist or antagonist of the invention's activity on these cells. Moreover, previous reports describing the biological effects of FGF-2 (basic FGF) on cortical or hippocampal neurons in vitro have demonstrated increases in both neuron survival and neurite outgrowth (Walicke et al., "Fibroblast growth factor promotes survival of dissociated hippocampal neurons and enhances neurite extension." Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 53:3012-3016. (1986), assay herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). However, reports from experiments done on PC- 12 cells suggest that these two responses are not necessarily synonymous and may depend on not only which FGF is being tested but also on which receptor(s) are expressed on the target cells. Using the primary cortical neuronal culture paradigm, the ability of an agonist or antagonist of the invention to induce neurite outgrowth can be compared to the response achieved with FGF-2 using, for example, a thymidine incoφoration assay. Fibroblast and endothelial cell assays. Human lung fibroblasts are obtained from Clonetics (San Diego, CA) and maintained in growth media from Clonetics. Dermal microvascular endothelial cells are obtained from Cell Applications (San Diego, CA). For proliferation assays, the human lung fibroblasts and dermal microvascular endothelial cells can be cultured at 5,000 cells/well in a 96-well plate for one day in growth medium. The cells are then incubated for one day in 0.1% BSA basal medium. After replacing the medium with fresh 0.1% BSA medium, the cells are incubated with the test proteins for 3 days. Alamar Blue (Alamar Biosciences, Sacramento, CA) is added to each well to a final concentration of 10%. The cells are incubated for 4 hr. Cell viability is measured by reading in a CytoFluor fluorescence reader. For the PGE assays, the human lung fibroblasts are cultured at 5,000 cells/well in a 96-well plate for one day. After a medium change to 0.1% BSA basal medium, the cells are incubated with FGF-2 or agonists or antagonists of the invention with or without IL-lα for 24 hours. The supematants are collected and assayed for PGE 2 by EIA kit (Cayman, Ann Arbor, MI). For the IL-6 assays, the human lung fibroblasts are cultured at 5,000 cells/well in a 96-well plate for one day. After a medium change to 0.1% BSA basal medium, the cells are incubated with FGF-2 or with or without agonists or antagonists of the invention IL-lα for 24 hours. The supematants are collected and assayed for IL-6 by ELISA kit (Endogen, Cambridge, MA). Human lung fibroblasts are cultured with FGF-2 or agonists or antagonists of the invention for 3 days in basal medium before the addition of Alamar Blue to assess effects on growth of the fibroblasts. FGF-2 should show a stimulation at 10 - 2500 ng/ml which can be used to compare stimulation with agonists or antagonists of the invention. Parkinson Models. The loss of motor function in Parkinson's disease is attributed to a deficiency of striatal dopamine resulting from the degeneration of the nigrostriatal dopaminergic projection neurons. An animal model for Parkinson's that has been extensively characterized involves the systemic administration of l -methyl-4 phenyl 1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine (MPTP). In the CNS, MPTP is taken-up by astrocytes and catabolized by monoamine oxidase B to 1-methyl- 4-phenyl pyridine (MPP + ) and released. Subsequently, MPP 1 is actively accumulated in dopaminergic neurons by the high-affinity reuptake transporter for dopamine. MPP + is then concentrated in mitochondria by the electrochemical gradient and selectively inhibits nicotidamide adenine disphosphate: ubiquinone oxidoreductionase (complex I), thereby interfering with electron transport and eventually generating oxygen radicals. It has been demonstrated in tissue culture paradigms that FGF-2 (basic FGF) has trophic activity towards nigral dopaminergic neurons (Ferrari et al., Dev. Biol. 1989). Recently, Dr. Unsicker's group has demonstrated that administering FGF-2 in gel foam implants in the striatum results in the near complete protection of nigral dopaminergic neurons from the toxicity associated with MPTP exposure (Otto and Unsicker, J. Neuroscience, 1990). Based on the data with FGF-2, agonists or antagonists of the invention can be evaluated to determine whether it has an action similar to that of FGF-2 in enhancing dopaminergic neuronal survival in vitro and it can also be tested in vivo for protection of dopaminergic neurons in the striatum from the damage associated with MPTP treatment. The potential effect of an agonist or antagonist of the invention is first examined in vitro in a dopaminergic neuronal cell culture paradigm. The cultures are prepared by dissecting the midbrain floor plate from gestation day 14 Wistar rat embryos. The tissue is dissociated with trypsin and seeded at a density of 200,000 cells/cm on polyorthinine-laminin coated glass coverslips. The cells are maintained in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's medium and F12 medium containing hormonal supplements (N l ). The cultures are fixed with paraformaldehyde after 8 days in vitro and are processed for tyrosine hydroxylase, a specific marker for dopminergic neurons, immunohistochemical staining. Dissociated cell cultures are prepared from embryonic rats. The culture medium is changed every third day and the factors are also added at that time. Since the dopaminergic neurons are isolated from animals at gestation day 14, a developmental time which is past the stage when the dopaminergic precursor cells are proliferating, an increase in the number of tyrosine hydroxylase immunopositive neurons would represent an increase in the number of dopaminergic neurons surviving in vitro. Therefore, if an agonist or antagonist of the invention acts to prolong the survival of dopaminergic neurons, it would suggest that the agonist or antagonist may be involved in Parkinson's Disease. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 26: The Effect of Agonists or Antagonists of the Invention on the Growth of Vascular Endothelial Cells On day 1, human umbilical vein endothelial cells (HUVEC) are seeded at 2-5x10 4 cells/35 mm dish density in M l 99 medium containing 4% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 16 units/ml heparin, and 50 units/ml endothelial cell growth supplements (ECGS, Biotechnique, Inc.). On day 2, the medium is replaced with Ml 99 containing 10% FBS, 8 units/ml heparin. An agonist or antagonist of the invention, and positive controls, such as VEGF and basic FGF (bFGF) are added, at varying concentrations. On days 4 and 6, the medium is replaced. On day 8, cell number is determined with a Coulter Counter. An increase in the number of HUVEC cells indicates that the compound of the invention may proliferate vascular endothelial cells, while a decrease in the number of HUVEC cell indicates that the compound of the invention inhibits vascular endothelial cells. The studies described in this example tested activity of a polypeptide of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), agonists, and/or antagonists of the invention. Example 27: Rat Corneal Wound Healing Model This animal model shows the effect of an agonist or antagonist of the invention on neovascularization. The experimental protocol includes: a) Making a 1-1.5 mm long incision from the center of cornea into the stromal layer. b) Inserting a spatula below the lip of the incision facing the outer comer of the eye. c) Making a pocket (its base is 1-1.5 mm form the edge of the eye). d) Positioning a pellet, containing 50ng- 5ug of an agonist or antagonist of the invention, within the pocket. e) Treatment with an agonist or antagonist of the invention can also be applied topically to the corneal wounds in a dosage range of 20mg - 500mg (daily treatment for five days). The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 28: Diabetic Mouse and Glucocorticoid-Impaired Wound Healing Models A. Diabetic db+/db+ Mouse Model To demonstrate that an agonist or antagonist of the invention accelerates the healing process, the genetically diabetic mouse model of wound healing is used. The full thickness wound healing model in the db+/db+ mouse is a well characterized, clinically relevant and reproducible model of impaired wound healing. Healing of the diabetic wound is dependent on formation of granulation tissue and re-epithelialization rather than contraction (Gartner, M.H. et al, J. Surg Res. 52:389 (1992); Greenhalgh, D.G. et al, Am. J. Pathol 136A235 (1990)). The diabetic animals have many of the characteristic features observed in Type II diabetes mellitus. Homozygous (db+/db+) mice are obese in comparison to their normal heterozygous (db+/+m) littermates. Mutant diabetic (db+/db+) mice have a single autosomal recessive mutation on chromosome 4 (db+) (Coleman et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:283-293 (1982)). Animals show polyphagia, polydipsia and polyuria. Mutant diabetic mice (db+/db+) have elevated blood glucose, increased or normal insulin levels, and suppressed cell-mediated immunity (Mandel et al, J. Immunol. 120: 1315 (1978); Debray- Sachs, M. et al, Clin. Exp. Immunol 51(1): \-1 (1983); Leiter et al, Am. J. of Pathol. 114:46- 55 (1985)). Peripheral neuropathy, myocardial complications, and microvascular lesions, basement membrane thickening and glomerular filtration abnormalities have been described in these animals (Norido, F. et al, Exp. Neurol. 83(2):22 l-232 (1984); Robertson et al, Diabetes 29(1):60-61 (1980); Giacomelli et al, Lab Invest. 40(4):460-413 (1979); Coleman, D.L., Diabetes 31 (Suppl): \-6 (1982)). These homozygous diabetic mice develop hyperglycemia that is resistant to insulin analogous to human type II diabetes (Mandel et al, J. Immunol. 120: 1315-1311 (1978)). The characteristics observed in these animals suggests that healing in this model may be similar to the healing observed in human diabetes (Greenhalgh, et al, Am. J. of Pathol. 736: 1235-1246 ( 1990)). Genetically diabetic female C57BL/KsJ (db+/db+) mice and their non-diabetic (db+/+m) heterozygous littermates are used in this study (Jackson Laboratories). The animals are purchased at 6 weeks of age and are 8 weeks old at the beginning of the study. Animals are individually housed and received food and water ad libitum. All manipulations are performed using aseptic techniques. The experiments are conducted according to the rules and guidelines of Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Institutional Animal Care and Use Committee and the Guidelines for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals. Wounding protocol is performed according to previously reported methods (Tsuboi, R. and Rifkin, D.B., J. Exp. Med. 172:245-251 (1990)). Briefly, on the day of wounding, animals are anesthetized with an intraperitoneal injection of Avertin (0.01 mg/mL), 2,2,2- tribromoethanol and 2-methyl-2-butanol dissolved in deionized water. The dorsal region of the animal is shaved and the skin washed with 70% ethanol solution and iodine. The surgical area is dried with sterile gauze prior to wounding. An 8 mm full-thickness wound is then created using a Keyes tissue punch. Immediately following wounding, the surrounding skin is gently stretched to eliminate wound expansion. The wounds are left open for the duration of the experiment. Application of the treatment is given topically for 5 consecutive days commencing on the day of wounding. Prior to treatment, wounds are gently cleansed with sterile saline and gauze sponges. Wounds are visually examined and photographed at a fixed distance at the day of surgery and at two day intervals thereafter. Wound closure is determined by daily measurement on days 1-5 and on day 8. Wounds are measured horizontally and vertically using a calibrated Jameson caliper. Wounds are considered healed if granulation tissue is no longer visible and the wound is covered by a continuous epithelium. An agonist or antagonist of the invention is administered using at a range different doses, from 4mg to 500mg per wound per day for 8 days in vehicle. Vehicle control groups received 50mL of vehicle solution. Animals are euthanized on day 8 with an intraperitoneal injection of sodium pentobarbital (300mg/kg). The wounds and surrounding skin are then harvested for histology and immunohistochemistry. Tissue specimens are placed in 10% neutral buffered formalin in tissue cassettes between biopsy sponges for further processing. Three groups of 10 animals each (5 diabetic and 5 non-diabetic controls) are evaluated: 1) Vehicle placebo control, 2) untreated group, and 3) treated group. Wound closure is analyzed by measuring the area in the vertical and horizontal axis and obtaining the total square area of the wound. Contraction is then estimated by establishing the differences between the initial wound area (day 0) and that of post treatment (day 8). The wound area on day 1 is 64mm " , the corresponding size of the dermal punch. Calculations are made using the following formula: [Open area on day 8] - [Open area on day 1] / [Open area on day 1] Specimens are fixed in 10% buffered formalin and paraffin embedded blocks are sectioned peφendicular to the wound surface (5mm) and cut using a Reichert-Jung microtome. Routine hematoxylin-eosin (H&E) staining is performed on cross-sections of bisected wounds. Histologic examination of the wounds are used to assess whether the healing process and the moφhologic appearance of the repaired skin is altered by treatment with an agonist or antagonist of the invention. This assessment included verification of the presence of cell accumulation, inflammatory cells, capillaries, fibroblasts, re-epithelialization and epidermal maturity (Greenhalgh, D.G. et al, Am. J. Pathol. 136:1235 (1990)). A calibrated lens micrometer is used by a blinded observer. Tissue sections are also stained immunohistochemically with a polyclonal rabbit anti- human keratin antibody using ABC Elite detection system. Human skin is used as a positive tissue control while non-immune IgG is used as a negative control. Keratinocyte growth is determined by evaluating the extent of reepithelialization of the wound using a calibrated lens micrometer. Proliferating cell nuclear antigen/cyclin (PCNA) in skin specimens is demonstrated by using anti-PCNA antibody ( 1 :50) with an ABC Elite detection system. Human colon cancer served as a positive tissue control and human brain tissue is used as a negative tissue control. Each specimen included a section with omission of the primary antibody and substitution with non-immune mouse IgG. Ranking of these sections is based on the extent of proliferation on a scale of 0-8, the lower side of the scale reflecting slight proliferation to the higher side reflecting intense proliferation. Experimental data are analyzed using an unpaired t test. A p value of < 0.05 is considered significant. R. Steroid Impaired Rat Model The inhibition of wound healing by steroids has been well documented in various in vitro and in vivo systems (Wahl, Glucocorticoids and Wound healing. In: Anti-Inflammatory Steroid Action: Basic and Clinical Aspects. 280-302 (1989); Wahlet al, J. Immunol. 115: 476-481 (1975); Werb et al., J. Exp. Med. 747: 1684- 1694 (1978)). Glucocorticoids retard wound healing by inhibiting angiogenesis, decreasing vascular permeability (Ebert et al, An. Intern. Med. 37:701-705 (1952)), fibroblast proliferation, and collagen synthesis (Beck et al, Growth Factors. 5: 295-304 ( 1991); Haynes et al, J. Clin. Invest. 61: 703-797 (1978)) and producing a transient reduction of circulating monocytes (Haynes et al., J. Clin. Invest. 61: 703-797 ( 1978); Wahl, "Glucocorticoids and wound healing", In: Antiinflammatory Steroid Action: Basic and Clinical Aspects, Academic Press, New York, pp. 280-302 (1989)). The systemic administration of steroids to impaired wound healing is a well establish phenomenon in rats (Beck et al, Growth Factors. 5: 295-304 (1991); Haynes et al, J. Clin. Invest. 61: 703-797 (1978); Wahl, "Glucocorticoids and wound healing", In: Antiinflammatory Steroid Action: Basic and Clinical Aspects, Academic Press, New York, pp. 280-302 (1989); Pierce et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86: 2229-2233 (1989)). To demonstrate that an agonist or antagonist of the invention can accelerate the healing process, the effects of multiple topical applications of the agonist or antagonist on full thickness excisional skin wounds in rats in which healing has been impaired by the systemic administration of methylprednisolone is assessed. Young adult male Sprague Dawley rats weighing 250-300 g (Charles River Laboratories) are used in this example. The animals are purchased at 8 weeks of age and are 9 weeks old at the beginning of the study. The healing response of rats is impaired by the systemic administration of methylprednisolone (17mg/kg/rat intramuscularly) at the time of wounding. Animals are individually housed and received food and water ad libitum. All manipulations are performed using aseptic techniques. This study is conducted according to the rules and guidelines of Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Institutional Animal Care and Use Committee and the Guidelines for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals. The wounding protocol is followed according to section A, above. On the day of wounding, animals are anesthetized with an intramuscular injection of ketamine (50 mg/kg) and xylazine (5 mg/kg). The dorsal region of the animal is shaved and the skin washed with 70% ethanol and iodine solutions. The surgical area is dried with sterile gauze prior to wounding. An 8 mm full-thickness wound is created using a Keyes tissue punch. The wounds are left open for the duration of the experiment. Applications of the testing materials are given topically once a day for 7 consecutive days commencing on the day of wounding and subsequent to methylprednisolone administration. Prior to treatment, wounds are gently cleansed with sterile saline and gauze sponges. Wounds are visually examined and photographed at a fixed distance at the day of wounding and at the end of treatment. Wound closure is determined by daily measurement on days 1-5 and on day 8. Wounds are measured horizontally and vertically using a calibrated Jameson caliper. Wounds are considered healed if granulation tissue is no longer visible and the wound is covered by a continuous epithelium. The agonist or antagonist of the invention is administered using at a range different doses, from 4mg to 500mg per wound per day for 8 days in vehicle. Vehicle control groups received 50mL of vehicle solution. Animals are euthanized on day 8 with an intraperitoneal injection of sodium pentobarbital (300mg/kg). The wounds and surrounding skin are then harvested for histology. Tissue specimens are placed in 10% neutral buffered formalin in tissue cassettes between biopsy sponges for further processing. Four groups of 10 animals each (5 with methylprednisolone and 5 without glucocorticoid) are evaluated: 1) Untreated group 2) Vehicle placebo control 3) treated groups. Wound closure is analyzed by measuring the area in the vertical and horizontal axis and obtaining the total area of the wound. Closure is then estimated by establishing the differences between the initial wound area (day 0) and that of post treatment (day 8). The wound area on day 1 is 64mm " , the corresponding size of the dermal punch. Calculations are made using the following formula: [Open area on day 8] - [Open area on day 1 ] / [Open area on day 1 ] Specimens are fixed in 10% buffered formalin and paraffin embedded blocks are sectioned peφendicular to the wound surface (5mm) and cut using an Olympus microtome. Routine hematoxylin-eosin (H&E) staining is performed on cross-sections of bisected wounds. Histologic examination of the wounds allows assessment of whether the healing process and the moφhologic appearance of the repaired skin is improved by treatment with an agonist or antagonist of the invention. A calibrated lens micrometer is used by a blinded observer to determine the distance of the wound gap. Experimental data are analyzed using an unpaired t test. A p value of < 0.05 is considered significant. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 29: Lymphadema Animal Model The puφose of this experimental approach is to create an appropriate and consistent lymphedema model for testing the therapeutic effects of an agonist or antagonist of the invention in lymphangiogenesis and re-establishment of the lymphatic circulatory system in the rat hind limb. Effectiveness is measured by swelling volume of the affected limb, quantification of the amount of lymphatic vasculature, total blood plasma protein, and histopathology. Acute lymphedema is observed for 7-10 days. Perhaps more importantly, the chronic progress of the edema is followed for up to 3-4 weeks. Prior to beginning surgery, blood sample is drawn for protein concentration analysis. Male rats weighing approximately ~350g are dosed with Pentobarbital. Subsequently, the right legs are shaved from knee to hip. The shaved area is swabbed with gauze soaked in 70% EtOH. Blood is drawn for se m total protein testing. Circumference and volumetric measurements are made prior to injecting dye into paws after marking 2 measurement levels (0.5 cm above heel, at mid-pt of dorsal paw). The intradermal dorsum of both right and left paws are injected with 0.05 ml of 1 % Evan's Blue. Circumference and volumetric measurements are then made following injection of dye into paws. Using the knee joint as a landmark, a mid-leg inguinal incision is made circumferentially allowing the femoral vessels to be located. Forceps and hemostats are used to dissect and separate the skin flaps. After locating the femoral vessels, the lymphatic vessel that runs along side and underneath the vessel(s) is located. The main lymphatic vessels in this area are then electrically coagulated or suture ligated. Using a microscope, muscles in back of the leg (near the semitendinosis and adductors) are bluntly dissected. The popliteal lymph node is then located. The 2 proximal and 2 distal lymphatic vessels and distal blood supply of the popliteal node are then and ligated by suturing. The popliteal lymph node, and any accompanying adipose tissue, is then removed by cutting connective tissues. Care is taken to control any mild bleeding resulting from this procedure. After lymphatics are occluded, the skin flaps are sealed by using liquid skin (Vetbond) (AJ Buck). The separated skin edges are sealed to the underlying muscle tissue while leaving a gap of ~0.5 cm around the leg. Skin also may be anchored by suturing to underlying muscle when necessary. To avoid infection, animals are housed individually with mesh (no bedding). Recovering animals are checked daily through the optimal edematous peak, which typically occurred by day 5-7. The plateau edematous peak are then observed. To evaluate the intensity of the lymphedema, the circumference and volumes of 2 designated places on each paw before operation and daily for 7 days are measured. The effect plasma proteins on lymphedema is determined and whether protein analysis is a useful testing perimeter is also investigated. The weights of both control and edematous limbs are evaluated at 2 places. Analysis is performed in a blind manner. Circumference Measurements: Under brief gas anesthetic to prevent limb movement, a cloth tape is used to measure limb circumference. Measurements are done at the ankle bone and dorsal paw by 2 different people then those 2 readings are averaged. Readings are taken from both control and edematous limbs. Volumetric Measurements: On the day of surgery, animals are anesthetized with Pentobarbital and are tested prior to surgery. For daily volumetrics animals are under brief halothane anesthetic (rapid immobilization and quick recovery), both legs are shaved and equally marked using wateφroof marker on legs. Legs are first dipped in water, then dipped into instrument to each marked level then measured by Buxco edema software(Chen/Victor). Data is recorded by one person, while the other is dipping the limb to marked area. Blood-plasma protein measurements: Blood is drawn, spun, and semm separated prior to surgery and then at conclusion for total protein and Ca2+ comparison. Limb Weight Comparison: After drawing blood, the animal is prepared for tissue collection. The limbs are amputated using a quillitine, then both experimental and control legs are cut at the ligature and weighed. A second weighing is done as the tibio- cacaneal joint is disarticulated and the foot is weighed. Histological Preparations: The transverse muscle located behind the knee (popliteal) area is dissected and arranged in a metal mold, filled with freezeGel, dipped into cold methylbutane, placed into labeled sample bags at - 80EC until sectioning. Upon sectioning, the muscle is observed under fluorescent microscopy for lymphatics.. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 30: Suppression of TNF alpha-induced adhesion molecule expression by a Agonist or Antagonist of the Invention The recruitment of lymphocytes to areas of inflammation and angiogenesis involves specific receptor-ligand interactions between cell surface adhesion molecules (CAMs) on lymphocytes and the vascular endothelium. The adhesion process, in both normal and pathological settings, follows a multi-step cascade that involves intercellular adhesion molecule- 1 (ICAM-1), vascular cell adhesion molecule- 1 (VCAM-1), and endothelial leukocyte adhesion molecule- 1 (E-selectin) expression on endothelial cells (EC). The expression of these molecules and others on the vascular endothelium determines the efficiency with which leukocytes may adhere to the local vasculature and extravasate into the local tissue during the development of an inflammatory response. The local concentration of cytokines and growth factor participate in the modulation of the expression of these CAMs. Tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNF-a), a potent proinflammatory cytokine, is a stimulator of all three CAMs on endothelial cells and may be involved in a wide variety of inflammatory responses, often resulting in a pathological outcome. The potential of an agonist or antagonist of the invention to mediate a suppression of TNF-a induced CAM expression can be examined. A modified ELISA assay which uses ECs as a solid phase absorbent is employed to measure the amount of CAM expression on TNF-a treated ECs when co-stimulated with a member of the FGF family of proteins. To perform the experiment, human umbilical vein endothelial cell (HUVEC) cultures are obtained from pooled cord harvests and maintained in growth medium (EGM-2; Clonetics, San Diego, CA) supplemented with 10% FCS and 1% penicillin/streptomycin in a 37 degree C humidified incubator containing 5% CO2- HUVECs are seeded in 96-well plates at concentrations of 1 x 10^ cells/well in EGM medium at 37 degree C for 18-24 hrs or until confluent. The monolayers are subsequently washed 3 times with a serum-free solution of RPMI- 1640 supplemented with 100 U/ml penicillin and 100 mg/ml streptomycin, and treated with a given cytokine and/or growth factor(s) for 24 h at 37 degree C. Following incubation, the cells are then evaluated for CAM expression. Human Umbilical Vein Endothelial cells (HUVECs) are grown in a standard 96 well plate to confluence. Growth medium is removed from the cells and replaced with 90 ul of 199 Medium ( 10% FBS). Samples for testing and positive or negative controls are added to the plate in triplicate (in 10 ul volumes). Plates are incubated at 37 degree C for either 5 h (selectin and integrin expression) or 24 h (integrin expression only). Plates are aspirated to remove medium and 100 μl of 0.1% paraformaldehyde-PBS(with Ca++ and Mg++) is added to each well. Plates are held at 4°C for 30 min. Fixative is then removed from the wells and wells are washed IX with PBS(+Ca,Mg)+0.5% BSA and drained. Do not allow the wells to dry. Add 10 μl of diluted primary antibody to the test and control wells. Anti-ICAM-1-Biotin, Anti-VCAM-1-Biotin and Anti-E-selectin-Biotin are used at a concentration of 10 μg/ml (1 : 10 dilution of 0.1 mg/ml stock antibody). Cells are incubated at 37°C for 30 min. in a humidified environment. Wells are washed X3 with PBS(+Ca,Mg)+0.5% BSA. Then add 20 μl of diluted ExtrAvidin- Alkaline Phosphotase (1 :5,000 dilution) to each well and incubated at 37°C for 30 min. Wells are washed X3 with PBS(+Ca,Mg)+0.5% BSA. 1 tablet of p-Nitrophenol Phosphate pNPP is dissolved in 5 ml of glycine buffer (pH 10.4). 100 μl of pNPP substrate in glycine buffer is added to each test well. Standard wells in triplicate are prepared from the working dilution of the ExtrAvidin-Alkaline Phosphotase in glycine buffer: 1 :5,000 (10°) > 10 "0 5 > 10 "1 > 10 "1 5 . 5 μl of each dilution is added to triplicate wells and the resulting AP content in each well is 5.50 ng, 1.74 ng, 0.55 ng, 0.18 ng. 100 μl of pNNP reagent must then be added to each of the standard wells. The plate must be incubated at 37°C for 4h. A volume of 50 μl of 3M NaOH is added to all wells. The results are quantified on a plate reader at 405 nm. The background subtraction option is used on blank wells filled with glycine buffer only. The template is set up to indicate the concentration of AP-conjugate in each standard well [ 5.50 ng; 1.74 ng; 0.55 ng; 0.18 ng]. Results are indicated as amount of bound AP-conjugate in each sample. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 31 : Production Of Polypeptide of the Invention For High-Throughput Screening Assays The following protocol produces a supernatant containing polypeptide of the present invention to be tested. This supernatant can then be used in the Screening Assays described in Examples 33-42. First, dilute Poly-D-Lysine (644 587 Boehringer-Mannheim) stock solution (1 mg/ml in PBS) 1 :20 in PBS (w/o calcium or magnesium 17-516F Biowhittaker) for a working solution of 50ug/ml. Add 200 ul of this solution to each well (24 well plates) and incubate at RT for 20 minutes. Be sure to distribute the solution over each well (note: a 12-channel pipetter may be used with tips on every other channel). Aspirate off the Poly-D-Lysine solution and rinse with 1ml PBS (Phosphate Buffered Saline). The PBS should remain in the well until just prior to plating the cells and plates may be poly-lysine coated in advance for up to two weeks. Plate 293T cells (do not carry cells past P+20) at 2 x 10 5 cells/well in .5ml DMEM(Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium)(with 4.5 G/L glucose and L-glutamine (12- 604F Biowhittaker))/ 10% heat inactivated FBS(14-503F Biowhittaker)/ lx Penstrep(17-602E Biowhittaker). Let the cells grow overnight. The next day, mix together in a sterile solution basin: 300 ul Lipofectamine (18324- 012 Gibco/BRL) and 5ml Optimem I (31985070 Gibco/BRL)/96-well plate. With a small volume multi-channel pipetter, aliquot approximately 2ug of an expression vector containing a polynucleotide insert, produced by the methods described in Examples 8- 10, into an appropriately labeled 96-well round bottom plate. With a multi-channel pipetter, add 50ul of the Lipofectamine/Optimem I mixture to each well. Pipette up and down gently to mix. Incubate at RT 15-45 minutes. After about 20 minutes, use a multi-channel pipetter to add 150ul Optimem I to each well. As a control, one plate of vector DNA lacking an insert should be transfected with each set of transfections. Preferably, the transfection should be performed by tag-teaming the following tasks. By tag-teaming, hands on time is cut in half, and the cells do not spend too much time on PBS. First, person A aspirates off the media from four 24-well plates of cells, and then person B rinses each well with .5- lml PBS. Person A then aspirates off PBS rinse, and person B. using al2-channel pipetter with tips on every other channel, adds the 200ul of DNA/Lipofectamine/Optimem I complex to the odd wells first, then to the even wells, to each row on the 24-well plates. Incubate at 37 degree C for 6 hours. While cells are incubating, prepare appropriate media, either 1%BSA in DMEM with l x penstrep, or HGS CHO-5 media (1 16.6 mg/L of CaC12 (anhyd); 0.00130 mg/L CuSO 4 - 5H 2 O; 0.050 mg/L of Fe(NO 3 ) 3 -9H 2 O; 0.417 mg/L of FeSO 4 -7H 2 O; 31 1.80 mg/L of Kcl; 28.64 mg/L of MgCl 2 ; 48.84 mg/L of MgSO 4 ; 6995.50 mg/L of NaCl; 2400.0 mg/L of NaHCO 3 ; 62.50 mg/L of NaH 2 PO 4 -H 0; 71.02 mg/L of Na 2 HPO4; .4320 mg/L of ZnSO - 7H 2 O; .002 mg/L of Arachidonic Acid ; 1.022 mg/L of Cholesterol; .070 mg/L of DL-alpha- Tocopherol-Acetate; 0.0520 mg/L of Linoleic Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Linolenic Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Myristic Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Oleic Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Palmitric Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Palmitic Acid; 100 mg/L of Pluronic F-68; 0.010 mg/L of Stearic Acid; 2.20 mg/L of Tween 80; 4551 mg/L of D-Glucose; 130.85 mg/ml of L- Alanine; 147.50 mg/ml of L- Arginine-HCL; 7.50 mg/ml of L-Asparagine-H2θ; 6.65 mg/ml of L-Aspartic Acid; 29.56 mg/ml of L-Cystine-2HCL-H 2 0; 31.29 mg/ml of L-Cystine-2HCL; 7.35 mg/ml of L- Glutamic Acid; 365.0 mg/ml of L-Glutamine; 18.75 mg/ml of Glycine; 52.48 mg/ml of L- Histidine-HCL-H 2 0; 106.97 mg/ml of L-Isoleucine; 1 1 1.45 mg/ml of L-Leucine; 163.75 mg/ml of L-Lysine HCL; 32.34 mg/ml of L-Methionine; 68.48 mg/ml of L-Phenylalainine; 40.0 mg/ml of L-Proline; 26.25 mg/ml of L-Serine; 101.05 mg/ml of L-Threonine; 19.22 mg/ml of L-Tryptophan; 91.79 mg/ml of L-Tryrosine-2Na-2H 2 0; and 99.65 mg/ml of L- Valine; 0.0035 mg/L of Biotin; 3.24 mg/L of D-Ca Pantothenate; 1 1.78 mg/L of Choline Chloride; 4.65 mg/L of Folic Acid; 15.60 mg/L of i-Inositol; 3.02 mg/L of Niacinamide; 3.00 mg/L of Pyridoxal HCL; 0.031 mg/L of Pyridoxine HCL; 0.319 mg/L of Riboflavin; 3.17 mg/L of Thiamine HCL; 0.365 mg/L of Thymidine; 0.680 mg/L of Vitamin B 12 ; 25 mM of HEPES Buffer; 2.39 mg/L of Na Hypoxanthine; 0.105 mg/L of Lipoic Acid; 0.081 mg/L of Sodium Putrescine-2HCL; 55.0 mg/L of Sodium Pyruvate; 0.0067 mg/L of Sodium Selenite; 20uM of Ethanolamine; 0.122 mg/L of Ferric Citrate; 41.70 mg/L of Methyl-B-Cyclodextrin complexed with Linoleic Acid; 33.33 mg/L of Methyl-B- Cyclodextrin complexed with Oleic Acid; 10 mg/L of Methyl-B-Cyclodextrin complexed with Retinal Acetate. Adjust osmolarity to 327 mOsm) with 2mm glutamine and lx penstrep. (BSA (81-068-3 Bayer) lOOgm dissolved in IL DMEM for a 10% BSA stock solution). Filter the media and collect 50 ul for endotoxin assay in 15ml polystyrene conical. The transfection reaction is terminated, preferably by tag-teaming, at the end of the incubation period. Person A aspirates off the transfection media, while person B adds 1.5ml appropriate media to each well. Incubate at 37 degree C for 45 or 72 hours depending on the media used: 1%BSA for 45 hours or CHO-5 for 72 hours. On day four, using a 300ul multichannel pipetter, aliquot 600ul in one 1ml deep well plate and the remaining supernatant into a 2ml deep well. The supematants from each well can then be used in the assays described in Examples 33-40. It is specifically understood that when activity is obtained in any of the assays described below using a supernatant, the activity originates from either the polypeptide of the present invention directly (e.g., as a secreted protein) or by polypeptide of the present invention inducing expression of other proteins, which are then secreted into the supernatant. Thus, the invention further provides a method of identifying the protein in the supernatant characterized by an activity in a particular assay. Example 32: Construction of GAS Reporter Construct One signal transduction pathway involved in the differentiation and proliferation of cells is called the Jaks-STATs pathway. Activated proteins in the Jaks-STATs pathway bind to gamma activation site "GAS" elements or interferon-sensitive responsive element ("ISRE"), located in the promoter of many genes. The binding of a protein to these elements alter the expression of the associated gene. GAS and ISRE elements are recognized by a class of transcription factors called Signal Transducers and Activators of Transcription, or "STATs." There are six members of the STATs family. Statl and Stat3 are present in many cell types, as is Stat2 (as response to IFN-alpha is widespread). Stat4 is more restricted and is not in many cell types though it has been found in T helper class I, cells after treatment with IL-12. Stat5 was originally called mammary growth factor, but has been found at higher concentrations in other cells including myeloid cells. It can be activated in tissue culture cells by many cytokines. The STATs are activated to translocate from the cytoplasm to the nucleus upon tyrosine phosphorylation by a set of kinases known as the Janus Kinase ("Jaks") family. Jaks represent a distinct family of soluble tyrosine kinases and include Tyk2, Jakl, Jak2, and Jak3. These kinases display significant sequence similarity and are generally catalytically inactive in resting cells. The Jaks are activated by a wide range of receptors summarized in the Table below. (Adapted from review by Schidler and Darnell, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 64:621-51 (1995).) A cytokine receptor family, capable of activating Jaks, is divided into two groups: (a) Class 1 includes receptors for IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-6, IL-7, IL-9, IL-1 1, IL-12, IL-15, Epo, PRL, GH, G-CSF, GM-CSF, LIF, CNTF, and thrombopoietin; and (b) Class 2 includes IFN-a, IFN-g, and IL-10. The Class 1 receptors share a conserved cysteine motif (a set of four conserved cysteines and one tryptophan) and a WSXWS motif (a membrane proximal region encoding Tφ-Ser-Xxx-Tφ-Ser (SEQ ID NO:888)). Thus, on binding of a ligand to a receptor, Jaks are activated, which in turn activate STATs, which then translocate and bind to GAS elements. This entire process is encompassed in the Jaks-STATs signal transduction pathway. Therefore, activation of the Jaks-STATs pathway, reflected by the binding of the GAS or the ISRE element, can be used to indicate proteins involved in the proliferation and differentiation of cells. For example, growth factors and cytokines are known to activate the Jaks-STATs pathway. (See Table below.) Thus, by using GAS elements linked to reporter molecules, activators of the Jaks-STATs pathway can be identified. JAKs STATS G (AS(elements) or ISRE Ligand tγk2 Jakl Jak2 Jak3 IFN faratlv IFN-a/B + + - - 1 ,2,3 ISRE IFN-g + + - 1 GAS (IRFl>Lvs6>lFP) 11- 10 + ? ? - 1 ,3 sp l 30 family IL-6 (Pleiotrohic) + + + 1 ,3 GAS (IRFl>Lys6>IFP) 11- 1 1 (Pleiotrohic) 9 + 9 ? 1 ,3 OnM(Pleιotrohtc) 9 + + ? 1 ,3 LIF(Pleιotrohιc) 9 + + 1 ,3 CNTF(Pletotrohιc) -/+ + + 9 1 ,3 G-CSF(Pleιotrohιc) ? + ? 9 1 ,3 IL-12(Pleιotrohιc) + - + + 1 ,3 g-C familv IL-2 (lymphocytes) - - - + 1 ,3,5 GAS IL-4 (lymph/myeloid) - + - + 6 GAS (IRF1 = IFP »Ly6)(IgH) IL-7 (lymphocytes) - + - + 5 GAS IL-9 (lymphocytes) - + - + 5 GAS IL-13 (lymphocyte) - + ? 9 6 GAS IL-15 9 + ? + 5 GAS gpl40 familv IL-3 (myeloid) - - + - 5 GAS (IRFl>IFP»Ly6) IL-5 (myeloid) - - + - 5 GAS GM-CSF (myeloid) - - + - 5 GAS Growth hormone familv GH ? - + 5 PRL ? +/- + 1,3,5 EPO ? + 5 GAS(B- CAS>IRFl=IFP»Ly6) Receptor Tyrosine Kinases EGF ? + 1,3 GAS(IRFl) PDGF ? + 1,3 CSF-1 ? + 1,3 GAS(notΙRFl) To construct a synthetic GAS containing promoter element, which is used in the Biological Assays described in Examples 33-34, a PCR based strategy is employed to generate a GAS-SV40 promoter sequence. The 5' primer contains four tandem copies of the GAS binding site found in the IRF1 promoter and previously demonstrated to bind STATs upon induction with a range of cytokines (Rothman et al., Immunity 1 :457-468 ( 1994).), although other GAS or ISRE elements can be used instead. The 5' primer also contains 18bp of sequence complementary to the SV40 early promoter sequence and is flanked with an Xhol site. The sequence of the 5' primer is: 5 ' :GCGCCTCGAGATTTCCCCG AAATCTAGATTTCCCCGAAATGATTTCCCCGAAAT GATTTCCCCGAAATATCTGCCATCTCAATTAG:3' (SEQ ID NO:889) The downstream primer is complementary to the SV40 promoter and is flanked with a Hind III site: 5':GCGGCAAGCTTTTTGCAAAGCCTAGGC:3' (SEQ ID NO:890) PCR amplification is performed using the SV40 promoter template present in the B- gal:promoter plasmid obtained from Clontech. The resulting PCR fragment is digested with Xhol/Hind III and subcloned into BLSK2-. (Stratagene.) Sequencing with forward and reverse primers confirms that the insert contains the following sequence: 5 ' :CTCGAG ATTTCCCCG AAATCTAG ATTTCCCCGAAATGATTTCCCCGAAATGATT TCCCCGAAATATCTGCCATCTCAATTAGTCAGCAACCATAGTCCCGCCCCTAACT CCGCCCATCCCGCCCCTAACTCCGCCCAGTTCCGCCCATTCTCCGCCCCATGGCTG ACTAATTTTTTTTATTTATGCAGAGGCCGAGGCCGCCTCGGCCTCTGAGCTATTCC AG A AGTAGTG AGG AGGCTTTTTTGG AGGCCTAGGCTTTTGC A AAAAGCTT: 3 ' (SEQ ID NO:891) With this GAS promoter element linked to the SV40 promoter, a GAS:SEAP2 reporter construct is next engineered. Here, the reporter molecule is a secreted alkaline phosphatase, or "SEAP." Clearly, however, any reporter molecule can be instead of SEAP, in this or in any of the other Examples. Well known reporter molecules that can be used instead of SEAP include chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT), luciferase, alkaline phosphatase, B-galactosidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP), or any protein detectable by an antibody. The above sequence confirmed synthetic GAS-SV40 promoter element is subcloned into the pSEAP-Promoter vector obtained from Clontech using Hindlll and Xhol, effectively replacing the SV40 promoter with the amplified GAS:SV40 promoter element, to create the GAS-SEAP vector. However, this vector does not contain a neomycin resistance gene, and therefore, is not preferred for mammalian expression systems. Thus, in order to generate mammalian stable cell lines expressing the GAS-SEAP reporter, the GAS-SEAP cassette is removed from the GAS-SEAP vector using Sail and Notl, and inserted into a backbone vector containing the neomycin resistance gene, such as pGFP-1 (Clontech), using these restriction sites in the multiple cloning site, to create the GAS-SEAP/Neo vector. Once this vector is transfected into mammalian cells, this vector can then be used as a reporter molecule for GAS binding as described in Examples 33-34. Other constructs can be made using the above description and replacing GAS with a different promoter sequence. For example, constmction of reporter molecules containing NFK-B and EGR promoter sequences are described in Examples 35 and 36. However, many other promoters can be substituted using the protocols described in these Examples. For instance, SRE, IL-2, NFAT, or Osteocalcin promoters can be substituted, alone or in combination (e.g., GAS/NF-KB/EGR, GAS/NF-KB, I1-2/NFAT, or NF-KB/GAS). Similarly, other cell lines can be used to test reporter construct activity, such as HELA (epithelial), HUVEC (endothelial), Reh (B-cell), Saos-2 (osteoblast), HUVAC (aortic), or Cardiomyocyte. Example 33: High-Throughput Screening Assay for T-cell Activity. The following protocol is used to assess T-cell activity by identifying factors, and determining whether supemate containing a polypeptide of the invention proliferates and/or differentiates T-cells. T-cell activity is assessed using the GAS/SEAP/Neo construct produced in Example 32. Thus, factors that increase SEAP activity indicate the ability to activate the Jaks-STATS signal transduction pathway. The T-cell used in this assay is Jurkat T-cells (ATCC Accession No. TIB- 152), although Molt-3 cells (ATCC Accession No. CRL- 1552) and Molt-4 cells (ATCC Accession No. CRL-1582) cells can also be used. Jurkat T-cells are lymphoblastic CD4+ Thl helper cells. In order to generate stable cell lines, approximately 2 million Jurkat cells are transfected with the GAS-SEAP/neo vector using DMRIE-C (Life Technologies)(transfection procedure described below). The transfected cells are seeded to a density of approximately 20,000 cells per well and transfectants resistant to 1 mg/ml genticin selected. Resistant colonies are expanded and then tested for their response to increasing concentrations of interferon gamma. The dose response of a selected clone is demonstrated. Specifically, the following protocol will yield sufficient cells for 75 wells containing 200 ul of cells. Thus, it is either scaled up, or performed in multiple to generate sufficient cells for multiple 96 well plates. Jurkat cells are maintained in RPMI + 10% serum with l%Pen-Strep. Combine 2.5 mis of OPTI-MEM (Life Technologies) with 10 ug of plasmid DNA in a T25 flask. Add 2.5 ml OPTI-MEM containing 50 ul of DMRIE-C and incubate at room temperature for 15-45 mins. During the incubation period, count cell concentration, spin down the required number of cells (10 7 per transfection), and resuspend in OPTI-MEM to a final concentration of 10 7 cells/ml. Then add 1ml of 1 x 10 7 cells in OPTI-MEM to T25 flask and incubate at 37 degree C for 6 hrs. After the incubation, add 10 ml of RPMI + 15% semm. The Jurkat:GAS-SEAP stable reporter lines are maintained in RPMI + 10% semm, 1 mg/ml Genticin, and 1% Pen-Strep. These cells are treated with supematants containing polypeptide of the present invention or polypeptide of the present invention induced polypeptides as produced by the protocol described in Example 31. On the day of treatment with the supernatant, the cells should be washed and resuspended in fresh RPMI + 10% semm to a density of 500,000 cells per ml. The exact number of cells required will depend on the number of supematants being screened. For one 96 well plate, approximately 10 million cells (for 10 plates, 100 million cells) are required. Transfer the cells to a triangular reservoir boat, in order to dispense the cells into a 96 well dish, using a 12 channel pipette. Using a 12 channel pipette, transfer 200 ul of cells into each well (therefore adding 100, 000 cells per well). After all the plates have been seeded, 50 ul of the supematants are transferred directly from the 96 well plate containing the supematants into each well using a 12 channel pipette. In addition, a dose of exogenous interferon gamma (0.1, 1.0, 10 ng) is added to wells H9, H10, and HI 1 to serve as additional positive controls for the assay. The 96 well dishes containing Jurkat cells treated with supematants are placed in an incubator for 48 hrs (note: this time is variable between 48-72 hrs). 35 ul samples from each well are then transferred to an opaque 96 well plate using a 12 channel pipette. The opaque plates should be covered (using sellophene covers) and stored at -20 degree C until SEAP assays are performed according to Example 37. The plates containing the remaining treated cells are placed at 4 degree C and serve as a source of material for repeating the assay on a specific well if desired. As a positive control, 100 Unit/ml interferon gamma can be used which is known to activate Jurkat T cells. Over 30 fold induction is typically observed in the positive control wells. The above protocol may be used in the generation of both transient, as well as, stable transfected cells, which would be apparent to those of skill in the art. Example 34: High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Myeloid Activity The following protocol is used to assess myeloid activity of polypeptide of the present invention by determining whether polypeptide of the present invention proliferates and/or differentiates myeloid cells. Myeloid cell activity is assessed using the GAS/SEAP/Neo construct produced in Example 32. Thus, factors that increase SEAP activity indicate the ability to activate the Jaks-STATS signal transduction pathway. The myeloid cell used in this assay is U937, a pre-monocyte cell line, although TF-1, HL60, or KG1 can be used. To transiently transfect U937 cells with the GAS/SEAP/Neo construct produced in Example 32, a DEAE-Dextran method (Kharbanda et. al., 1994, Cell Growth & Differentiation, 5:259-265) is used. First, harvest 2x10e^ U937 cells and wash with PBS. The U937 cells are usually grown in RPMI 1640 medium containing 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (FBS) supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin and 100 mg/ml streptomycin. Next, suspend the cells in 1 ml of 20 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.4) buffer containing 0.5 mg/ml DEAE-Dextran, 8 ug GAS-SEAP2 plasmid DNA, 140 mM NaCl, 5 mM KC1, 375 uM Na 2 HPO 4 .7H 2 O, 1 mM MgCl 2 , and 675 uM CaCl 2 . Incubate at 37 degrees C for 45 min. Wash the cells with RPMI 1640 medium containing 10% FBS and then resuspend in 10 ml complete medium and incubate at 37 degree C for 36 hr. The GAS-SEAP/U937 stable cells are obtained by growing the cells in 400 ug/ml G418. The G418-free medium is used for routine growth but every one to two months, the cells should be re-grown in 400 ug/ml G418 for couple of passages. 8 These cells are tested by harvesting 1x10 cells (this is enough for ten 96-well plates assay) and wash with PBS. Suspend the cells in 200 ml above described growth medium, with a final density of 5xl0 5 cells/ml. Plate 200 ul cells per well in the 96-well plate (or lxlO 5 cells/well). Add 50 ul of the supernatant prepared by the protocol described in Example 31. Incubate at 37 degee C for 48 to 72 hr. As a positive control, 100 Unit/ml interferon gamma can be used which is known to activate U937 cells. Over 30 fold induction is typically observed in the positive control wells. SEAP assay the supernatant according to the protocol described in Example 37. Example 35: High- Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Neuronal Activity. When cells undergo differentiation and proliferation, a group of genes are activated through many different signal transduction pathways. One of these genes, EGRl (early growth response gene 1 ), is induced in various tissues and cell types upon activation. The promoter of EGRl is responsible for such induction. Using the EGRl promoter linked to reporter molecules, activation of cells can be assessed by polypeptide of the present invention. Particularly, the following protocol is used to assess neuronal activity in PC 12 cell lines. PC 12 cells (rat phenochromocytoma cells) are known to proliferate and/or differentiate by activation with a number of mitogens, such as TPA (tetradecanoyl phorbol acetate), NGF (nerve growth factor), and EGF (epidermal growth factor). The EGRl gene expression is activated during this treatment. Thus, by stably transfecting PC 12 cells with a constmct containing an EGR promoter linked to SEAP reporter, activation of PC 12 cells by polypeptide of the present invention can be assessed. The EGR/SEAP reporter constmct can be assembled by the following protocol. The EGR-1 promoter sequence (-633 to +l)(Sakamoto K et al., Oncogene 6:867-871 ( 1991)) can be PCR amplified from human genomic DNA using the following primers: 5' GCGCTCGAGGGATGACAGCGATAGAACCCCGG -3* (SEQ ID NO:892) 5' GCGAAGCTTCGCGACTCCCCGGATCCGCCTC-3' (SEQ ID NO:893) Using the GAS:SEAP/Neo vector produced in Example 32, EGRl amplified product can then be inserted into this vector. Linearize the GAS:SEAP/Neo vector using restriction enzymes Xhol/Hindlll, removing the GAS/SV40 stuffer. Restrict the EGRl amplified product with these same enzymes. Ligate the vector and the EGRl promoter. To prepare 96 well-plates for cell culture, two mis of a coating solution ( 1 :30 dilution of collagen type I (Upstate Biotech Inc. Cat#08- 1 15) in 30% ethanol (filter sterilized)) is added per one 10 cm plate or 50 ml per well of the 96-well plate, and allowed to air dry for 2 hr. PC 12 cells are routinely grown in RPMI- 1640 medium (Bio Whittaker) containing 10% horse semm (JRH BIOSCIENCES, Cat. # 12449-78P), 5% heat-inactivated fetal bovine semm (FBS) supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin and 100 ug/ml streptomycin on a precoated 10 cm tissue culture dish. One to four split is done every three to four days. Cells are removed from the plates by scraping and resuspended with pipetting up and down for more than 15 times. Transfect the EGR/SEAP/Neo constmct into PC 12 using the Lipofectamine protocol described in Example 31. EGR-SEAP/PC12 stable cells are obtained by growing the cells in 300 ug/ml G418. The G418-free medium is used for routine growth but every one to two months, the cells should be re-grown in 300 ug/ml G418 for couple of passages. To assay for neuronal activity, a 10 cm plate with cells around 70 to 80% confluent is screened by removing the old medium. Wash the cells once with PBS (Phosphate buffered saline). Then starve the cells in low semm medium (RPMI- 1640 containing 1% horse semm and 0.5% FBS with antibiotics) overnight. The next morning, remove the medium and wash the cells with PBS. Scrape off the cells from the plate, suspend the cells well in 2 ml low serum medium. Count the cell number and add more low semm medium to reach final cell density as 5x10^ cells/ml. Add 200 ul of the cell suspension to each well of 96-well plate (equivalent to 1x10^ cells/well). Add 50 ul supernatant produced by Example 31, 37 degree C for 48 to 72 hr. As a positive control, a growth factor known to activate PC 12 cells through EGR can be used, such as 50 ng/ul of Neuronal Growth Factor (NGF). Over fifty-fold induction of SEAP is typically seen in the positive control wells. SEAP assay the supernatant according to Example 37. Example 36: High-Throughput Screening Assay for T-cell Activity NF-KB (Nuclear Factor KB) is a transcription factor activated by a wide variety of agents including the inflammatory cytokines IL-1 and TNF, CD30 and CD40, lymphotoxin- alpha and lymphotoxin-beta, by exposure to LPS or thrombin, and by expression of certain viral gene products. As a transcription factor, NF-KB regulates the expression of genes involved in immune cell activation, control of apoptosis (NF- KB appears to shield cells from apoptosis), B and T-cell development, anti-viral and antimicrobial responses, and multiple stress responses. In non-stimulated conditions, NF- KB is retained in the cytoplasm with I-KB (Inhibitor KB). However, upon stimulation, I- KB is phosphorylated and degraded, causing NF- KB to shuttle to the nucleus, thereby activating transcription of target genes. Target genes activated by NF- KB include IL-2, IL-6, GM-CSF, ICAM-1 and class 1 MHC. Due to its central role and ability to respond to a range of stimuli, reporter constructs utilizing the NF-KB promoter element are used to screen the supematants produced in Example 31. Activators or inhibitors of NF-KB would be useful in treating, preventing, and/or diagnosing diseases. For example, inhibitors of NF-KB could be used to treat those diseases related to the acute or chronic activation of NF-KB, such as rheumatoid arthritis. To constmct a vector containing the NF-KB promoter element, a PCR based strategy is employed. The upstream primer contains four tandem copies of the NF-KB binding site (GGGGACTTTCCC) (SEQ ID NO:894), 18 bp of sequence complementary to the 5' end of the SV40 early promoter sequence, and is flanked with an Xhol site: 5 ' :GCGGCCTCGAGGGGACTTTCCCGGGG ACTTTCCGGGGACTTTCCGGGACTTTC CATCCTGCCATCTCAATTAG:3' (SEQ ID NO:895) The downstream primer is complementary to the 3' end of the SV40 promoter and is flanked with a Hind III site: 5':GCGGCAAGCTTTTTGCAAAGCCTAGGC:3' (SEQ ID NO:890) PCR amplification is performed using the SV40 promoter template present in the pB- gakpromoter plasmid obtained from Clontech. The resulting PCR fragment is digested with Xhol and Hind III and subcloned into BLSK2-. (Stratagene) Sequencing with the T7 and T3 primers confirms the insert contains the following sequence: 5 ' :CTCGAGGGGACTTTCCCGGGGACTTTCCGGGGACTTTCCGGGACTTTCCATCTG CCATCTCAATTAGTCAGCAACCATAGTCCCGCCCCTAACTCCGCCCATCCCGCCC CTAACTCCGCCCAGTTCCGCCCATTCTCCGCCCCATGGCTGACTAATTTTTTTTAT TTATGCAGAGGCCGAGGCCGCCTCGGCCTCTGAGCTATTCCAGAAGTAGTGAGG AGGCTTTTTTGGAGGCCTAGGCTTTTGCAAAAAGCTT:3' (SEQ ID NO:896) Next, replace the SV40 minimal promoter element present in the pSEAP2-promoter plasmid (Clontech) with this NF-KB/SV40 fragment using Xhol and Hindlll. However, this vector does not contain a neomycin resistance gene, and therefore, is not preferred for mammalian expression systems. In order to generate stable mammalian cell lines, the NF-KB/SV40/SEAP cassette is removed from the above NF-KB/SEAP vector using restriction enzymes Sail and Notl, and inserted into a vector containing neomycin resistance. Particularly, the NF-KB/SV40/SEAP cassette was inserted into pGFP- 1 (Clontech), replacing the GFP gene, after restricting pGFP- 1 with Sail and Notl. Once NF-KB/SV40/SEAP/Neo vector is created, stable Jurkat T-cells are created and maintained according to the protocol described in Example 33. Similarly, the method for assaying supematants with these stable Jurkat T-cells is also described in Example 33. As a positive control, exogenous TNF alpha (0.1, 1, 10 ng) is added to wells H9, H10, and HI 1, with a 5-10 fold activation typically observed. Example 37: Assay for SEAP Activity As a reporter molecule for the assays described in Examples 33-36, SEAP activity is assayed using the Tropix Phospho-light Kit (Cat. BP-400) according to the following general procedure. The Tropix Phospho-light Kit supplies the Dilution, Assay, and Reaction Buffers used below. Prime a dispenser with the 2.5x Dilution Buffer and dispense 15 ul of 2.5x dilution buffer into Optiplates containing 35 ul of a supernatant. Seal the plates with a plastic sealer and incubate at 65 degree C for 30 min. Separate the Optiplates to avoid uneven heating. Cool the samples to room temperature for 15 minutes. Empty the dispenser and prime with the Assay Buffer. Add 50 ml Assay Buffer and incubate at room temperature 5 min. Empty the dispenser and prime with the Reaction Buffer (see the table below). Add 50 ul Reaction Buffer and incubate at room temperature for 20 minutes. Since the intensity of the chemiluminescent signal is time dependent, and it takes about 10 minutes to read 5 plates on luminometer, one should treat 5 plates at each time and start the second set 10 minutes later. Read the relative light unit in the luminometer. Set H12 as blank, and print the results. An increase in chemiluminescence indicates reporter activity. Reaction Buffer Formulation: # of plates Rxn buffer diluent (ml) CSPD (ml) 10 60 3 11 65 3.25 12 70 3.5 13 75 3.75 14 80 4 15 85 4.25 16 90 4.5 17 95 4.75 18 100 5 19 105 5.25 0 110 5.5 1 115 5.75 2 120 6 3 125 6.25 4 130 6.5 5 135 6.75 6 140 7 7 145 7.25 8 150 7.5 9 155 7.75 0 160 1 165 8.25 2 170 8.5 3 175 8.75 4 180 9 5 185 9.25 36 190 9.5 37 195 9.75 38 200 10 39 205 10.25 40 210 10.5 41 215 10.75 42 220 1 1 43 225 1 1.25 44 230 1 1.5 45 235 1 1.75 46 240 12 47 245 12.25 48 250 12.5 49 255 12.75 50 260 13 Example 38: High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Changes in Small Molecule Concentration and Membrane Permeability Binding of a ligand to a receptor is known to alter intracellular levels of small molecules, such as calcium, potassium, sodium, and pH, as well as alter membrane potential. These alterations can be measured in an assay to identify supematants which bind to receptors of a particular cell. Although the following protocol describes an assay for calcium, this protocol can easily be modified to detect changes in potassium, sodium, pH, membrane potential, or any other small molecule which is detectable by a fluorescent probe. The following assay uses Fluorometric Imaging Plate Reader ("FLIPR") to measure changes in fluorescent molecules (Molecular Probes) that bind small molecules. Clearly, any fluorescent molecule detecting a small molecule can be used instead of the calcium fluorescent molecule, fluo-4 (Molecular Probes, Inc.; catalog no. F-14202), used here. For adherent cells, seed the cells at 10,000 -20,000 cells/well in a Co-star black 96- well plate with clear bottom. The plate is incubated in a CO 2 incubator for 20 hours. The adherent cells are washed two times in Biotek washer with 200 ul of HBSS (Hank's Balanced Salt Solution) leaving 100 ul of buffer after the final wash. A stock solution of 1 mg/ml fluo-4 is made in 10% pluronic acid DMSO. To load the cells with fluo-4 , 50 ul of 12 ug/ml fluo-4 is added to each well. The plate is incubated at 37 degrees C in a CO incubator for 60 min. The plate is washed four times in the Biotek washer with HBSS leaving 100 ul of buffer. For non-adherent cells, the cells are spun down from culture media. Cells are resuspended to 2-5x10 6 cells/ml with HBSS in a 50-ml conical tube. 4 ul of 1 mg/ml fluo-4 solution in 10% pluronic acid DMSO is added to each ml of cell suspension. The tube is then placed in a 37 degrees C water bath for 30-60 min. The cells are washed twice with HBSS, resuspended to lxlO 6 cells/ml, and dispensed into a microplate, 100 ul/well. The plate is centrifuged at 1000 φm for 5 min. The plate is then washed once in Denley Cell Wash with 200 ul, followed by an aspiration step to 100 ul final volume. For a non-cell based assay, each well contains a fluorescent molecule, such as fluo-4 . The supernatant is added to the well, and a change in fluorescence is detected. To measure the fluorescence of intracellular calcium, the FLIPR is set for the following parameters: (1) System gain is 300-800 mW; (2) Exposure time is 0.4 second; (3) Camera F/stop is F/2; (4) Excitation is 488 nm; (5) Emission is 530 nm; and (6) Sample addition is 50 ul. Increased emission at 530 nm indicates an extracellular signaling event caused by the a molecule, either polypeptide of the present invention or a molecule induced by polypeptide of the present invention, which has resulted in an increase in the intracellular Ca ++ concentration. Example 40: High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Tyrosine Kinase Activity The Protein Tyrosine Kinases (PTK) represent a diverse group of transmembrane and cytoplasmic kinases. Within the Receptor Protein Tyrosine Kinase RPTK) group are receptors for a range of mitogenic and metabolic growth factors including the PDGF, FGF, EGF, NGF, HGF and Insulin receptor subfamilies. In addition there are a large family of RPTKs for which the corresponding ligand is unknown. Ligands for RPTKs include mainly secreted small proteins, but also membrane-bound and extracellular matrix proteins. Activation of RPTK by ligands involves ligand-mediated receptor dimerization, resulting in transphosphorylation of the receptor subunits and activation of the cytoplasmic tyrosine kinases. The cytoplasmic tyrosine kinases include receptor associated tyrosine kinases of the src-family (e.g., src, yes, lck, lyn, fyn) and non-receptor linked and cytosolic protein tyrosine kinases, such as the Jak family, members of which mediate signal transduction triggered by the cytokine superfamily of receptors (e.g., the Interleukins, Interferons, GM-CSF, and Leptin). Because of the wide range of known factors capable of stimulating tyrosine kinase activity, identifying whether polypeptide of the present invention or a molecule induced by polypeptide of the present invention is capable of activating tyrosine kinase signal transduction pathways is of interest. Therefore, the following protocol is designed to identify such molecules capable of activating the tyrosine kinase signal transduction pathways. Seed target cells (e.g., primary keratinocytes) at a density of approximately 25,000 cells per well in a 96 well Loprodyne Silent Screen Plates purchased from Nalge Nunc (Naperville, IL). The plates are sterilized with two 30 minute rinses with 100% ethanol, rinsed with water and dried overnight. Some plates are coated for 2 hr with 100 ml of cell culture grade type I collagen (50 mg/ml), gelatin (2%) or polylysine (50 mg/ml), all of which can be purchased from Sigma Chemicals (St. Louis, MO) or 10% Matrigel purchased from Becton Dickinson (Bedford,MA), or calf semm, rinsed with PBS and stored at 4 degree C. Cell growth on these plates is assayed by seeding 5,000 cells/well in growth medium and indirect quantitation of cell number through use of alamarBlue as described by the manufacturer Alamar Biosciences, Inc. (Sacramento, CA) after 48 hr. Falcon plate covers #3071 from Becton Dickinson (Bedford,MA) are used to cover the Loprodyne Silent Screen Plates. Falcon Microtest III cell culture plates can also be used in some proliferation experiments. To prepare extracts, A431 cells are seeded onto the nylon membranes of Loprodyne plates (20,000/200ml/well) and cultured overnight in complete medium. Cells are quiesced by incubation in serum-free basal medium for 24 hr. After 5-20 minutes treatment with EGF (60ng/ml) or 50 ul of the supernatant produced in Example 31 , the medium was removed and 100 ml of extraction buffer ((20 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 0.15 M NaCl, 1% Triton X-100, 0.1% SDS, 2 mM Na3VO4, 2 mM Na4P2O7 and a cocktail of protease inhibitors (# 1836170) obtained from Boeheringer Mannheim (Indianapolis, IN) is added to each well and the plate is shaken on a rotating shaker for 5 minutes at 4°C. The plate is then placed in a vacuum transfer manifold and the extract filtered through the 0.45 mm membrane bottoms of each well using house vacuum. Extracts are collected in a 96-well catch/assay plate in the bottom of the vacuum manifold and immediately placed on ice. To obtain extracts clarified by centrifugation, the content of each well, after detergent solubilization for 5 minutes, is removed and centrifuged for 15 minutes at 4 degree C at 16,000 x g. Test the filtered extracts for levels of tyrosine kinase activity. Although many methods of detecting tyrosine kinase activity are known, one method is described here. Generally, the tyrosine kinase activity of a supernatant is evaluated by determining its ability to phosphorylate a tyrosine residue on a specific substrate (a biotinylated peptide). Biotinylated peptides that can be used for this puφose include PSK1 (corresponding to amino acids 6-20 of the cell division kinase cdc2-p34) and PSK2 (corresponding to amino acids 1- 17 of gastrin). Both peptides are substrates for a range of tyrosine kinases and are available from Boehringer Mannheim. The tyrosine kinase reaction is set up by adding the following components in order. First, add lOul of 5uM Biotinylated Peptide, then lOul ATP/Mg + (5mM ATP/50mM MgCl 2 ), then lOul of 5x Assay Buffer (40mM imidazole hydrochloride, pH7.3, 40 mM beta- glycerophosphate, ImM EGTA, lOOmM MgCl 2 , 5 mM MnCl 2? 0.5 mg/ml BSA), then 5ul of Sodium Vanadate(lmM), and then 5ul of water. Mix the components gently and preincubate the reaction mix at 30 degree C for 2 min. Initial the reaction by adding lOul of the control enzyme or the filtered supernatant. The tyrosine kinase assay reaction is then terminated by adding 10 ul of 120mm EDTA and place the reactions on ice. Tyrosine kinase activity is determined by transferring 50 ul aliquot of reaction mixture to a microtiter plate (MTP) module and incubating at 37 degree C for 20 min. This allows the streptavadin coated 96 well plate to associate with the biotinylated peptide. Wash the MTP module with 300ul/well of PBS four times. Next add 75 ul of anti-phospotyrosine antibody conjugated to horse radish peroxidase(anti-P-Tyr-POD(0.5u/ml)) to each well and incubate at 37 degree C for one hour. Wash the well as above. Next add lOOul of peroxidase substrate solution (Boehringer Mannheim) and incubate at room temperature for at least 5 mins (up to 30 min). Measure the absorbance of the sample at 405 nm by using ELISA reader. The level of bound peroxidase activity is quantitated using an ELISA reader and reflects the level of tyrosine kinase activity. Example 41 : High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Phosphorylation Activity As a potential alternative and/or compliment to the assay of protein tyrosine kinase activity described in Example 40, an assay which detects activation (phosphorylation) of major intracellular signal transduction intermediates can also be used. For example, as described below one particular assay can detect tyrosine phosphorylation of the Erk-1 and Erk-2 kinases. However, phosphorylation of other molecules, such as Raf, JNK, p38 MAP, Map kinase kinase (MEK), MEK kinase, Src, Muscle specific kinase (MuSK), IRAK, Tec, and Janus, as well as any other phosphoserine, phosphotyrosine, or phosphothreonine molecule, can be detected by substituting these molecules for Erk- 1 or Erk-2 in the following assay. Specifically, assay plates are made by coating the wells of a 96-well ELISA plate with 0. lml of protein G (lug/ml) for 2 hr at room temp, (RT). The plates are then rinsed with PBS and blocked with 3% BSA/PBS for 1 hr at RT. The protein G plates are then treated with 2 commercial monoclonal antibodies (lOOng/well) against Erk-1 and Erk-2 (1 hr at RT) (Santa Cruz Biotechnology). (To detect other molecules, this step can easily be modified by substituting a monoclonal antibody detecting any of the above described molecules.) After 3-5 rinses with PBS, the plates are stored at 4 degree C until use. A431 cells are seeded at 20,000/well in a 96-well Loprodyne filteφlate and cultured overnight in growth medium. The cells are then starved for 48 hr in basal medium (DMEM) and then treated with EGF (6ng/well) or 50 ul of the supematants obtained in Example 31 for 5-20 minutes. The cells are then solubilized and extracts filtered directly into the assay plate. After incubation with the extract for 1 hr at RT, the wells are again rinsed. As a positive control, a commercial preparation of MAP kinase (lOng/well) is used in place of A431 extract. Plates are then treated with a commercial polyclonal (rabbit) antibody (lug/ml) which specifically recognizes the phosphorylated epitope of the Erk-1 and Erk-2 kinases (1 hr at RT). This antibody is biotinylated by standard procedures. The bound polyclonal antibody is then quantitated by successive incubations with Europium-streptavidin and Europium fluorescence enhancing reagent in the Wallac DELFIA instrument (time- resolved fluorescence). An increased fluorescent signal over background indicates a phosphorylation by polypeptide of the present invention or a molecule induced by polypeptide of the present invention. Example 42: Assay for the Stimulation of Bone Marrow CD34+ Cell Proliferation This assay is based on the ability of human CD34+ to proliferate in the presence of hematopoietic growth factors and evaluates the ability of isolated polypeptides expressed in mammalian cells to stimulate proliferation of CD34+ cells. It has been previously shown that most mature precursors will respond to only a single signal. More immature precursors require at least two signals to respond. Therefore, to test the effect of polypeptides on hematopoietic activity of a wide range of progenitor cells, the assay contains a given polypeptide in the presence or absence of other hematopoietic growth factors. Isolated cells are cultured for 5 days in the presence of Stem Cell Factor (SCF) in combination with tested sample. SCF alone has a very limited effect on the proliferation of bone marrow (BM) cells, acting in such conditions only as a "survival" factor. However, combined with any factor exhibiting stimulatory effect on these cells (e.g., IL-3), SCF will cause a synergistic effect. Therefore, if the tested polypeptide has a stimulatory effect on a hematopoietic progenitors, such activity can be easily detected. Since normal BM cells have a low level of cycling cells, it is likely that any inhibitory effect of a given polypeptide, or agonists or antagonists thereof, might not be detected. Accordingly, assays for an inhibitory effect on progenitors is preferably tested in cells that are first subjected to in vitro stimulation with SCF+IL+3, and then contacted with the compound that is being evaluated for inhibition of such induced proliferation. Briefly, CD34+ cells are isolated using methods known in the art. The cells are thawed and resuspended in medium (QBSF 60 semm-free medium with 1% L-glutamine (500ml) Quality Biological, Inc., Gaithersburg, MD Cat# 160-204-101). After several gentle centrifugation steps at 200 x g, cells are allowed to rest for one hour. The cell count is adjusted to 2.5 x 10 5 cells/ml. During this time, 100 μl of sterile water is added to the peripheral wells of a 96-well plate. The cytokines that can be tested with a given polypeptide in this assay is rhSCF (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, MN, Cat# 255-SC) at 50 ng/ml alone and in combination with rhSCF and rhIL-3 (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, MN, Cat# 203-ML) at 30 ng/ml. After one hour, 10 μl of prepared cytokines, 50 μl of the supematants prepared in Example 31 (supematants at 1 :2 dilution = 50 μl) and 20 μl of diluted cells are added to the media which is already present in the wells to allow for a final total volume of 100 μl. The plates are then placed in a 37°C/5% CO 2 incubator for five days. Eighteen hours before the assay is harvested, 0.5 μCi/well of [3H] Thymidine is added in a 10 μl volume to each well to determine the proliferation rate. The experiment is terminated by harvesting the cells from each 96-well plate to a filtermat using the Tomtec Harvester 96. After harvesting, the filtermats are dried, trimmed and placed into OmniFilter assemblies consisting of one OmniFilter plate and one OmniFilter Tray. 60 μl Microscint is added to each well and the plate sealed with TopSeal-A press-on sealing film A bar code 15 sticker is affixed to the first plate for counting. The sealed plates is then loaded and the level of radioactivity determined via the Packard Top Count and the printed data collected for analysis. The level of radioactivity reflects the amount of cell proliferation. The studies described in this example test the activity of a given polypeptide to stimulate bone marrow CD34+ cell proliferation. One skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), antibodies, agonists, and/or antagonists and fragments and variants thereof. As a nonlimiting example, potential antagonists tested in this assay would be expected to inhibit cell proliferation in the presence of cytokines and/or to increase the inhibition of cell proliferation in the presence of cytokines and a given polypeptide. In contrast, potential agonists tested in this assay would be expected to enhance cell proliferation and/or to decrease the inhibition of cell proliferation in the presence of cytokines and a given polypeptide. The ability of a gene to stimulate the proliferation of bone marrow CD34+ cells indicates that polynucleotides and polypeptides corresponding to the gene are useful for the diagnosis and treatment of disorders affecting the immune system and hematopoiesis. Representative uses are described in the "Immune Activity" and "Infectious Disease" sections above, and elsewhere herein. Example 43: Assay for Extracellular Matrix Enhanced Cell Response (EMECR) The objective of the Extracellular Matrix Enhanced Cell Response (EMECR) assay is to identify gene products (e.g., isolated polypeptides) that act on the hematopoietic stem cells in the context of the extracellular matrix (ECM) induced signal. Cells respond to the regulatory factors in the context of signal(s) received from the surrounding microenvironment. For example, fibroblasts, and endothelial and epithelial stem cells fail to replicate in the absence of signals from the ECM. Hematopoietic stem cells can undergo self-renewal in the bone marrow, but not in in vitro suspension culture. The ability of stem cells to undergo self-renewal in vitro is dependent upon their interaction with the stromal cells and the ECM protein fibronectin (fn). Adhesion of cells to fn is mediated by the αs.βi and α 4 .βι integrin receptors, which are expressed by human and mouse hematopoietic stem cells. The factor(s) which integrate with the ECM environment and responsible for stimulating stem cell self-renewal has not yet been identified. Discovery of such factors should be of great interest in gene therapy and bone marrow transplant applications Briefly, polystyrene, non tissue culture treated, 96-well plates are coated with fn fragment at a coating concentration of 0.2 μg/ cm 2 . Mouse bone marrow cells are plated ( 1 ,000 cells/well ) in 0.2 ml of semm-free medium. Cells cultured in the presence of IL-3 ( 5 ng/ml ) + SCF ( 50 ng/ml ) would serve as the positive control, conditions under which little self-renewal but pronounced differentiation of the stem cells is to be expected. Gene products of the invention (e.g., including, but not limited to, polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention, and supematants produced in Example 31), are tested with appropriate negative controls in the presence and absence of SCF(5.0 ng/ml), where test factor supemates represent 10% of the total assay volume. The plated cells are then allowed to grow by incubating in a low oxygen environment ( 5% CO 2 , 7% O 2 , and 88% N 2 ) tissue culture incubator for 7 days. The number of proliferating cells within the wells is then quantitated by measuring thymidine incoφoration into cellular DNA. Verification of the positive hits in the assay will require phenotypic characterization of the cells, which can be accomplished by scaling up of the culture system and using appropriate antibody reagents against cell surface antigens and FACScan. One skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), antibodies, agonists, and/or antagonists and fragments and variants thereof. If a particular polypeptide of the present invention is found to be a stimulator of hematopoietic progenitors, polynucleotides and polypeptides corresponding to the gene encoding said polypeptide may be useful for the diagnosis and treatment of disorders affecting the immune system and hematopoiesis. Representative uses are described in the "Immune Activity" and "Infectious Disease" sections above, and elsewhere herein. The gene product may also be useful in the expansion of stem cells and committed progenitors of various blood lineages, and in the differentiation and/or proliferation of various cell types. Additionally, the polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the gene of interest and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof, may also be employed to inhibit the proliferation and differentiation of hematopoietic cells and therefore may be employed to protect bone marrow stem cells from chemotherapeutic agents during chemotherapy. This antiproliferative effect may allow administration of higher doses of chemotherapeutic agents and, therefore, more effective chemotherapeutic treatment. Moreover, polynucleotides and polypeptides corresponding to the gene of interest may also be useful for the treatment and diagnosis of hematopoietic related disorders such as, for example, anemia, pancytopenia, leukopenia, thrombocytopenia or leukemia since stromal cells are important in the production of cells of hematopoietic lineages. The uses include bone marrow cell ex-vivo culture, bone marrow transplantation, bone marrow reconstitution, radiotherapy or chemotherapy of neoplasia. Example 44: Human Dermal Fibroblast and Aortic Smooth Muscle Cell Proliferation The polypeptide of interest is added to cultures of normal human dermal fibroblasts (NHDF) and human aortic smooth muscle cells (AoSMC) and two co-assays are performed with each sample. The first assay examines the effect of the polypeptide of interest on the proliferation of normal human dermal fibroblasts (NHDF) or aortic smooth muscle cells (AoSMC). Aberrant growth of fibroblasts or smooth muscle cells is a part of several pathological processes, including fibrosis, and restenosis. The second assay examines IL6 production by both NHDF and SMC. IL6 production is an indication of functional activation. Activated cells will have increased production of a number of cytokines and other factors, which can result in a proinflammatory or immunomodulatory outcome. Assays are mn with and without co-TNFa stimulation, in order to check for costimulatory or inhibitory activity. Briefly, on day 1 , 96-well black plates are set up with 1000 cells/well (NHDF) or 2000 cells/well (AoSMC) in 100 μl culture media. NHDF culture media contains: Clonetics FB basal media, 1 mg/ml hFGF, 5mg/ml insulin, 50mg/ml gentamycin, 2%FBS, while AoSMC culture media contains Clonetics SM basal media, 0.5 μg/ml hEGF, 5mg/ml insulin, 1 μg/ml hFGF, 50mg/ml gentamycin, 50 μg/ml Amphotericin B, 5%FBS. After incubation at 37°C for at least 4-5 hours, culture media is aspirated and replaced with growth arrest media. Growth arrest media for NHDF contains fibroblast basal media, 50mg/ml gentamycin, 2% FBS, while growth arrest media for AoSMC contains SM basal media, 50mg/ml gentamycin, 50μg/ml Amphotericin B, 0.4% FBS. Incubate at 37°C until day 2. On day 2, serial dilutions and templates of the polypeptide of interest are designed such that they always include media controls and known-protein controls. For both stimulation and inhibition experiments, proteins are diluted in growth arrest media. For inhibition experiments, TNFa is added to a final concentration of 2ng/ml (NHDF) or 5ng/ml (AoSMC). Add 1/3 vol media containing controls or polypeptides of the present invention and incubate at 37°C/5% CO 2 until day 5. Transfer 60μl from each well to another labeled 96-well plate, cover with a plate- sealer, and store at 4°C until Day 6 (for IL6 ELISA). To the remaining 100 μl in the cell culture plate, aseptically add Alamar Blue in an amount equal to 10% of the culture volume (lOμl). Return plates to incubator for 3 to 4 hours. Then measure fluorescence with excitation at 530nm and emission at 590nm using the CytoFluor. This yields the growth stimulation/inhibition data. On day 5, the IL6 ELISA is performed by coating a 96 well plate with 50-100 ul/well of Anti-Human IL6 Monoclonal antibody diluted in PBS, pH 7.4, incubate ON at room temperature. On day 6, empty the plates into the sink and blot on paper towels. Prepare Assay Buffer containing PBS with 4% BSA. Block the plates with 200 μl/well of Pierce Super Block blocking buffer in PBS for 1-2 hr and then wash plates with wash buffer (PBS, 0.05% Tween-20). Blot plates on paper towels. Then add 50 μl/well of diluted Anti-Human IL-6 Monoclonal, Biotin-labeled antibody at 0.50 mg/ml. Make dilutions of IL-6 stock in media (30, 10, 3, 1, 0.3, 0 ng/ml). Add duplicate samples to top row of plate. Cover the plates and incubate for 2 hours at RT on shaker. Plates are washed with wash buffer and blotted on paper towels. Dilute EU-labeled Streptavidin 1 : 1000 in Assay buffer, and add 100 μl/well. Cover the plate and incubate 1 h at RT. Plates are again washed with wash buffer and blotted on paper towels. Add 100 μl/well of Enhancement Solution and shake for 5 minutes. Read the plate on the Wallac DELFIA Fluorometer. Readings from triplicate samples in each assay are tabulated and averaged. A positive result in this assay suggests AoSMC cell proliferation and that the polypeptide of the present invention may be involved in dermal fibroblast proliferation and/or smooth muscle cell proliferation. A positive result also suggests many potential uses of polypeptides, polynucleotides, agonists and/or antagonists of the polynucleotide/polypeptide of the present invention which gives a positive result. For example, inflammation and immune responses, wound healing, and angiogenesis, as detailed throughout this specification. Particularly, polypeptides of the present invention and polynucleotides of the present invention may be used in wound healing and dermal regeneration, as well as the promotion of vasculargenesis, both of the blood vessels and lymphatics. The growth of vessels can be used in the treatment of, for example, cardiovascular diseases. Additionally, antagonists of polypeptides and polynucleotides of the invention may be useful in treating diseases, disorders, and/or conditions which involve angiogenesis by acting as an anti- vascular (e.g., anti-angiogenesis). These diseases, disorders, and/or conditions are known in the art and/or are described herein, such as, for example, malignancies, solid tumors, benign tumors, for example hemangiomas, acoustic neuromas, neurofibromas, trachomas, and pyogenic granulomas; artheroscleric plaques; ocular angiogenic diseases, for example, diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, macular degeneration, corneal graft rejection, neovascular glaucoma, retrolental fibroplasia, rubeosis, retinoblastoma, uvietis and Pterygia (abnormal blood vessel growth) of the eye; rheumatoid arthritis; psoriasis; delayed wound healing; endometriosis; vasculogenesis; granulations; hypertrophic scars (keloids); nonunion fractures; scleroderma; trachoma; vascular adhesions; myocardial angiogenesis; coronary collaterals; cerebral collaterals; arteriovenous malformations; ischemic limb angiogenesis; Osier-Webber Syndrome; plaque neovascularization; telangiectasia; hemophiliac joints; angiofibroma; fibromuscular dysplasia; wound granulation; Crohn's disease; and atherosclerosis. Moreover, antagonists of polypeptides and polynucleotides of the invention may be useful in treating anti-hyperproliferative diseases and/or anti- inflammatory known in the art and/or described herein. One skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), antibodies, agonists, and/or antagonists and fragments and variants thereof. Example 45: Cellular Adhesion Molecule (CAM) Expression on Endothelial Cells The recruitment of lymphocytes to areas of inflammation and angiogenesis involves specific receptor-ligand interactions between cell surface adhesion molecules (CAMs) on lymphocytes and the vascular endothelium. The adhesion process, in both normal and pathological settings, follows a multi-step cascade that involves intercellular adhesion molecule- 1 (ICAM-1), vascular cell adhesion molecule- 1 (VCAM-1), and endothelial leukocyte adhesion molecule- 1 (E-selectin) expression on endothelial cells (EC). The expression of these molecules and others on the vascular endothelium determines the efficiency with which leukocytes may adhere to the local vasculature and extravasate into the local tissue during the development of an inflammatory response. The local concentration of cytokines and growth factor participate in the modulation of the expression of these CAMs. Briefly, endothelial cells (e.g., Human Umbilical Vein Endothelial cells (HUVECs)) are grown in a standard 96 well plate to confluence, growth medium is removed from the cells and replaced with 100 μl of 199 Medium (10% fetal bovine semm (FBS)). Samples for testing and positive or negative controls are added to the plate in triplicate (in 10 μl volumes). Plates are then incubated at 37°C for either 5 h (selectin and integrin expression) or 24 h (integrin expression only). Plates are aspirated to remove medium and 100 μl of 0.1% paraformaldehyde-PBS(with Ca++ and Mg++) is added to each well. Plates are held at 4°C for 30 min. Fixative is removed from the wells and wells are washed IX with PBS(+Ca,Mg) + 0.5% BSA and drained. 10 μl of diluted primary antibody is added to the test and control wells. Anti-ICAM-1-Biotin, Anti-VCAM-1-Biotin and Anti-E-selectin-Biotin are used at a concentration of 10 μg/ml (1 : 10 dilution of 0.1 mg/ml stock antibody). Cells are incubated at 37°C for 30 min. in a humidified environment. Wells are washed three times with PBS(+Ca,Mg) + 0.5% BSA. 20 μl of diluted ExtrAvidin-Alkaline Phosphotase (1 :5,000 dilution, refered to herein as the working dilution) are added to each well and incubated at 37°C for 30 min. Wells are washed three times with PBS(+Ca,Mg)+0.5% BSA. Dissolve 1 tablet of p-Nitrophenol Phosphate pNPP per 5 ml of glycine buffer (pH 10.4). 100 μl of pNPP substrate in glycine buffer is added to each test well. Standard wells in triplicate are prepared from the working dilution of the ExtrAvidin-Alkaline Phosphotase in glycine buffer: 1 :5,000 (10°) > 10 "0 5 > 10 "1 > 10 '1 5 . 5 μl of each dilution is added to triplicate wells and the resulting AP content in each well is 5.50 ng, 1.74 ng, 0.55 ng, 0.18 ng. 100 μl of pNNP reagent is then added to each of the standard wells. The plate is incubated at 37°C for 4h. A volume of 50 μl of 3M NaOH is added to all wells. The plate is read on a plate reader at 405 nm using the background subtraction option on blank wells filled with glycine buffer only. Additionally, the template is set up to indicate the concentration of AP-conjugate in each standard well [ 5.50 ng; 1.74 ng; 0.55 ng; 0.18 ng]. Results are indicated as amount of bound AP-conjugate in each sample. Example 46: Alamar Blue Endothelial Cells Proliferation Assay This assay may be used to quantitatively determine protein mediated inhibition of bFGF-induced proliferation of Bovine Lymphatic Endothelial Cells (LECs), Bovine Aortic Endothelial Cells (BAECs) or Human Microvascular Uterine Myometrial Cells (UTMECs). This assay incoφorates a fluorometric growth indicator based on detection of metabolic activity. A standard Alamar Blue Proliferation Assay is prepared in EGM-2MV with 10 ng /ml of bFGF added as a source of endothelial cell stimulation. This assay may be used with a variety of endothelial cells with slight changes in growth medium and cell concentration. Dilutions of the protein batches to be tested are diluted as appropriate. Semm-free medium (GIBCO SFM) without bFGF is used as a non-stimulated control and Angiostatin or TSP-1 are included as a known inhibitory controls. Briefly, LEC, BAECs or UTMECs are seeded in growth media at a density of 5000 to 2000 cells/well in a 96 well plate and placed at 37-C overnight. After the overnight incubation of the cells, the growth media is removed and replaced with GIBCO EC-SFM. The cells are treated with the appropriate dilutions of the protein of interest or control protein sample(s) (prepared in SFM ) in triplicate wells with additional bFGF to a concentration of 10 ng/ ml. Once the cells have been treated with the samples, the plate(s) is/are placed back in the 37° C incubator for three days. After three days 10 ml of stock alamar blue (Biosource Cat# DAL1 100) is added to each well and the plate(s) is/are placed back in the 37°C incubator for four hours. The plate(s) are then read at 530nm excitation and 590nm emission using the CytoFluor fluorescence reader. Direct output is recorded in relative fluorescence units. Alamar blue is an oxidation-reduction indicator that both fluoresces and changes color in response to chemical reduction of growth medium resulting from cell growth. As cells grow in culture, innate metabolic activity results in a chemical reduction of the immediate surrounding environment. Reduction related to growth causes the indicator to change from oxidized (non-fluorescent blue) form to reduced (fluorescent red) form. i.e. stimulated proliferation will produce a stronger signal and inhibited proliferation will produce a weaker signal and the total signal is proportional to the total number of cells as well as their metabolic activity. The background level of activity is observed with the starvation medium alone. This is compared to the output observed from the positive control samples (bFGF in growth medium) and protein dilutions. Example 47: Detection of Inhibition of a Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction This assay can be used to detect and evaluate inhibition of a Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction (MLR) by gene products (e.g., isolated polypeptides). Inhibition of a MLR may be due to a direct effect on cell proliferation and viability, modulation of costimulatory molecules on interacting cells, modulation of adhesiveness between lymphocytes and accessory cells, or modulation of cytokine production by accessory cells. Multiple cells may be targeted by these polypeptides since the peripheral blood mononuclear fraction used in this assay includes T, B and natural killer lymphocytes, as well as monocytes and dendritic cells. Polypeptides of interest found to inhibit the MLR may find application in diseases associated with lymphocyte and monocyte activation or proliferation. These include, but are not limited to, diseases such as asthma, arthritis, diabetes, inflammatory skin conditions, psoriasis, eczema, systemic lupus erythematosus, multiple sclerosis, glomerulonephritis, inflammatory bowel disease, crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, arteriosclerosis, cirrhosis, graft vs. host disease, host vs. graft disease, hepatitis, leukemia and lymphoma. Briefly, PBMCs from human donors are purified by density gradient centrifugation using Lymphocyte Separation Medium (LSM ® , density 1.0770 g/ml, Organon Teknika Coφoration, West Chester, PA). PBMCs from two donors are adjusted to 2 x 10 6 cells/ml in RPMI- 1640 (Life Technologies, Grand Island, NY) supplemented with 10% FCS and 2 mM glutamine. PBMCs from a third donor is adjusted to 2 x 10 5 cells/ml. Fifty microliters of PBMCs from each donor is added to wells of a 96-well round bottom microtiter plate. Dilutions of test materials (50 μl) is added in triplicate to microtiter wells. Test samples (of the protein of interest) are added for final dilution of 1 :4; rhuIL-2 (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, MN, catalog number 202-IL) is added to a final concentration of 1 μg/ml; anti- CD4 mAb (R&D Systems, clone 34930.1 1, catalog number MAB379) is added to a final concentration of 10 μg/ml. Cells are cultured for 7-8 days at 37°C in 5% CO 2 , and 1 μC of [ 3 H] thymidine is added to wells for the last 16 hrs of culture. Cells are harvested and thymidine incoφoration determined using a Packard TopCount. Data is expressed as the mean and standard deviation of triplicate determinations. Samples of the protein of interest are screened in separate experiments and compared to the negative control treatment, anti-CD4 mAb, which inhibits proliferation of lymphocytes and the positive control treatment, IL-2 (either as recombinant material or supernatant), which enhances proliferation of lymphocytes. One skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), antibodies, agonists, and/or antagonists and fragments and variants thereof. It will be clear that the invention may be practiced otherwise than as particularly described in the foregoing description and examples. Numerous modifications and variations of the present invention are possible in light of the above teachings and, therefore, are within the scope of the appended claims. The entire disclosure of each document cited (including patents, patent applications, journal articles, abstracts, laboratory manuals, books, or other disclosures) in the Background of the Invention, Detailed Description, and Examples is hereby incoφorated herein by reference. Further, the hard copy of the sequence listing submitted herewith and the corresponding computer readable form are both incoφorated herein by reference in their entireties. Moreover, the hard copy of and the corresponding computer readable form of the Sequence Listing of Serial No. 60/124,270 are also incoφorated herein by reference in their entireties. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule 13 Aw) Λ. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description on page 66 , line N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrT Furtherdeposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name ofdcpositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including poslal code and cotinin) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209059 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (lea e blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (spectfv the general nature of the indications eg "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application | ( This sheet was received by the International Bureauon Authorized officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209059 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the 'expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209059 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bιs) \. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description on page 66 N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OF DEPOSIT Furtherdeposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name ot depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209060 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if ot applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ifthe indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (ipecify the general nature of the indications e g , "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application | | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authorized officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209060 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209060 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description on page 66 | ιne N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identi fied on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Dateofdeposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209061 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank i/ not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leaveblanki ' not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g . "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application | | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209061 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209061 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Nameofdepositaryinstitution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209062 C. ADDITIONAL INDIC ATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information iscontinuedonanadditionalsheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ifthe indications are not for all designated Stales) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g , "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international appl ication j j This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209062 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209062 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International app cationNo reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard anassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date ofdeposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209063 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blankif not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g , "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only [ | This sheet was received with the international application I | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209063 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the fumishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209063 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \3bts) \. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption on page 66 me N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSΓΓ Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209064 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ifthe indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blankj 'not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications eg "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | [ This sheet was received with the international application | j This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209064 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209064 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM ( PCT Rule I 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption B. IDENTIFICATTONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Nameoi depositarymstitution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including poital code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209065 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank it not applicable) This information iscontinuedonanadditional sheet | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application j j This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authorized officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209065 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209065 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description on page 66 |, ne N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OF DEPOSΓΓ Furtherdeposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Nameofdepositaryinstitution American Type Culture Collection Address ot depositary institution (including postal code and coimln) 10801 University Boulevard anassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209066 C. ADDITIONAL INDIC ATIONS This information is continued on an additional sheet [ \ D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leaveblanktfnoiapplicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application j | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209066 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209066 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name oi depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and counln) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209067 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blankif not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only j This sheet was received with the international application | I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209067 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209067 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSΓΓ Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name ot depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal coae and country) 10801 University Boulevard Maπassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209068 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated Slates) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the mdicanons eg "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application I | This sheet was received by the International Bureau c Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209068 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209068 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bι<ι) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption on page 66 , line N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name ot depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address ot depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Dateofdeposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209069 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information iscontinuedonanadditional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application j j This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1 92) ATCC Deposit No.: 209069 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209069 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule I 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description B. IDENTIFICATTONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Nameofdepositaryinstitution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and cυuntn) 10801 University Boulevard anassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 12 January 1998 209579 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet I D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated Slates) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the mdicanons e g "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application | I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209579 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209579 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSΓT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name ot depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and counln) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 12 January 1998 209578 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blankif ot applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g 'Accession dumber of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only I This sheet was received with the international application j j This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 209578 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 209578 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption on page 66 , line N/A B. ΓDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 16 July 1998 203067 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specifv the general nature of the indications eg, "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application j | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 203067 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 203067 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bis) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description B. IDENTIFICATION OF DEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Nameol depositaryinstitution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Maπassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date ol deposit Accession Number 16 July 1998 203068 C. ADDITIONAL INDICA (leave blank i/ not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications eg "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | [ This sheet was received with the international appl ication | j This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authonzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 203068 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 203068 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption on page 66 , line N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name ofdepositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 01 February 1999 203609 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blankf not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nanire of the mdicanons eg, "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application I j This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 203609 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 203609 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the fumishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Furtherdeposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 01 February 1999 203610 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet [ | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank ,f not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the Intemational Bureau later (specify the general nanire of the mdicanons e g "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For Intemational Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application | J This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 203610 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the fumishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 203610 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM ( PCT Rule I 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption on page 66 ι. ne N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet [ | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 17 November 1998 203485 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ifthe indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leaveblankij 'not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specifv the general nanire of the indications e g 'Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | [ This sheet was received with the international application | | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: 203485 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: 203485 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption B. IDENTIFICΛTIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address ol depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 18 June 1999 PTA-252 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This informationiscontinuedonanadditional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nanire of the mdicanons e g "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application j | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: PTA-252 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the fumishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: PTA-252 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application No reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption on page 66 , line N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OF DEPOSIT Furtherdeposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Dateofdeposit Accession Number 18 June 1999 PTA-253 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet [ | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated Slates) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specifv the general nature of the indications e g , "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | j This sheet was received with the international application j I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: PTA-253 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: PTA-253 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant's or agent's file International application I reference number PA104PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descπption B. IDENTIFICΛTIONOFDEPOSIT Furtherdeposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 22 December 1999 PTA-1081 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ifthe indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the Intemational Bureau later (specify the general nature of the mdicanons e g "Accession Number of Deposit") Forreceiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | This sheet was received with the international application I j This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzedofficer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No.: PTA-1081 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the intemational application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. ATCC Deposit No.: PTA-1081 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier.

Claims: What Is Claimed Is: 1. An isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of: (a) a polynucleotide fragment of SEQ ID NO:X or a polynucleotide fragment of the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (b) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide fragment of SEQ ID NO:Y or a polypeptide fragment encoded by the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (c) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide fragment of a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X or a polypeptide fragment encoded by the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (d) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide domain of SEQ ID NO:Y or a polypeptide domain encoded by the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (e) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide epitope of SEQ ID NO:Y or a polypeptide epitope encoded by the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (f) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y or the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X, having biological activity; (g) a polynucleotide which is a variant of SEQ ID NO:X; (h) a polynucleotide which is an allelic variant of SEQ ID NO:X; (i) a polynucleotide which encodes a species homologue of the SEQ ID NO:Y; (j) a polynucleotide capable of hybridizing under stringent conditions to any one of the polynucleotides specified in (a)-(i), wherein said polynucleotide does not hybridize under stringent conditions to a nucleic acid molecule having a nucleotide sequence of only A residues or of only T residues. 2. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1 , wherein the polynucleotide fragment comprises a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein. 3. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1 , wherein the polynucleotide fragment comprises a nucleotide sequence encoding the sequence identified as SEQ ID NON or the polypeptide encoded by the cDΝA sequence included in the related cDΝA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID ΝO:X. 4. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1 , wherein the polynucleotide fragment comprises the entire nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X. 5. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 2, wherein the nucleotide sequence comprises sequential nucleotide deletions from either the C-terminus or the N-terminus. 6. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 3, wherein the nucleotide sequence comprises sequential nucleotide deletions from either the C-terminus or the N-terminus. 7. A recombinant vector comprising the isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1. 8. A method of making a recombinant host cell comprising the isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1. 9. A recombinant host cell produced by the method of claim 8. 10. The recombinant host cell of claim 9 comprising vector sequences. 1 1. An isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of: (a) a polypeptide fragment of SEQ ID NON or of the sequence encoded by the cDΝA included in the related cDΝA clone; (b) a polypeptide fragment of SEQ ID ΝO:Y or of the sequence encoded by the cDNA included in the related cDNA clone, having biological activity; (c) a polypeptide domain of SEQ ID NO: Y or of the sequence encoded by the cDNA included in the related cDNA clone; (d) a polypeptide epitope of SEQ ID NO:Y or of the sequence encoded by the cDNA included in the related cDNA clone; (e) a full length protein of SEQ ID NO:Y or of the sequence encoded by the cDNA included in the related cDNA clone; (f) a variant of SEQ ID NO: Y; (g) an allelic variant of SEQ ID NO:Y; or (h) a species homologue of the SEQ ID NO:Y. 12. The isolated polypeptide of claim 1 1, wherein the full length protein comprises sequential amino acid deletions from either the C-terminus or the N- terminus. 13. An isolated antibody that binds specifically to the isolated polypeptide of claim 11. 14. A recombinant host cell that expresses the isolated polypeptide of claim 1 1. 15. A method of making an isolated polypeptide comprising: (a) culturing the recombinant host cell of claim 14 under conditions such that said polypeptide is expressed; and (b) recovering said polypeptide. 16. The polypeptide produced by claim 15. 17. A method for preventing, treating, or ameliorating a medical condition, comprising administering to a mammalian subject a therapeutically effective amount of the polypeptide of claim 1 1 or the polynucleotide of claim 1. 18. A method of diagnosing a pathological condition or a susceptibility to a pathological condition in a subject comprising: (a) determining the presence or absence of a mutation in the polynucleotide of claim 1; and (b) diagnosing a pathological condition or a susceptibility to a pathological condition based on the presence or absence of said mutation. 19. A method of diagnosing a pathological condition or a susceptibility to a pathological condition in a subject comprising: (a) determining the presence or amount of expression of the polypeptide of claim 11 in a biological sample; and (b) diagnosing a pathological condition or a susceptibility to a pathological condition based on the presence or amount of expression of the polypeptide. 20. A method for identifying a binding partner to the polypeptide of claim 1 1 comprising: (a) contacting the polypeptide of claim 1 1 with a binding partner; and (b) determining whether the binding partner effects an activity of the polypeptide. 21. The gene corresponding to the cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO: Y. 22. A method of identifying an activity in a biological assay, wherein the method comprises: (a) expressing SEQ ID NO:X in a cell; (b) isolating the supernatant; (c) detecting an activity in a biological assay; and (d) identifying the protein in the supernatant having the activity. 23. The product produced by the method of claim 20.

Inventors: RUBEN STEVEN M, RUBEN, STEVEN, M.
Applicants: HUMAN GENOME SCIENCES INC, ROSEN CRAIG A, RUBEN STEVEN M, HUMAN GENOME SCIENCES, INC., ROSEN, CRAIG, A., RUBEN, STEVEN, M.
Application year: 2000
Main classification: C07K
IPC codes: A61K31, A61K35, A61K38, A61K39, A61K45, A61K48, A61P1, A61P9, A61P13, A61P17, A61P25, A61P27, A61P29, A61P35, C07K14, C07K16, C12N1, C12N5, C12N15, C12P21, C12Q1, G01N33, G01N37